Mercury 45 Jet 50-55 Service manual

Cleanliness and Care of
Outboard Motor
Service Manual Outline
Section
1
- General Information & Specifications
A marine power product is a combination of many machined, honed, polished and lapped surfaces with tolerances that are measured in the ten thousands of an
inch./mm When any product component is serviced, care
and cleanliness are important. Throughout this manual, it
should be understood that proper cleaning, and protection
of machined surfaces and friction areas is a part of the repair procedure. This is considered standard shop practice
even if not specifically stated.
Section
2
- Electrical & Ignition
Whenever components are removed for service, they
should be retained in order. At the time of installation, they
should be installed in the same locations and with the same
mating surfaces as when removed.
Section
Part A - Ignition System
Part B - Battery, Charging System &
Starting System
Part C - Timing/Synchronizing &
Adjusting
Part D - Wiring Diagrams
3
- Fuel Systems
Part A - Carburetion
Part B - Fuel Pump
Part C - Fuel Enrichment
Before raising or removing and outboard engine from a
boat, the following precautions should be adhered to:
Part D - Oil Injection
(1) Check that flywheel is secured to end of crankshaft with
a locknut and lifting eye is threaded into flywheel a minimum of 5 turns.
Section
4
- Powerhead
Section
5
- Mid-Section
(2) Connect a hoist of suitable strength to the lifting eye.
Part A - Clamp/Swivel Brackets and
Driveshaft Housing
In addition, personnel should not work on or under an outboard which is suspended. Outboards should be attached
to work stands, or lowered to ground as soon as possible.
Part B - Power Trim (Design I)
We reserve the right to make changes to this manual without prior notification.
Part D - Power Trim (Design III)
Refer to dealer service bulletins for other pertinent information concerning the products described in this manual.
Part F - Manual Tilt (Design I, II, III)
Part C - Power Trim (Design II)
Part E - Power Trim (Design IV)
Part G - Manual Tilt (Design IV)
Section
6
- Lower Unit
Part A - Standard Gear Housing
Part B - 60 Big Foot, 60 SeaPro &
Marathon Gear Housing
Part C - Jet Drive
Section
7
- Outboard Installation/
Attachments
Part A - Ride-Guide Steering Throttle/Shift Cables &
Electrical Connections
Part B - Tiller Handle and Co-Pilot
Part C - Rewind Starter
ii
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
We could not possibly know of and advise the service trade
of all conceivable procedures by which a service might be
performed and of the possible hazards and/or results of
each method. We have not undertaken any such wide evaluation. Therefore, anyone who uses a service procedure
and/or tool, which is not recommended by the manufacturer, first must completely satisfy himself that neither his nor
the products safety will be endangered by the service procedure selected.
Notice
Throughout this publication, “Dangers”, “Warnings” and
“Cautions” (accompanied by the International HAZARD
Symbol ! ) are used to alert the mechanic to special instructions concerning a particular service or operation that
may be hazardous if performed incorrectly or carelessly.
OBSERVE THEM CAREFULLY!
These “Safety Alerts” alone cannot eliminate the hazards
that they signal. Strict compliance to these special instructions when performing the service, plus “Common Sense”
operation, are major accident prevention measures.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in
this manual are based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication. As required, revisions
to this manual will be sent to all dealers contracted by us
to sell and/or service these products.
! DANGER
It should be kept in mind, while working on the product, that
the electrical system and ignition system are capable of violent and damaging short circuits or severe electrical
shocks. When performing any work where electrical terminals could possibly be grounded or touched by the mechanic, the battery cables should be disconnected at the
battery.
DANGER - Immediate hazards which WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
! WARNING
WARNING - Hazards or unsafe practices which COULD
result in severe personal injury or death.
Any time the intake or exhaust openings are exposed during service they should be covered to protect against accidental entrance of foreign material which could enter the
cylinders and cause extensive internal damage when the
engine is started.
! CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product or property damage.
It is important to note, during any maintenance procedure
replacement fasteners must have the same measurements and strength as those removed. Numbers on the
heads of the metric bolts and on the surfaces of metric nuts
indicate their strength. American bolts use radial lines for
this purpose, while most American nuts do not have
strength markings. Mismatched or incorrect fasteners can
result in damage or malfunction, or possibly personal injury. Therefore, fasteners removed should be saved for reuse in the same locations whenever possible. Where the
fasteners are not satisfactory for re-use, care should be
taken to select a replacement that matches the original.
Notice to Users of This
Manual
This service manual has been written and published by the
Service Department of Mercury Marine to aid our dealers’
mechanics and company service personnel when servicing the products described herein.
It is assumed that these personnel are familiar with the
servicing procedures of these products, or like or similar
products manufactured and marketed by Mercury Marine,
that they have been trained in the recommended servicing
procedures of these products which includes the use of
mechanics’ common hand tools and the special Mercury
Marine or recommended tools from other suppliers.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
i
GENERAL INFORMATION
and SPECIFICATIONS
50557
1
Table of Contents
Page
Propeller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Master Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Powerhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Cowl Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Filling Oil Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Propeller Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Propeller Information Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
50/55 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
60 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Propeller Information Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
60 Big foot, 60 SeaPro/Marathon . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
50-60 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Stainless Steel Race Propellers –
Available from Mercury Performance
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
General Information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Power Trim System
(Models with Power Trim) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Checking Trim System Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Trimming (Models with Power Trim) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Trimming Outboard “Out” (“Up”) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Trimming Outboard “In” (“Down”) . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Boat Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Test Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-0 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
Page
Lubrication Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Ride Guide Steering Cable and Pivot
Point Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Gear Housing Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Salt Water Corrosion - Gear Housing
Bearing Carrier and Cover Nut . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Flushing Outboard Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Following Complete Submersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Salt Water Submersion (Special
Instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Submerged While Running (Special
Instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Submerged Engine (Fresh Water)
(Plus Special Instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Out-of-Season Outboard Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Out-of-Season Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
How Weather Affects Engine Performance . . . . . 1-20
Conditions Affecting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Detonation: Causes and Prevention . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Compression Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Water Pressure Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Painting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Decal Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Section
Propeller Information
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
For in-depth information on marine propellers and boat
performance – written by marine engineers – see your Authorized Dealer for the illustrated “What You Should Know
About Quicksilver Propellers... and Boat Performance Information” (Part No. 90-86144).
Section Heading
General Information and Specifications
Electrical & Ignition
Fuel Systems
Powerhead
Mid-Section
Lower Unit
Outboard Installation/Attachments
How To Use This Manual
The manual is divided into SECTIONS (shown, right) which
represents major components and systems.
Page Numbering
Some SECTIONS are further divided into PARTS. Each
PART has a title page. A “Table of Contents” for the particular PART is printed on the back of the title page.
Two number groups appear at the bottom of each page.
The example, below, is self-explanatory.
SECTIONS and PARTS are listed on the “Service Manual
Outline” sheet which immediately follows the cover of this
book.
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
90-817643R2 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-7
Section Description
Revision No. 2
Month of Printing
Year of Printing
Section Number
Part of Section Letter
Page Number
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-1
Master Specifications
Model 45 Jet/50/55 Marathon-Seapro/60/60 Marathon-Seapro/60 Bigfoot
HORSEPOWER
(KW)
OUTBOARD
WEIGHT
CYLINDER
BLOCK
STROKE
Model 50
Model 55
Model 60
Model 45 Jet
Electric Start (ELPTO)
(ELO)
Manual Start (ML)
Type
Displacement
50 (37)
55 (41)
60 (45)
60 (45)
217.0 lbs. (98.4kg)
213.0 lbs. (96.6kg)
213.0 lbs. (96.6kg)
Two-Stoke Cycle – Loop Charged
51.8 cu. in. (849cc)
Length
2.520 in. (64.008mm)
Diameter (Std)
Taper/Out of Round Maximum
Bore Type
2.955 in. (75.057mm)
0.003 in. (0.076mm)
Cast Iron
PISTON
Piston Type
Standard
0.015 in. (0.381mm) Oversize
0.030 in. (0.762) Oversize
Aluminum
2.950 in. (74.93 mm)
2.965 in. (75.31 mm)
2.980 in. (75.69 mm)
REEDS
Reed Stand 0pen (Max.)
Reed Stop (Max.)
Reed Thickness
– 45 Jet/50/60
– 55
CYLINDER
BORE
GEAR
HOUSING
50/55/60
Gear Ratio
Gearcase Capacity
Forward Gear - No. of Teeth
Pinion Gear - No. of Teeth
Pinion Height
Forward Gear Backlash
Water Pressure
– @ Idle
– @ WOT
60 SeaPro/Marathon, 60 Bigfoot
Gear Ratio
Gearcase Capacity
Forward Gear - No. of Teeth-Type
Pinion Gear - No. of Teeth-Type
Pinion Height
Forward Gear Backlash
Water Pressure @ RPM
FUEL
SYSTEM
Fuel
Recommended Gasoline
Recommended Oil
Gasoline/Oil Ratio
Fuel Pressure – @ Idle
– @ WOT
1-2 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
0.020 in. (0.50mm)
Not Adjustable
0.008 in. (0.203mm)
0.010 in. (0.254mm)
1.64:1
11.5 fl. oz. (340ml)
23
14
0.025 in. (0.64mm)
0.013 in. – 0.019 in.
(0.33mm – 0.48mm)
1 – 3 PSI
7 – 12 PSI
2.3:1
22.5 fl. oz. (655ml)
30
13
0.025 in. (0.64mm)
0.012 in. to 0.019 in. (0.30mm to 0.48mm)
10 to 15 PSI (69 to 103 kPa) @ 5250 RPM
Pre-Mixed Gasoline and Oil
Unleaded 87 Octane Minimum
Quicksilver TC-W II or TC-W3 2 Cycle
Outboard Oil
50:1 (25:1 Break-In)
3-1/2 PSI
6 PSI
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Model 45 Jet/50/55 Marathon-Seapro/60/60 Marathon-Seapro/60 Bigfoot
STARTING
SYSTEM
Manual Start – All Models
Electric Start – Optional – All Models
Starter Draw (Under Load)
Battery Rating
IGNITION
SYSTEM
Type
Spark Plug Type
Spark Plug Gap
CHARGING
SYSTEM
Alternator Output
Electric Models
Manual Models (Not Regulated)
C
A
R
B
U
R
E
T
O
R
Idle RPM
Capacitor Discharge
NGK BP8H-N-10
0.040 in. (1.0mm)
16 Amperes @ 3000 RPM
14 Amperes @ 300 RPM
9 Amperes @ 3000 RPM
675 ± 25
5000 – 5500
Idle Mixture Screw Adjustment
(Preset - Turns Out)
Model 50
All Other Models
1-1/8 ± 1/4
1-1/2 ± 1/4
Float Adjustment
Float Level
Recommended Oil
Oil Tank Capacity/Approx. Time
Reserve Capacity/Approx. Time
Output @ 1500 RPM for 10 Minutes
with Pump @ Full Open
T
I
M
I
N
G
125 Amperes
Min. Reserve Cap. Rating of 100 Min. and
CCA of 350 Amperes
Wide Open Throttle (WOT) RPM
Main Jet
– Model 50 (WME – 43)
– Model 55/60 Seapro-Marathon
(WME – 44)
– Model 45 Jet/60 (WME – 45)
Vent Jet
– Model 50 (WME – 43)
– Model 55/60 Seapro-Marathon
(WME – 44)
– Model 45 Jet/60 (WME – 45)
OIL
INJECTION
Recoil Starter
Idle
Maximum BTDC
@ Cranking Speed
– Model 50/60
– Model 55/60 Seapro-Marathon
@ 5000 RPM
– Model 50/60
– Model 55/60 Seapro-Marathon
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7/16 in. (11.2mm)
.048 in.
.060 in.
.062 in.
.090 in.
None
.090 in.
Quicksilver TC-W II or TC-W 3
3.0 qts. (2.8L) 7 hrs.
14.5 fl. oz. (0.43L) 1/2 hr.
10.0cc ± 3cc
2° – 6° ATDC
24° BTDC
18° BTDC
22° BTDC
16° BTDC
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-3
Reed Block
Powerhead
Reed Stop Opening (Max.) . . . . . . . 0.020 in.
(0.50 mm)
Specifications
Block
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cylinder, 2 Cycle
Displacement
50/55/60 Horsepower . 51.8 cu in. (849 cc)
Cylinder Bore
Crankshaft
Runout (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . 0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Taper (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . 0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2
Special Tools
Dia. Standard . . . . . . . . . . .
Dia. .015 in. Oversize . . . .
Dia. .030 in. Oversize . . . .
Out of Round (Max.) . . . . .
Taper (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.955 in. (75.057 mm)
2.970 in. (75.438 mm)
2.985 in. (75.819 mm)
0.003 in. (0.076 mm)
0.003 in. (0.076 mm)
Piston
Description
Part Number
Flywheel Holder
91–52344
Protector Cap
91-24161
Flywheel Puller
91-73687A1
Lifting Eye
91-90455
Dia. Standard . . . . . . . . . . . 2.950 in. (74.93 mm)
Dia. .015 in. Oversize . . . . 2.965 in. (75.31 mm)
Dia. .030 in. Oversize . . . . 2.980 in. (75.69 mm)
Piston Ring Expander
91-24697
Piston Pin Tool
91-74607A2
IMPORTANT: Measure piston skirt at right angle (90°)
to piston pin center line, 0.50 in. (12.7mm) up from bottom edge of skirt.
Lock Ring Installation
Tool
91-77109A1
Powerhead Stand
91-25821A1
*Torque Wrench (0–200 91-32610
lb. ft.)
*Torque Wrench (0–150 91-66274
lb. in.)
0.50 in.
(12.7mm)
PISTON
SIZE
PISTON SKIRT
DIAMETER
Compression Tester
91-29287
*May be Obtained Locally
CYLINDER BORE
FINISH HONE
Standard
Piston
2.950 in.
(74.93 mm)
2.955 in.
(75.057mm)
0.015 in.
(0.381 mm)
Oversize
2.965 in.
(75.31 mm)
2.970 in.
(75.438 mm)
0.030 in.
(0.752 mm)
Oversize
2.980 in.
(75.69 mm)
2.985 in.
(75.819 mm)
1-4 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Cowl Removal
Filling Oil Injection System
Remove fill cap (a) from the oil tank and fill tank with oil. Retighten the fill cap.
a
50553
50552
Use Quicksilver NMMA Certified TC-W3 or TC-WII 2-Cycle
Outboard Oil.
• Quicksilver Certified TC-W3 Outboard Oil is a higher
grade oil that provides increased lubrication and extra
resistance to carbon buildup when used with good or varying grades of gasoline.
• Quicksilver Certified TC-WII Outboard Oil is an industry
leading oil that provides superior outboard lubrication
and resistance to carbon buildup when used with good
grades of gasoline.
Periodically consult with your dealer to get the latest gasoline and oil recommendations. If Quicksilver 2-Cycle Outboard Oil is not available, substitute a 2-Cycle outboard
manufacturers oil that is NMMA Certified TC-W3 or TCWII, or another brand of 2-Cycle outboard oil that is NMMA
Certified TC-W3 or TC-WII. The use of an inferior 2-Cycle
outboard oil can reduce engine durability. Damage from
use of inferior oil may not be covered under the limited warranty.
50554
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-5
Propeller Selection
1. Select a propeller that will allow the engine to operate
at or near the top of the recommended full throttle RPM
range (listed in “Specifications,” preceding) with a normal load. Maximum engine speed (RPM) for propeller
selection exists when boat speed is maximum and trim
is minimum for that speed. (High RPM, caused by an
excessive trim angle, should not be used in determining correct propeller.) Normally, there is a 150-350
RPM change between propeller pitches.
2. If full throttle operation is below the recommended
range, the propeller MUST BE changed to one with a
lower pitch to prevent loss of performance and possible engine damage.
3. For better acceleration, such as is needed in water
skiing, changing to a different pitch to increase the
engine speed to 500 RPM above the recommended
range is advised. Continuous operation above the recommended maximum RPM, however, is not permissible.
4. After initial propeller installation, the following common
conditions may require that the propeller be changed
to a lower pitch:
a. Warmer weather and great humidity will cause an
RPM loss.
b. Operating in a higher elevation causes an RPM
loss.
c.
Propeller Installation
! WARNING
To avoid accidental starting, which could result in personal injury, remove spark plug leads from spark
plugs before working near propeller. Place a block of
wood between the anti-ventilation plate and propeller
to protect hands from propeller blades while tightening propeller nut.
! CAUTION
If the propeller moves forward-and-aft on the propeller
shaft (is loose), retighten the propeller nut. Operation
with a loose propeller could cause damage to the
thrust hub and gear housing during acceleration, deceleration or when shifting gears.
IMPORTANT: To assure that the propeller remains secure on the shaft during the season, periodically
check propeller shaft nut for tightness.
1. To aid in future removal of the propeller, liberally coat
the propeller shaft spline with one of the following
Quicksilver lubricants:
– Anti-Corrosion Grease
– 2-4-C Marine Lubricant
– Special Lubricant 101
2. Place forward thrust hub on propeller shaft.
Operating with a damaged propeller or a dirty boat
bottom or gear housing will cause an RPM loss.
d. Operation with an increased load (additional passengers, equipment, pulling skiers, etc.).
b
a
50551
a - Thrust Hub
b - Propeller Shaft
1-6 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. While aligning splines, place Quicksilver propeller and
tab washer on propeller shaft in this order.
4. To prevent propeller from rotating, place a flat block of
wood between the anti-ventilation plate and the
propeller.
Water test the boat not using the trim adjustment pin. If undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions are experienced (boat runs with nose down), install trim adjustment
pin in proper hole to prevent unsafe handling characteristics.
5. Thread propeller nut on propeller shaft, tighten securely with wrench [minimum of 55 lb. ft. (74.5 N·m) of
torque] and bend on tab washer to secure propeller
nut.
6. After first use, bend the tab straight, retighten propeller
nut [minimum of 55 lb. ft. (74.5 N⋅m) of torque] and
again bend tab washer to secure nut. Check propeller
periodically for tightness.
a
c
d
51119
c - Tab Washer
d - Propeller Nut
Installing and Removing Propeller
50157
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment
! WARNING
Operating some boats with outboard trimmed to the
full “in” trim angle [not using trim adjustment bolt (a)]
at planing speed will cause undesirable and/or unsafe
steering conditions. Each boat must be water tested
for handling characteristics after outboard installation
and after any trim adjustments.
IMPORTANT: Some boat/outboard combinations, that
do not use the trim adjustment pin (a) and are trimmed
to the full “in” trim angle, will not experience any undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions during planing speed. Thus, not using trim adjustment pin may be
desired. However, some boats with outboard trimmed
to the full “in” trim angle at planing speeds will cause
undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. If
these steering conditions are experienced, under no
circumstances should the outboard be operated without the trim adjustment pin and without the pin adjusted in the proper holes to prevent unsafe handling
characteristics.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-7
Propeller Information Chart
50/55 MODELS
Wide Open Throttle RPM: 5000-5500
Recommended Transom Height: Short Shaft 16-1/2 in. (41.9 cm), Long Shaft 21 in. (53.3 cm)
Right Hand Rotation
Gear Reduction: 1.64:1
Thrust Hub: 73345A 1
Diameter
10″
10″
10″
10″
10.13″
10.13″
10.38″
10-1/4″
10.38″
10-1/2″
10.63″
10-3/4″
10.88″
12″
11-1/4″
12-1/4″
12-1/4″
12-1/2″
Pitch
19″
17″
16″
16″
15″
15″
14″
14″
13″
13″
12″
12″
11″
10-1/2″
10″
9″
9″
8″
No. of
Blades
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Material
Alum
Alum
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Alum
Steel
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Alum
Alum
Alum
Steel
Alum
Alum
Approx.
Gross Boat
Wgt. (Lbs.)
Up to 700
Up to 800
700-900
700-900
800-1100
800-1100
900-1300
900-1300
1000-1500
1000-1500
1100-1700
1100-1700
1200-1900
1400-2100
1500-2300
1800 +
1800 +
2100 +
Approx.
Boat
Length
Up to 14′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
13′ to 15′
13′ to 15′
14′ to 16′
14′ to 16′
14′ to 17′
14′ to 17′
15′ to 17′
15′ to 17′
16′ to 18′
16′ +
17′ +
18′ +
18′ +
18′ +
Speed
Range
(MPH)
48-55
44-51
41-48
41-48
38-45
38-45
35-41
35-41
32-38
32-38
28-34
28-34
24-30
22-28
20-26
14-22
14-22
01-18
Propeller
Part Number
48-73146A400
48-73144A400
48-91818A500
48-73142A400
48-76232A500
48-73140A400
48-816706A40
48-76230A500
48-76228A500
48-816704A40
48-79792A500
48-816702A40
48-85632A400
48-42740A100
48-73132A400
48-97868A500
48-87818A100
48-42738A100
60 MODELS
Wide Open Throttle RPM: 5000-5500
Recommended Transom Height: Short Shaft 16-1/2 in. (41.9 cm), Long Shaft 20 in. (53.3 cm)
Right Hand Rotation
Gear Reduction: 1.64:1
Thrust Hub: 73345A 1
Diameter
10″
10″
10″
10″
10.13″
10.13″
10.38″
10-1/4″
10.38″
10-1/2″
10.63″
10-3/4″
10.88″
12″
11-1/4″
12-1/4″
12-1/4″
12-1/2″
Pitch
19″
17″
16″
16″
15″
15″
14″
14″
13″
13″
12″
12″
11″
10-1/2″
10″
9″
9″
8″
No. of
Blades
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Material
Alum
Alum
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Alum
Steel
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Alum
Alum
Alum
Steel
Alum
Alum
1-8 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
Approx.
Gross Boat
Wgt. (Lbs.)
Up to 8000
Up to 1000
700-1100
700-1100
800-1200
800-1200
900-1500
900-1500
1200-1800
1200-1800
1500-2100
1500-2100
1800-2400
2000-2600
2100-2600
2400 +
2400 +
2800 +
Approx.
Boat
Length
Up to 14′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
13′ to 15′
13′ to 15′
14′ to 16′
14′ to 16′
15′ to 17′
15′ to 17′
16′ to 18′
16′ to 18′
16′ to 18′
17′ +
17′ +
18′ +
18′ +
19′ +
Speed
Range
(MPH)
48-55
44-51
41-48
41-48
38-45
38-45
35-41
35-41
32-38
32-38
28-34
28-34
24-30
22-28
20-26
14-22
14-22
01-18
Propeller
Part Number
48-73146A400
48-73144A400
48-91818A500
48-73142A400
48-76232A500
48-73140A400
48-816706A40
48-76230A500
48-76228A500
48-816704A40
48-79792A500
48-816702A40
48-85632A400
48-42740A100
48-73132A400
48-97868A500
48-87818A100
48-42738A100
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Propeller Information Chart
60 BIG FOOT, 60 SEAPRO/MARATHON MODELS
Wide Open Throttle RPM: 5000-5500
Recommended Transom Height: Short Shaft 16-1/2 in. (41.9 cm), Long Shaft 21 in. (53.3 cm),
Extra Long Shaft 23-1/2 in. (59.7cm)
Right Hand Rotation, 4-1/4 in. Gear Case Torpedo
Gear Reduction: 2.3:1
Thrust Hub : 13191A1
Diameter
12-3/4″
13-1/2″
12-3/4″
13-1/2″
12-1/2″
12-3/4″
13-1/2″
12-3/4″
12-3/4″
13-1/2″
13″
13″
13-1/4″
13-1/8″
13-3/4″
13-3/8″
14″
14″
14″
14″
No. of
Blades
5
3
5
3
3
5
3
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Pitch
26″
26″
24″
24″
23″
22″
22″
21″
20″
20″
19″
18″
17″
16″
15″
14″
13″
12″
11″
10″
Material
Steel
Steel
Steel
Steel
Alum
Steel
Steel
Alum
Steel
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Steel
Alum
Steel
Approx.
Gross Boat
Wgt. (Lbs.)
Up to 800
Up to 800
Up to 1000
Up to 1000
700-1100
700-1100
700-1100
800-1200
800-1200
800-1200
1000-1500
1000-1500
1300-1800
1300-1800
1600-2200
1600-2200
2000-2600
2000-2600
2400 +
2800 +
Approx.
Boat
Length
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 15′
Up to 16′
13′ to 16′
13′ to 16′
13′ to 16′
14′ to 17′
14′ to 17′
15′ to 18′
15′ to 18′
16′ to 19′
16′ to 19′
17′ +
17′ +
18′ +
19′ +
Speed
Range
(MPH)
48-55
48-54
46-52
46-52
45-51
43-49
43-49
40-47
38-45
38-45
35-42
33-40
31-38
29-36
26-33
23-31
20-28
17-26
1-22
1-20
Propeller
Part Number
48-815748A400
48-16996A40 0
48-815746A400
48-16994A40 0
48-77350A4000
48-815744A400
48-16992A40
48-77348A4000
48-816612A400
48-16990A40
48-77346A40 0
48-16988A 5
48-77344A40 0
48-16986A 5 0
48-77342A40 0
48-17314A 500
48-77340A40 0
48-17312A 5 0
48-77338A40 0
48-17310A 5
0
50-60 MODELS
Stainless Steel Race Propellers – Available from Mercury Performance Products
Diameter
11″
11″
11″
Pitch
18″
20″
22″
No. of
Blades
3
3
3
Rotation
RH
RH
RH
Propeller
Part Number
48-66106
48-66108
48-66110
GENERAL INFORMATION:
Propeller-Drive Hub: 43676
Diffuser Rings: Alum Propellers – 32201
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-9
Power Trim System
(Models with Power Trim)
Trim System Design II
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTE: 50/60 models are not equipped with Trim System
Design I. See chart below.
Model
40 (4cyl)
50/60
Design I
X
Design II
Design III
X
X
X
X
a
b
50158
The power trim system is filled at the manufacturer and is
ready for use.
50146
Trim System Design III
Trim outboard through entire trailering range several times
to remove any air from the system.
The trim system is pressurized and is not externally vented.
The outboard can be raised or lowered manually by loosening the manual release valve 2 to 3 turns counterclockwise.
The trim “out” angle of this outboard is not adjustable. The
trim system has an internal valve which will automatically
stop the outward trim travel at 20° when engine RPM is approximately 2000 RPM or higher; outboard also has to be
in water and in gear.
The outboard can be operated beyond the 20° trim limit for
operating outboard in shallow water if engine RPM is kept
below approximately 2000 RPM.
1-10 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
a
a
52028
52029
a - Fill Screw (System is Pressurized, DO NOT Open Unless Outboard
is Tilted to Full Up Position)
b - Manual Tilt Release Valve Location
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
CHECKING TRIM SYSTEM FLUID LEVEL
IMPORTANT: This trim system is pressurized. Remove
fill screw when outboard is trimmed to the full “up” position. Retighten fill screw securely.
1. Trim outboard to full “up” position. Engage tilt lock lever
(a). Trim system fluid can only be checked when outboard is in this position.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “OUT” (“UP”) CHARACTERISTICS
! WARNING
Excessive trim “out” also may reduce the stability of
some high speed hulls. To correct instability at high
speed, reduce the power GRADUALLY and trim the
outboard “in” slightly before resuming high speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will cause a sudden
change of steering torque and may cause additional
momentary boat instability.)
1. Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
a
2. Transfers steering torque harder to left on standard or
slightly elevated transom installation (single outboard).
3. Increases clearance over submerged objects.
4. In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
5. If trimmed out beyond the water pickup, reduced water
supply can cause serious overheating.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “IN” (“DOWN”)
CHARACTERISTICS
50157
2. Remove fill screw and check fluid level. Fluid level
should be to bottom of threads in fill hole (b).
3. If necessary, add Quicksilver Power Trim & Steering
Fluid or; Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F,
FA or Dexron II fluid to trim system.
4. Reinstall fill screw.
Trimming (Models with Power Trim)
NOTE: Because varying hull designs react differently in
various degrees of rough water, it is recommended to experiment with trim positions to determine whether trimming
up or down will improve the ride in rough water.
! WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “in” may cause undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. Each
boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the trim angle (trim adjustment pin relocation).
1. Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
2. Usually improves ride in choppy water.
3. In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right
(bow steer).
4. Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to the
left) on single outboard installations.
5. Improves planing speed acceleration.
When trimming your outboard from a mid-trim position (trim
tab in neutral straight fore-and-aft position), you can expect
the following results:
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-11
Trim Tab Adjustment
Boat Performance
1. Check trim tab position as follows:
TEST INSTRUCTIONS
a. Operate boat at the speed at which it would normally be operated.
b. If the boat pulls to the right (starboard), the trailing
edge of trim tab must be moved to the right. If the
boat pulls to the left (port), the trailing edge of trim
tab must be moved to the left.
2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows:
a. Shift outboard control into neutral and turn ignition
key to “Off” position.
b. Loosen bolt (c) and trim tab (b).
c.
If boat pulls to the left, adjust trailing edge of trim
tab to the left. If boat pulls to the right, adjust trailing
edge of trim tab to the right.
d. Tighten trim tab bolt securely.
e. Operate boat per “Check trim tab position as
follows,” to check trim tab setting. If necessary
readjust trim tab.
a
! WARNING
A tight grip on the steering wheel/tiller handle is
always advisable and is required when accelerating,
decelerating or when trimming the boat. On models
with Power Trim, upon reaching cruising speed, the
outboard should be trimmed to obtain a balanced
steering condition. While trimming, steering loads will
vary and will pull in one direction until a balanced
condition has been attained. If the outboard is trimmed
past the balanced steering condition, the steering
wheel/tiller handle then will have a tendency to pull in
the opposite direction. Excessive trimming past the
balanced steering position will result in increased
steering loads and, in most boat applications, a
decrease in performance.
! CAUTION
When trimming boat with dual outboards, both outboards should be at approximately the same tilt angle
and be tilted out (up) simultaneously (to prevent boat
from veering side-to-side) until desired boat attitude is
achieved. Outboards can then be trimmed individually
to precisely adjust boat trim angle and pitch.
1. With boat in water, trim the outboard(s) (trim button in
remote control handle) so that the decal on the side of
cowl is horizontal. This is a typical average setting that
should give reasonable acceleration and top speed.
2. Go for a short familiarization ride at various throttle and
trim settings BEFORE starting testing.
NOTE: Instruments should be read with eye directly in front
to eliminate any error in reading the instruments.
b
3. When making either top speed or acceleration runs,
best accuracy will be obtained by running with or
against any wind. Side winds require driving in a constant turn to keep the boat moving straight-ahead. If
winds are 10 MPH (16 km/hr) or greater, it is suggested
that all acceleration runs be made downwind.
c
50553
a - Anti-Ventilation Plate
b - Adjustable Trim Tab
c - Bolt
4. The top speed WOT (wide-open-throttle) test should
be done with the boat normally loaded (to duplicate
actual running conditions). Operate boat in gear at
WOT and check RPM. Engine RPM must be within the
recommended full throttle RPM range (listed in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual).
NOTE: When performing an acceleration test, it is
recommended that a stop watch be used to improve testing
accuracy. A wrist watch with a second hand may also be
substituted.
1-12 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
BOAT TEST CHART (Example)
Propeller
Diameter
and
Pitch
WOT
RPM
*
WOT
MPH
*
10 1/8 ” x
15
10 1/4 ” x
5450
5700
35
34
Acceleration Propeller Break Loose Wind during Run
Air
Water
Time
Temperature
During
Condition
in Seconds
During
MPH
Direction
(°F)
Acceleration Turns
7
6
slight
no
no
no
5
5
3”
chop
Comments
73
73
*WOT is wide-open-throttle
5. An acceleration test can also be performed if desired.
Start the test with boat motionless in the water and outboard in neutral. A stop watch should be started as the
throttle is quickly pushed to WOT (wide-open-throttle).
Stop the watch as the speedometer needle sweeps
past 20 MPH (32 km/hr). Several runs should be made
to assure a good average.
6. Prop “break loose” (sudden higher RPM), if not excessive, in some cases can be beneficial during acceleration. If undesirable “break loose” occurs, it can be decreased by trimming the outboard further under. If it
remains excessive with all similar propellers, the outboard must be lowered.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. It is suggested that all applicable data be recorded on
a chart (such as that illustrated, above) and retained
for future reference.
8. After several propellers of different pitch and/or design
have been tried, select one that best serves the general purpose of the boat. The selected propeller should
enable the engine to operate within its recommended
full throttle RPM range, without excessive propeller
“break loose” during acceleration or turns. A second
propeller that would make both a suitable spare or a
special purpose alternate might also be desirable.
NOTE: A higher pitch often gives best top speed, but the
next lower pitch gives adequate top speed with much better
acceleration.
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-13
Lubrication Points
Item
Description
No.
1
2
3
Throttle/Shift
Linkage
Pivot Points
Upper
Shift
Shaft
Swivel Pin
4
Ride Guide
Steering
Cable
5
Tilt Tube
6
Steering
Link Rod
Pivot Points
7
Propeller
Shaft
8
Starter Motor
Pinion Gear
9
*
Gear
Housing
Bearing
Carrier
Type of
Lubricant
Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon
Marine
Lubricant
Fresh Water
Frequency
Salt Water
Frequency
Every
60 Days
Every
30 Days
Every
60 Days
◊
∆
Gear
Housing
Engine
Crankshaft
Splines to
Drive Shaft
Splines
1
1
Every
30 Days
1
50554
Quicksilver
-Anti-Corrosion Grease
SAE 30W
Motor Oil
1 - Throttle/Shift Linkage Pivot Point Lubrication
Once in
Season
Every
60 Days
Once in
Season
Every
60 Days
Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon
Marine
Lubricant
After first 20
Hours, then
once in
season
Check and fill
after first 10
days, then
every 30 days
10
1
1
SAE 30W
Motor Oil
1
1
1
Quicksilver
Gear Lube
Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon
Marine
Lubricant
Check and fill
after first 10
days, then
every 30 days
Drain and re- Drain and refill after 1st 25 fill after 1st 25
hours, then
hours, then
after every
after every
100 hours, or 100 hours, or
once a year
once a year
before storing before storing
Once in
Season
2
2
51122
2 - Upper Shift Shaft Lubrication
Once in
Season
* Refer to lubrication instructions outlined in “Salt Water Corrosion Gear Housing Bearing Carrier and Cover Nut” of this section (see
“Table of Contents”).
◊
∆
Refer to “Gear Housing Lubrication” of this section (see “Table of
Contents”).
Refer to “Gear Housing Removal and Installation” (Section 5).
1-14 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7
3
50551
7 - Propeller Shaft Lubrication (a)
50157
3 - Swivel Pin Grease Fittings
8
RIDE GUIDE STEERING CABLE and PIVOT POINTS
LUBRICATION
! WARNING
Core of steering cable (transom end) must be fully
retracted into cable housing before lubricating cable.
If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of
cable could occur.
With core of Ride Guide Steering cable (transom end) fully
retracted, lubricate transom end of steering cable thru
grease fitting and exposed portion of cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant. Lubricate all pivot points with
SAE 30W engine oil.
51118
8 - Rotate Starter Motor Pinion Gear To Expose Shaft and Lubricate
6
4
5
10
50334
4 - Ride Guide Steering Grease Fitting
5 - Tilt Tube Grease Fitting
6 - Steering Link Rod Pivot Point Lubrication
9
50558
Gear Housing Lubrication
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-15
GEAR HOUSING LUBRICATION
NOTE: Refer to “Specifications,” for gear housing lubricant
capacity.
! WARNING
If gear housing is installed on outboard, to avoid accidental starting, disconnect (and isolate) spark plug
leads from spark plugs before working near the propeller.
! CAUTION
Do not use automotive grease in the gear housing. Use
only Quicksilver Gear Lube or Quicksilver Super-Duty
Lower Unit Lubricant.
1. Tilt outboard so that lubricant in gear housing will drain
toward front of housing, out fill hole and into clean container.
IMPORTANT: Inspect FILL and VENT plug washers for
damage. Use new washer as needed.
2. Remove lubricant fill plug and washer. Note amount of
metal particles on magnetic fill plug.
3. Remove VENT plugs and washers (a and c) and allow
all lubricant to drain.
5. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water in lubricant. Gear lubricant
which has been drained from a gear housing recently
in operation will have a yellowish color due to lubricant
agitation/aeration. This is normal and should not be
confused with the presence of water.
6. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the need
for disassembly and inspection of oil seals, seal surfaces, O-rings, water pump gaskets as well as gear
housing components for damage.
IMPORTANT: Never add lubricant to gear housing
without first removing VENT plugs, as trapped air will
prevent housing from being filled. Fill gear housing
only when outboard is in operating position.
7. With outboard in operating position, insert lubricant
tube into fill hole.
8. Fill gear housing until excess lubricant flows from forward VENT hole.
9. Install VENT plug and washer (a).
10. Continue to fill gear housing until lubricant flows from
VENT hole.
11. Install VENT plug and washer (c).
12. Clean magnet on FILL plug and install FILL plug and
washer (b).
SALT WATER CORROSION - GEAR HOUSING
BEARING CARRIER and COVER NUT
c
Salt water corrosion buildup can be sufficient to split a gear
housing and destroy an entire lower unit. To protect against
such damage, therefore, it is recommended that the gear
housing bearing carrier be lubricated on a regular basis, as
follows:
a
b
Service first at the 20-hour inspection, then on an annual
basis. Remove the entire bearing carrier to adequately
clean corrosive deposits and dried-up lubricant from both
ends of the bearing carrier, as well as the gear housing.
Apply a liberal amount of 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant
to the 2 ends of the bearing carrier, then reassemble and
torque to specifications. Refer to gear housing disassembly and reassembly (Section 6A).
50558
a - Lubricant VENT Plug/Washer
b - Lubricant Fill Plug/Washer
c - Lubricant VENT Plug/Washer
4. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant will
have a “metal flake” appearance). Presence of fine
metal particles (resembling powder) on the FILL plug
bar magnet indicates normal wear. The presence of
metal chips on the drain plug bar magnet indicates the
need for gear housing disassembly and components
inspection.
1-16 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Periodic Inspection
Conduct a periodic, systematic inspection to uncover and
correct a failure before it can cause inconvenience or mechanical damage. Inspection interval is based on average
operating conditions in recreation service. Under severe
conditions, the inspection interval should be shortened. Inspection includes:
1. Clean entire unit thoroughly, including all accessible
powerhead parts.
2. Check entire unit for loose, damaged or missing parts.
Tighten or replace as required.
Flushing Outboard Cooling System
! WARNING
When flushing, be certain that area in vicinity of propeller is clear and that no person is standing nearby –
to avoid possible injury. It is recommended to remove
propeller as a precautionary measure.
1. Install Quicksilver Flushing Attachment (73971A2) [or
equivalent tool] on the gear housing from the FRONT
side, positioning the rubber cups over the water intake
openings.
3. Lubricate gear housing.
4. Lubricate other points as indicated, previously.
5. Lubricate starter motor shaft with light film of SAE 10W
motor oil. Do not over-lubricate.
6. Service spark plugs. Inspect spark plug leads and
electrical leads for damage or deterioration, as explained in Section 2 “Electrical and Ignition”.
7. Inspect fuel lines for damage or deterioration and service fuel filters as indicated in Section 3 “Fuel System
and Carburetion.”
8. Remove propeller and inspect. Trim nicks and burrs
with a file, being careful not to remove more metal than
absolutely necessary. Inspect for cracks, damage or
bent condition. If condition is doubtful, refer to authorized Quicksilver Propeller Repair Station facilities.
Before reinstalling propeller, coat propeller shaft with
Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101, Anti-Corrosion
Grease or 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
9. Inspect the outboard surface finish for damage or
corrosion. Thoroughly clean damaged or corroded
areas and apply matching paint (Quicksilver Spray
Paints).
10. Check trim tab and galvanic corrosion sacrificial anode
for damage or for deterioration from salt water
operation.
11. Check remote controls and steering. Be sure that all
connections and fittings are in good condition, properly
secured and correctly adjusted.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
b
a
50551
a - Water Hose (1/2 in. [13mm] I.D. or Larger)
b - Flushing Attachment (73971A2)
(Typical Gear Housing)
2. Connect hose (1/2 in. [13mm] I.D. or larger) between
flushing attachment and water tap.
IMPORTANT: To prevent water pump damage, do not
start or run engine unless cooling water is flowing.
3. With the outboard in normal operating position (vertical), partially open water tap (IT MAY NOT BE NECESSARY to use full water pressure) and adjust water flow
so that there is a significant water loss around the rubber cups.
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-17
4. Start engine and idle in neutral. Then increase engine
speed, not to exceed 2500 RPM.
SUBMERGED ENGINE (FRESH WATER)
(PLUS SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS)
5. Flush or service engine as required. Be sure adequate
cooling water is provided.
1. Recover engine as quickly as possible.
a. Water must be discharged thru “tell-tale outlet.”
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine overheating. If water flow
is insufficient, stop engine and determine cause before continuing.
b. Flush until discharged water is clear. In saltwater
areas, run outboard 3 to 5 minutes.
c.
Stop engine before turning off water.
6. Stop engine, turn water off and remove flushing attachment from gear housing.
IMPORTANT: While and after flushing, keep outboard
in upright position until all water has drained from
drive shaft housing to prevent water from entering the
powerhead via drive shaft housing and exhaust ports.
Following Complete Submersion
Submerged engine treatment is divided into 3 distinct
problem areas. The most critical is submersion in salt
water; the second is submersion while running.
SALT WATER SUBMERSION (SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS)
Due to the corrosive effect of salt water on internal engine
components, complete disassembly is necessary before
any attempt is made to start the engine.
SUBMERGED WHILE RUNNING (SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS)
When an engine is submerged while running, the possibility of internal engine damage is greatly increased. If, after
engine is recovered and with spark plugs removed, engine
fails to rotate freely when turning flywheel, the possibility of
internal damage (bent connecting rod and/or bent crankshaft) exists. If this is the case, the powerhead must be
disassembled.
1-18 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
2. Remove cowling.
3. Flush exterior of outboard with fresh water to remove
mud, weeds, etc. DO NOT attempt to start engine if
sand has entered powerhead, as powerhead will be
severely damaged. Disassemble powerhead if necessary to clean components.
4. Remove spark plugs and get as much water as possible out of powerhead. Most water can be eliminated by
placing engine in a horizontal position (with spark plug
holes down) and rotating flywheel.
5. Pour alcohol into carburetor throat (alcohol will absorb
water). Again rotate flywheel.
6. Turn engine over and pour alcohol into spark plug
openings and again rotate flywheel.
7. Turn engine over (place spark plug openings down)
and pour engine oil into throats of carburetors while
rotating flywheel to distribute oil throughout crankcase.
8. Again turn engine over and pour approximately one
teaspoon of engine oil into each spark plug opening.
Again rotate flywheel to distribute oil in cylinders.
9. Remove and clean carburetors and fuel pump assembly.
10. Reinstall spark plugs, carburetors and fuel pump.
11. Attempt to start engine, using a fresh fuel source. If
engine starts, it should be run for at least one hour to
eliminate any water in engine.
12. If engine fails to start, determine cause (fuel, electrical
or mechanical). Engine should be run within 2 hours
after recovery of outboard from water, as serious internal damage may occur. If unable to start engine in this
period, disassemble engine and clean all parts and
apply oil as soon as possible.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Out-of-Season Outboard Storage
! WARNING
As a safety precaution, when boat is in storage,
remove positive (+) battery cable. This will eliminate
possibility of accidental starting of engine and resultant overheating and damage to engine from lack of
water.
In preparing an outboard for out-of-season storage, 2 precautions must be considered: 1) The engine must be protected from physical damage and 2) the engine must be
protected from rust, corrosion and dirt.
1. Remove cowling from engine.
2. Place outboard in water or install Quicksilver Flushing
Attachment over water intake by following instructions
outlined in “Flushing Cooling System” (see “Table of
Contents”).
3. Start engine and allow to warm up. Disconnect fuel
line. When engine starts to stall quickly spray Quicksilver Storage Seal into each carburetor throat. Continue
to spray until engine dies from lack of fuel.
4. Remove spark plugs and inject a 5 second spray of
Quicksilver Storage Seal around the inside of each cylinder. Manually turn engine over several times to distribute Storage Seal throughout cylinders. Reinstall
spark plugs.
5. If engine fuel filter appears to be contaminated, remove and replace. Refer to Section 3 “Fuel System
and Carburetion.”
10. If the water pickup is clogged, the speedometer will be
inoperative. Clean the pickup with a piece of wire or
blow out with compressed air. Before blowing out with
air, disconnect the tubing from the speedometer.
11. To prevent freeze damage, drain the speedometer
system of water completely before storage. Remove
tubing from speedometer fitting and blow thru the
tubing to remove water.
12. Store battery as outlined in “Out-of-Season Battery
Storage,” following.
13. For out-of-season storage information on Autoblend
units, refer to Section 8 in this service manual.
IMPORTANT: When storing outboard for the winter, be
sure that all water drain holes in gear housing are open
and free so that all water will drain out. If a speedometer is installed in the boat, disconnect the pickup tube
and allow it to drain. Reconnect the tube after draining.
Trapped water may freeze and expand, thus cracking
gear housing and/or water pump housing. Check and
refill gear housing with Quicksilver Gear Lube before
storage to protect against possible water leakage into
gear housing which is caused by loose lubricant vent
plug or loose grease fill plug. Inspect gaskets under
lubricant vent and fill plugs, replacing any damaged
gaskets, before reinstalling plugs.
Out-of-Season Battery Storage
1. Remove battery as soon as possible and remove all
grease, sulfate and dirt from top surface.
6. Drain and refill lower unit with Quicksilver Gear Lube,
as explained in “Gear Housing Lubrication” (see “Table
of Contents”).
2. Cover PLATES with distilled water, but not over 3/16 in.
(5mm) above perforated baffles.
7. Clean outboard thoroughly, including all accessible
powerhead parts, and spray with Corrosion and Rust
Preventive.
4. Store battery in a COOL, DRY place in a dry carton or
box.
8. Refer to lubrication chart in this section (see “Table of
Contents”) and lubricate all lubrication points.
9. Remove propeller. Apply Quicksilver Special Lubricant
101, Anti-Corrosion Grease or 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine
Lubricant to propeller shaft and reinstall propeller.
Refer to “Propeller Installation” (see “Table of
Contents”).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Cover terminal bolts well with grease.
5. Remove battery from storage every 60 days. Check
water level and place on charge for 5 to 6 hours at 6
amperes. DO NOT fast charge.
! CAUTION
A discharged battery can be damaged by freezing.
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-19
How Weather Affects Engine
Performance
Summer Conditions of high temperature, low barometric
pressure and high humidity all combine to reduce the
engine power. This, in turn, is reflected in decreased boat
speeds--as much as 2 or 3 miles-per-hour (3 or 5 Km
per-hour) in some cases. (Refer to previous chart.) Nothing
will regain this speed for the boater, but the coming of cool,
dry weather.
In pointing out the practical consequences of weather
effects, an engine--running on a hot, humid summer
day--may encounter a loss of as much as 14% of the
horsepower it would produce on a dry, brisk spring or fall
day. The horsepower, that any internal combustion engine
produces, depends upon the density of the air that it
consumes and, in turn, this density is dependent upon the
temperature of the air, its barometric pressure and water
vapor (or humidity) content.
Accompanying this weather-inspired loss of power is a
second but more subtle loss. At rigging time in early spring,
the engine was equipped with a propeller that allowed the
engine to turn within its recommended RPM range at full
throttle. With the coming of the summer weather and the
consequent drop in available horsepower, this propeller
will, in effect, become too large. Consequently, the engine
operates at less than its recommended RPM.
It is a known fact that weather conditions exert a profound
effect on power output of internal combustion engines.
Therefore, established horsepower ratings refer to the
power that the engine will produce at its rated RPM under
a specific combination of weather conditions.
Corporations internationally have settled on adoption of
I.S.O. (International Standards Organization) engine test
standards, as set forth in I.S.O. 3046 standardizing the
computation of horsepower from data obtained on the dynamometer, correcting all values to the power that the engine will produce at sea level, at 30% relative humidity at
77° F (25° C) temperature and a barometric pressure of
29.61 inches of mercury.
1-20 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
Due to the horsepower/RPM characteristics of an engine,
this will result in further loss of horsepower at the propeller
with another decrease in boat speed. This secondary loss,
however, can be regained by switching to a smaller pitch
propeller that allows the engine to again run at recommended RPM.
For boaters to realize optimum engine performance under
changing weather conditions, it is essential that the engine
have the proper propeller to allow it to operate at or near
the top end of the recommended maximum RPM range at
wide-open-throttle with a normal boat load.
Not only does this allow the engine to develop full power,
but equally important is the fact that the engine also will be
operating in an RPM range that discourages damaging
detonation. This, of course, enhances overall reliability and
durability of the engine.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Conditions Affecting Operation
1. Proper positioning of the weight inside the boat (persons and gear) has a significant effect on the boat’s
performance, for example:
a. Shifting weight to the rear (stern)
(1) Generally increases top speed.
(2) If in excess, can cause the boat to porpoise.
(3) Can make the bow bounce excessively in
choppy water.
(4) Will increase the danger of the following wave splashing into the boat when coming off
plane.
b. Shifting weight to the front (bow)
Detonation generally is thought of as spontaneous ignition,
but it is best described as a noisy explosion in an unburned
portion of the fuel/air charge after the spark plug has fired.
Detonation creates severe, untimely, shock waves in the
engine, and these shock waves often find or create a weakness: The dome of a piston, piston rings or piston ring
lands, piston pin and roller bearings.
While there are many causes for detonation in a 2-cycle
engine, emphasis is placed on those causes which are
most common in marine 2-cycle application. A few, which
are not commonly understood, are:
1. Over-advanced ignition timing.
2. Use of low octane gasoline.
3. Propeller pitch too high (engine RPM below recommended maximum range).
(1) Improves ease of planing off.
4. Lean fuel mixture at or near wide-open-throttle.
(2) Generally improves rough water ride.
5. Spark plugs (heat range too hot - incorrect reach
- cross-firing).
(3) If excessive, can make the boat veer left and
right (bow steer).
2. Boat Bottom: For maximum speed, a boat bottom
should be nearly a flat plane where it contacts the
water and particularly straight and smooth in fore-andaft direction.
a. Hook: Exists when bottom is concave in fore-andaft direction when viewed from the side. When
boat is planing, “hook” causes more lift on bottom
near transom and allows bow to drop, thus greatly
increasing wetted surface and reducing boat
speed. “Hook” frequently is caused by supporting
boat too far ahead of transom while hauling on a
trailer or during storage.
6. Inadequate engine cooling (deteriorated cooling
system).
7. Combustion chamber/piston deposits (result in
higher compression ratio).
Detonation usually can be prevented, provided that 1) the
engine is correctly set up and 2) diligent maintenance is
applied to combat the detonation causes, listed, preceding.
b. Rocker: The reverse of hook and much less common. “Rocker” exists if bottom is convex in foreand-aft direction when viewed from the side, and
boat has strong tendency to porpoise.
c.
Surface Roughness: Moss, barnacles, etc., on
boat or corrosion of outboard’s gear housing increase skin friction and cause speed loss. Clean
surfaces when necessary.
3. Gear Housing: If unit is left in the water, marine vegetation may accumulate over a period of time in certain
types of water. This growth must be removed from unit
before operation, as it may clog the water inlet holes in
the gear housing and cause the engine to overheat.
51115
Detonation: Causes and Prevention
Detonation in a 2-cycle engine somewhat resembles the
“pinging” heard in an automobile engine. It can be otherwise described as a tin-link “rattling” or “pinging” sound.
Damaged Piston Resulting from Detonation
Compression Check
1. Remove spark plugs.
2. Install compression gauge (a) in spark plug hole.
3. Hold throttle plates at W.O.T.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-21
4. Crank engine thru at least 4 compression strokes to
obtain highest possible reading.
5. Check and record compression of each cylinder.
Variation of more than 15 psi. (103.5 kPa) between
cylinders indicates that lower compression cylinder is
in some way defective, such as worn or sticking piston
rings and/or scored piston and cylinder.
6. Compression check is important because an engine
with low or uneven compression cannot be tuned
successfully to give peak performance. It is essential,
therefore, that improper compression be corrected
before proceeding with an engine tuneup.
a
7. Cylinder scoring: If powerhead shows any indication of
overheating, such as discolored or scorched paint,
visually inspect cylinders for scoring or other damage
as outlined in Section 4 “Powerhead.”
Water Pressure Check
51046
NOTE: To perform these checks, a Water Pressure Gauge
Kit, P/N 91-79250A2 is recommended.
a - Compression Gauge (P/N 91-29287)
1. Water pressure at idle, in neutral, is 1-3 psi (7-21 kPa).
2. Water pressure should increase, then drop to 4-6 psi
(21-35 kPa) prior to 2500 RPM (due to poppet valve
opening.)
3. At 2500 RPM, water pressure should not exceed 12 psi
(83 kPa). Readings above 12 psi at 2500 RPM may indicate a stuck poppet valve.
Serial Number Location
The engine serial number is located on the starboard side
of the swivel bracket (as on all Mariner/Mercury models)
and also on the cylinder head (a).
4. Static test (boat stationary - operate in forward gear
with a cut down “ smaller diameter” propeller) at 5000
RPM or above is 7-12 psi (48-83 kPa).
! CAUTION
A MODIFIED PROPELLER OR LOW PITCH PROPELLER IS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE ABOVE STATIC
TEST. STATIC TEST REQUIRES THE BOAT BE STATIONARY IN THE WATER SECURED TO A DOCK OR
TRAILER AND RUN IN FORWARD GEAR. DO NOT USE
A FLUSHING DEVICE FOR THIS TEST.
a
51139
1-22 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Painting Procedures
3. Sand blistered area with 3M 180 grit sandpaper
or P180 Gold Film Disc to remove paint blisters
only. Feather edge all broken paint edges.
Cleaning & Painting Aluminum
Propellers & Gear Housings
4. Clean gear housing thoroughly with (DX-330)
wax and grease remover.
! WARNING
Avoid serious injury from flying debris. Avoid serious injury from airborne particles. Use eye and
breathing protection with proper ventilation.
PROPELLERS
1. Sand the entire area to be painted with 3M 120
Regalite Polycut or coarse Scotch-Brite, disc or
belts.
2. Feather edges of all broken paint edges. Try not
to sand through the primer.
3. Clean the surface to be painted using PPG
Industries DX330 Wax and Grease Remover or
equivalent (Xylene or M.E.K.).
4. If bare metal has been exposed, use Quicksilver’s Light Gray Primer.
5. Allow a minimum of 1 hour dry time and no more
than 1 week before applying the finish coat.
6. Apply the finish coat using Quicksilver’s EDP
Propeller Black.
GEAR HOUSINGS
The following procedures should be used in refinishing gear housings. This procedure will provide the
most durable paint system available in the field. The
materials recommended are of high quality and
approximate marine requirements. The following
procedure will provide a repaint job that compares
with a properly applied factory paint finish. It is recommended that the listed materials be purchased
from a local Ditzler Automotive Finish Supply Outlet.
The minimum package quantity of each material
shown following is sufficient to refinish several gear
housings.
Procedure:
5. Spot repair surfaces where bare metal is exposed with (DX-503) alodine treatment.
IMPORTANT: Do not use any type of aerosol
spray paints as the paint will not properly adhere
to the surface nor will the coating be sufficiently
thick to resist future paint blistering.
6. Mix epoxy chromate primer (DP-40) with equal
part catalyst (DP-401) per manufacturers
instructions, allowing proper induction period for
permeation of the epoxy primer and catalyst.
7. Allow a minimum of one hour drying time and no
more than one week before top coating assemblies.
8. Use Ditzler Urethane DU9000 for Mercury Black,
DU34334 for Mariner Grey, and DU35466 for
Force Charcoal, and DU33414M for Sea Ray
White. Catalyze all three colors with Ditzler DU5
catalyst mixed 1:1 ratio. Reduce with solvents
per Ditzler label.
! CAUTION
Be sure to comply with instructions on the label
for ventilation and respirators. Using a spray gun,
apply one half to one mil even film thickness. Let
dry, flash off for five minutes and apply another
even coat of one half to one mil film thickness.
This urethane paint will dry to the touch in a matter of hours, but will remain sensitive to scratches
and abrasions for a few days.
9. The type of spray gun used will determine the
proper reduction ratio of the paint.
IMPORTANT: Do not paint sacrificial zinc trim tab
or zinc anode.
10. Cut out a cardboard “plug” for trim tab pocket to
keep paint off of mating surface to maintain good
continuity circuitry between trim tab and gear
housing.
1. Wash gear housing with a muriatic acid base
cleaner to remove any type of marine growth,
and rinse with water, if necessary.
2. Wash gear housing with soap and water, then
rinse.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS - 1-23
Decal Application
Decal Removal
1. Mark decal location before removal to assure
proper alignment of new decal.
2. Carefully soften decal and decal adhesive with a
heat gun or heat blower while removing old decal.
3. Clean decal contact area with a 1:1 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water.
4. Thoroughly dry decal contact area and check for
a completely cleaned surface.
Instructions for “Wet” Application
NOTE: The following decal installation instructions are provided for a “Wet” installation. All decals should be applied
wet.
TOOLS REQUIRED
1. Plastic Squeegee*
2. Stick Pin
3. Dish Washing Liquid/Detergent without ammonia** “Joy” and “Drift” are known to be compatible for this process.
** Automotive Body Filler Squeegee
** Do not use a soap that contains petroleum based
solvents.
SERVICE TIP: Placement of decals using the
“Wet” application will allow time to position decal. Read entire installation instructions on this
technique before proceeding.
DECAL APPLICATION
1. Mix 1/2 ounce (16 ml) of dish washing liquid in one
gallon (4 l) of cool water to use as wetting solution.
NOTE: Leave protective masking, if present, on the face of
decal until final steps of decal installation. This will ensure
that the vinyl decal keeps it’s shape during installation.
2. Place the decal face down on a clean work surface and remove the paper backing from “adhesive side” of decal.
3. Using a spray bottle, flood the entire “adhesive
side” of the decal with the pre-mixed wetting solution.
4. Flood area where the decal will be positioned with
wetting solution.
5. Position pre-wetted decal on wetted surface and
slide into position.
6. Starting at the center of the decal, “lightly”
squeegee out the air bubbles and wetting solution
with overlapping strokes to the outer edge of the
decal. Continue going over the decal surface until
all wrinkles are gone and adhesive bonds to the
cowl surface.
7. Wipe decal surface with soft paper towel or cloth.
8. Wait 10 - 15 minutes.
9. Starting at one corner, “carefully and slowly” pull
the masking off the decal surface at a 180° angle.
NOTE: To remove any remaining bubbles, pierce the decal
at one end of the bubble with stick pin and press out the entrapped air or wetting solution with your thumb (moving toward the puncture).
TEMPERATURE
IMPORTANT: Installation of vinyl decals should
not be attempted while in direct sunlight. Air and
surface temperature should be between 60°F
(15°C) and 100°F (38°C) for best application.
SURFACE PREPARATION
IMPORTANT: Do not use a soap or any petroleum
based solvents to clean application surface.
Clean entire application surface with mild dish washing liquid and water. Rinse surface thoroughly with
clean water.
1-24 - GENERAL INFORMATION and SPECIFICATIONS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
2
A
51123
IGNITION SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Page
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
Direct Voltage Adapter (DVA) Tests . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2
Ignition System Test Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3
Stator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4
Ignition Coil Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-5
Trigger Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-5
ADI Ignition using a RED Stator with an
Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-5
RED Stator with Adaptor and Ignition Coils . . . . . . . 2A-6
RED Stator DVA Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
Electric Start Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
Manual Start Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
Ignition (Key) Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
2A-0 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
Page
Ignition Components
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
BLACK and RED Stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
BLACK Stator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
RED Stator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10
Ignition Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-11
Switch Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-11
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Description
Test Procedures
The outboard ignition system is alternator-driven with distributor-less capacitor discharge. Major components of the
ignition system are the flywheel, stator, trigger, switch box,
ignition coils and spark plugs.
Direct Voltage Adapter (DVA) Tests
The stator assembly is mounted stationary below the flywheel and has 2 capacitor charging coils. The flywheel is
fitted with permanent magnets inside the outer rim. As the
flywheel rotates the permanent magnets pass the capacitor charging coils. This causes the capacitor charging coils
to produce AC voltage. The AC voltage then is conducted
to the switch box where it is rectified and stored in a capacitor.
DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE/SHOCK HAZARD! Do not
touch ignition components and/or metal test probes
while engine is running and/or being “cranked”. STAY
CLEAR OF SPARK PLUG LEADS. To assure personal
safety, each individual spark plug lead should be
grounded to engine.
The trigger assembly (also mounted under the flywheel)
has 3 coils. The flywheel has a second set of permanent
magnets (located around the center hub). As the flywheel
rotates the second set of magnets pass the trigger coils.
This causes the trigger coils to produce an AC voltage that
is conducted to an electric Silicon Controlled Rectifier
(SCR) in the switch box.
The switch discharges the capacitor voltage into the ignition coil at the correct time and firing order sequence.
Capacitor voltage is conducted to the primary side of the
ignition coil. The ignition coil multiplies this voltage high
enough to jump the gap at the spark plug.
The preceding sequence occurs once-per-engine-revolution for each cylinder.
Spark timing is changed (advanced/retarded) by rotating
the trigger assembly which changes each trigger coil position in relation to the permanent magnets on the flywheel
center hub.
IMPORTANT: If the engine misfires, runs rough or does
not start, the ignition system should be checked using
a Multi-Meter/DVA Tester (91-99750), or a voltmeter
(capable of measuring 400 volts DC, or higher) and Direct Voltage Adaptor (91-89045).
! WARNING
! CAUTION
To protect against meter and/or component damage,
observe the following precautions:
– 400 VDC* test position (or higher) MUST BE used for
all tests.
– INSURE the Positive (+) lead/terminal of DVA is connected to the Positive (+) receptacle of meter
– DO NOT CHANGE meter selector switch position
while engine is running and/or being ”cranked”.
– Switch box MUST BE GROUNDED during tests.
Running or ”cranking” engine with switch box ungrounded may damage switch box.
*If using a meter with a built–in DVA, the DVA/400 VDC test
position should be used.
NOTE: Test leads are not supplied with the DVA. Use test
leads supplied with meter.
Test procedures and specifications are provided for checking primary ignition voltage while the engine is running
and/or being ”cranked”.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS:
1. Intermittent, weak, or no spark output at two spark
plugs usually indicates a bad TRIGGER.
2. Intermittent, weak, or no spark output at all three spark
plugs usually indicates a bad STATOR or SWITCH
BOX.
3. Intermittent, weak, or no spark at any one spark plug
usually indicates a bad SPARK PLUG, COIL, or
SWITCH BOX.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2A-1
Test Sequence
1-A) Check primary input voltage to coils (See Test
Chart)
2-B) Check ignition switch/wiring, as follows:
! CAUTION
1. If voltage readings to coil(s) are BELOW specification,
proceed with Step 2-A.
To prevent engine from starting, remove spark plug
leads from ALL spark plugs and ground leads to engine.
2. If voltage readings to coil(s) are WITHIN specifications, proceed with Step 1-B.
1. Disconnect ignition switch and stop switch leads
from switch box and isolate the leads.
1-B) Check coils for spark. [Connect Spark Gap Tester
(91–63998A1) between coil high voltage tower and
spark plug.]
1. No spark or weak spark. COIL is bad.
2. Spark is OK, proceed with Step 1-C.
2. Repeat check in Step 2-A.
1-C) If Step 1-A and 1-B check OK, replace spark plugs.
If problem exists after replacing spark plugs, proceed with
Step 1-D.
1-D) If Steps 1-A, 1-B, and 1-C check OK, check ignition timing.
1. If ignition timing does not check to specification (or a
sudden or unexplained timing change occurs) check
trigger advance linkage for loose and/or broken parts
and check trigger magnet ring (on flywheel hub) for
looseness and/or a shift in position.
a. If reading is still BELOW specification, proceed
with Step 3-A.
b. If reading is WITHIN specification, either the ignition switch, stop switch, or wiring is bad.
3-A) Check stator low speed and high speed input to
switch box. (see Test Chart).
1. If either the low speed or high speed reading to switch
box is BELOW specification, Stator or Switch Box is
bad (test stator as outlined in this service manual section; if stator checks to specification replace switch box
and repeat check).
2. If both the low speed and high speed reading are
WITHIN specification, replace switch box and repeat
test.
2. If ignition checks to specification and engine does not
run or runs poorly, trouble exists with fuel system or
engine mechanical.
2-A) Check switch box ”stop” circuit. (See Test Chart).
1. If reading is BELOW specifications, proceed with Step
2-B.
2. If reading is ABOVE specifications, the Trigger or
Switch Box is bad (test trigger as outlined in this service manual section; if trigger checks OK, replace
switch box and repeat check).
3. If reading is WITHIN specifications, proceed with Step
3-A.
2A-2 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Ignition System Test Chart
IMPORTANT: BEFORE attempting the ignition system checks, following, thoroughly read the preceding pages of
these instructions to become familiar with the proper Automatic Distributorless Ignition (ADI) test sequence and procedures (particularly any “Safety Warnings” and “Cautions”). ALL tests are performed with lead wires connected –
terminals exposed. SWITCH BOX MUST BE GROUNDED (CASE TO ENGINE BLOCK) FOR ALL TESTS – IF NOT,
SWITCH BOXES MAY BE DAMAGED.
55/60 MARATHON/SEAPRO – (398-9873A-5 printed on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277479 and BELOW
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
45 JET, 50/60 ELECTRIC – (398-9710A22, 398-9710A23, or 398-9710A34 printed on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277605 and BELOW
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
NOTE: When servicing a unit prior to the listed serial number and below, it is recommended that the flywheel be removed and
the stator part number verified to determine proper testing applications.
ADI Test
Seq
Seq.
Test
Selector Sw.
Position
DVA Leads
Red
Black
Voltage (1)
@300-1000
@300
1000 RPM
Voltage
@1000-4000
@1000
4000 RPM
1–A
Coil Primary
400 VDC*
Coil (+)
Terminal
Coil (–)
Terminal
150–250
180–280
2–A
Switch Box Stop Circuit
400VDC*
Black/Yellow(3)
Sw. Box Terminal
Ground
200–360
200–360
3–A
4–A
Stator Low Speed
400VDC*
Blue Sw. Box
Terminal
Ground
200–300
200–330
3–A
4–A
Stator High Speed
400VDC*
Red Sw. Box Terminal
Ground
20–90
130–300
5–A
Switch Box Bias
20 VDC or
40 VDC
Ground (1)
White/Black Sw.
Box Terminal (1)
2–10
10–30
(1)
Using meter only, REVERSE LEAD POLARITY, connect leads as specified.
(*) If using a meter with built-in DVA, place selector switch in the DVA/400 VDC position.
55/60 MARATHON/SEAPRO – (398-9873A21 printed on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277480 and ABOVE
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
45 JET, 50/60 ELECTRIC – (398-9873A24 printed on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277606 and ABOVE
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
ADI Test
Seq
Seq.
Test
1–A
Coil Primary
2–A
Selector Sw.
Position
DVA Leads
Voltage
Voltage
@300 RPM @1000 RPM
Voltage
@4000 RPM
Red
Black
400 VDC*
Coil (+)
Terminal
Coil (–)
Terminal
145–175
210–250
200–240
Switch Box Stop Circuit
400VDC*
Black/Yellow(3)
Sw. Box Terminal
Ground
215–265
280–340
260–320
3–A
4–A
Stator Low Speed
400VDC*
Blue Sw. Box
Terminal
Ground
215–265
280–340
260–320
3–A
4–A
Stator High Speed
400VDC*
Red Sw. Box
Terminal
Ground
10–15
45–55
205–255
5–A
Switch Box Bias
20 VDC or
40 VDC
Ground (1)
White/Black Sw.
Box Terminal (1)
2–10
10–30
10–30
(1)
Using meter only, REVERSE LEAD POLARITY, connect leads as specified.
(*) If using a meter with built-in DVA, place selector switch in the DVA/400 VDC position.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2A-3
! WARNING
When testing or servicing the ignition system, high
voltage is present, be extremely cautious! DO NOT
TOUCH OR DISCONNECT any ignition parts while engine is running, while key switch is on, or while battery
cables are connected.
! CAUTION
Failure to comply with the following items may result
in damage to the ignition system.
1. DO NOT reverse battery cable connections. The
battery negative cable is (-) ground.
2. DO NOT “spark” battery terminals with battery
cable connections to check polarity.
3. DO NOT disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
4. DO NOT crank engine when switch box is not
grounded to engine.
A process of elimination must be used when checking the
ignition system without a Multi-Meter/DVA Tester
(91-99750) or a voltmeter (capable of measuring 400 volts
DC, or higher) and Direct Voltage Adaptor (91-89045), as
the switch box and ignition coils cannot be thoroughly
checked with conventional test equipment.
All other components can be tested with an ohmmeter. Before troubleshooting the ignition system, check the following:
1. Make sure that electrical harness and ignition switch
are not the source of the problem.
2. Check that plug-in connectors are fully engaged and
terminals are free of corrosion.
3. Make sure that wire connections are tight and free of
corrosion.
4. Check all electrical components, that are grounded directly to engine, and all ground wires to see that they
are grounded to engine.
5. Check for disconnected wires, and short and open circuits.
STATOR TEST
NOTE: Stator can be tested without removing from engine.
1. Disconnect stator leads from switch box.
2. Use an ohmmeter and perform the following tests.
IMPORTANT: If stator is mounted on engine, black stator lead must be grounded to powerhead when testing.
Connect test lead to black stator lead if stator is removed from engine.
55/60 MARATHON/SEAPRO – (398-9873A-5 printed
on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277479 and BELOW
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
45 JET, 50/60 ELECTRIC – (398-9710A22,
398-9710A23, or 398-9710A34 printed on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277605 and BELOW
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
NOTE: When servicing a unit listed “Serial Number and
Below”, it is recommended that the flywheel be removed
and the stator part number verified to determine proper
testing applications.
Test Leads
Between Blue
Stator Lead and
Red Stator Lead
(Low Speed)
Between Red
Stator Lead and
Engine Ground*
(Hi-Speed)
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_______)
3600 – 4200
(90 – 140)
3.6 – 4.2
(R x 1000)
90 – 140
90 – 140
(R x 1)
*If stator is mounted on engine, black stator lead must be
grounded to powerhead when testing. Connect test lead to
black stator lead if stator is removed from engine.
55/60 MARATHON/SEAPRO – (398-9873A21 printed
on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277480 and ABOVE
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
45 JET, 50/60 ELECTRIC – (398-9873A24 printed on
the stator)
USA S/N 0G277606 and ABOVE
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
Test Leads
Between Blue
Stator Lead and
Red Stator Lead
(Low Speed)
Between Red
Stator Lead and
Engine Ground*
(Hi-Speed)
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_______)
1100 – 1600
1.1 – 1.6
(R x 1000)
30 – 35
30 – 35
(R x 1)
*If stator is mounted on engine, black stator lead must be
grounded to powerhead when testing. Connect test lead to
black stator lead if stator is removed from engine.
NOTE: Readings are for a cold engine (room temperature).
Resistance will increase slightly, if engine is warm.
3. If meter readings are other than specified, replace stator assembly.
2A-4 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
IGNITION COIL TEST
IMPORTANT: Ohmmeter tests can only detect certain
faults in the ignition coil. Replace ignition coil, if ohmmeter readings (listed in chart, following) are not as
specified. If coil tests OK, and coil is still suspected of
being faulty, use Multi-Meter/DVA Tester (91-99750) or
a voltmeter (capable of measuring 400 volts DC, or
higher) and Direct Voltage Adaptor (91-89045) to thoroughly check coil.
ADI Ignition using a RED
Stator with an Adapter
Module
Red stators require an adapter module that is connected between the stator and switch box. Without the
adapter module, the voltage supplied by the stator
would exceed the voltage capability of the switch box.
1. Disconnect wires from coil terminals.
2. Pull spark plug lead out of coil tower.
3. Use an ohmmeter and perform the following tests.
Test Leads
Between (+) and (-) Coil
Terminals
Between Coil Tower and (-)
Coil Terminal
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_________)
.02-.04*
.02-.04*
(R x 1)
800-1100**
8-11**
(R x 100)
* The primary DC resistance of these coils generally is less than one
(1) OHM. If a reading resembling a short is obtained, this would be
acceptable.
** Copper wire is an excellent conductor, but it will have a noticeable
difference in resistance from cold to hot temperatures. Reasonable
variations from these readings are acceptable.
4. If meter readings are not as specified, replace ignition
coil.
TRIGGER TEST
1. Disconnect all trigger leads from switch box.
2. Use an Ohmmeter and perform the following tests.
Test Leads
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_________)
Between Brown Trigger Lead
and White/Black Trigger Lead
1100-1400
11-14
(R x 100)
Between White Trigger Lead
and White/Black Trigger Lead
1100-1400
11-14
(R x 100)
Between Violet Trigger Lead
and White/Black Trigger Lead
1100-1400
11-14
(R x 100)
NOTE: Above readings are for a cold engine (room temperature). Resistance will increase slightly, if engine is
warm.
3. If meter readings are not as specified, replace trigger.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2A-5
NOTE: If using a meter with a built -in DVA, place selector
switch in the DVA/400 VDC position.
RED Stator with Adaptor and
Ignition Coils
NOTE: Red stators require an adapter module that is
connected between the stator and switch box. Without the adapter module, the voltage supplied by the
stator would exceed the voltage capability of the
switch box.
RED Stator DVA Test
Test
Selector
Switch Position
RED DVA
Lead
BLACK DVA
Lead
Voltage @ 300
RPM
Voltage @
1000 RPM
Voltage @
4000 RPM
Coil Primary
400 VDC*
Coil (+) Terminal
Coil (–) Terminal
130 Volts Minimum
195 to 275
195 to 275
Stop Circuit
400 VDC*
Black/Yellow
Sw. Box Terminal
Ground
190 Volts Minimum
275 to 320
260 to 320
Blue Sw. Box
Terminal
400 VDC*
Blue Sw. Box
Terminal
Ground
190 Volts Minimum
275 to 320
260 to 320
Blue/White Sw.
Box Terminal
400 VDC*
Blue/White Sw.
Box Terminal
Ground
190 Volts Minimum
275 to 320
260 to 320
NOTE: The stator for manual start engines have a BLUE/
WHITE and a BLACK wire which provide power for the overheat horn and overspeed limiter module.
NOTE: Resistance varies greatly with temperature. Measurements should be made within an ambient range of 65 to
85 degrees F°
Electric Start Engines
Troubleshooting Procedures
Red Stator Resistance Test
(all wires disconnected)
Positive Meter
Negative
Lead (+)
Meter Lead (–)
Connect to
White/Green
stator lead
Connect to Yellow stator lead
Connect to
Green/White
stator lead
Connect to Yellow stator lead
R x 1 Ohms
Scale
660 – 710
Positive Meter
Negative
Lead (+)
Meter Lead (–)
Connect to
White/Green
stator lead
Connect to
Blue/White
Connect to
Green/White
stator lead
Connect to
Black
Connect to Yel- Connect to Yellow stator lead low stator lead
2A-6 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
If the DVA reading is LOW, the stator, adapter module
or switch box may be defective. Refer to the particular
engine model procedure, following, to isolate the problem.
•
Disconnect the BLUE adapter lead from the
switch box.
•
Connect the DVA meter between the BLUE
adapter lead and ground.
•
Crank the engine (manual or electric).
•
If the DVA is normal (190 to 260 volts), the switch
box is defective.
•
If the DVA reading is still low, either the stator or
the adapter is defective.
•
Disconnect the GREEN/WHITE and WHITE/
GREEN stator leads from the adapter.
660 – 710
•
Measure the resistance between the GREEN/
WHITE and WHITE/GREEN stator leads.
130 – 145
•
If the resistance is normal (660 to 710 ohms), the
adapter is defective.
0.17 – 0.19
•
If the resistance is incorrect, the stator is defective.
0.165 – 0.181
Manual Start Engines
Red Stator Resistance Test
(all wires disconnected)
If the DVA reading is HIGH (particularly @ 1000 RPM)
the ADAPTER MODULE is defective.
R x 1 Ohms
Scale
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Ignition (Key) Switch Test
1. Disconnect remote control wiring harness and instrument panel connector.
Ignition Components
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Wiring diagram for control boxes is located in SECTION 2D.
Flywheel
2. Set ohmmeter on R x 1 scale for the following tests:
REMOVAL
COMMANDER 2000 KEY SWITCH
1. Remove flywheel cover from engine.
! WARNING
Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel
during removal and installation; therefore, disconnect
(and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs to prevent engine from starting.
2. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs.
23894
3. While holding flywheel with Flywheel Holder (a)
(91-52344), remove flywheel nut and washer.
COMMANDER KEY SWITCH
A
(PUR)
M(BLK)
(BLK/YEL)M
(RED)B
S (YEL/RED)
C
(YEL/BLK)
KEY
POSITION
CONTINUITY SHOULD BE INDICATED
AT THE FOLLOWING POINTS:
BLK BLK/YEL
OFF
•
a
RED YEL/RED PUR YEL/BLK
•
RUN
•
•
START
CHOKE*
•
•
•
•
•
51123
•
4. Install Crankshaft Protector Cap (91-24161) on the
end of crankshaft, then install Flywheel Puller (a)
(91-73687A1) into flywheel (b).
•
•
5. Remove flywheel.
•
•
•
NOTE: Neither heat or hammer should be used on flywheel
to aid in removal as damage to flywheel or electrical components under flywheel may result.
•
*Key switch must be positioned to “RUN” or “START” and key pushed
in to actuate choke, for this continuity test.
BLK•BLACK
PUR•PURPLE
RED•RED
YEL•YELLOW
a
b
3. If meter readings are other than specified in the preceding test, verify that switch and not wiring is faulty.
If wiring checks OK, replace switch.
51124
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2A-7
INSTALLATION
BLACK and RED Stator
! WARNING
REMOVAL
Engine could possibly start when turning flywheel
during installation; therefore, disconnect (and isolate)
spark plug leads from spark plugs to prevent engine
from starting.
1. Remove flywheel; refer to “Flywheel Removal”.
2. Remove screws (a).
a
1. Disconnect spark plug leads from spark plugs.
2. Place flywheel key (a) into slot in crankshaft.
a
51123
3. Disconnect stator leads as shown and remove stator.
a
51123
3. Align slot in flywheel center bore with flywheel key and
install flywheel onto crankshaft.
c
4. Install washer and locknut.
5. Hold flywheel with Flywheel Holder (a) (91-52344);
torque locknut to 100 lb. ft. (136 N·m).
b
a
51123
6. Install flywheel cover.
51124
a - Stator Leads to Switch Box (2)
b - Yellow Leads to Rectifier (2)
c - Ground Lead (1)
2A-8 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
BLACK STATOR INSTALLATION
RED STATOR INSTALLATION
1. Install stator as shown.
IMPORTANT: The stator must be oriented as
shown to obtain correct system voltage.
a
b
1. Position red stator so appropriate arrow on decal
points aft.
2. Secure stator with four (4) attaching screws retained from disassembly. Apply Loctite 222 to
threads and torque to 60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m).
FORWARD
51124
a - Screws; apply Loctite 271 on Threads (unless Patch Screw
used) and torque to 60 lbs. in. (7.0 N·m)
b - Stator
2. Connect stator leads; refer to wiring diagrams in Section 2D.
b
b
b
b
a
c
a
AFT
c
54067
a - Orient Appropriate Arrow of Decal Aft
b - Apply Loctite 222 (obtain locally) To Screws (4) and Torque
to 60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m)
c - Stator Harness
3. Route stator harness thru top of electrical plate
grommet as shown. Secure to powerhead with
sta-strap.
b
4. Position stator adaptor in cavity of electrical plate
with blue lead toward top of engine.
5. Refer to electrical diagram and make electrical
connections as shown.
6. Bundle and secure stator adaptor, harnesses and
connections with sta-straps as shown.
51124
a - Stator Leads to Switch Box (2)
b - Yellow Leads to Rectifier (2)
c - Ground Lead (1)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2A-9
a
b
f
3. Disconnect trigger leads (a) from switch box (b) and remove trigger.
c
f
a
d
f
b
e
f
54981
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Electrical Plate Grommet
Blue Lead of Stator Adaptor
Stator Harness
Black Ground Lead of Stator Adaptor
Stator Adaptor
Sta-Straps
51123
INSTALLATION
1. Install trigger (a) and connect link arm (b).
Trigger
a
REMOVAL
1. Remove flywheel and stator; refer to “Flywheel” and
“Stator” removal, preceding.
2. Disconnect link arm (a) and remove trigger(b).
b
b
19459
a
19459
2A-10 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Connect trigger leads (a) to switch box (b); refer to wiring diagrams in Section 2D.
1. Refer to wiring diagrams in Section 2D when connecting wires.
b
a
Switch Box
g
c
h
d
f
51123
3. Install stator; refer to “Stator Installation”, preceding.
4. Install flywheel; refer to “Flywheel Installation”, preceding.
a
e
Ignition Coils
1. Refer to wiring diagrams in Section 2D when connecting wires.
b
a
b
51123
d
e
c
c
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
White/Black
Purple
Brown
White
Red
Blue
Black
Grommet
b
a
c
d
e
a
a
b
c
d
e
-
b
51124
Coils
Cover
Hex Nuts; coat with Quicksilver Liquid Neoprene
Bolts; torque to 20 lb. in. (2.5 N·m)
Coil Tower Boots; form a water tight seal between coil tower and
spark plug lead using Quicksilver Insulating Compound
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2A-11
ELECTRICAL
2
B
11669
BATTERY, CHARGING SYSTEM and
STARTING SYSTEM
Table of Contents
Page
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Recommended Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Operating Engine Without Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Specific Gravity Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
Specific Gravity Cell Comparison Test . . . . . . 2B-2
Electrolyte Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2
Charging A Discharged Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2
Winter Storage of Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3
Battery Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3
Battery Charging System Troubleshooting . . . . . 2B-4
Stator Ohms Test (Alternator Coils Only) . . . . . . 2B-4
Alternator System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
Unregulated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
Regulated Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
9 Ampere Battery Charging Wiring Diagram
(Rectifier Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-7
9 Ampere Battery Charging Wiring Diagram
(Regulator Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-8
9 Ampere Battery Charging Diagram
with Battery Isolator (Rectifier Models) . . . . . 2B-9
15/16 Ampere Battery Charging Diagram
with Battery Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10
Rectifier Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11
2B-0 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Starting Circuit . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Test for Shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Test For Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Positive Brushes and Terminals .
Testing Negative Brushes For Ground . . . . .
Starter Solenoid Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brush Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
2B-12
2B-12
2B-12
2B-12
2B-15
2B-15
2B-15
2B-16
2B-16
2B-16
2B-17
2B-17
2B-17
2B-18
2B-18
2B-18
2B-20
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Battery
Specific Gravity Readings
Precautions
Use a hydrometer (a) to measure specific gravity of electrolyte in each cell.
When charging batteries, an explosive gas mixture forms
in each cell. A portion of this gas escapes thru holes in vent
plugs and may form an explosive atmosphere around battery if ventilation is poor. This explosive gas may remain in
or around battery for several hours after it has been
charged. Sparks or flames can ignite this gas and cause an
internal explosion which may shatter the battery.
The following precautions should be observed to prevent
an explosion.
a
1. DO NOT smoke near batteries being charged or which
have been charged very recently.
2. DO NOT break live circuits at terminals of batteries because a spark usually occurs at the point where a live
circuit is broken. Always be careful when connecting or
disconnecting cable clamps on chargers. Poor connections are a common cause of electrical arcs which
cause explosions.
3. DO NOT reverse polarity of battery cables on battery
terminals.
! CAUTION
If battery acid comes into contact with skin or eyes,
wash skin immediately with a mild soap. Flush eyes
with water immediately and see a doctor.
22532
Recommended Battery
The 2-cycle Outboard type engine requires a 12 volt battery with a “Cold Cranking Amperage” rating for cranking
and a “Reserve Capacity” rating. The minimum should be
a “Cold Cranking Amperage” of 350 amperes and a “Reserve Capacity” of 100 minutes for engines outlined in this
manual.
Hydrometer measures percentage of sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte in terms of specific gravity. As a battery
drops from a charged to a discharged condition, acid
leaves the solution and chemically combines with the
plates, causing a decrease in specific gravity of electrolyte.
An indication of concentration of electrolyte is obtained
with a hydrometer.
When using a hydrometer, observe the following points:
1. Hydrometer must be clean (inside and out) to insure an
accurate reading.
Operating Engine Without Battery
If desired (or in an emergency), engines equipped with an
alternator can be started and operated without a battery
(either disconnected or removed) if “Warning”, below, is followed.
! WARNING
Before operating engine with battery leads disconnected from battery, disconnect stator leads (yellow)
from rectifier. Insulate (tape) stator lead ring terminals.
2. Never take hydrometer readings immediately after water has been added. Water must be thoroughly mixed
with electrolyte by charging for at least 15 minutes at
a rate high enough to cause vigorous gassing.
3. If hydrometer has built-in thermometer, draw liquid in
several times to ensure correct temperature before
taking reading.
4. Hold hydrometer vertically and draw in just enough liquid from battery cell so that float is free-floating. Hold
hydrometer at eye level so that float is vertical and free
of outer tube, then take reading at surface of liquid. Disregard curvature where liquid rises against float stem
due to capillary action.
5. Avoid dropping electrolyte on boat or clothing, as it is
extremely corrosive. Wash off immediately with baking
soda solution.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-1
Specific gravity of electrolyte varies not only with percentage of acid in liquid but also with temperature.As temperature drops, electrolyte contracts, so that specific gravity increases. Unless these variations in specific gravity are
taken into account, specific gravity obtained by hydrometer
may not give a true indication of concentration of acid in
electrolyte.
A fully charged battery will have a specific gravity reading
of approximately 1.270 at an electrolyte temperature of 80°
F (27° C). If electrolyte temperature is above or below 80°
F, additions or subtractions must be made in order to obtain
a hydrometer reading corrected to 80° F standard. For every 10° F (3.3° C) above 80° F, add 4 specific gravity points
(.004) to hydrometer reading. Example: A hydrometer
reading of 1.260 at 110° F (43° C) would be 1.272 corrected
to 80° F, indicating a fully charged battery.
For every 10° below 80° F, subtract 4 points (.004) from the
reading. Example: A hydrometer reading of 1.272 at 0° F
(-18° C) would be 1.240 corrected to 80° F, indicating a partially charged battery.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CELL COMPARISON TEST
This test may be used when an instrumental tester is not
available. To perform this test, measure specific gravity of
each cell, regardless of state of charge, and interpret results as follows: If specific gravity readings show a difference between highest and lowest cell of .050 (50 points) or
more, battery is defective and should be replaced.
Electrolyte Level
Charging A Discharged Battery
The following basic rules apply to any battery charging situation:
1. Any battery may be charged at any rate (in amperes)
as long as spilling of electrolyte (from violent gassing)
does not occur and as long as electrolyte temperature
does not exceed 125° F (52° C). If spewing of electrolyte occurs, or if electrolyte temperature exceeds 125°
F, charging rate (in amperes) must be reduced or temporarily halted to avoid damage to the battery.
2. Battery is fully charged when, over a 2-hour period at
a low charging rate (in amperes), all cells are gassing
freely (not spewing liquid electrolyte), and no change
in specific gravity occurs. Full charge specific gravity
is 1.260-1.275, corrected for electrolyte temperature
with electrolyte level at 3/16” (4.8mm) over plate. For
most satisfactory charging, lower charging rates in amperes are recommended.
3. If, after prolonged charging, specific gravity of at least
1.230 on all cells cannot be reached, battery is not in
optimum condition and will not provide optimum performance; however, it may continue to provide additional service, if it has performed satisfactorily in the
past.
4. To check battery voltage while cranking engine with
electric starter motor, place red (+) lead of tester on
positive (+) battery terminal and black (-) lead of tester
on negative (-) battery terminal. If the voltage drops below 9-1/2 volts while cranking, the battery is weak and
should be recharged or replaced.
Check electrolyte level in battery regularly. A battery in use
in hot weather should be checked more frequently because
of more rapid loss of water. If electrolyte level is found to be
low, then distilled water should be added to each cell until
liquid level rises approximately 3/16” (4.8mm) over plate.
DO NOT OVERFILL, because this will cause loss of electrolyte and result in poor performance, short life and excessive corrosion.
! CAUTION
During service, only distilled water should be added to
the battery, not electrolyte.
2B-2 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Winter Storage of Batteries
Battery companies are not responsible for battery damage,
either in winter storage or in dealer stock, if the following
instructions are not observed:
1. Remove battery from its installation as soon as possible and remove all grease, sulfate and dirt from top surface by running water over top of battery. Be sure, however, that vent caps are tight beforehand, and blow off
all excess water thoroughly with compressed air.
Check water level, making sure that plates are covered.
Some models are equipped with either a voltage regulator
or a voltage regulator/rectifier. The voltage regulator
senses battery voltage and allows the correct amount of direct current to charge the battery.
Models Equipped With Rectifier
a
2. When adding distilled water to battery, be extremely
careful not to fill more than 3/16” (4.8mm) over plate inside battery. Battery solution or electrolyte expands
from heat caused by charging. Overfilling battery will
cause electrolyte to overflow (if filled beyond 3/16”
over plate).
3. Grease terminal bolts well with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant, and store battery in COOL-DRY place.
Remove battery from storage every 30-45 days, check
water level (add water if necessary), and put on charge
for 5 or 6 hours at 6 amperes. DO NOT FAST
CHARGE.
4. If specific gravity drops below 1.240, check battery for
reason, and then recharge. When gravity reaches
1.260, discontinue charging. To check specific gravity,
use a hydrometer, which can be purchased locally.
5. Repeat preceding charging procedure every 30-45
days, as long as battery is in storage. When ready to
place battery back in service, remove excess grease
from terminals (a small amount is desirable on terminals at all times), recharge again as necessary and reinstall battery.
b
c
a - Stator
b - Rectifier
c - Battery
Models Equipped With Regulator/Rectifier
a
b
! WARNING
Hydrogen and oxygen gases are produced during normal battery operation or charging. Sparks or flame can
cause this mixture to ignite and explode, if they are
brought near the battery. Sulfuric acid in battery can
cause serious burns, if spilled on skin or in eyes. Flush
or wash away immediately with clear water.
Battery Charging System
Description
The battery charging system components are the stator,
rectifier or voltage regulator/rectifier and the battery. Alternating current is generated in the stator alternator coils and
flows to the rectifier. The rectifier changes the alternating
current to direct current for charging the battery.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
c
a - Stator
b - Regulator/Rectifier
c - Battery
The charging system may be damaged by: 1) reversed battery cables, 2) running the engine with battery cables disconnected and stator leads connected to rectifier, and 3)
and open circuit, such as a broken wire or loose connection.
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-3
Battery Charging System
Troubleshooting
Stator Ohms Test
(Alternator Coils Only)
A fault in the battery charging system usually will cause the
battery to become undercharged. Check battery electrolyte level, and charge battery. See “Electrolyte Level”, and
“Charging a Discharged Battery”.
NOTE: Stator can be tested without removing from engine.
If battery will NOT accept a satisfactory charge, replace
battery.
If battery accepts a satisfactory charge, determine the
cause of the charging system problem as follows.
1. Check for correct battery polarity [red cable to positive
(+) battery terminal]. If polarity was incorrect, check for
damaged rectifier. See “Rectifier Test”.
2. Check for loose or corroded battery connections.
1. Disconnect both yellow (stator leads) from voltage regulator/rectifier, or terminal block.
2. Use an ohmmeter and perform the following test.
IMPORTANT: If stator is mounted on engine, black stator lead (if provided) must be grounded to powerhead
when testing.
3. Replace stator if readings are outside ranges shown.
NOTE: When servicing a unit listed “Serial Number and
Below”, it is recommended that the flywheel be removed
and the stator part number verified to determine proper
testing applications.
3. Visually inspect wiring between stator and battery for
cuts, chafing; and disconnected, loose or corroded
connection.
55/60 MARATHON/SEAPRO – (398-9873A-5 or
398-9873A21 printed on the stator)
4. Excessive electrical load (from too many accessories)
will cause battery to run down.
LIGHTING COIL STATOR - 7 AMPERE (96 WATTS)
If visual inspection determines that battery connections
and wiring are OK, perform the following stator and rectifier
tests.
Test Leads
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_______)
Between Yellow
Stator Leads
.12 – .23*
.12 – .23*
(R x 1)
No Continuity
No Continuity
(R x 1000)
100 – 140
10 – 14
(R x 10)
Between Either
Yellow Stator
Lead and Engine
Ground**
Between Blue/
White and Black
Stator Leads
* DC Resistance of these windings generally is less than 1.5 OHMS.
If a reading (resembling a short) is obtained, this would be acceptable.
** If stator is removed from engine, connect test lead to black stator
lead, if provided.
45 JET, 50/60 ELECTRIC – (398-9710A22,
398-9710A23, or 398-9710A34 printed on the stator)
USA S/N 0G277605 and BELOW
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
9 AMPERE STATOR
Test Leads
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_______)
Between Yellow
Stator Leads
.6 – 1.1*
.6 – 1.1*
(R x 1)
No Continuity
No Continuity
(R x 1000)
Between Either
Yellow Stator
Lead and Engine
Ground**
2B-4 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
REGULATED SYSTEMS
16 AMPERE STATOR
Scale Reading
(x_______)
.17 – .19*
.17 – .19*
(R x 1)
2. If battery voltage is above 14.5 volts, replace voltage
regulator/rectifier. Check condition of battery as overcharging may have damaged battery.
No Continuity
No Continuity
(R x 1000)
3. If battery voltage is below 14.5 volts, charge battery;
refer to “Charging a Discharged Battery”. If battery can
NOT be satisfactorily charged, replace battery.
Between Yellow
Stator Leads
Between Either
Yellow Stator
Lead and Engine
Ground**
* DC Resistance of these windings generally is less than 1.5 OHMS.
If a reading (resembling a short) is obtained, this would be acceptable.
** If stator is removed from engine, connect test lead to black stator
lead, if provided.
45 JET, 50/60 ELECTRIC – (398-9873A24 printed on
the stator)
USA S/N 0G277606 and ABOVE
BELGIUM S/N (Not Available at Time of Printing)
15 AMPERE STATOR
Test Leads
Resistance
(OHMS)
Scale Reading
(x_______)
Between Yellow
Stator Leads
.20 – .25*
.20 – .25*
(R x 1)
Between Either
Yellow Stator
Lead and Engine
Ground**
1. Check battery voltage at battery with engine running.
Resistance
(OHMS)
Test Leads
No Continuity
No Continuity
(R x 1000)
4. If battery accepts a satisfactory charge, check battery
voltage while cranking engine; refer to “Charging a
Discharged Battery”. If cranking voltage is not acceptable, replace battery.
5. If cranking voltage is acceptable, disconnect larger diameter RED harness wire from starter solenoid terminal.
6. Remove smaller diameter RED wire (sense lead) from
starter solenoid terminal and connect to the positive (+)
terminal of a 9 volt transistor battery. Ground the negative (–) terminal of the 9 volt battery to the engine.
7. Connect RED (+) ammeter lead to larger diameter
RED harness wire, and BLACK (–) ammeter lead to
positive terminal on starter solenoid.
8. Secure starter wires away from flywheel.
9. With engine running at the indicated RPM’s, the ammeter should indicate the following appropriate amperes:
9 AMP
* DC Resistance of these windings generally is less than 1.5 OHMS.
If a reading (resembling a short) is obtained, this would be acceptable.
RPM
AMPERES
Idle
1
** If stator is removed from engine, connect test lead to black stator
lead, if provided.
1000
4
2000
8
3000
9
Alternator System Test
16 AMP
UNREGULATED SYSTEMS
IMPORTANT: Rectifier must be functioning properly
for accurate test results to be obtained.
1. If engine is equipped with a voltage regulator, disconnect voltage regulator leads at rectifier; re-install hex
nut on rectifier terminal that has yellow stator lead.
RPM
AMPERES
Idle
2
1000
10
2000
16
3000
18
2. Remove red wire from (+) terminal of rectifier.
3. Connect red (+) ammeter lead to rectifier (+) terminal
and black (-) ammeter lead to red rectifier wire.
4. Run engine at 3000 RPM.
5. Meter should read 7-9 amperes; if not, replace stator.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
15 AMP
RPM
AMPERES
Idle
3.5
1000
8
2000
13
3000
14
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-5
10. A reading of 18 amperes (16 amp system) or 9 amperes (9 amp system) at 3000 RPM indicates the
charging system is functioning properly and the battery
being discharging current due to the amperage draw
on the system is greater than the amperage output of
the engine charging system.
11. If ammeter reads less than required amperes @ 3000
RPM, test the stator; refer to “Stator Ohm Test (Alternator Coils Only)”. If stator tests OK, replace voltage regulator.
d
a
c
b
51000
a
b
c
d
-
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
Red Lead (2)
Yellow Lead (2)
Grey Lead
2B-6 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
9 Ampere Battery Charging Wiring
Diagram
(RECTIFIER MODELS)
a
BLK
BLU
GRY
RED
YEL
•
•
•
•
•
Black
Blue
Gray
Red
Yellow
b
d
e
f
RED SLEEVE
c
51249
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Stator/Alternator Assembly
Rectifier
20 Ampere Fuse (Remote Control Harness)
Starter Solenoid
GRAY Wire to Tachometer
To Battery (+) Positive Terminal
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
IMPORTANT: After electrical connections are made,
coat all terminal connections using Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene (92-25711), to avoid corrosion.
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-7
9 Ampere Battery Charging Wiring Diagram
IMPORTANT: After electrical connections are made,
coat all terminal connections using Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene (92-25711), to avoid corrosion.
(REGULATOR MODELS)
a
BLK
BLU
GRY
RED
YEL
•
•
•
•
•
Black
Blue
Gray
Red
Yellow
b
d
e
RED SLEEVE
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
f
Stator/Alternator Assembly
Regulator
20 Amp Fuse (Remote Control Harness)
Starter Solenoid
Gray Wire to Tachometer
To Battery (+) Positive Terminal
51249
2B-8 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
9 Ampere Battery Charging Diagram
with Battery Isolator
IMPORTANT: After electrical connections are made,
coat all terminal connections using Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene (92-25711), to avoid corrosion.
(RECTIFIER MODELS)
a
BLK
BLU
GRY
RED
YEL
•
•
•
•
•
Black
Blue
Gray
Red
Yellow
b
d
e
RED SLEEVE
c
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Stator/Alternator Assembly
Rectifier
20 Amp Fuse
Starter Solenoid
Gray Wire to Tachometer
Battery Isolation
51251
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-9
15/16 Ampere Battery Charging
Diagram with Battery Isolator
IMPORTANT: After electrical connections are made,
coat all terminal connections using Quicksilver Liquid
Neoprene (92-25711), to avoid corrosion.
a
BLK
BLU
GRY
RED
YEL
•
•
•
•
•
Black
Blue
Gray
Red
Yellow
b
d
e
c
RED SLEEVE
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Stator/Alternator Assembly
Voltage Regulator
20 Amp Fuse
Starter Solenoid
Gray Wire to Tachometer
Battery Isolation
2B-10 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
51250
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Rectifier Test
a
d
c
! WARNING
Disconnect battery leads from battery before testing
rectifier.
b
NOTE: Rectifier can be tested without removing from engine.
f
1. Disconnect all wires from terminals on rectifier.
2. Use an ohmmeter (R x 1000 scale) and perform the following test. Refer to drawing for rectifier terminal identification.
NOTE: Due to differences in the manufacture of ohm meters, the internal battery polarity may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer. As a result, the test readings may be
a direct reversal of those listed. If so, reverse meter leads
and reperform test.
e
07300
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Stator Terminals
Positive Terminal
Ground
Rectifier Test (continued)
Connect red meter lead to ground, black lead alternately
to terminals “a” and “c”.
Continuity Indicated
Connect black meter lead to ground, red lead
alternately to terminals “a” and “c”.
No Continuity Indicated
Connect black meter lead to terminal “b”, red
lead alternately to terminals “a” and “c”.
No Continuity Indicated
Connect black meter lead to ground, red lead
alternately to terminals “a” and “c”.
Continuity Indicated.
Replace Rectifier.
No Continuity Indicated.
Replace Rectifier.
Continuity Indicated
Connect red meter lead to terminal “b”,
black lead alternately to terminals “a”
and “c”.
No Continuity Indicated.
Replace Rectifier.
Continuity Indicated.
Replace Rectifier.
No Continuity Indicated.
Rectifier tests O.K.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Continuity Indicated
Connect black meter lead to terminal “b”, red
lead alternately to terminals “a” and “c”.
Continuity Indicated.
Replace Rectifier.
No Continuity Indicated
Connect red meter lead to terminal “b”,
black lead alternately to terminals “a”
and “c”.
No Continuity Indicated.
Replace Rectifier.
Continuity Indicated.
Rectifier Tests O.K.
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-11
Starting System
Starting System Components
The starting system consists of the following components.
1. Battery
2. Starter Solenoid
3. Neutral Start Switch
The neutral start switch opens the start circuit when the
shift control lever is not in neutral. This prevents accidental
starting when engine is in gear.
! CAUTION
The starter motor may be damaged if operated continuously. DO NOT operate continuously for more than 30
seconds. Allow a 2 minute cooling period between
starting attempts.
4. Starter Motor
5. Ignition Switch
Troubleshooting the Starting Circuit
Description
Before beginning the starting circuit troubleshooting flow
chart, following, check first for the following conditions:
The function of the starting system is to crank the engine.
The battery supplies electrical energy to crank the starter
motor. When the ignition switch is turned to “Start” position,
the starter solenoid is activated and completes the starting
circuit between the battery and starter.
1. Make sure that battery is fully charged.
2. Check that control lever is in “neutral” position.
3. Check terminals for corrosion and loose connections.
4. Check cables and wiring for frayed and worn insulation.
5. Check in-line fuse in red wire; see diagram.
2B-12 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
The following “Starting Circuit Troubleshooting Flow Chart” is designed as an aid to troubleshooting the starting circuit. This
flow chart will accurately locate any existing malfunction. Location of “Test Points” (called out in the chart) are numbered in
diagram below.
RED SLEEVE
7
RED SLEEVE
1
2
5
3
6
NEUTRAL START SWITCH
(LOCATED IN CONTROL
HOUSING IF ENGINE IS
EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE
CONTROL)
4
51208
Starting Circuit Troubleshooting
Flow Chart
Starter Motor Does Not Turn
SAFETY WARNING: Disconnect black (starter motor) cable
from starter solenoid test point 1 BEFORE making tests
1-thru-7 to prevent unexpected engine cranking.
TEST 1
Use an ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) and connect meter leads between negative (-) battery post and common powerhead
ground.
No continuity indicated; there is an open circuit in the black negative (-) battery cable between the negative (-) battery post and
the powerhead.
• Check cable for loose or corroded connections.
• Check cable for open.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Continuity Indicated
Proceed to TEST 2, on next page.
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-13
* Battery Voltage
TEST 2
No voltage reading;
proceed to TEST 3.
a. Disconnect black ground wire(s) from Test Point 2.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 2.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
12 Volt Reading*
TEST 3
a. Reconnect black ground wire(s).
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 3.
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
Check black ground wire for poor connection or
open circuit. Reconnect ground wire to starter
solenoid; proceed to TEST 7.
12 Volt Reading
No voltage reading;
proceed to TEST 4.
Defective starter solenoid.
TEST 4
No voltage reading;
proceed to TEST 5.
a. Connect voltmeter between common
engine ground and Test Point 4.
b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
12 Volt Reading*
Neutral start switch is open, or yellow/red wire
is open between Test Points 4 and 3.
TEST 5
No voltage reading;
proceed to TEST 6.
12 Volt Reading*
Connect voltmeter between common
engine ground and Test Point 5.
Defective ignition switch.
TEST 6
Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 6.
No voltage reading; check red wire between
battery (+) positive terminal and Test Point 6.
12 Volt Reading*
Check fuse in red wire between test points 5 and 6.
Check for open red wire between test points 5 and 6.
TEST 7
a. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 1.
b. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
12 Volt Reading*
No voltage reading; Defective starter solenoid.
Should hear solenoid click; proceed to TEST 8.
TEST 8
a. Reconnect black (starter motor) cable to starter solenoid Test Point 1.
b. Connect voltmeter between common engine ground and Test Point 7
c. Turn ignition key to “Start” position.
No voltage reading; check black cable
for poor connection or open circuit.
2B-14 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
12 Volt Reading*
Check black ground cable at starter for loose
or corroded connection, or open circuit. If
cable is O.K., check starter motor.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Starter Motor
Disassembly
Removal
1. Remove 2 thru bolts and commutator end cap, taking
care not to lose brush springs.
a
! CAUTION
c
Disconnect battery leads from battery before removing starter.
1. Disconnect battery leads from battery.
2. Disconnect black cable.
b
3. Remove bolts and remove starter clamp.
c
11646
4. Remove starter.
a - Thru Bolts
b - Commutator End Cap
c - Brush Springs
5. Remove black cable.
2. Pull armature from starter frame.
3. Remove locknut.
b
b
b
c
a
a
d
11659
51209
a
b
c
d
-
a - Armature
b - Locknut
Black Cable
Bolts (2)
Starter Clamp
Black Cable
6. Remove 2 rubber collars and 2 rubber bumpers
a
a
b
11645
a - Rubber Collars
b - Rubber Bumpers
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-15
b. Clean the commutator slots after undercutting.
4. Remove components from armature.
c.
d
e
f
De-burr the commutator lightly with No. 00 sandpaper, then clean the commutator.
d. Check the armature on a growler for shorts. See
“Testing”, following.
a
9. Open-circuited armatures often can be saved where
and open circuit is obvious and repairable. The most
likely place for an open circuit is at the commutator
bars. Long cranking periods overheat the starter motor
so that solder in the connections melts. The poor connections cause arcing and burning of the commutator
bars.
c
10. Repair bars, that are not too badly burned, by re-soldering the leads in bars (using rosin flux solder) and
turning down the commutator in a lathe to remove
burned material, then undercut the mica.
b
11658
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Spacer
Spring
Drive Assembly
Drive End Cap
Armature Shaft
Washer
11. Clean out the copper or brush dust from slots between
the commutator bars.
12. Check the armature for shorts and ground. See “Testing”.
Testing
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean all motor parts.
2. Check pinion teeth for chips, cracks or excessive wear.
3. Replace the drive clutch spring and/or collar, if tension
is not adequate, or if wear is excessive.
ARMATURE TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature for short circuits by placing on growler and
holding hack saw blade over armature core while armature
is rotated. If saw blade vibrates, armature is shorted. Recheck after cleaning between commutator bars. If saw
blade still vibrates, replace armature.
4. Check that the brush holder is not damaged or is not
holding the brushes against the commutator.
5. Replace brushes that are pitted or worn to less than
1/4” (6.4mm) in length. Refer to “Brush Replacement”,
following.
6. Replace a damaged or excessively worn bushing in
the end cap.
7. Check the armature conductor (commutator bar junction) for a firm connection. A poor connection usually
results in a burned commutator bar.
8. Re-surface and undercut a rough commutator, as follows:
! CAUTION
Do not turn down the commutator excessively.
11669
a. Re-surface the commutator and undercut the insulation between the commutator bars 1/32″
(0.8mm) to the full width of the insulation, make
sure that the undercut is flat.
2B-16 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ARMATURE TEST FOR GROUND
TESTING NEGATIVE BRUSHES FOR GROUND
1. Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter on armature core (or shaft) and other lead on
commutator, as shown.
Set ohmmeter to (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of ohmmeter
on the negative brush and the other lead on the end cap
(bare metal). If the meter indicates NO continuity, replace
the negative brush. Repeat this procedure on the other
negative brush.
2. If meter indicates continuity, armature is grounded and
must be replaced.
a
b
11675
11674
CHECKING POSITIVE BRUSHES AND TERMINALS
a - Negative (-) Brushes
b - End Cap
1. Connect ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads between positive brushes.
2. Ohmmeter must indicate full continuity (zero resistance). If resistance is indicated, check lead to positive
terminal solder connection. If connection cannot be repaired, brushes must be replaced. Refer to “Brush Replacement”.
a
11673
a - Positive Brushes
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-17
STARTER SOLENOID TEST
Test starter solenoid as follows:
1. Disconnect all leads from solenoid terminals.
2. Use an ohmmeter, set to (R x 1 scale) and connect between solenoid terminals 1 and 2.
c
3. Connect a 12-volt supply between solenoid terminals
3 and 4. Solenoid should click and meter should read
zero ohms.
4. If meter does not read zero ohms (full continuity), replace solenoid.
d
e
f
a
b
g
11660
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Positive (+) Terminal
Long Brush Lead
Push Lead Into Slot
Insulating Washer
Flat Washer
Lock Washer
Nut
2. Install components.
4
1
a
b
c
a
b
d
3
2
d
14354
a - 12-Volt Supply
b - Ohmmeter Leads
Brush Replacement
IMPORTANT: Replace brushes that are pitted or worn
to less than 1/4” (6.4mm) in length.
b
a
11656
a
b
c
d
-
Positive (+) Brushes
Negative (-) Brushes
Brush Holder
Bolts (Fasten Negative Brushes and Holder)
1. Install positive brushes into commutator end cap.
Reassembly
1. Lubricate helix threads and drive end cap bushing with
SAE 10W oil.
2. Install components onto armature shaft.
2B-18 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Construct a brush retainer tool as shown.
d
c
a
b
e
g
f
11658
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Washer
Helix Threads
Armature Shaft
Drive End Cap
Drive Assembly
Spring
Spacer
3. Install locknut (a).
a
Brush Retainer Tool Layout (Full Size)
11659
18-Gauge Sheet Metal
METRIC
SCALE
3”
2”
1-3/4”
1-11/16”
3/4”
1/2”
= 76.2mm
= 50.8mm
= 44.5mm
= 42.9mm
= 19.1mm
= 12.7mm
Brush Retainer Tool Side View (Full Size)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2B-19
5. Place springs and brushes into brush holder and hold
in place with brush retainer tool.
6. Lubricate bushing with one drop of SAE 10W oil. DO
NOT over-lubricate.
Installation
1. Install 2 rubber collars and 2 rubber bumpers.
a
a
a
b
b
11645
a - Rubber Collars
b - Rubber Bumpers
2. Install components as shown.
3. Connect battery leads to battery.
11661
a - Brush Retainer Tool
b - Bushing
c
7. Position armature into starter frame so that commutator end of armature is at end of starter frame where permanent magnets are recessed 1” (25.4mm). Align
marks (a) as shown.
c
b
8. Install commutator end cap onto starter frame; align
marks (b) as shown, and remove brush retainer tool.
a
d
9. Install thru bolts (c) and torque to 70 lbs. in. (8 N·m).
c
c
e
a
51209
a
b
c
d
e
-
Starter
Clamp
Bolts (2)
Black Cable (from Battery)
Black Cable (from Solenoid)
b
11648
2B-20 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
2
C
51046
TIMING/SYNCHRONIZING/ADJUSTING
Table of Contents
Page
Timing/Synchronizing/Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1
Timing Pointer Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-1
Carburetor Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2
(Models With One Piece Throttle Link
Rod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2
(Models With Adjustable Length
Throttle Link Rod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2
(Both One Piece and Adjustable Link
Rod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-2
Timing Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Idle Timing Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Maximum Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-3
Idle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4
Throttle Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2C-4
2C-0 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Timing/Synchronizing/
Adjusting
Specifications
FULL THROTTLE RPM
5000 - 5500 RPM
IDLE TIMING
2 - 6° ATDC
IDLE RPM IN
(FORWARD GEAR)
650 - 750 RPM
MAXIMUM TIMING
@ 5000RPM
50/60-22° BTDC
50/60-24° BTDC
(@ Cranking Speed)
55-16° BTDC
55-18° BTDC
SPARK PLUG TYPE
50/55/60
NGK BP8H-N-10 *
NGK BPZ8H-N-10**
FIRING ORDER
1-3-2
* 50/55/60 Models, Serial No. D000750 to D181999, came
standard with NGK BU8H spark plugs. NGK BP8H-N-10
can be used in these models.
91-58222A1
51128
51046
** Suppressor (Resistor) Spark Plug.
3. Turn flywheel clockwise until No. 1 (TOP) piston is at
top dead center (TDC). Set dial indicator to “0” (zero).
Special Tools
Part Number
*91-58222A1
Description
Dial Indicator Gauge Kit
*91-59339
Service Tachometer
*91-99379
Timing Light
91-63998A1
Spark Gap Tool
*May be obtained locally.
4. Turn flywheel counterclockwise until dial indicator
needle reads .550 in. (14.0 mm) BTDC, then turn flywheel clockwise until needle reads .459 in. (11.7 mm)
BTDC exactly.
5. Flywheel cover timing pointer (a) should align exactly
with .459 (14.0 mm) timing mark (b) on flywheel. If not,
loosen two (2) timing pointer attaching screws (c) and
adjust pointer. After adjusting pointer, torque attaching
screws to 20 lb. in. (2.26 N·m).
Timing Pointer Adjustment
IMPORTANT: Models equipped with adjustable timing
pointer or .459 mark on flywheel require the following
procedure before timing engine.
c
c
b
! WARNING
Remove all spark plugs from engine to prevent engine
from starting.
1. Remove three (3) spark plugs.
2. Install dial indicator into No. 1 (TOP) cylinder.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a
51046
6. Remove dial indicator from No. 1 (TOP) cylinder.
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2C-1
Carburetor Synchronization
(MODELS WITH ONE PIECE THROTTLE LINK ROD)
d. Look into throats of carburetors and verify all
throttle shutters are completely closed. Tighten
four (4) synchronizing screws (b).
a. Remove four (4) attaching screws from sound box
cover and remove cover.
b. Loosen screw (a) of cam follower.
c.
b
Loosen two (2) synchronizing screws (b) located
on throttle levers of top and bottom carburetors.
a
d. Look into throats of carburetors and verify all
throttle shutters are completely closed. Tighten
synchronizing screws.
b
b
a
51045
(BOTH ONE PIECE AND ADJUSTABLE LINK ROD)
1. Recheck throttle shutters and make any necessary adjustments.
2. Hold throttle arm (c) so that idle stop screw (d) is
against stop.
b
3. Place roller (e) of cam follower against throttle cam (f)
and adjust idle stop screw (d) to align raised mark (g)
of throttle cam with center of cam follower roller. Tighten locknut (h).
51045
f
7.
(MODELS WITH 4 ADJUSTABLE LENGTH THROTTLE
LINK ROD)
e
a. Remove four (4) attaching screws from sound box
cover and remove cover.
b. Loosen screw (a) of cam follower.
c.
Loosen four (4) synchronizing screws (b) located
on link rod.
h
g
c
d
51045
2C-2 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Hold throttle arm at idle position. Adjust cam follower
so that a clearance of .005 in.-.040 in.(0.13 mm-1.02
mm) exists between roller (e) of cam follower and
throttle cam (f). Tighten screw (a) securing cam follower.
Timing Adjustments
! CAUTION
Engine may be timed while cranking engine with starter motor. To prevent engine from starting when being
cranked, all spark plugs must be removed.
1. Insert Spark Gap Tool (91-63998A1) into each spark
plug boot and attach alligator clips to good engine
ground.
f
.005 in.
.040 in.
(0.13 mm
1.02 mm)
2. Disconnect remote fuel line from engine.
3. Connect remote control electric harness to engine wiring harness.
e
4. Remove throttle cable barrel from barrel retainer.
IDLE TIMING ADJUSTMENT
1. Connect timing light to No. 1 (TOP) spark plug lead.
! WARNING
While cranking engine, keep clear of propeller as it
may rotate.
a
2. Shift engine to neutral.
51069
5. Hold throttle arm (a) against full throttle stop screw (b).
Adjust full throttle stop screw to allow throttle shutters
to open fully while providing approximately .015 in. (.38
mm) freeplay in throttle linkage to prevent carburetor
throttle shutters from acting as throttle stops at wide
open throttle. Tighten locknut (c) on stop screw (b).
IMPORTANT: To time engine at cranking speed, a fully
charged battery must be used.
3. Hold throttle arm at idle position, crank engine with
starter motor and adjust idle timing screw (a) to align
2 degrees ATDC timing mark of flywheel with timing
pointer. Tighten locknut (b).
NOTE: Timing will be 2° - 6° ATDC after adjusting idle RPM.
2° ATDC
10
0
10
20442
a
b
51045
51045
6. Reinstall sound box cover.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2C-3
MAXIMUM TIMING
1. Hold control arm (a) so that maximum spark advance
screw (b) is against stop. Crank engine with starter motor and adjust maximum spark advance screw to align
the specified BTDC timing mark on flywheel with timing
pointer. Tighten locknut (c).
3. Hold throttle arm at idle position (throttle cable barrel
removed from barrel retainer). Adjust idle timing screw
(a) to attain an engine idle RPM of 650-750 RPM in
“FORWARD” gear. Tighten locknut (b) and turn off engine.
b
a
c
b
a
51045
Throttle Cable Installation
51045
NOTE: All timing adjustments made to engine under cranking speed conditions should be verified with engine running
and adjustments made if necessary. This is due to advance
characteristics of individual ignition systems.
Idle Adjustment
1. With engine is water, connect electrical harness and
fuel line to engine. Start engine and allow to warm up.
1. With end of throttle cable connected to throttle lever,
hold throttle lever against idle stop. Adjust throttle
cable barrel to slip into barrel retainer on cable anchor
bracket with a very light preload of throttle lever against
idle stop. Lock barrel in place.
IMPORTANT: Excessive preload on throttle cable will
cause difficulty when shifting from forward to neutral.
(Re-adjust throttle cable barrel, if necessary.)
2. Check preload on throttle cable by placing a thin piece
of paper between idle stop screw and idle stop. Preload is correct when paper can be removed without
tearing but has some drag on it. Re-adjust throttle
cable barrel, if necessary.
2. Properly adjust carburetor low speed mixture screws.
Initial setting is 1-1/4 turns off seat.
2C-4 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION
2
D
51127
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Page
Table of Contents
Page
Model 45 Jet Electric Start
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 50/60 Electric Start
Wiring Diagram
(Rectifier Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 50/60 Electric Start
Wiring Diagram
(Regulator Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 50/60 Electric Start Tiller Handle
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 55 Manual Start
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 50/60 Power Trim
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 50/60 Manual Start with RED Stator
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 50/60 Electric Start with RED Stator
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2D-0 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
2D-1
2D-2
2D-3
2D-4
Key/Choke Switch Continuity Test
(COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount Remote Control)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-9
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount Remote Control
(Power Trim/Tilt Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-10
COMMANDER Side Mount Remote Control
(Power Tilt Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-11
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount Remote Control
(Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D-12
2D-5
2D-6
2D-7
2D-8
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Model 45 Jet Electric Start
Wiring Diagram
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
1
2
5
3
6
4
18
(+)
(–)
7
13
17
12
16
14
11
8
15
10
3
1 - Stator
2 - Trigger
3 - Switch Box
4 - Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
5 - Starter
6 - Starter Solenoid
7 - Battery
8 - Engine Harness
9 - RPM Limiter
10- Warning Module
11- Temperature Switch
12- Enrichment Valve
13- 20 Ampere Fuse
14- Low Oil Sensor
15- To Power Trim Motor
16- Ignition Coil #3 Cylinder
17- Ignition Coil #2 Cylinder
18- Ignition Coil #1 Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4
5
2
6
1
8
7
53471
9
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2D-1
Model 50/60 Electric Start
Wiring Diagram
a
(RECTIFIER MODELS)
a b c d e f g h i j k l mn o p -
Stator
Trigger
Switch Box
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 1
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 2
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 3
Starter Motor
Starter Solenoid
Rectifier
Fuse Holder (20 Amp Fuse)
Battery
Wiring Harness Connector
Enrichment Valve
Temperature Switch
Low Oil Warning Module
Low Oil Sensor
g
b
i
c
h
d
e
k
f
J
m
p
n
l
o
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
2D-2 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Model 50/60 Electric Start
Wiring Diagram
(REGULATOR MODELS)
a b c d e f g h i j k l mn o p -
Stator
Trigger
Switch Box
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 1
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 2
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 3
Starter Motor
Starter Solenoid
Regulator
Fuse Holder (20 Amp Fuse)
Battery
Wiring Harness Connector
Enrichment Valve
Temperature Switch
Low Oil Warning Module
Low Oil Sensor
a
g
c
b
i
h
d
e
f
J
m
p n
k
l
o
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2D-3
Model 50/60 Electric
Start Tiller Handle
Wiring Diagram b
a
g
c
i
d
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
h
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
(+)
(–)
e
J
k
f
m
p
n
3
4
5
2
l
6
1
8
7
o
a b c d e f g h i j k l mn o p q r s t u v w-
Stator
Trigger
Switch Box
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 1
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 2
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 3
Starter Motor
Starter Solenoid
Regulator
Fuse Holder (20 Amp Fuse)
Battery
Engine Wiring Harness Connector
Enrichment Valve
Temperature Switch
Low Oil Warning Module
Low Oil Sensor
RPM Limiter
Stop Button
Lanyard Stop Switch
Key Switch
Neutral Start Switch
Warning Horn
Tiller Handle Wiring Harness Connector
2D-4 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
5
q
4
3
2
6
w
7
8
r
t
s
v
u
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
1
Model 55 Manual Start
Wiring Diagram
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
-
a
Stator
Trigger
Switch Box
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 1
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 2
Ignition Coil Cylinder No. 3
Temperature Switch
Overheat Warning Module
Warning Horn
Stop Button
Lanyard Stop Switch
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
b
c
d
h
e
f
g
i
J
51126
k
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2D-5
55/60 Manual Start with RED
Stator Wiring Diagram
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
a
Stator
Terminal Block
Adaptor
Ground
Switch Box
RPM Limiter
Audio Horn
Insulate Unused Red Lead and Secure with
Sta-Strap
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
ORN
PNK
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LT
DRK
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
d
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Green
Orange
Pink
Purple
Red
Tan
White
Yellow
Light
Dark
b
e
c
f
h
g
54488
2D-6 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
50/60 Electric Start with RED
Stator Wiring Diagram
a
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
16 Amp Red Stator
Switch Box
Stator Adaptor
Ground Connection
Voltage Regulator
Insulate Unused Red Lead
b
d
c
f
e
(+)
(–)
3
4
5
2
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
ORN
PNK
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LT
DRK
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Green
Orange
Pink
Purple
Red
Tan
White
Yellow
Light
Dark
6
1
8
7
54982
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2D-7
Model 50/60 Power Trim
Wiring Diagram
-
Power Trim
Power Trim Relay
Engine Starter Motor Solenoid
Rectifier
Cowl Mounted Trim Switch
Red (+) Battery Cable
Fuse Holder (20 Amp Fuse)
Engine Wiring Harness Connector
Remote Control Wiring Harness Connector
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
f
b
d
c
g
e
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
h
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
a
i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
51125
2D-8 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Key/Choke Switch Continuity
Test
(COMMANDER 2000 Side
Mount Remote Control)
23894
“OFF”
“RUN”
“START”
PUSH (CHOKE)*
BLK/YEL - BLK
RED - PUR
RED - PUR - YEL/RED
RED - YEL/BLK
*Key switch must be positioned to “RUN” or “START”
and key pushed in to actuate choke, for this continuity
test.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2D-9
COMMANDER 2000 Side
Mount Remote Control
(Power Trim/Tilt Electric Start
with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Ignition/Choke Switch
Emergency Stop Switch
Neutral Start Switch
Tachometer/Accessories Harness Connector
Wiring Harness Connector
Warning Horn
Trim/Tilt Switch
g
f
d
e
a
b
c
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GRAY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
23891
2D-10 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
- Ignition/Choke Switch
- Emergency Stop Switch
- Neutral Start Switch
- Tachometer/Accessories Harness
- Wiring Harness Connector
- Warning Horn
- Trim/Tilt Switch
- Wire Retainer
– Control Handle
- Trim Harness Bushing
- Trim Harness Connector
- Lead to Trim Indicator Gauge
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
d
l
k
c
b
e
a
J
f
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
i
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
h
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
g
COMMANDER Side Mount
Remote Control (Power Tilt
Electric Start with Warning
Horn) Wiring Diagram
24072
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
ELECTRICAL and IGNITION - 2D-11
COMMANDER 2000 Side
Mount Remote Control (Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram
d
e
f
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Ignition/Choke Switch
Emergency Stop Switch
Neutral Start Switch
Tachometer/Accessories Harness Connector
Wiring Harness Connector
Warning Horn
BLK
BLU
BRN
GRY
GRN
PUR
RED
TAN
WHT
YEL
LIT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
c
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREY
GREEN
PURPLE
RED
TAN
WHITE
YELLOW
LIGHT
2D-12 - ELECTRICAL and IGNITION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS
3
A
51046
CARBURETION
Table of Contents
Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-1
Attenuator Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-2
WME Carburetor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4
Reed Valve Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-4
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-5
Carburetor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-6
Carburetion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8
Fuel System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8
Troubleshooting Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-8
Carburetor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Initial Starting Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
idle Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Idle Mixture Screw Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Carburetor Float Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-11
Main (High Speed) Jet Adjustment . . . . . . . . 3A-11
WME Carburetor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-12
Rejetting Carburetors For High Altitude
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-12
Jet Orifice Size/Part Number Chart . . . . . . . 3A-12
Carburetor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-13
Carburetor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-13
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-15
Carburetor Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-15
Carburetor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3A-17
3A-0 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Specifications
Idle RPM
(in “Forward” Gear)
Float Level
Fuel Pump Pressure
(@ W.O.T.)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Special Tools
650-700
Part No.
Description
91-36392
Carburetor Scale
9/16 in. (14.3mm)
4-7 PSI (28-43 kPa)
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-1
Attenuator Plate
14
12
11 8
7
12
10
9
13
11
12
5
4
1
6
3
2
3A-2 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Attenuator Plate
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
4
3
1
4
3
5
2
6
6
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
2
12
AR
13
3
14
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
SOUND ATTENUATOR
SCREW
CAP PLUG
SEAL
SOUND ATTENUATOR PLATE
SCREW
ARM
ROLLER
SCREW
WASHER
TUBING (4-1/4 IN.)
STA-STRAP
GASKET
THROTTLE LINK
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
Drive Tight
100
135.5
Drive Tight
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-3
WME Carburetor Specifications
Carburetor Number Stamped at TOP of Carburetor Mounting Flange
Carburetor Number
Location
Model H.P.
Main Jet
Bowl Vent Jet
WME 43-1
WME 43-2
WME 43-3
Top Carburetor
Center Carburetor
Bottom Carburetor
50
.048
.090
WME 45-1
WME 45-2
WME 45-3
Top Carburetor
Center Carburetor
Bottom Carburetor
60
.062
.090
WME 44-1
WME 44-2
WME 44-3
Top Carburetor
Center Carburetor
Bottom Carburetor
55/60
.060
None
REED VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
Reed Valve Opening (Maximum)
.020 in. (0.5 mm)
.020
3A-4 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Notes:
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-5
Carburetor
2
4
11
10
7
92
9
7
8
6
3
5
15
12
16
13
1
17
18
19
20
14
21
22
25
26
27
23
24
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
92
Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824)
3A-6 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Carburetor
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
1
4
1
4
1
3
2
4
1
5
3
6
3
7
3
8
3
9
3
10
3
11
6
12
3
13
1
14
1
15
6
16
3
17
3
18
3
19
3
20
3
21
3
22
3
23
12
24
1
24
2
25
3
26
3
27
3
27
3
27
3
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
CARBURETOR (TOP)
CARBURETOR (CENTER)
50 - WME-43
CARBURETOR (BOTTOM)
CARBURETOR (TOP)
55/60 SeaPro/Marathon
CARBURETOR (CENTER)
CARBURETOR (BOTTOM)
WME-44
CARBURETOR (TOP)
60 - WME-45
CARBURETOR (CENTER)
BEACHING/PONTOON/BIG FOOT
CARBURETOR (BOTTOM)
FORMULA/MAGNUM III
SCREW–throttle adjustment (UPPER/BOTTOM)
THROTTLE SHAFT (UPPER)
THROTTLE SHAFT (CENTER)
50/60
THROTTLE SHAFT (BOTTOM)
THROTTLE SHAFT (UPPER/BOTTOM)
THROTTLE SHAFT (CENTER)
WME-44
SPRING–throttle return
VENT JET (.090 - 50/60)
IDLE NEEDLE
SPRING–idle needle
GASKET–cover plate
COVER PLATE
SCREW–cover plate
GASKET–flange
LEVER–oil pump (WME43/45 - Bottom)
SCREW–oil pump lever (WME43/45 - Bottom)
SCREW–throttle valve
THROTTLE VALVE
RETAINING RING
FLOAT SHAFT
GASKET–nozzle well
GASKET–fuel bowl
INLET NEEDLE VALVE
FLOAT
SCREW–fuel bowl
FUEL BOWL (UPPER)
FUEL BOWL (CENTER/BOTTOM)
PLUG KIT
SEAL–bowl drain
MAIN FUEL JET (.048 - 50)
MAIN JET (.060-55/60 SeaPro/Marathon/Pontoon)
MAIN FUEL JET (.062 - 60)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
18
2.0
6
0.7
18
2.0
25
3.0
14
14
14
1.5
1.5
1.5
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-7
Carburetion
Troubleshooting Charts
Fuel System Troubleshooting
PROBLEM 1: ENGINE TURNS OVER BUT WILL
NOT START OR STARTS HARD
WHEN COLD
Troubles, that are caused by items 1-thru-5, listed below,
may give the impression that a problem exists in the fuel
system:
1. Spark plugs
2. Ignition spark voltage
3. Cylinder compression
4. Reed valves
5. Ignition timing
Possible Cause
Improper starting procedure
Corrective Action
Check procedure, as outlined in “Operation and
Maintenance Manual.”
Fuel tank empty; improperly mixed fuel; contaminants (water, dirt,
etc.) in fuel.
Check fuel in fuel tank
and replace or add.
Fuel tank air vent closed
or restricted.
Air vent must be open
and free from contaminants.
A pinched or restricted
fuel line.
Dirty or restricted fuel filter
Check, and replace as
needed.
Check, replace or clean.
Enrichener Valve not operating.
Check enrichener system. (Refer to “Enrichener System”
following.)
An inlet needle (in carburetor) that is stuck
open or closed. (A
needle stuck open, will
cause a flooding condition. A needle stuck
closed, will prevent
fuel from entering carburetor.)
Remove, clean, or replace.
Anti-Siphon valve
stricting fuel flow.
Refer to “Checking for
Restricted Fuel Flow
caused by Anti-Siphon
Valves”, following.
re-
See “Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow caused
by Anti-Siphon Valves, page 3A-13.
3A-8 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
PROBLEM: ENGINE FLOODS
PROBLEM 1: ENGINE IDLES ROUGH AND
STALLS
PROBLEM 2: ENGINE RUNS UNEVEN OR
SURGES
PROBLEM 3: ENGINE WILL NOT ACCELERATE
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Dirt or foreign particles
are preventing inlet
needle from seating.
Flush out inlet seat and
clean inlet needle.
Worn inlet needle.
Replace.
Possible Cause
Punctured float.
Replace.
Fuel tank air vent closed
or restricted.
Incorrect float setting.
Reset float.
Check - Air vent must be
open all-the-way and
free from restrictions.
A pinched, cut or restricted fuel line; also
loose fuel line connection.
Check all fuel lines and
replace as needed.
Check and tighten all
fuel line connections.
A dirty or restricted fuel
filter.
Check, replace, or clean
all fuel filters.
Restricted filter in fuel
tank.
Clean by rinsing in clean
lead-free gasoline or
kerosene.
Improperly mixed fuel;
contaminants (water,
dirt, etc,) in fuel.
Check fuel and replace,
if necessary.
An inlet needle (in carburetor) that is either
stuck open or closed.
(A needle, that is stuck
open, will cause a
flooding condition. A
needle, that is stuck
closed, will prevent
fuel from entering carburetor.)
Remove and replace
with new inlet needle.
Incorrect idle mixture adjustment.
Re-adjust.
Damaged fuel pump diaphragm.
Replace.
Carburetor is loose.
Tighten bolts securely.
Chamber cover leaking
air.
Tighten or replace gasket.
Off idle holes plugged.
Blow out with
pressed air.
com-
Main nozzle or idle
nozzle air bleed holes
plugged.
Blow out with
pressed air.
com-
Improper main jet or restricted jet.
Clean or replace with
proper jet (refer to
“Main Jet Chart”).
Damaged reed(s).
Inspect reeds as outlined
in Section 4A.
Replace.
PROBLEM: ENGINE RUNS TOO LEAN
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Carburetor is loose. Air
leaks past mixing
chamber cover.
Tighten bolts securely.
Tighten cover or replace gasket.
Fuel level too low.
Reset float level.
Clogged high speed jet.
Check and clean.
Restricted fuel flow to
carburetor.
Check fuel lines and filter(s) for restricted
flow.
Incorrect high speed jet.
Refer to main jet chart
and replace with proper jet.
Idle mixture set too lean.
Adjust to run richer.
Air leakage into fuel system.
Check fuel line connections, hose clamps,
fuel pump, and fuel
outlet tube (located in
fuel tank) for loose fittings.
Anti-Siphon valve
stricting fuel flow.
re-
Refer to “Checking for restricted
fuel
flow
caused by Anti-Siphon
valves.”
PROBLEM: ENGINE RUNS TOO RICH
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Fuel level too high.
Reset float to correct
level.
Carburetor floods.
See preceding “Engine
Floods”
Idle nozzle air
holes plugged.
Blow out with
pressed air.
Restricted air flow.
Check cowl air inlet and
carburetor for obstructions.
Main Fuel Jet loose.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Retighten Jet.
com-
A crack in the fuel pickup outlet tube (located
in fuel tank).
Corrective Action
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-9
PROBLEM 1: ENGINE IDLES ROUGH AND
STALLS
PROBLEM 2: ENGINE RUNS ENEVEN OR
SURGES
PROBLEM 3: ENGINE WILL NOT ACCELERATE.
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
A crack in the fuel outlet
tube (located in fuel
tank.)
Replace.
Anti-Siphon valve
stricting fuel flow.
Refer to “Checking for
Restricted Fuel Flow
Caused by Anti-Siphon Valves,” following.
re-
PROBLEM : FUEL BLOW-BACK OUT OF CARBURETOR
Possible Cause
Chipped/Broken (reedblock) Reeds
Corrective Action
Replace Reeds.
Any type of anti-siphon device must be located between
the outboard fuel inlet and fuel tank outlet. A method of
checking [if such a device (or bad fuel) is a problem source]
is to operate the outboard with a separate fuel supply which
is know to be good.
If, it is found that the anti-siphon valve is the cause of the
problem, either 1) replace the anti-siphon valve or 2) replace it with a solenoid-operated fuel shutoff valve.
PROBLEM : ROUGH IDLE
If related to reed-block,
indicates
excessive
preload in reeds.
CHECKING FOR RESTRICTED FUEL FLOW CAUSED
BY ANTI-SIPHON VALVES
While anti-siphon valves are helpful from a safety standpoint, they clog, they may be too small, or they may have
too heavy a spring. The pressure drop across these valves
can, create operational problems and/or powerhead damage by restricting fuel. Some symptoms of restricted (lean)
fuel flow, are:
1 - Loss of fuel pump pressure
2 - Loss of power
3 - High speed surging
4 - Preignition/detonation (piston dome erosion)
5 - Outboard cuts out or hesitates upon acceleration
6 - Outboard runs rough
7 - Outboard quits and cannot be restarted
8 - Outboard will not start
9 - Vapor lock
Replace Reeds.
PROBLEM : CAN’T REDUCE ENGINE RPM TO
SLOW IDLE
Multiple chipped reeds
3A-10 - FUEL SYSTEMS
Replace Reeds.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Carburetor Adjustments
INITIAL STARTING ADJUSTMENT
Turn idle mixture screw in (clockwise) until it seats LIGHTLY--then back-off (each carburetor) 1-1/4 turns.
IDLE SEED ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjust engine idle RPM as outlined in Section 2C
“Timing/Synchronizing/Adjusting.”
CARBURETOR FLOAT ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove carburetor as outlined in “Carburetor Removal,” following.
2. Remove fuel bowl and gasket and check float level using a carburetor scale.
3. If necessary, adjust float level by bending metal tab (on
float) to which inlet needle is clipped.
9/16″ (14.3mm)
IDLE MIXTURE SCREW ADJUSTMENT
1. Start engine and allow to warm-up. Throttle back engine to idle for about one minute.
a
b
2. With engine running at idle speed in “Forward” gear -turn idle mixture screw IN (clockwise) until engine
starts to “bog” down and misfire. Back out 1/4 turn or
more.
a
51046
a - Metal Tab
b - Inlet Needle
MAIN (HIGH SPEED) JET ADJUSTMENT
The carburetor has a fixed high speed jet. Extreme
changes in weather (temperature and humidity) and/or elevation may result in a too lean or rich fuel mixture at wideopen-throttle, which may require a change in the high
speed jet. A smaller size main jet will lean the fuel mixture,
and a larger size jet will enrich the fuel mixture.
d
c
50555
a - Idle Mixture Screw (on each carburetor)
3. Check for too lean mixture on acceleration.
4. DO NOT adjust leaner than necessary to attain reasonably smooth idling. When in doubt, stay on the
slightly rich side of the adjustment.
a
b
a
b
c
d
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
-
51118
High Speed Jet
Bowl Drain Plug
Bowl Vent Jet
Idle Mixture Screw
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-11
WME Carburetor
Specifications
Carburetor Number Stamped at TOP of carburetor mounting flange.
Carburetor Number
Model
H.P.
50
.052
.092
WME-26
50
.048
.090
WME-27
55
.060
None
WME-22 A or B
60
.070
.090
WME-35
60
.068
None
WME-28
60
.062
.090
WME-43
50
.048
.090
WME-44
55/60
.060
None
WME-45
45/60
.062
.090
HIGH ALTITUDE JET CHART
High Speed Jet Size
2500’-5000’
(750-1500m)
.002” smaller (than standard jet)
5000’-7500’
(1500-2250m)
.004” smaller (than standard jet)
7500’ and Up
(2250m and Up)
.006” smaller (than standard jet)
3A-12 - FUEL SYSTEMS
Bowl Vent Jet
WME-23
REJETTING CARBURETORS FOR HIGH ALTITUDE
OPERATION
The carburetor jet installed at the manufacturer is for engine operation at sea level through an elevation of 2500
feet (762m) above sea level. If the engine is to be operated
at an altitude higher than 2500 feet above sea level, it will
be necessary to rejet (remove the carburetor jets and install jets with a different orifice size) the carburetors. Each
time the engine is to be operated at a different elevation
from the previous time, refer to the “Carburetor Jet Charts”
following, and rejet the carburetors for elevation engine will
be operated at.
Engine Operation
Elevation
(Above Sea Level)
Main Jet
*Standard Jets listed are for operation of engine from 0 ft. – 2500 ft.
(0–762 M) of elevation.
JET ORIFICE SIZE/PART NUMBER CHART
NOTE: Thread size for jets is 10-32.
JET ORIFICE SIZE/PART NUMBER CHART
Jet
Orifice
Size
(inch)
Part
Number
.040
.042
.044
.046
.048
.050
.052
.054
.056
.076
.078
.080
.082
.084
.086
.088
.090
.092
19266040
1399-5315
1395-7394
1399-5317
1395-6246
1395-6028
1395-6359
1399-5225
1399-5213
1399-3796
1395-6680
1395-6201
1399-3518
1399-3517
1395-5815
1395-6202
1395-6247
1395-5733
Jet
Orifice
Size
(inch)
Part
Number
.058
.060
.062
.064
.066
.068
.070
.072
.074
.094
.096
.098
1395-7831
1395-6487
1399-4217
1399-4216
1399-4215
1395-6029
1395-6030
1395-6207
1399-3794
1395-8423
1399-6249
1395-7335
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Carburetor Removal
Carburetor Disassembly
• Remove four screws and lift off attenuator.
• Remove fuel bowl.
• Remove six screws and remove carburetors.
Disconnect linkages and fuel and primer lines.
a
a
51119
b
a - Fuel Bowl
• Remove float pin and remove float.
• Remove fuel bowl gasket.
b
50527
a - Attenuator Screw (4)
b - Carburetor Screw (6)
a
c
51115
a - Float Pin
b - Float
c - Gasket
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-13
• Remove fuel inlet needle.
• Remove main jet plug and gasket.
• Remove stem gasket.
• Remove main jet.
a
b
b
a
51116
51116
a - Fuel Inlet Needle
b - Stem Gasket
a - Main Jet Plug and Gasket
b - Main Jet
• Remove mixing chamber cover and gasket.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disassemble carburetor beyond this point for cleaning. Examine throttle shaft for wear
and inspect for damaged throttle shutter plate.
• Remove idle mixture screw.
• Remove bowl vent jet
If removal of throttle shaft and/or throttle shutter plate is
necessary, remove 2 screws, which secure throttle shutter
plate to throttle shaft. Remove retaining clip from end of
throttle shaft, then pull shaft out of carburetor.
a
b
a
c
c
b
51116
a - Mixing Chamber Cover and Gasket
b - Idle Mixture Screw
c - Bowl Vent Jet
3A-14 - FUEL SYSTEMS
51117
a - Throttle Shaft
b - Screw (2)
c - Throttle Shaft Spring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
• Spring tension on stud.
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Carefully inspect carburetor body and fuel bowl for
cracks, stripped threads, plugged or restricted passages and passage plugs that show signs of leakage.
c
2. Thoroughly clean all carburetor parts with a mild cleaning solution (that will not damage rubber or plastic) to
remove dirt, and varnish that may have accumulated.
3. After washing parts, blow parts dry with compressed
air. Be sure to blow air thru all passages, orifices and
nozzles.
4. Check float hinge in the float pin area for wear and
check float for leaks. Replace parts as necessary.
d
5. Examine inlet needle for wear. If worn, replace with
new inlet needle.
51259
c - Spring
d - Stud
Carburetor Reassembly
• If removed, install throttle shaft, throttle shutter plate, 2
screws (use Loctite Grade ‘A’), and throttle shaft spring
as shown. Install retaining clip on other end of shaft.
• Install mixing chamber cover and gasket as shown.
• Install idle mixture screw.
• Install bowl vent jet
d
a
a
b
d
c
c
b
51117
a - Throttle Shaft
b - Screws (2) (Torque 6 lb. in. (0.7 N·m)
c - Throttle Shaft Spring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
51116
a
b
c
d
-
Mixing Chamber Cover and Gasket
Idle Mixture Screw
Bowl Vent Jet
Screw (2) Torque 18 lb. in. (2.1 N·m)
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-15
• Install main jet.
• Attach Spring Clip on Inlet Needle to metal float tab and
place needle into its seat.
• Install main jet plug and gasket.
a
a
b
51116
b
a - Main Jet [Torque 14 lb. in (1.6 N·m)]
b - Main Jet Plug and Gasket [Torque 22 lb. in. (2.5 N·m)]
51115
• Install stem gasket.
a - Spring Clip
b - Float Tab
• Install fuel bowl gasket.
• Install float into carburetor with float pin.
a
b
• Adjust float following “Carburetor Float Adjustment,”
Page 3A-13.
a
51119
a - Stem Gasket
b - Fuel Bowl Gasket
NOTE: If Spring Clip on Inlet Needle was removed, or if
needle was replaced, be sure spring clip is reattached.
b
51115
a - Float
b - Float Pin
3A-16 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
• Install float bowl.
Carburetor Installation
• Install carburetors, attenuator plate, connect linkages,
and fuel and primer lines.
• Install sound attenuator.
c
b
a
b
b
51116
a - Fuel Bowl
b - Screw (4) Torque 18 lb in. (2.1 N·m)
a
50527
a - Attenuator Brackets (2)
b - Carburetor Screw (6) Torque 100 lb. in. (11.5 N·m)
c - Attenuator Screw (4)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3A-17
FUEL SYSTEMS
3
B
FUEL PUMP
Table of Contents
Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-1
Fuel Pump (50/60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-2
Fuel Pump (55/60 Seapro/Marathon) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-4
Fuel Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6
Fuel Pump Description/Operation . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6
Checking for Restricted Fuel Flow
Caused by Anti-siphon Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-6
Troubleshooting Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-7
Fuel Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-8
Fuel Pump Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-8
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-8
Fuel Pump Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-9
Check Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-9
Fuel Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-9
Fuel Pump Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10
Torque Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-10
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11
Fuel Tank Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-11
Fuel Line and Primer Bulb Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-12
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3B-13
3B-0 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Specifications
Fuel Pump Pressure
(@ W.O.T.)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4-7 PSI (28-43 kPa)
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-1
Fuel Pump (50/60)
28
A
20
21
29
19
21
30
29
21
21
18
29
33
7
6
21
1 3
31
32
21
5
11
4 5
12
4
2
3
19
14
9
17
21
10
13
15
8
22
24
B
21
C
16
22
22
23
26
21
25
21
27
15
21
22
21
19
Perfect Seal (92-34227-1)
A – To Carburetor
B – To Crankcase
C – To Oil Pump
3B-2 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Fuel Pump (50/60)
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
2
16
2
16
2
17
1
18
1
19
1
20
1
21
AR
22
3
23
1
24
1
25
1
26
1
27
1
28
1
29
3
30
1
31
1
32
1
33
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
DIAPHRAGM KIT
RUBBER CHECK VALVE
CHECK VALVE
RETAINER
SPRING
CAP
SPRING
CAP
DIAPHRAGM
GASKET
GASKET–boost
GASKET–pulse
PLATE
FITTING
SCREW–fuel pump
SCREW–fuel pump to crankcase
BASE
HOSE
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LINE
STA-STRAP
HOSE (1-1/4″)(1-1/4″)(14-1/4″)
TEE
CHECK VALVE
FUEL CONNECTOR
SCREW
HOSE (4-1/4″)
SOLENOID VALVE
HOSE (1-3/4″)(3-1/4″)(11-1/2″)
TEE FITTING
HOSE (16″)
CLAMP
SCREW
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
55
55
6.0
6.0
80
9.0
100
135.5
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-3
Fuel Pump (55/60 Seapro/Marathon)
26
27
A
26
20
26
7
6
3 4
25
5
26
1
11
5
12
2
4 3
14
9
19
17
10
19
8
15
13
18
B
16
19
19
15
29
21
19
19
28
24
19
23
22
19
Perfect Seal (92-34227-1)
A – To Carburetor
B – To Crankcase
3B-4 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Fuel Pump (55/60 Seapro/Marathon)
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
2
4
2
5
2
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
2
16
2
16
2
17
1
18
2
19
AR
20
1
21
1
22
1
23
1
24
1
25
1
26
4
27
1
28
1
29
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
DIAPHRAGM KIT
RUBBER CHECK VALVE
CHECK VALVE
RETAINER
SPRING
CAP
SPRING
CAP
DIAPHRAGM
GASKET
GASKET–boost
GASKET–pulse
PLATE
FITTING
SCREW–fuel pump
SCREW–fuel pump to crankcase
BASE
HOSE (10″)(14-1/4″)
STA-STRAP
HOSE
HOSE (4-1/4″)
FUEL FILTER
BRACKET
NUT
TEE FITTING
HOSE (1-1/2″)(5-1/2″)(9-1/2″)(9-1/2″)
PRIMER BULB
FUEL CONNECTOR
SCREW
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
55
55
N·m
6.0
6.0
Drive Tight
80
9.0
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-5
! WARNING
FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD. Observe fire prevention rules, particularly NO SMOKING. Before servicing
any part of the fuel system, disconnect electrical system at the battery. Drain the fuel system completely.
Use an approved container to collect and store fuel.
Wipe up any spillage immediately. Materials used to
contain spillage must be disposed of in an approved
receptacle. Any fuel system service must be performed in a well ventilated area.
FUEL LEAKAGE FROM ANY PART OF THE FUEL SYSTEM CAN BE A FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD
WHICH CAN CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR
DEATH. Careful periodic inspection of the entire fuel
system is mandatory, particularly after engine storage.
All fuel components, including fuel tanks, whether
plastic, metal, or fiberglass, fuel lines, primer bulbs,
fittings, swelling, and must be inspected for corrosion.
Any sign of leakage or deterioration necessitates replacement before further engine operation.
Fuel Pumps
General Information
FUEL PUMP DESCRIPTION/OPERATION
The fuel pump is a crankcase-pressure-operated, diaphragm-type pump. Crankcase pulsating pressure is
transferred by way of a passage (hole) from the crankcase
to the fuel pump.
CHECKING FOR RESTRICTED FUEL FLOW CAUSED
BY ANTI-SIPHON VALVES
While anti-siphon valves are helpful from a safety standpoint, they clog, they may be too small, or they may have
too heavy a spring. The pressure drop occures these
valves can create operational problems and/or powerhead
damage by restricting flow of fuel. Some symptoms of restricted (lean) fuel flow, are:
1 - Loss of fuel pump pressure
2 - Loss of power
3 - High speed surging
4 - Preignition/detonation (piston dome erosion)
5 - Outboard hesitates upon acceleration
6 - Outboard runs rough
7 - Outboard quits and cannot be restarted
8 - Outboard will not start
9 - Vapor lock
Any type of anti-siphon device must be located between
the outboard fuel inlet and fuel tank outlet. A method of
checking [if such a device (or bad fuel) is a problem source]
is to operate the outboard with a separate fuel supply which
is known to be good.
If it is found that the anti-siphon valve is the cause of the
problem, either 1) replace the anti-siphon valve, or 2) replace it with a solenoid-operated fuel shutoff valve.
Testing
Install clear fuel hose(s) between fuel pump and carburetor(s). Run engine, and inspect hose(s) for air bubbles. If
air bubbles are found, see “Air Bubbles in Fuel Line” . If air
bubbles are NOT found, see “Lack of Fuel Pump Pressure”.
When the piston travels upward, a vacuum is created in the
crankcase. This vacuum pulls in the fuel pump diaphragm,
the inlet check valve (in fuel pump) is opened and, and fuel
is drawn into fuel pump.
Downward motion of the piston forces out the fuel pump diaphragm, closes the inlet check valve (to keep fuel from returning to fuel tank) and opens the outlet check valve, forcing fuel to the carburetors.
3B-6 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting Fuel Pump
PROBLEM: AIR BUBBLES IN FUEL LINE
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Low fuel in fuel tank.
Fill tank
Loose fuel line connection
Check and tighten
connections.
Fuel pump fitting loose.
Tighten fitting.
A hole or cut in fuel line.
Check condition of fuel
lines and replace any
found bad.
PROBLEM: LACK of FUEL PUMP PRESSURE
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
An anti-siphon valve
Read “Checking for
Restricted Fuel Flow
Caused by Anti-Siphon
Valves” preceding.
Air in fuel line
“Air Bubbles in Fuel Line,”
preceding.
A dirty or clogged fuel filter Clean or replace filter.
The fuel pickup in fuel tank Clean or replace pickup.
clogged or dirty.
Fuel pump anchor
screw(s) loose.
Tighten all screws
Worn out fuel pump
diaphragm.
Rebuild pump.
Fuel pump gasket(s)
worn out.
Rebuild fuel pump.
Defective (hole or crack)
check valve(s) in fuel
pump (unlikely).
Rebuild pump.
Broken check valve
retainer.
Rebuild pump.
Pulse hole plugged.
Remove pump and clean
out hole.
Hole in pulse hose.
Replace pulse hose
Loose pulse hose.
Tighten connection.
Boost diaphragm gasket
distorted or out of place.
Check seal between mating surfaces where
“rib” divides pulse chamber and gasket must align
with rib; check for distorted gasket. Align or replace gasket if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Align diaphragm aligning tabs with fuel
pump aligning tabs during reassembly.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-7
Fuel Pump Removal
Fuel Pump Disassembly
1. Remove oil tank from outboard. Refer to Section 8A
“Oil Injection System.”
1. Remove bolts (a) and chamber plate (b).
2. Remove fuel “inlet” hose, (a) “outlet” hose, (b) and
pulse hose (d).
a
b
3. Remove two bolts (f) securing fuel pump to powerhead.
f
e
b
d
a
e
a
e
e
a
e
51267
2. Disassemble fuel pump as shown in “Fuel Pump Exploded View.”
c
e
Cleaning and Inspection
f
1. Clean fuel pump housing, chamber plate and pump
base, then dry with compressed air.
2. Look at spring for signs of bad coils or other damage.
51267
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Inlet Fuel Hose
Outlet Fuel Hose
Oil Injection hose - From Oil Tank
Pulse Hose - From Crankcase
Sta-Strap (6)
Bolts (2)
3. Check pump body, chamber plate and pump base, for
cracks or rough gasket surfaces.
4. Check hoses for looseness or signs of leakage.
5. Look at check valve discs for cracks, tears, or other
damage.
4. Remove gasket from backside and replace gasket as
necessary -- check gasket in port area.
6. Repair of fuel pump is limited to the replacement of
those bad parts found during inspection.
b
a
51267
a - Gasket
b - Port Area
3B-8 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Fuel Pump Reassembly
Check Valve Assembly
a
1. Insert retainer (a) thru plastic disc (b) and rubber check
valve (c).
b
b
23601
a
a
c
b
23601
2. Install check valves and retainers into fuel pump body.
23610
Fuel Pump Assembly
1. Assemble remaining components as shown in “Fuel
Pump Exploded View”.
2. Install bolts (a) and torque to 40 lb. in. (4.5 N·m).
a
a
51267
23601
3. With retainer installed in pump body, break retainer
rod (a) from retainer (b) by bending sideways.
4. Reinstall rod (a) into retainer cap (b) and, use a small
hammer or hammer and punch to tap rod down into retainer until flush with top of retainer.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-9
Fuel Pump Exploded View
IMPORTANT: Align all gasket and diaphragm aligning
tabs with fuel pump aligning tabs during reassembly.
NOTE: In fuel pump reassembly, remember that respective diaphragms go against the mating surfaces of the fuel
pump body, and respective gaskets are between the diaphragms and end caps. Gaskets should always be replaced on fuel pump during reassembly.
1234567891011 1213141516-
Fuel Pump Body
Rubber Disc (2)
Plastic Check Valve Disk (2)
Retainer (2)
Spring
Cap
Diaphragm
Boost Gasket
Spring
Cap
Chamber Plate
Diaphragm
Pulse Gasket
Fuel Pump Base
Gasket
Bolt 40mm (2)
Bolt 50mm (2)
17- Pipe Plug
18- Fitting 90°
Torque Specifications
a 40 lb. in. (4.5 N·m)
50569
NOTE: Gaskets, items 8 and 13 were not used on early
production units, however they should be installed
when rebuilding a fuel pump.
3B-10 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Components
Maintenance
13
The inside of the fuel tank should be cleaned once each
season. Dirt or water may have entered the fuel tank during
refilling. Clean the tank by flushing with clean, lead-free
gasoline or kerosene.
12
4
6
5
If a fuel restriction problem is encountered, the fuel filter on
end of outlet tube may be obstructed. Remove cover and
inspect filter for varnish, dirt or deposits. Clean filter by rinsing in clean, lead-free gasoline or kerosene.
7
8
10
1
c
b
9
11
2
3
a
d
51046
a
b
c
d
-
Fuel Tank Filter
Pick-Up Tube
Cover
Gasket
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
REF.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DESCRIPTION
QUAN.
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY (PLASTIC-6.6 GAL.)
FILLER CAP
GASKET, filler cap
PICK-UP BODY ASSEMBLY
ADAPTOR
WINDOW ASSEMBLY
GASKET, pick-up body
FUEL GAUGE ASSEMBLY
SCREW, fuel gauge
HOSE
FILTER
SCREW, pick-up body
WASHER, pick-up body screw
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
6
6
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-11
Fuel Line and Primer Bulb
Assembly
3
8
6
10
5
9
11
2
14
13
12
7
5
9
4
6
1
REF.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3B-12 - FUEL SYSTEMS
DESCRIPTION
FUEL LINE ASSEMBLY
PRIMER BULB ASSEMBLY
CHECK VALVE, inlet
FITTING, outlet
CLAMP, primer bulb to check valve (LARGE)
CLAMP, fuel line to check valve (SMALL)
CONNECTOR, fuel tank (OUTLET)
CONNECTOR, engine (INLET)
CLAMP, fuel line to connector
BAYONET BODY ASS’Y
(FUEL TANK END)
STEM, bayonet body
“O” RING, bayonet body stem
SPRING, bayonet body stem
WASHER, CUPPED - body spring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Maintenance
Periodically check fuel line and primer bulb for cracks,
breaks, restrictions or chafing. Check all fuel line connections for tightness. All fuel line connections must be
clamped securely.
2. To install fuel line clamps, grip hose clamp with pliers
and push down on hook with screwdriver until hooks interlock.
Installing Fuel Line Clamps
Primer bulb assembly has 2 check valves: Fuel inlet (toward tank) and a fuel outlet (toward engine).
The fuel inlet valve allows fuel to fill primer bulb but closes
to prevent fuel from returning to tank when bulb is
squeezed. The fuel outlet valve opens when primer bulb is
squeezed to allow fuel flow to carburetor, but closes as bulb
is released to prevent fuel from returning to primer bulb.
FUEL LINE CLAMP REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. To remove fuel line clamps, grip clamp with pliers and
bend over, lapping hook backward.
Removing Fuel Line Clamps
51115
51115
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3B-13
FUEL SYSTEMS
3
C
ENRICHMENT
Table of Contents
Page
Enrichener System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-1
Enrichener Valve Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3C-2
3C-0 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Enrichener System
The enrichener system provides the engine with extra fuel
charge for ease of starting cold engine. The system consists of an electrically operated enrichener valve which is
connected by a hose to the intake manifold.
Fuel is gravity fed to the valve from the float bowl of the top
carburetor via a hose. When the ignition key is turned to the
“on” position and pushed in (and held in) current is sent to
the valve causing it to open, which allows fuel to pass thru.
The fuel passes thru a hose and is supplied to the engine
via fitting located in the intake manifold of the middle carburetor. When the key (or choke button) is released, the valve
will return to the closed position. The valve can be operated
manually by pressing and holding button located at bottom
of valve.
Connect to Fitting on Oil Pump Base
Connect to Fitting
on bowl of TOP
carburetor
51223
Enrichener Valve Manual Operation Button
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3C-1
IMPORTANT: Use of enrichener if engine is warm
could result in engine flooding
ENRICHENER VALVE TEST
Push key (or choke button) in.
Valve should click
Click
No Click
Check for battery voltage to YELLOW/BLACK wire at terminal
block on engine when key (or choke button) is pushed in.
Squeeze primer bulb until bulb is firm. Remove lower hose from fitting on enrichener valve. Place a container under valve, then push
key (or choke button). Check for fuel flow from fitting.
Battery Voltage Indicated
Check for loose or corroded connection between YELLOW/BLACK
wire and black wire (under same screw at terminal block).
Check that other BLACK wire at terminal block is properly
grounded.
No Voltage Indicated
Repair connections(s) as necessary, then push key (or choke button) in. If enrichener valve DOES NOT click, replace valve.
Check for open in YELLOW/BLACK wire between
key switch (or choke button) and terminal block.
Fuel Flow from Fitting
Valve is O.K. Check hoses and fittings from valve to carburetors for
leaks or obstructions.
No Fuel Flow from Fitting
Remove upper hose from fitting on enrichener valve. If fuel flows
from hose, replace valve. If not, check hose and carburetor fittings for
leaks or obstructions.
3C-2 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS
3
D
51203
OIL INJECTION
Table of Contents
Page
Operation of the Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1
Oil Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-1
Oil Injection Flow System (Fixed Ratio Oil
Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-2
Pump Drive Assembly (Fixed Ratio Oil
Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-3
Pump Drive System (Fixed Ratio Oil Pump) . . . . 3D-3
Oil Pump to Powerhead Assembly (Fixed
Ratio Oil Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-4
Oil Injection Flow System (Variable Ratio
Oil Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-5
Pump Drive Assembly (Variable Ratio Oil
Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Pump Drive System (Variable Ratio Oil
Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-6
Oil Pump to Powerhead Assembly (Variable
Ratio Oil Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-7
Set Up Instructions for Oil
Injection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-9
Carburetor/Oil Pump Synchronization
(Variable Ratio Oil Pump) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-8
Filling Oil Injection System with Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-8
Bleeding Air From Oil Injection
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-9
Bleeding Air From Oil Pump Inlet Hose . . . . . 3D-9
Bleeding Air From Oil Pump Outlet Hose . . . 3D-9
3D-0 - FUEL SYSTEMS
Page
Outboard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-10
Check Operation of the Oil Injection
System (Engine Running) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-10
Required Side Mount Remote Control or
Ignition Key Switch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-10
Oil Injection System
Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-11
Troubleshooting the Oil Injection System . . . . . 3D-11
Installing Drive Gear (For Oil Injection
Pump) On to Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-12
Oil Warning Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-12
Removal/Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-12
Engine Mounted Oil Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D-14
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Operation of the Injection
System
2. Oil Injection Pump
The crankshaft driven oil pump is a constant ratio oil
pump which provides an oil fuel mixture.
The oil injection system delivers a oil mixture thru a constant ratio oil pump.
3. Check Valve Vent
Provides air to oil reservoir for proper venting and also
prevents oil leaks when outboard is tilted forward.
The engine mounted oil reservoir holds 3 qts. (2.8 Liters)
which will provide 10.5 hours of running time at wide open
throttle.
A low oil warning horn will be activated when 14.5 fl. oz.
(435 ml) of oil remains in the reservoir. This will provide approximately 1.5 hours of wide open throttle running before
oil is depleted.
The crankshaft driven oil pump injects oil into the fuel before the fuel pump.
Oil Injection System
1. Oil Reservoir
The oil reservoir gravity feeds oil to the oil pump. The
reservoir contains a low oil sensor which activates a
warning horn when 14.5 fl. oz. (435 ml) of oil remains
in the reservoir.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. 2 PSI Check Valve
This valve prevents gasoline from being forced into oil
line.
5. Low Oil Sensor
When oil level in reservoir drops to approximately 14.5
fl. oz. (435 ml), the sensor will signal warning module
to activate warning horn.
6. Warning Module
When ignition key is initially turned on, the warning
module will briefly provide a self test of its engine overheat warning system - a brief continuous BEEP tone,
followed by a self test of its low oil warning system - a
brief intermittent BEEP-BEEP tone.
If the oil in the reservoir drops to less than 14.5 fl. oz. (435
ml), the low oil sensor in the reservoir will signal the warning module to activate the warning horn. If the powerhead
temperature should exceed 300° F (65° C), the overheat
temperature sensor in the water jacket cover will signal the
warning module to activate the warning horn.
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-1
Oil Injection Flow System (Fixed Ratio Oil Pump)
Warning Module
Fill Cap
Fuel Filter
Vent
Carburetor
Oil
Level
Sight
Gauge
Fuel Pump
2 PSI
Check
Valve
Fuel Line Connector
Oil Pump
51202
3D-2 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Pump Drive Assembly (Fixed Ratio
Oil Pump)
Pump Drive System (Fixed Ratio Oil
Pump)
a
b
b
a
e
c
d
c
51203
d
51203
a
b
c
d
-
Bleed Screw
Oil Outlet
Oil Pump
Oil Inlet
a
b
c
d
e
-
O-Rings
Driven Gear
Drive Gear
Crankshaft
Oil Pump
a
e
b
d
c
51203
a
b
c
d
e
-
Oil Pump
Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to Shaft
Driven Gear
Bushings
O-Rings
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-3
Oil Pump to Powerhead Assembly
(Fixed Ratio Oil Pump)
95
95
7
6
51203
5
a
1
4
3
2
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m)
Bolt
Oil Pump
O-Rings
Bushing
Bearing
Bushing
Driven Gear
3D-4 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Oil Injection Flow System (Variable Ratio Oil Pump)
c
a
b
d
e
f
k
g
j
h
52049
i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
-
Fill Cap
Vent
Warning Module
Fuel Filter
Carburetors
Fuel Pump
2 psi Check Valve
Oil Pump
Fuel Line Connector
Low Oil Sensor
Oil Level Sight Gauge
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-5
Pump Drive Assembly (Variable Ratio
Oil Pump)
Pump Drive System (Variable Ratio
Oil Pump)
a
b
a
d
b
e
d
c
c
52044
52046
a
b
c
d
-
Oil Outlet
Oil Pump
Oil Inlet
Bleed Screw
a
b
c
d
e
-
O–Rings
Driven Gear
Drive Gear
Crankshaft
Oil Pump
a
e
d
b
c
52044
a
b
c
d
e
-
Oil Pump
Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon to Shaft
Driven Gear
Bushings
O-Rings
3D-6 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Oil Pump to Powerhead Assembly
(Variable Ratio Oil Pump)
95
95
7
6
52046
5
a
1
4
3
2
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-
60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m)
Bolt
Oil Pump
O-Rings
Bushing
Bearing
Bushing
Driven Gear
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-7
Filling Oil Injection System with Oil
Set Up Instructions for Oil
Injection System
! CAUTION
During break-in, engine must be run on a 25:1 gasoline/oil ratio (50:1 mixed oil/fuel ratio in fuel tank plus
50:1 ratio from oil pump) for the first 15 gallons of fuel.
Refer to engine break-in procedure in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
Quicksilver 2-Cycle Outboard Oil is recommended for this
oil injection system. In an emergency, whin Quicksilver oil
is not available, substitute a high quality 2-cycle outboard
oil that meets BIA ratings TC-W and TC-WII, shown on oil
container. BIA ratings, TC-W and TC-WII are the Boating
Industry Association’s designation for approved 2-Cycle
water-cooled outboard oils.
! CAUTION
If using an electric fuel pump, fuel pressure must not
exceed 4 psi (27.4 kPa). If necessary, install a pressure
regulator between electrical fuel pump and engine. Set
at 4 psi maximum.
Carburetor/Oil Pump Synchronization
(Variable Ratio Oil Pump)
While holding throttle arm at idle position, adjust length of
link rod so that stamped mark of oil pump body aligns with
stamped mark of oil pump lever, and lever is in closed position.
a
c
b
52047
a - Mark on Body
b - Mark on Lever
c - Link Rod
3D-8 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Bleeding Air From Oil Injection
System
Outboard Operation
1. Check oil level in oil tank.
2. A 50:1 gasoline/oil mixture must be used during breakin or after extended storage.
! CAUTION
If air exists in either oil pump hose (inlet or outlet), the
air MUST BE bled from hose(s) or engine damage may
occur.
BLEEDING AIR FROM OIL PUMP INLET HOSE
With engine not running, place a shop towel below oil
pump. Loosen bleed screw three to four turns and allow air
bubbles to exit inlet hose. Torque bleed screw to 25 lb. in.
(3.0 N·m). This procedure also allows oil pump to fill with
oil.
3. Check warning horn operation.
Turning the key from the “off” to “on” position (engine not
running) will momentarily trigger the warning horn. This
alerts you the warning system is functional. If the warning
horn does not sound or stays on when the key is in the “on”
position, refer to oil injection system troubleshooting chart
following to correct the problem.
The oil injection warning sound is an intermittent “beep”,
“beep”, “beep”, etc. The overheat warning sound is a continuous “beep” .
BLEEDING AIR FROM OIL PUMP OUTLET HOSE
1. Purge air from outlet hose by running engine (on 50:1
gasoline/oil mixture in fuel tank) at idle speed until no
air bubbles are present in outlet hose.
Check Operation of the Oil Injection
System (Engine Running)
1. Operate engine following the break-in procedure outlined in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Fixed Ratio Oil Pump
If warning horn should sound and intermittent “beep”,
“beep”, “beep” during operation, a problem may be occurring in the oil injection system. Refer to troubleshooting following.
51204
Variable Ratio Oil Pump
c
a
b
52047
a - Bleed Screw
b - Inlet Hose
c - Outlet Hose
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-9
Required Side Mount Remote Control
or Ignition Key Switch Assembly
Oil Injection System
Troubleshooting Chart
Boats Equipped with a Side Mount Remote Control
A Quicksilver Commander Series Side Mount Remote
Control equipped with a warning horn, must be used with
this outboard. This warning horn is necessary for both the
oil injection warning system and the engine overheat warning system.
Boats Equipped with Panel or Console Mount Remote
Controls
Troubleshooting the Oil Injection
System
If a problem occurs with the oil injection system and the
warning horn sounds in a intermittent manner, stop engine
and check if problem is caused by (1) low oil Level, or (2)
a faulty warning sensor of module.
A Quicksilver Ignition Key/Choke Assembly equipped with
a warning horn is necessary for both the oil injection warning system and the engine overheat warning system.
Troubleshooting Chart
Problem: Warning Horn Does Not Sound When Ignition Key is Turned to “ON” Position.
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Horn malfunction or open (tan/blue) wire between horn and
engine.
Disconnect tan/blue warning module lead (engine overheat sensor) located in cylinder head. Use a jumper wire
to ground tan/blue warning module lead to engine ground.
Warning horn should sound. If not, check tan/blue wiring
between engine and warning horn for open circuit. Check
horn.
Faulty Warning Module
Check if all warning module leads are connected
Using incorrect side mount remote control or ignition/
choke assembly.
See info above
Problem: Warning Horn Stays On When Ignition Key is Turned to “ON” Position (Engine Cold).
Possible Cause
Corrective Action
Faulty Engine overheat sensor.
If warning horn sounds a continuous “beep”, the engine
overheat sensor may be faulty. Disconnect tan/blue overheat sensor lead at bullet connection. Turn ignition key to
“ON” position. If horn stops sounding, the engine overheat
sensor is faulty.
Faulty Warning Module
Check connections-replace module.
Problem: Warning Horn Sounds (Intermittent Beep) When Engine is Running and Oil Tank is Full.
Possible Cause
Defective low oil sensor (located in bottom of oil tank).
Corrective Action
Disconnect both low oil sensor leads (blue) at bullet connections. Connect an ohmmeter between sensor leads.
There should be no continuity through sensor. If continuity
exists, sensor is faulty
If all of the checks are positive, the Warning Module is faulty. Replace Module and re-test.
3D-10 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
1. Check oil level in oil tank. If oil level is approximately
14.5 fl. oz. (435 ml) or less, the problem is low oil level.
Add oil to oil tank.
NOTE: There is a safety reserve of oil left in the oil tank after the low oil warning is sounded that allows enough oil for
approximately 1.5 hours of full throttle operation.
2. If there is more than approximately 14.5 fl. oz. (435 ml)
of oil remaining in tank, then the problem may be a
faulty low oil warning sensor or a faulty warning module. Refer to troubleshooting chart following.
Installing Drive Gear (For Oil
Injection Pump) Onto
Crankshaft
1. Refer to Section 4A (Powerhead) for proper disassembly of components.
2. Inspect gear teeth for damage. Replace gear if any of
these problems exist:
*Excessive Wear
*Cracks in hub or rear (Do Not mistake plastic flow
lines for cracks)
*Distorted Teeth
b
a
51084
a - Oil Drive Gear
b - Key
3. Refer to Section 4 (POWERHEAD) for proper
reassembly of components.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-11
3. Connect PURPLE, TAN and both BLUE leads at
respective bullet connectors. Secure warning module
BLACK lead to switch box mounting bolt and install
warning module.Tighten bolts securely.
Oil Warning Module
Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect battery cables.
b
b
50430
d
a
c
51204
51084
2. Disconnect warning module PURPLE, TAN and both
BLUE leads at bullet connectors. Remove warning
module from lower cowl.
a
b
c
d
-
Warning Module
Warning Module Leads
Screws
Ground Wire (BLACK)
4. Re-connect battery cables.
b
b
50430
d
a
c
51204
a
b
c
d
-
51084
Warning Module
Warning Module Leads
Screws
Ground Wire
3D-12 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Disconnect oil hose and low oil sensor wires (BLUE) at
bullet connectors. Remove oil reservoir.
Engine Mounted Oil
Reservoir
b
Removal
1. Disconnect battery cables.
a
51203
a - Oil Tank Wires (BLUE)
b - Oil Hose
4. Remove oil level sensor from oil reservoir.
! CAUTION
Oil level sensor is FRAGILE. Handle with care.
51084
2. Remove starter/oil bracket.
b
a
b
a
51204
a - Screw
b - Oil Level Sensor
51080
a - Starter Bracket
b - Bolts
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
FUEL SYSTEMS - 3D-13
3. Install starter/oil tank bracket.
Installation
1. Install oil level sensor and secure in place.
b
a
b
a
51204
a - Oil Level Sensor
b - Screw (Tighten Securely)
51080
2. Connect sensor oil level wires (BLUE) at bullet connectors. Re-connect oil hose and secure in place with stay
strap. Install reservoir to outboard.
a - Starter/Oil Tank Bracket
b - Bolts
4. Re-connect battery cables.
b
a
51203
a - Oil Level Sensor Wires
b - Oil Hose
51084
3D-14 - FUEL SYSTEMS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD
4
51081
Table of Contents
Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cylinder Block and Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Induction Manifold and Reed Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Throttle Lever and Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Powerhead Torque Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
ELPTO Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Powerhead Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Removing Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Crankshaft Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Honing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Check Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Piston and Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Cleaning Piston Ring Grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Measuring Piston Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Reed Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-0 - POWERHEAD
Page
Powerhead Reassembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . 4-26
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
End Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Assembling Rod to Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Piston Ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Crankshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Installing Rods to Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Connecting Rod Cap Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Crankcase Cover to Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Intake/Reed Block Manifold Installation . . . . . . . . 4-34
Thermostat Cover Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Install Remaining Engine Components . . . . . . . . 4-35
Powerhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Specifications
Special Tools
General
Part No.
Type
Two-Stroke Cycle
Displacement
51.8 cu. in. (849 cc)
Cylinder Bore
Diameter Standard
2.955 in. (75.057 mm)
Diameter .015 Oversize
2.970 in. (75.438 mm)
Diameter .030 Oversize
2.985 in. (75.819 mm)
Out of Round (Max.)
0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Taper (Max.)
0.003 in. (0.08 mm)
Piston
2.950 in. (74.93 mm)
Diameter .015 Oversize
2.965 in. (75.31 mm)
Diameter .030 Oversize
2.980 in. (75.69 mm)
Piston Ring
0.010 in. – 0.018 in.
(.254 mm – .457 mm)
Crankshaft
Runout (Max.)
*91-66274
91-25821A1
Flywheel Holder
Protector Cap
Flywheel Puller
Lifting Eye
Piston Ring Expander
Piston Pin Tool
Lockring Installation Tool
Torque Wrench (0 – 200 lb. ft.)
(0 – 27 N·m)
Torque Wrench (0 – 150 lb. ft.)
(0 – 20 N·m)
Powerhead Stand
*May be obtained locally
Diameter Standard
End Gap
91-52344
91-24161
91-73687A1
91-90455
*91-24697
91-74607A2
91-77109A1
*91-32610
Description
0.002 in. (0.05 mm)
Quicksilver Lubricants and
Service Aids
Part No.
92-32609-1
92-12564--1
92-42649A1
92-13249A24
92-59327-1
92-90018A12
92-34277-1
*
Description
Loctite 271 Grade “A”
Master Gasket Sealant
Needle Bearing Assembly
Lubricant
2 Cycle Outboard Oil
Loctite Primer “T”
2-4-C Marine Lubricant
Perfect Seal
Loctite 272
*May be obtained locally
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-1
Cylinder Block and Crankcase
44
43
45
20
21
38
37
16
9
22
36
35
34
23
24 25
26
7
29
27
28
17
32
33
1
31
37
30
29
9
15
14
8 7
18
12
19
5
11
9
12
10
41
95
42
40
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
9
Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)
12
Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
4-2 - POWERHEAD
6
13
39
3
4
2
9
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Cylinder Block and Crankcase
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
8
3
6
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
2
8
2
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
3
14
1
15
2
16
1
17
2
18
4
19
6
20
4
21
1
22
1
23
1
24
1
25
1
26
1
26
1
27
1
28
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
CYLINDER BLOCK
SCREW
SCREW
CHECK VALVE
HOSE (16″)
CHECK VALVE (PRESS-IN)
CARRIER ASSEMBLY
CHECK VALVE
ADJUSTING SCREW
JAM NUT
CAP
DOWEL PIN (LOCATING)
DOWEL PIN (BEARING RACE)
COVER
SCREW
GASKET
STUD
PIPE PLUG
SCREW
SCREW (25MM - Qty. of 3 on 55)
SCREW (55)
POPPET VALVE
DIAPHRAGM
WASHER
SCREW
50/60
SPRING
SPRING (60 Pontoon/Big Foot)
THERMOSTAT (120)
GASKET
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
220
220
18.5
18.5
25.0
25.0
220
18.5
25.0
350
220
29.0
39.5
18.5
25.0
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
POWERHEAD - 4-3
Cylinder Block and Crankcase
44
43
45
20
21
38
37
16
9
22
36
35
34
23
24 25
26
7
29
27
28
17
32
33
1
31
37
30
29
9
15
14
8 7
18
12
19
5
11
9
12
10
41
95
42
40
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
9
Loctite PST Pipe Sealant (92-809822)
12
Loctite Master Gasket (92-12564-2)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
4-4 - POWERHEAD
6
13
39
3
4
2
9
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Cylinder Block and Crankcase
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
29
30
1
31
1
32
1
33
1
34
2
35
2
36
2
37
1
37
1
38
1
39
1
40
1
41
1
42
2
43
1
44
1
45
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
PIPE PLUG
TEMPERATURE SENDER
RETAINER
SCREW
WASHER
WASHER
WASHER
WING NUT
ELBOW
ELBOW (55)
COVER
FITTING (50/60)
COVER
O-RING
SCREW
LIFTING EYE
SCREW (55MM )
NUT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft. N·m
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
50/60
Hand Tight
55
60
7.0
220
18.5
25.0
Drive Tight
POWERHEAD - 4-5
Induction Manifold and Reed Block
24
23
25
30
29
26
27
95
28
22
20 21
19
18
17
15
1
13
14
11
10
9
7 8
5
4
3
2
12
6
14
16
19
14
2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24)
19
Perfect Seal (92-34227-1)
4-6 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Induction Manifold and Reed Block
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
3
7
1
8
2
2
9
10
2
11
2
12
4
13
1
14
1
15
1
16
10
17
1
18
1
19
3
19
3
20
3
21
3
22
3
23
1
24
2
25
2
26
1
27
1
28
1
29
1
30
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
GASKET
LOWER END CAP ASSEMBLY
OIL SEAL
OIL SEAL
O-RING
SCREW
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
STUD
WASHER
WASHER
50/60
WING NUT
SCREW
INDUCTION MANIFOLD
ELBOW (Qty. of 2 on 55)
GASKET
SCREW
REED BLOCK ASSEMBLY
GASKET
REED SET (0.008 THICK)
REED SET (0.010 THICK)
TAB WASHER
RETAINER
SCREW
SHIFT RAIL
TAB WASHER
SCREW
SLIDE
NYLINER
NUT
WASHER
NUT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
220
18.5
N·m
25.0
Hand Tight
220
18.5
25.0
220
18.5
25.0
60
165
7.0
14.0
18.5
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
POWERHEAD - 4-7
Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods
14
95
7
13
14
6
95
12
11
14
4
9
14
10
14
16
16
12
15
1
8
5
95
2
3
14
2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
4-8 - POWERHEAD
14
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Crankshaft, Pistons and Connecting Rods
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
2
9
3
9
AR
9
AR
10
6
11
1
11
AR
11
AR
12
3
13
6
14
87
15
6
16
3
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
BALL BEARING
RETAINING RING
KEY
DRIVER GEAR
ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY (TOP)
OIL SEAL
ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY (CENTER)
PISTON ASSEMBLY (STANDARD)
PISTON ASSEMBLY (.015 O.S.)
PISTON ASSEMBLY (.030 O.S.)
LOCK RING
PISTON RING (STANDARD)
PISTON RING (.015 O.S.)
PISTON RING (.030 O.S.)
CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
SCREW
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
1st Torque – 15 lb. in.
(1.5 N·m)
2nd Torque –
1/4″ Bolt – 120 lb. in.
(13.5 N·m) + an additional 1/4 turn
5/16″ Bolt – 27 lb. ft.
(36.5 N·m)
ROLLER BEARING
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-9
Throttle Lever and Linkage
10
9
2
16
3
17
8
95
15
10
9
5
14
95
95
7
11
6
1
5
12
4
95
13
18
24
23
22
19
21
11
20
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
4-10 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Throttle Lever and Linkage
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
2
6
1
7
1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
THROTTLE LEVER
ADJUSTING SCREW
JAM NUT
PIN
ADJUSTING SCREW
WASHER
NUT
BUSHING
JAM NUT
CAP
SWIVEL BUSHING
SPRING
WASHER
SPARK ADVANCE LEVER
SPARK ADVANCE ROD
SWIVEL BASE
SWIVEL BALL
SCREW
THROTTLE ROD
STUD
SPRING
THROTTLE CAM
WASHER
NUT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
Drive Tight then Back
Off 1/2 Turn
Drive Tight
Drive Tight then Back
Off 1/2 Turn
POWERHEAD - 4-11
Powerhead Torque Sequence
INTAKE MANIFOLD TORQUE SEQUENCE
Install bolts and torque to 18 lb. ft. (24.5 N·m)
5
6
12
11
1
2
9
10
3
4
14
13
8
7
PE-51085
CRANKCASE COVER AND LOWER END CAP COVER TORQUE SEQUENCE
Torque bolts to 18 lb. ft. (24.5 N·m)
8
10
6
12
4
14
2
2
7
9
5
11
3
1
13
PE-51085
3
1
PE-51086
4-12 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Disconnect control/trim harness and fuel line.
General Information
Powerhead “Disassembly” and “Reassembly” instructions
are printed in a sequence that should be followed to assure
best results when removing or replacing powerhead components. If complete disassembly is not necessary, start
reassembly at point disassembly was stopped. Refer to
“Table of Contents” preceding.
If major powerhead repairs are to be performed, remove
powerhead from drive shaft housing as an assembly. Remove external engine components referring to appropriate
section of service manual.
ELPTO MODEL
1. Remove battery cables.
PE-51082
3. Disconnect trim switch and trim relay wires.
a
b
c
d
PE-51084
PE-51089
a
b
c
d
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
-
Blue/White
Green/White
Red/Black
Trim Switch
POWERHEAD - 4-13
4. Remove control cables.
a
6. Remove electrical box cover.
b
PE-51088
a - Shift Cable
b - Throttle Cable
5. Remove bolt and rubber grommet.
PE-51089
c
7. Remove battery cables and starter bracket.
a
c
b
b
PE-51082
a - Bolt
b - Fuel Connector
c - Rubber Grommet
a
PE-51080
a - Positive Cable
b - Ground Cable
c - Bracket
4-14 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
8. Disconnect wires and remove oil tank.
10. Remove cover (a).
a
c
b
PE-51088
a - Oil Tank Wires (Blue)
b - Power Trim Wires (Blue/White) and (Green/White)
c - Oil Hose (From Tank)
9. Remove ground wire to powerhead. Disconnect wires
from trim relay module(s). Disconnect tel tale hose
b
c
a
PE-51083
11. Remove powerhead bolts.
a
PE-51082
Design 1
b
c
a
54244
Design 2
a - Trim Relay Module(s)
b - Ground Lead
c - Tel Tale Hose
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
PE-51088
POWERHEAD - 4-15
12. Install lifting eye (p/n 91-90455) into flywheel a minimum of five turns. Lift powerhead from drive shaft
housing allowing shift linkage to slide off shift rail guide.
Powerhead Disassembly
Removing Engine Components
Remove the following engine components:
Component/Assembly
Section
Starter Motor
Ignition Switch Box
Ignition Coil
Starter Solenoid
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
Flywheel
Stator Assembly
Trigger Assembly
Air Attenuator
Carburetor and Linkage
Fuel Pump
Fuel Enrichment valve
Shift Cable Latch Assembly
Control Cable Anchor Bracket
Warning Module
Oil Pump
2B
2A*
2A*
2B*
2B*
2A
2A*
2A*
3A
3A
3B
3C
7A
7A
3D*
3D
*NOTE: all ignition and electrical components can be removed and installed as an assembly.
1. Place powerhead in repair stand or on bench.
NOTE: Powerhead stand p/n 91-25821A1 can be used.
PE-51081
PE-51227a
4-16 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Remove thermostat components.
a
b
4. Remove check valves and holders.
c
d
f
e
PE-51087
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Bolts
Thermostat Cover
Thermostat Gasket
Thermostat
Poppet Valve
Spring
a
3. Remove intake manifold and reed block manifold.
a
PE-51227c
a - Check Valve/Holders
5. Place engine on work bench and remove end cap
bolts.
a
PE-51085
a - Bolts
PE-51227a
a - Bolts (14)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-17
6. Remove crankcase cover bolts.
Crankshaft Disassembly
a
1. Remove roller bearing assemblies from crankshaft.
b
c
c
b
PE-51085
a - Bolts (14)
b - Lower End Cap
7. Remove crankcase cover from cylinder block.
8. Remove end cap.
a
a
PE-51085
a - Roller Bearing Race
b - Roller Bearing
c - Retaining Ring
2. Remove 2 bolts from each rod cap. Keep components
with respective connecting rod.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT reuse connecting rod bolts.
a
PE-51087
Crankcase Cover Removed
9. Remove crankshaft assembly.
PE-51080
a - Bolts, use 5/16 in. – 12 point socket or 1/4 – 12 point socket
PE-51085
Crankshaft Assembly Removed
4-18 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Remove connecting rod/piston assembly from crankshaft; re-attach caps to respective rod as each is removed. CAPS MUST BE INSTALLED IN SAME DIRECTION ON SAME ROD, or mating surface will not
seat properly.
6. Remove piston rings. Always install new piston rings.
a
4. Remove main bearing sealing rings.
b
PE-51081
a - Piston Ring Expander (p/n 91-24697)
b - Piston Rings
NOTE: Cylinders must be honed for rings to seat properly.
! CAUTION
PE-51083
5. Scribe (with awl) identification number (cylinder 1, 2,
and 3) on inside of piston and connecting rod in order
to reassemble piston to same connecting rod.
1
Safety glasses should be worn when removing or installing locking rings.
7. Remove piston pin lock rings using awl. Always install
new lock rings.
PE-51083
PE-51081
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-19
8. Remove piston pin.
11. Press crankshaft bearing as shown.
a
b
PE-51086
a - Piston Pin
b - Piston Pin Tool (91-74607A2)
9. Remove piston pin needle bearings (29 per piston pin)
and locating washers (“a” 2 per piston) as shown.
PE-51081
a
12. Remove oil drive gear if necessary.
PE-51088
a - Locating Washers
! CAUTION
Bearing removal will cause bearing damage and will
require replacement.
b
10. Inspect crankshaft bearing. Remove bearing (a) and
retaining ring (b) only if necessary.
a
b
a
PE-51084
a - Oil Drive Gear
b - Key
PE-51084
4-20 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Cleaning and Inspection
! CAUTION
Cylinder Block and Crankcase Cover
IMPORTANT: Crankcase cover and cylinder block are
matched, line-bored assembly should not be mismatched by using a different crankcase cover or cylinder block.
If crankcase cover and cylinder block is to be submerged in a very strong cleaning solution, it will be
necessary to remove the crankcase cover/cylinder
block bleed system from cover/cylinder block to prevent damage to hoses and check valves.
CYLINDER BORE SIZE
PISTON SIZE
CYL. BLOCK
FINISH HONE
Standard Diameter
2.955 in.
75.057 mm
.015 Oversize
2.970 in.
75.438 mm
.030 Oversize
2.985 in.
75.819 mm
• Inspect cylinder bores for scoring (a transfer of aluminum from piston to cylinder wall). Cylinder wall scoring usually can be “cleaned up” by honing or reboring.
! CAUTION
When reboring cylinder block, remove hone frequently and check condition of cylinder walls. DO NOT hone
any more than absolutely necessary, as hone can remove cylinder wall material rapidly.
PE-51090
HONING PROCEDURE
• Inspect cylinder block and crankcase cover for cracks
or fractures.
Follow hone manufacture’s recommendations for use of
hone cleaning and lubrication during honing.
• Check gasket surfaces for nicks, deep grooves,
cracks and distortions that could cause compression
leakages.
IMPORTANT: After honing, bores should be thoroughly cleaned with hot water and detergent. Scrub well
with stiff bristle brush and rinse with hot water. If any
abrasive material is allowed to remain in the cylinder
bore, it will cause a rapid wear of new piston rings and
cylinder bore. After cleaning, bores should be
swabbed several times with 2 cycle engine oil and a
clean cloth. Wipe excess oil with clean, dry cloth. Cylinders should not be cleaned with kerosene or gasoline. Clean remainder of cylinder block.
• Check that all water passages in cylinder block are
not obstructed. Check locating pins in cylinder block
that they are tight.
• Check crankcase cover fuel/bleed passages that they
are not obstructed. Verify that check valves in crankcase cover are not damaged.
• Thoroughly clean cylinder block and crankcase cover.
Verify that all sealant and old gaskets are removed
from matching surfaces. Clean all carbon deposits
from exhaust ports.
• Hone all cylinder walls just enough to de-glaze.
• Inspect spark plug holes for stripped or damaged
threads.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-21
• Measure cylinder bore inside diameter (with an inside
micrometer) of each cylinder, as shown below. Check
for tapered, out-of-round (“egg-shaped”) and oversize
bore.
TOP
TO CHECK: Inspect check valves by looking through hole.
If light can be seen the nylon ball is bad (probably melted);
REPLACE valve. If you see no light, insert fine wire into
check valve hole to see if there is slight movement of nylon
ball. If ball moves, valve is O.K.. Replace valve if ball does
not move.
Install check valve into check valve holder as shown.
Air
a
b
CENTER
BOTTOM
Air
• If a cylinder bore is tapered, out-of-round or worn
more than .003 in. (0.08 mm) from standard “Cylinder Block Finish Hone” diameter (refer to chart), it will
be necessary to rebore that cylinder(s) to designated
oversize bore and install oversize piston(s) and piston rings during reassembly.
NOTE: The weight of an oversize piston is approximately
the same as a standard size piston; therefore, it is not necessary to rebore all cylinders in a block just because one
cylinder requires reboring.
IMPORTANT: Ports must be deburred after honing.
• After honing and thoroughly cleaning cylinder bores,
apply 2 cycle outboard oil to cylinder walls to prevent
rusting.
Check Valves
NOTE: Check valves can be replaced by removing intake
manifold when powerhead is attached to driveshaft housing.
The check valves are a 3/16 in. (4.76 mm) diameter brass
casing containing a nylon ball-valve. These can be damaged by hot combustion blow-by into crankcase (ie.: backfire, or a hole in top of piston, etc.).
4-22 - POWERHEAD
PE-51080
a - Check Valve
b - Holder
Piston and Piston Rings
IMPORTANT: If engine was submerged while engine
was running, piston pin and connecting rod may be
bent. If piston pin is bent, piston must be replaced. Piston pins are not sold separately because of matched
fit into piston. If piston pin is bent, connecting rod
must be checked for straightness (refer to “Connecting Rods” for checking straightness).
• Inspect piston for scoring and excessive piston skirt
wear.
• Check tightness of piston ring locating pins. Locating
pins must be tight.
• Thoroughly clean pistons. Carefully remove carbon deposits, with a soft wire brush or carbon remover solution. DO NOT burr or round off machined edges.
• Inspect piston grooves for wear and carbon accumulation. If necessary, scrape carbon from piston ring
grooves being careful not to scratch sides of grooves.
Refer to procedure for cleaning piston ring grooves.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
CLEANING PISTON RING GROOVES
IMPORTANT: The piston rings are half – keystone rings
– (tapered on the top side) – follow cleaning and inspection carefully! Chromed ring is installed on top.
PISTON
SIZE
PISTON SKIRT
DIAMETER
CYL. BORE
FINISH HONE
Standard
Piston
2.950 in.
(74.93 mm)
2.955 in.
(75.057 mm)
.015
Oversize
2.965 in.
(75.31 mm)
2.970 in.
(75.438 mm)
.030
Oversize
2.980 in.
(75.69 mm)
2.985 in.
(75.819 mm)
Crankshaft
Enlarged View of
Piston Ring Grooves
• Inspect crankshaft to drive shaft splines for wear. (Replace crankshaft, if necessary.)
• Check crankshaft for straightness. (Replace as necessary.)
• Inspect crankshaft oil seal surfaces. Sealing surfaces
must not be grooved, pitted or scratched. (Replace as
necessary.)
! CAUTION
Care must be taken not to scratch the side surfaces of
ring groove. Scratching the side surfaces of the ring
groove will cause damage to the ring groove.
• Check all crankshaft bearing surfaces for rust, water
marks, chatter marks, uneven wear and/or overheating. (Refer to “Connecting Rods”.)
• If necessary, clean crankshaft surfaces with crocus
cloth as shown.
• Use a bristle brush and carbon remover solution to remove carbon from side surfaces.
• A tool can be made for cleaning the inner diameter of
the tapered ring grooves. The tool can be made from a
broken tapered piston ring with the side taper removed
to enable inside edge of the ring to reach the inside diameter of the groove. Carefully scrape the carbon from
inner diameter of ring grooves. Care must be taken not
to damage the grooves by scratching the surfaces of
the grooves.
MEASURING PISTON SKIRT
Measure piston skirt at right angle (90°) to piston pin centerline, 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) up from bottom edge of skirt.
.50 in.
(12.7 mm)
PE-51089
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-23
· Thoroughly clean (with solvent) and dry crankshaft and
crankshaft ball bearings. Recheck surfaces of crankshaft. Replace crankshaft if surfaces cannot be properly “cleaned up”. If crankshaft will be reused, lubricate
surfaces of crankshaft with light oil to prevent rust. DO
NOT lubricate crankshaft ball bearings at this time.
! WARNING
DO NOT spin-dry crankshaft ball bearing with compressed air.
Thermostat
Wash thermostat with clean water. Using a thermostat tester, similar to the one shown, test thermostat as follows:
· Open thermostat valve, then insert a thread between
valve and thermostat body. Allow valve to close against
thread.
· Suspend thermostat (from thread) and thermometer inside tester so that neither touches the container. Bottom
of thermometer must be even with bottom of thermostat
to obtain correct thermostat opening.
· Fill thermostat tester with water to cover thermostat.
Connecting Rods
If necessary, clean connecting rod surfaces as follows:
· Attach end caps to connecting rods. Following these directions, tighten rod cap attaching bolts to specifications. Recheck alignment.
! CAUTION
Crocus cloth MUST BE USED to clean bearing surface
at crankshaft end of connecting rod. DO NOT use any
other type of abrasive cloth.
· Clean crankshaft end of connecting rod by using crocus
cloth placed in a slotted 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter shaft,
as shown. Insert shaft in a drill press and operate press
at full speed while keeping connecting rod at a 90°
angle to slotted shaft.
· Plug tester into electrical outlet.
· Observe temperature at which thermostat begins to
open. Thermostat will drop off thread when it starts to
open. Thermostat must begin to open when temperature reaches 5°F (3°C) above designated stamping on
bottom of thermostat.
· Continue to heat water until thermostat is completely
open.
· Unplug tester unit.
· Replace thermostat, if it fails to open at the specified
temperature, or if it does not fully open.
IMPORTANT: Clean connecting rod just enough to
clean bearing surfaces. DO NOT continue to clean after marks are removed from bearing surfaces.
· Clean piston pin end of connecting rod, using same
method as above. Use 320 grit carborundum cloth instead of crocus cloth.
· Thoroughly wash connecting rods to remove abrasive
grit. Recheck bearing surfaces of connecting rods. Replace any connecting rod that cannot be properly polished. Lubricate bearing surfaces of connecting rods
which will be reused with 2 cycle engine oil to prevent
rust.
PE-51087
PE-51083
4-24 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
If the opening exceeds .020 in. (0.5 mm), or if the reed is
chipped, cracked or otherwise damaged, replace.
Reed Blocks
NOTE: Do not disassemble reed block unless necessary.
e
d
c
a
.020
b
PE-51089
PE-51089
a
b
c
d
e
-
Reed Block
Reed (3 Sets)
Retaining Washer
Tab Washer
Bolt (With Loctite Grade “A”)
! CAUTION
Replace locking tab-Washer. DO NOT REUSE.
IMPORTANT: Do not “flop” (reverse) the reed petels for
additional use – replace reed when necessary.
Reed should lie flat. There should be no pre-load (pressure
between reed and reed-block), although a slight pre-load
is tolerable.
If reed block was disassembled, reassemble by locating
reeds (a) on pins with (c) retaining washer (b). Use new
tab-washer. Insert bolt (d), and torque to 60 lb. in. (6.5
N·m); then, if necessary, continue the torque to align flat on
hex-head to locking tab (e). DO NOT exceed 100 lb. in.
(11.5 N·m) of torque. Bend up lock tab to secure bolt position.
The maximum allowable opening between reed and reedblock is 0.020 in. (0.5mm). This must be checked with a flat
blade feeler gauge, as shown.
0.020 MAX.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-25
Powerhead Reassembly and
Installation
General Information
Before proceeding with powerhead reassembly, be sure
that all parts to be reused have been carefully cleaned and
thoroughly inspected, as outlined in “Cleaning and Inspection”. Parts, which have not been properly cleaned (or
which are questionable), can severely damage an otherwise perfectly good powerhead within a few minutes of operation. All new powerhead gaskets must be installed during assembly.
During reassembly, lubricate parts with Quicksilver
2-Cycle Outboard Oil whenever 2-cycle oil is specified, and
Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant whenever grease is
specified.
A torque wrench is essential for correct reassembly of powerhead. Do not attempt to reassemble powerhead without
using a torque wrench.
! CAUTION
Any GREASE used for bearings INSIDE the powerhead
MUST BE gasoline soluble. Use only Quicksilver
Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant. DO NOT use
2-4-C Marine Lubricant, or other lubricants inside the
powerhead, or damage may occur.
Assembling Rod to Piston
! CAUTION
Never intermix new needle bearings with used needle
bearings. It is required to replace needle bearings as
a set. Never intermix needle bearings from one connecting rod with those of another connecting rod
1. Place clean needle bearings on a clean sheet of paper
and lubricate with Quicksilver Needle Bearing Lubricant.
Service Tip
End Cap
1. Clean thoroughly, including seal and O-ring seats; remove Perfect Seal residue and clean cap-to-head mating surface.
2. Using suitable mandrel, press oil seals into cap until
fully seated.
NOTE: Lip of smaller seal faces away from powerhead. Lip
of larger seal faces towards powerhead.
3. Lubricate oil seal lips with 2-cycle oil.
4. Lubricate O-ring seal with 2-cycle oil and install in
groove.
5. Apply Perfect Seal to flange of end cap.
Lip of Larger Seal
a
PE-51228
b
If the tip of an awl can be inserted between needle bearings, one or more needles are missing and must be replaced.
Lip on Bottom of
Smaller Seal
PE-51088
a - 2-Cycle Oil
b - Perfect Seal
4-26 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Install needle bearings.
4. Push sleeve from piston using piston pin tool.
a
b
a
b
PE-51081
a - Needle Bearings (29)
b - Sleeve [from Piston Pin Tool (91-74607A2)]
3. Place locating rings on connecting rod, carefully place
piston over end of rod. Refer to scribed identification
number for matching rod to piston and direction of assembly (which side of rod is “UP”).
PE-51080
a - Sleeve
b - Piston Pin Tool (91-74607A2)
5. Place piston pin over tool, and tap into position (driving
tool out other side).
b
a
1
b
1
a
PE-51083
a - Scribed Identification Number
b - Locating Washer
PE-51086
a - Piston Pin
b - Piston Pin Tool
! WARNING
Eye protection must be worn while installing piston
pin lockrings.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-27
6. Install new piston pin lockrings (each side of piston) using Lockring Tool (p/n 91-77109A1).
7. Make sure lockrings are properly seated in piston
grooves.
Piston Ring Installation
IMPORTANT: Piston ring side with letter or mark must
be facing up.
! CAUTION
Do not re-use piston pin lockrings. Use only new lockrings and make sure they are properly seated in piston
grooves.
b
Piston Ring
Piston rings are TAPERED top side, and flat (rectangular)
on the bottom side (half-keystone rings). Note that,top ring
is chromed and bottom ring is steel.
a
Enlarged View of
Piston Ring Grooves
PE-51086
a - Lockring Installation Tool (91-77109A1)
b - Lockring (2)
! CAUTION
Care must be taken not to scratch the side surfaces of
ring groove. Scratching this area will damage the ring
groove.
PE-51086
NOTE: Shaft of Lockring Installation Tool 91-77109A1
must be modified (shortened) to 1.050 in. (26.7 mm).
1.050 in. (26.7 mm)
4-28 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
1. Install piston ring in appropriate groove on piston using
Piston Ring Expander Tool. Spread rings just enough
to slip over piston.
Top Groove – Chromed Ring
Bottom Groove – Steel Ring
4. Remove connecting rod cap from connecting rod being installed.
2. Check piston rings to be sure they fit freely in groove.
Lubricate rings and cylinder wall with 2-cycle oil.
UP
5. Install each piston with “UP” identification facing flywheel end. Pistons MUST be installed in this direction.
a
b
! CAUTION
PE-51081
a - Piston Ring Expander
b - Piston Rings
3. Align piston ring end gaps with ring locating pins as
shown. Check locating pins making sure they are tight.
Pistons must be installed very carefully into cylinders.
Piston rings can not be inspected thru exhaust ports.
6. Bottom end of cylinder bore has taper which permits
the insertion of the piston into block without using a piston ring compressor. Place piston carefully into cylinder.
a
a
b
PE-51228
b
a
PE-51082
PE-51087
a - Locating Pin
b - Piston Rings
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-29
Crankshaft Installation
! CAUTION
1. If lower bearing and gear were removed from crankshaft, slide gear in place (note keyway and key in gear
to crankshaft assembly). Install gear to crankshaft using an arbor press and suitable mandrel.
2. Install main bearing retaining ring after pressing main
bearing tight against oil gear.
Any grease used for bearings INSIDE the powerhead
MUST BE gasoline soluble. Use only Quicksilver
Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant. DO NOT use
2-4-C Marine Lubricant, or other lubricants inside powerhead, or damage to engine may occur.
4. Grease crankshaft journal with Quicksilver Needle
Bearing Assembly Lubricant to hold bearing in place.
Position needle bearings on journal. There are 28
bearings per each center main.
b
a
c
PE-51084
a - Lower Bearing
b - Gear
c - Retaining Ring
a
b
PE-51081
a - Crankshaft Journal
b - Bearings (28)
IMPORTANT: Snap ring groove faces up towards flywheel.
! CAUTION
Safety glasses should be worn when removing or installing ring seals.
3. Install ring seals (2) to crankshaft.
5. Attach main bearing races with holes towards lower
gear end of crankshaft. Secure each main bearing
race with retaining ring. Lubricate top main bearing
with 2-cycle engine oil and install to crankshaft as
shown.
c
b
b
a
b
PE-51083
a - Main Bearing Race
b - Retaining Ring (Groove Faces Flywheel)
c - Top Main Bearing (One Piece)
a
PE-51083
a - Ring Seal
b - Slot On Crankshaft
4-30 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
6. Position cylinder block and piston rods as shown. Insert locating pins (a).
Installing Rods to Crankshaft
1. Oil rod and bearing cage with 2-cycle oil.
a
a
2. Pull rod into place and install bearing cages as shown.
a
PE-51080
PE-51088
Flywheel End
Lower End
7. Place crankshaft into cylinder block; align and seat top
and center main bearings so that locating pins on block
align with larger holes in each bearing race.
NOTE: Clean rod bolt/rod cap bolt holes of oil and debris
before reassembly.
IMPORTANT: The rod cap and rod must be aligned and
held together when threading oiled bolt. Check that
mating surfaces are tight together after bolt enters
threads in piston rod.
3. Place rod cap over bearing cages. While holding cap
to rod, insert slightly oiled bolts and lightly tighten while
observing cap to rod alignment.
PE-51080
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
PE-51089
POWERHEAD - 4-31
Connecting Rod Cap Alignment
Crankcase Cover to Block
1. Check each connecting rod for correct alignment by
carefully running fingernails up and down edge of rod
cap. If not aligned, a ridge can be seen or felt at the
separating line. Correct any misalignment.
1. Install upper seal to crankshaft.
Front View
Correct
Front View
Incorrect
a
Side View
Correct
Side View
Incorrect
Side View
Incorrect
PE-51243
a - Oil Seal (Lubricate Inside with 2-cycle oil)
Space
2. Apply LOCTITE MASTER GASKET SEALANT to
clean block surface. Instructions in kit must be followed
exactly.
Ridge
IMPORTANT: Extend sealer to edge on each center
main journal to prevent blow-by between cylinders.
PE-51224
2. When connecting rods are attached, and bolts drawn
down finger tight, torque rod-cap bolts to 15 lb. in. (1.7
N·m). Recheck alignment. Re-torque 1/4 in. bolts to
120 lb. in. (13.5 N·m) and then turn additional 1/4
turn or 5/16 in. bolts to 27 lb. ft. (36.5 N·m). Recheck
alignment.
PE-51087
Sealant “Bead Pattern” Indicated by Bold Line Above
4-32 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Install end cap assembly (lubricate seals with 2-cycle
engine oil) to block. Apply Perfect Seal to flange of end
cap (a).
5. Insert clean bolts (note 2 sizes) and finger tighten.
6. Torque bolts to 18 lb. ft. (24.5 N·m) following sequence
shown below.
2
3
1
a
PE-51086
8
10
6
12
4
14
2
PE-51088
4. Place crankcase cover onto block.
b
7
a
PE-51084
9
5
11
3
1
13
PE-51085
NOTE: Inspect all hoses on reinstallation. Replace if necessary.
a - Crankcase Cover
b - End Cap
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-33
Intake/Reed Block Manifold Installation
3. Install reed block manifold and intake manifold with
gasket to cylinder block.
1. Place engine on repair stand or on bench.
NOTE: Powerhead repair stand p/n 91-25821A1 can be
used.
Can only be
installed one way.
PE-51225
4. Install bolts and torque to 18 lb. ft. (24.5 N·m) in sequence shown below.
5
6
11
12
1
2
PE-51227
2. Install check valve/holders.
10
9
3
13
4
14
PE-51080
8
7
PE-51085
a
PE-51227
a - Check Valve/Holders
4-34 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Thermostat Cover Installation
Powerhead Installation
1. Install thermostat components into cylinder block.
Torque bolts to 18 lb. ft. (24.5 N·m).
1. Install lifting eye (p/n 91-90455) into flywheel a minimum of 5 turns. Install powerhead to driveshaft housing. Slide shift slide on rail while lowering powerhead
on splines of drive shaft.
50/60 Models
PE-51087
55 Model
PE-51087
Install Remaining Engine
Components
Component/Assembly
Starter Motor
Ignition Switch Box
Ignition Coil
Starter Solenoid
Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
Flywheel
Stator Assembly
Trigger Assembly
Air Silencer
Carburetor and Linkage
Fuel Pump
Fuel Enrichment Valve
Shift Cable Latch Assembly
Control Cable Anchor Bracket
Warning Module
Oil Pump
Section
2B
2A*
2A*
2B*
2B*
2A
2A*
2A*
3A
3A
3B
3C
7A
7A
3D*
3D
PE-51081
* Note: All ignition and electrical components can be removed and installed as an assembly.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-35
2. Install Powerhead bolts. Torque to 28 lb.ft. (38.0 N·m).
4. Reattach ground wire to powerhead. Connect wires
from trim relay switch. Connect tel tale hose.
Design 1
b
c
PE-51082
a
Design 2
b
PE-51088
c
3. Install cover. Torque bolts to 80 lb. in. (9.0 N·m).
a
54244
a - Module(s)
b - Ground Lead
c - Tel Tale Hose
5. Reconnect wires and oil hose. Secure in place with stastrap.
c
a
b
PE-51088
PE-51083
4-36 - POWERHEAD
a - Oil Tank Wires
b - Power Trim Wires
c - Oil Hose (Connect to Tank)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
6. Install oil tank.
9. Install bolt and rubber grommet.
7. Install battery cables and starter bracket.
c
a
c
b
b
a
PE-51082
PE-51080
a - Positive Cable
b - Ground Cable
c - Bracket
8. Install electrical box cover. Note, bottom edge of cover
fits into groove of plate.
a - Bolt
b - Fuel Connector
c - Rubber Grommet
10. Install control cables. Refer to cable adjustment in Section 7A.
a
b
PE-51088
a - Shift Cable
b - Throttle Cable
PE-51089
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWERHEAD - 4-37
11. Reconnect trim switch.
Test Run Procedure
! CAUTION
a
When engine is started, IMMEDIATELY check that water pump is operating. Operation of water pump is indicated by water discharging from “tell tale”.
b
1. While test running outboard, check powerhead assembly for leaks and/or unusual noises. Make any repairs BEFORE placing outboard in service.
c
d
Important Information
Proper break-in assures that all moving parts “wear-in”
evenly to ensure a longer engine life and optimum performance.
PE-51089
a
b
c
d
-
Blue/White
Green/White
Red/Black
Trim Switch
12. Connect control/trim harness and fuel line.
Operate your new outboard motor at varied throttle settings
– not to exceed 1/2 throttle (2500-3500 RPM) during the
first hour or the first five gallons of break-in fuel. Refer to
“Fuel Mixture and Gasoline/Oil Recommendations” –
“Break-In Fuel Mixture” located in your operation and Maintenance Manual.
During the second hour operation, or the second 5 gallons
(20 Litres) of break-in fuel, operate the Outboard at varied
throttle settings not to exceed 4500 RPM.
DO NOT OPERATE YOUR NEW OUTBOARD MOTOR
AT FULL THROTTLE UNTIL THE SECOND HOUR OF
BREAK-IN IS COMPLETED.This includes full throttle acceleration, pulling waterskiers, or wide open throttle running.
After the first two hours of running, approximately 10 gallons (40 Liters) of fuel, full throttle operation may be attained, but not sustained, for the remaining break-in fuel
(approximately 5 gallons).
For the next five hours of operation, full throttle operation
may, again, be attained, but it is strongly not recommended
for sustained use. (Not more than 5 minutes of continuous
wide open throttle.)
! CAUTION
PE-51082
13. Install battery cables.
SEVERE DAMAGE to your engine can result by not
complying with the preceding break-in procedures.
PE-51084
4-38 - POWERHEAD
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION
5
50557
CLAMP/SWIVEL BRACKETS and
DRIVE SHAFT HOUSING
A
Table of Contents
Page
Mid-Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1
Swivel Bracket Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-1
Mid-Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-2
Transom Bracket Components (55 Model) . . . . . 5A-2
Mid-Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-3
Transom Bracket Components (50/60
Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-3
Mid-Section Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4
Drive Shaft Housing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-4
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-5
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-5
Tilt Lock Lever/Transom Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-5
Drive Shaft Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5A-7
5A-0 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Mid-Section Components
Swivel Bracket Components
17 a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
-
Swivel Bracket
Bushing (2)
Oil Seal
Bushing
Grease Fitting
Washer (2)
Yoke
Retaining Ring
Roll Pin
Steering Arm
Bracket
Locking Plate
Bolt (2)
Steering Link
Bolt
Spacer
Lock Nut
Washer (2)
Washer (2)
12
13
b
18
11
16
10
14
A
17
c
15 a
19
A
3
9
4
2
A
1
5
A
2
3
A
6
7
8
Lubrication/Sealant Application
Points
A
2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12)
Torque Specifications
a
20 lb. ft. (27.0 N·m)
b
40 lb. ft. (54.0 N·m)
c Torque until it seats, then back off 1/4 turn.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5A-1
Mid-Section Components
Transom Bracket Components (55 Model)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
-
Transom Bracket
Grease Fitting
Pin
Transom Bracket
Lock Lever
Spring
Bushing
Spring
Lever
Roll Pin
Washer (2)
Bracket
Anode
Bolt (2)
Washer (2)
Bolt:
5 (30mm)
1 (35mm)
Lockwasher (2)
Lock Nut (2)
Pin
Tilt Tube
Lock Nut (2)
Bolt (4)
Washer (4)
Nut (4)
Bolt (2)
Washer (2)
Thumb Screw (2)
Rubber Grip
Tilt Lever
Bushing
Washer
Washer
Bolt
Link
Bolt (4)
Washer (8)
Bracket (2)
Shim (4)
Nut (4)
A
8
b
33
29
34
7
1
9
10
5
28
21
32
30
31
4
2
3
A
6
25
b
11
A
17
16
27
26
20
12
b 18
D
B
15
19
22
21
24
23
35
14
13
a
36
36
39
37
38
Lubrication/Sealant Application
Points
A
2-4-C Marine w/Teflon Lubricant (92-90018A12)
B
Loctite 271 (92-823089--1)
D
Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1)
5A-2 - MID-SECTION
Torque Specifications
a
60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m)
b
25 lb. ft. (34.0 N·m)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Mid-Section Components
Transom Bracket Components (50/60 Models)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Transom Bracket
Grease Fitting
Pin
Transom Bracket
Tilt Lock Lever
Spring
Bushing
Spring
Lever
Roll Pin
Washer (2)
Bracket
Anode Plate
Bolt (2)
Washer (2)
Bolt:
5 (30mm)
1 (35mm)
17 - Lockwasher (2)
18 - Lock Nut (2)
19 - Pin
20 - Tilt Tube
21 - Lock Nut (2)
22 - Spacer
23 - O-ring
24 - Cap
25 - Clamp
26 - Washer
27 - Screw
28 - Bolt (4)
29 - Washer (4)
30 - Nut (4)
Non-Power Trim
31 - Link
32 - Tilt Lever
33 - Bushing
34 - Washer
35 - Wave Washer
36 - Knob
37 - Bolt
38 - Nut
39 - Bolt
A
-
32
b
37
A
A
7
36
33
34
35
8
9
10
3
31
21
11
2
4
5
A
27
25
26
6
16
17
20
22
A
12
21
18
b
24
13
15
14 a
28
19
1
29
23
30
39
38
Lubrication/Sealant Application
Points
A
2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Torque Specifications
a 60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m)
b 25 lb. ft. (34.0 N·m)
MID-SECTION - 5A-3
Mid-Section Components
Drive Shaft Housing Components
c
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
-
Drive shaft Housing
Seal
Bolt (4)
Exhaust Tube
Gasket
Pin
Exhaust Plate
Bolt
Lock Nut (2)
Washer (2)
Washer (2)
Bolt (4)
Mount
Bolt (2)
Pin (4)
Bushing
Coupling
Spacer
Lock Nut
Washer
Wave Washer
Shift Link
Bushing
Shift Shaft
Seal
Clamp
Bolt (2)
Water Tube
Seal
Bolt (2)
Ground Strap
Bolt (4)
Cover (2)
Screw (4)
Nut (4)
Clamp (2)
Washer (2)
Nut (2)
Connector
Tube
Fitting
Washer (4)
Bolt (4)
Lock Nut
Washer
Stud
Mount (2)
f
12
13
e 9
10
a
11
19
14
8
20
15
7
21
22
23
16
6
5
24
A
4
25
26
c 3
A
27 b
28
2
29
A
31
c 33
32
34
30
1
47
35
I
37
36
38 e
46
40
39
Torque Specification
a
No Torque Requirement Drive Unit Until Tight,
But Joint Must Be Free to
Pivot
b 80 lb. in. (9.0 N·m)
c 220 lb. in. (25.0 N·m)
d 40 lb. ft. (54.0 N·m)
e 50 lb.ft. (67.5 N·m)
f
28 lb. ft. (38.0 N·m)
5A-4 - MID-SECTION
45
42
44
d
17
41
18
43
d
Lubrication/Sealant Application
Points
A
2-4-C w TeflonMarine Lubricant (92-90018A12)
I
Loctite 35 (92-59328-1)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Disassembly
Reassembly
Remove shock system assembly (refer to Section 5C) from
non power trim models.
Tilt Lock Lever/Transom Bracket
Remove power trim assembly (refer to Section 5B) from
power trim models.
Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to tilt lock lever
shank, spacer and bushing prior to reassembly.
Servicing components such as steering arm, driveshaft
housing, exhaust assembly, swivel bracket assembly, etc.
generally require powerhead and/or gear housing removal. Refer to appropriate section in service manual. Components such as transom bracket, lower mount bracket, tilt
tube and lower engine mounts can be serviced without
powerhead/gear housing removal; however, outboard
must be supported (shown) before servicing components
not requiring powerhead/gear housing removal.
b
e
d
c
a
f
! WARNING
Failure to support outboard as shown could result in
personal injury and/or damage to outboard or boat.
Typical Outboard Shown
a
b
51079
a
b
c
d
e
f
c
-
Spring
Tilt Lock Lever
Bushing
Spring
Lever
Roll Pin
Install roll pin to tilt lock lever assembly using appropriate
punch.
51078
a - Hoist
b - Rope
c - Lifting Eye (P/N 91-90455)
Refer to parts views on pages 1, 2 and 3 and disassemble
mid-section components as required.
51078
! CAUTION
When reinstalling outboard tilt tube, longer threaded
end of tilt tube must extend approximately 3/4 in.
(19mm) toward steering cable nut side of boat.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5A-5
Lubricate outboard tilt tube using Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine
Lubricant and install into swivel bracket.
Install and secure yoke and washer using snap ring.
Secure transom brackets into place using fiber washers
and lock nuts.
b
a
c
a
c
c
51078
b
a - Tilt Tube
b - Fiber Washer
c - Lock Nuts
51079
Apply Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to steering arm
shaft and install.
a
a - Washer
b - Yoke
c - Snap Ring
Install lower mounting bracket to transom brackets.
b
a
a
b
b
51079
a - Steering Arm
b - Washer
b
b
51079
a - Lower Mounting Bracket
b - Bolt
5A-6 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Install clamp.
Drive Shaft Housing
Secure transom bracket assembly to transom.
Install drive shaft housing to transom bracket assembly.
Secure using bolts and components as shown.
d
e
e
g
g
c
c
b
a
c
f
a
51097
b
a - Clamp
b - Bolts [220 lb. in. (24 N·m)]
51097
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Install shift linkage assembly and new gasket to drive shaft
housing.
Transom Bracket Assembly
Drive Shaft Housing Assembly
Bolts [28 lb. in. (32 N·m)]
Lock Nuts [50 lb. ft. (69 N·m)]
Washer
Rubber Mount
Washer
b
a
Secure lower mount assembly to drive shaft housing. Secure drive shaft housing to yoke.
c
d
e
51097
b
a - Shift Linkage Assembly
b - Gasket
Install powerhead and gearcase assemblies referring to
appropriate sections of service manual.
Powerhead Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4A
Lower Unit Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A
a
51097
a
b
c
d
e
-
Lower Mount
Bolt
Washer
Rubber Washer
Lock Nut [50 lb. ft. (68 N·m)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5A-7
MID-SECTION
5
50158
POWER TRIM (DESIGN 1)
B
Table of Contents
Page
Power Trim General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-1
Trimming Outboard “Up” (“Out”) . . . . . . . 5B-1
Trimming OUtboard “Down” (“In”) . . . . . 5B-1
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually . . 5B-2
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-2
Power Trim System Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-3
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-3
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . . 5B-3
Power Trim Flow Diagrams Design 1 . . . . . . . 5B-4
Determine if Problem is Electrical or
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-11
Trouble Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-11
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . 5B-12
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12
Leak Down Check – Pump and Manifold
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-12
Leak Down Check – Pilot Valve
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-13
Leak Down Check – Manual Release
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-13
Leakage Past Ball and Seat – Piston
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-13
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . 5B-14
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . 5B-15
Electrical System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 5B-16
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount Remote
Control (Power Trim/Tilt Electric Start with
Warning Horn) Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . 5B-16
Power Trim System Wiring Diagram . . . . . 5B-17
Troubleshooting the “Down” Circuit*
(When “Up” Circuit is OK) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-18
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit*
(When “Down” Circuit Is OK) . . . . . . . . . 5B-19
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits
(All Circuits Inoperative)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 5B-20
5B-0 - MID-SECTION
Power Trim System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Trim System Disassembly . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim “Motor” Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim “Motor” Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pump Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manifold Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and Inspection of Trim Rod
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Pump Motor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Overload Switch Test . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test for Shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test for Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Cleaning Commutator .
Power Trim System Reassembly . . . . . . . . . .
Manifold Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Motor Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Re-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bleeding Power Trim Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Trim Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
5B-21
5B-22
5B-22
5B-23
5B-25
5B-25
5B-26
5B-27
5B-27
5B-28
5B-29
5B-29
5B-29
5B-29
5B-29
5B-30
5B-30
5B-30
5B-30
5B-30
5B-30
5B-31
5B-32
5B-33
5B-35
5B-36
5B-37
5B-37
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim General
Information
Description
The Power Trim system consists of an electric motor,
pressurized fluid reservoir, pump and trim cylinder.
The remote control (or trim panel) is equipped with a
switch that is used for trimming the outboard “up” and
“down”, and for tilting the outboard for shallow water
operation (at slow speed) or for “trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed “up” or “down” while engine is
under power or when engine is not running.
Trimming Characteristics
NOTE: Because varying hull designs react differently
in various degrees of rough water, it is recommended
to experiment with trim positions to determine whether trimming “up” or “down” will improve the ride in
rough water.
When trimming your outboard from a mid-trim position (trim tab in neutral, straight fore-and-aft, position), you can expect the following results:
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (“OUT”)
WARNING
Excessive trim “out” may reduce the stability of
some high speed hulls. To correct instability at
high speed, reduce the power gradually and trim
the motor “in” slightly before resuming high
speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will
cause a sudden change of steering torque and
may cause additional momentary boat instability.)
Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
Transfers steering torque harder to left on installations below 23” transom height.
Increases clearance over submerged objects.
In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
In excess, can cause insufficient water supply to water pump resulting in serious water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
Operating “up” circuit will actuate the “up” solenoid
(located under engine cowl) and close the electric
motor circuit. The electric motor will drive the pump,
thus forcing automatic transmission fluid thru internal
passageways into the “up” side of the trim cylinder.
The trim cylinder/trim ram will position the engine at
the desired trim angle within the 20° maximum trim
range. The Power Trim system is designed so the engine cannot be trimmed beyond the 20° maximum
trim angle as long as engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM.
The engine can be raised beyond the 20° maximum
trim angle for shallow water operation, etc., by keeping the engine RPM below 2000 RPM. If engine RPM
increases above 2000 RPM, the thrust created by the
propeller (if deep enough in the water) will cause the
trim system to automatically lower the engine back to
the 20° maximum trim angle.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (“IN”)
WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may cause
undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions.
Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the tilt
angle (tilt pin relocation).
Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
Usually improves ride in choppy water.
In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right
(bow steer).
Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to
the left).
Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving tilt
pin one hole closer to transom).
Operating “Down” circuit will actuate the “down” solenoid (located under engine cowl) and close the electric motor circuit (motor will run in opposite direction
of the “Up” circuit). The electric motor will drive the
pump, thus forcing automatic fluid thru internal passageways into the “down” side of the tilt ram. The tilt
ram will move the engine downward to the desired
angle.
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-1
Trailering Outboard
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
While operating “up” circuit, tilt ram will continue to tilt
outboard to full up position for trailering.
Tilting Outboard Up and Down
Manually
WARNING
Before loosening the manual release valve, make
sure all persons are clear of engine as engine will
drop to full “down” position when valve is loosened.
With power trim installed, the outboard can be raised
or lowered manually by opening the manual release
valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise).
Operating some boats with engine trimmed to the
full “in” trim angle [not using trim adjustment pin
(a)] at planing speed will cause undesirable and/
or unsafe steering conditions. Each boat must be
water tested for handling characteristics after engine installation and after any trim adjustments.
IMPORTANT: Some boat/motor combinations,
that doe not use the trim adjustment pin (a) and
are trimmed to the full “in” trim angle, will not experience any undesirable and/or unsafe steering
conditions during planing speed. Thus, not using
trim adjustment pin may be desired. However,
some boats with engine trimmed to the full “in”
trim angle at planing speeds will cause undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. If these
steering conditions are experienced, under no
circumstances should the engine be operated
without the trim adjustment pin and without the
pin adjusted in the proper holes to prevent unsafe
handling characteristics.
Water test the boat not using the trim adjustment pin.
If undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions are
experienced (boat runs with nose down), install trim
adjustment pin in proper hole to prevent unsafe handling characteristics.
50146
a - Manual Release Valve
50157
5B-2 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim System
Components
1 - Trim Rod
2 - Dowel Pin (Upper)
3 - Upper Pivot Pin
4 - Rod Wiper
5 - O-ring .671 in. I.D.
6 - Cylinder Cap
7 - O-ring 1.864 in. I.D.
8 - O-ring .614 in. I.D.
9 - Trim Rod Piston
10- Ball (5)
11- Spring Seat (5)
12- Spring (5)
13- Retaining Plate
14- Screw (5)
15- O-ring 1.600 in I.D. (Rod Piston)
16- O-ring 1.600 in. I.D. (Memory Piston)
17- Memory Piston
18- Trim Rod Cylinder
19- Screw (2)
20- O-ring .208 in I.D. (2)
21- Filter
22- O-ring .301 in. I.D.
23- Valve Seat
24- O-ring .364 in. I.D.
25- Ball
26- Spring Guide
27- Spring
28- Dowel Pin (2)
29- Reservoir
30- Fill Screw
31- O-ring .583 in. I.D.
32- Screw (4)
33- Washer (4)
34- O-ring 2.364 in. I.D.
35- Screw
36- Drive Shaft
37- Pump
38- O-ring .176 in. I.D. (2)
39- Dowel Pin
40- Manifold
41- O-ring .114 in. I.D.
42- O-ring .208 in. I.D.
43- O-ring .239 in. I.D.
44- Relief Valve
45- “E” Clip
46- Wire Harness
47- Cap
48- Washer
49- Grommet
50- Screw (4)
51- Screw
52- Reservoir Cap
53- O-ring 2.364 in. I.D.
54- Disk Foam Pad
55- Nut (2)
56- End Cap
57- Washer (.030 in. Thick) (2)
58- Washer, Thrust
59- Armature
60- Washer (.010 in. Thick)
61- Housing
62- O-ring
63- End Frame
64- O-ring .489 in. I.D.
65- Screw (2)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
NOTE: It is recommended that “ALL” O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
Torque Specifications
a 35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m)
b 100 lb. in. (11.2 N·m)
c 70 lb. in. (7.9 N·m)
d 90 lb. in. (10.2 N·m)
e 25 lb. in. (2.8 N·m)
f 13 lb. in. (1.5 N·m)
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service
Aids
A
Loctite Grade “A” (271)
B
2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12)
26153
MID-SECTION - 5B-3
Power Trim Flow Diagrams
Design 1
51638
5B-4 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 1
51637
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-5
Design 1
51639
5B-6 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 1
51640
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-7
Design 1
51641
5B-8 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 1
51642
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-9
Design 1
51643
5B-10 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting
Determine if Problem is Electrical or
Hydraulic
Refer to the following chart to determine which system is at fault.
Trouble Chart
Outboard will not trim up or down.
Outboard trims up, will not trim
down.
Determine if Power Trim pump
motor operates when appropriate trim circuit is activated.
Outboard trims down, will not trim
up.
Outboard will not return completely to “down” position or returns part
way with jerky motion.
Pump motor operates.
Pump motor does not operate.
Outboard thumps when shifted.
Outboard trails out when backing
off throttle at high speed.
Refer to “Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting”.
Outboard will not hold a trimmed
position or will not remain tilted for
any extended period.
Outboard will not hold trim position
when in reverse.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Refer to “Electrical System
Troubleshooting”.
MID-SECTION - 5B-11
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
power trim system.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components
have been found (during troubleshooting procedure) it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball valve components and
castings must be cleaned using engine cleaner
and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
Leak Down Check – Pump and
Manifold Assembly
NOTE: Scribe (d) pump housing halves before disassembly.
1. Debris or chips between valve and seat (a). Usually imbedded in rubber valve seat.
2. Nicked or deteriorated O-ring (b).
3. Nicked, deteriorated or misplaced O-ring between manifold and trim cylinder. Refer to “Manifold Removal” for O-ring location.
IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized.
Outboard must be in the full “UP” position (cylinder fully extended) prior to fill screw or manual release valve removal.
Refer to instructions following if disassembly is required.
Follow preliminary checks before proceeding to troubleshooting flow diagrams (following).
Preliminary Checks
IMPORTANT: Operate Power Trim system after
each check to see if problem has been corrected.
If problem has not been corrected proceed to next
check.
1. Check that manual release valve is tightened to
full right (clockwise) position.
2. Check trim pump fluid level with outboard in full
“UP” position and fill if necessary. Refer to “Fill
and Purge the Power Trim System”.
3. Check for external leaks in Power Trim system.
Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
4. Outboard not holding tilted position (falls to trim in
position) indicates debris or defective components in trim valve assembly. Clean or replace
components as required.
5. Check manual release valve for broken stem and
one O-ring remaining in the release valve passage. (Separate the manifold assembly from the
cylinder to dislodge broken stem.) Install new release valve and test system.
6. Check for nicked, deteriorated or misplaced Orings throughout trim system.
5B-12 - MID-SECTION
51735
4. After reassembly, insert driveshaft and check
pump rotation resistance to turning – housing
halves can shift/turn during reassembly. Align
scribe marks (d) carefully.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Leak Down Check – Pilot Valve
Assembly
Leakage Past Ball and Seat – Piston
Assembly
1. Debris or chips between check ball and seat (a),
usually imbedded in rubber valve seat.
Unit will trim to full or near full DOWN position and
then will begin to trim UP while trim switch is held in
“DOWN” mode.
2. Nicked or deteriorated O-ring (b).
A leak path is created between the UP side of the cylinder and the reservoir. The trim system will leak
DOWN until the trim port in cylinder is covered.
If trim switch is released, outboard can be pushed (by
hand) DOWN to the point where trim UP started.
1. Inspect balls and seats in piston assembly for debris or damage. Repair or replace balls/seats.
a - Check Ball and Seat
b - O-ring
Leak Down Check – Manual Release
Valve
1. Debris or chips under O-ring (a).
2. Flash from valve molding causing O-ring (a) to not
seal.
51143
a
a - Ball and Seat. Check for Debris or Damage
3. Nicked O-ring (a).
a
51560
a - O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-13
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Outboard falls to full down position with manual release valve closed.
Example a: Outboard lowers more than one
tilt pin hole in eight hours.
Example b: Outboard lowers during acceleration.
Inspect Manual Release
Valve.
Result
Result
Manual release valve and/or Oring damage.
Manual release valve and O-rings
appear to be OK. Replace Orings.
Replace defective valve and Orings.
Inspect Memory Piston O-ring.
Result
Result
Result
O-rings appear to be OK. Cylinder
bore and memory piston are OK.
Replace O-rings and proceed.
O-ring, memory piston or cylinder
bore defective.
Inspect Oil Pump O-rings (located
below oil pump).
Replace defective O-rings or
components.
Result
O-ring failure (located below oil
pump).
O-rings appear to be OK. Replace O-rings.
Replace O-rings.
Replace oil pump.
5B-14 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Outboard will not hold tilted position in reverse
and/or trails out during high speed deceleration.
Inspect Manual Release
Valve.
Result
Result
Manual release valve and/or Oring damage
Manual release valve and O-rings
appear to be OK. Replace O-rings
and proceed.
Replace defective valve and Orings.
Inspect Trim Rod Piston Check
Valve.
Result
Result
No debris or defective components
found.
Debris found in check valve components.
Inspect Manifold Reverse Thrust
Valve.
Clean check valve components
using engine cleaner and compressed air or replace.
CAUTION
DO NOT ADJUST OR REMOVE
REVERSE THRUST VALVE. THIS
VALVE IS PRESET AT FACTORY
FOR PRECISE REVERSE THRUST
PRESSURE AND DOES NOT REQUIRE ADJUSTMENT. REVERSE
THRUST VALVE COMPONENTS
CAN ONLY BE CLEANED USING
ENGINE CLEANER AND COMPRESSED AIR (THROUGH MANIFOLD PORTS) WHILE VALVE
COMPONENTS REMAIN IN MANIFOLD.
Result
Result
Debris found in manifold reverse
thrust valve components.
No debris found in manifold reverse thrust valve.
Clean manifold reverse thrust
valve (without removing) components using engine cleaner and
compressed air or replace.
Replace Manifold as a Unit.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-15
Electrical System Troubleshooting
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount
Remote Control (Power Trim/Tilt
Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram
g
7
d
e
4
f
a
b
BLK •
BLU •
BRN •
GRY •
GRN •
PUR •
RED •
TAN •
WHT •
YEL •
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Green
Purple
Red
Tan
White
Yellow
- Ignition/Choke Switch
- Emergency Stop Switch
- Neutral Start Switch
- Tachometer/Accessories Harness Connector
- Wiring Harness Connector
- Warning Horn
- Trim/Tilt Switch
5B-16 - MID-SECTION
5
c
23891
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim System Wiring Diagram
BLK •
BLU •
GRN •
RED •
WHT •
Black
Blue
Green
Red
White
50285
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
To Power Trim Pump Motor
Relay Switch “UP”
Relay Switch “DOWN”
Engine Starter Motor Solenoid
Cowl Trim Switch
Fuse Holder (20 Amp Fuse)
Engine Wiring Harness Connector
Remote Control Wiring Harness
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-17
Troubleshooting the “Down” Circuit*
(When “Up” Circuit is OK)
*Remote Control Not Equipped with Trailer Button
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 1 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Down” trim button.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 2.
• Depress “Down” trim button.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 4 and black lead to ground.
Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 4 and 1.
No Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit between
Point 3 and positive (+) battery terminal.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check wires for open.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Pump motor wiring is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Relay Switch is defective.
• Pump motor is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indicated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or
open circuit in wire supplying current to Point 5.
5B-18 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit*
(When “Down” Circuit Is OK)
*Remote Control NOT Equipped with Trailer Button
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 8 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Up” trim button.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 6.
• Depress “Up” trim button.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 7 and black lead to ground.
Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 7 and 8.
No Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit between
Point 3 and positive (+) battery terminal.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check wires for open circuit.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Pump motor wiring is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Relay Switch is defective.
• Pump motor is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indicated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or
open circuit in wire supplying current to Point 5.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-19
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits (All Circuits Inoperative)*
*Remote Control Not Equipped with Trailer Button
Check in-line fuse (under cowl) to
see if fuse is blown.
Blown Fuse:
Fuse Not Blown:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3 and black lead to ground.
Battery voltage should be indicated.
• Correct problem that caused
fuse to blow.
• Replace fuse.
No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Check battery leads for poor
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
connections or open circuits.
Point 8 and black lead to ground.
• Check battery charge.
• Depress “Up” trim button and
check for battery voltage.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Check black ground wires for
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect red Voltmeter lead to
Point 5, and black lead to ground.
No Voltage Indicated:
Check that voltage is being
supplied to control by performing
the following checks:
• DO NOT start engine.
• Turn ignition switch to “Run” position.
• Check for voltage at any instrument, using a Voltmeter.
poor connection or poor ground.
• Pump motor is faulty. Refer to
“Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair”, following.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Trim switch is faulty or there is an
open circuit in wires (green-white,
blue-white) between trim buttons
and trim pump.
• Check trim switch.
• Check all trim harness connectors for loose or corroded connections.
• Check for pinched or severed
wires.
No Voltage Indicated:
Red wire is open between Point 3
and red terminal on back of the ignition switch.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check for open in wire.
5B-20 - MID-SECTION
Battery Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit in wire between Point 5 and Red terminal on
the back of the ignition switch.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim System Removal
5. Use suitable punch to remove (DRIVE UP) lower
dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
power trim system.
1. Disconnect power trim harness from outboard
wiring harness.
2. Remove screw and clip securing wiring harness
to clamp bracket.
3. Use suitable tool to remove (DRIVE DOWN) upper dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
6. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
4. Use suitable punch to drive out upper pivot pin.
a
a
51144
a - Pivot Pin
51144
a - Pivot Pin
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-21
7. Tilt power trim assembly (top first) out from clamp
bracket and remove assembly.
9. Remove O-ring from fill cap.
1
51194
Power Trim System
Disassembly
Trim Rod Removal
1. Secure power trim assembly in soft jawed vise.
2. Open manual release valve three or four turns
(counterclockwise) and position trim rod to full up
position.
2
51195
3. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from cylinder
using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long
pegs).
8. Remove fill cap and drain unit.
a
51193
5B-22 - MID-SECTION
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove trim rod assembly from cylinder.
6. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
a
b
51196
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
51196
5. Remove memory piston from cylinder using lockring pliers (shown) or suitable tool.
7. Remove trim system from vise and empty fluid
into appropriate container.
Trim Rod Disassembly
1. Place trim rod assembly on clean work surface.
2. Remove screws securing plate to trim rod piston
and O-ring.
3. Remove check ball components from trim rod piston.
a
b
c
51143
a - Screw
b - Plate
c - O-ring
CAUTION
51193
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
When removing Trim Rod piston, spanner
wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs to
avoid damage to trim piston.
MID-SECTION - 5B-23
4. Place trim rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat
to shock piston using torch lamp (P/N 91-63209).
5. Loosen trim rod piston using spanner wrench (1/4
in. x 5/16 in. long pegs).
6. Allow trim rod piston to cool, remove from trim rod.
CAUTION
Do not remove check ball components from trim
rod piston. Removal and reinstallation of check
valve could result in improper operating pressure
and possible power trim system damage. If check
valve is defective, replace trim rod piston.
7. Remove inner O-ring from piston.
a
c
b
51199
a - Check Ball Components
b - O-ring
c - Piston
8. Remove rod wiper, inner O-ring and outer O-ring.
51146
b
a
51147
a
b
51146
a - Trim Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
5B-24 - MID-SECTION
c
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove motor and harness from reservoir.
Trim “Motor” Removal
1. Secure power trim assembly in soft jawed vise.
2. Remove cap, washer and grommet from reservoir assembly.
b
a
c
51196
Trim “Motor” Disassembly
51195
a - Cap
b - Washer
c - Grommet
1. Remove end cap from motor housing. Note position of washers on armature.
3. Remove screws securing reservoir cap to reservoir.
c
a
a
b
d
a
51193
a
b
c
d
51194
- End Cap
- Motor Housing
- Wave Washer (2)
- Washer
a - Screws
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-25
2. Remove O-ring from end frame.
Reservoir Assembly Removal
3. Place scribe mark on motor housing and end
frame as reassembly reference, as shown.
CAUTION
DO NOT ADJUST OR REMOVE REVERSE
THRUST VALVE. THIS VALVE IS PRESET AT FACTORY FOR PRECISE REVERSE THRUST PRESSURE AND DOES NOT REQUIRE ADJUSTMENT.
a
1. Remove manual release valve from manifold. DO
NOT remove or adjust reverse thrust valve.
b
51194
a - O-ring
b - Scribe Mark
c
b
4. Remove end frame and armature from housing.
e
a
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
c - Reverse Thrust Valve
2. Remove “E” clip and O-rings from manual release
valve.
a
b
d
c
a
b
c
51194
a
b
c
d
e
- End Frame
- Washer
- Armature
- Fiber Guard (Brush Wires)
- Housing
5B-26 - MID-SECTION
51196
a - “E” Clip
b - O-rings
c - Manual Release Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Remove four screws securing reservoir to manifold.
Oil Pump Removal
IMPORTANT: The oil pump is not rebuildable. If oil
pump is defective, replace as an assembly.
1. Remove screw, oil pump and O-rings from manifold.
c
a
a
51193
a - Screw
b
4. Remove reservoir from manifold.
5. Remove drive shaft from oil pump.
a
a
51007
a - O-ring
b - Oil Pump
c - Screw
a
b
Manifold Removal
1. While holding trim cylinder to manifold, remove
screws.
b
a
51194
a - Drive Shaft
b - Oil Pump
c
51007
a - Trim Cylinder
b - Manifold
c - Screw
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-27
2. Slowly remove manifold from cylinder. Note position of above trim check ball assembly and remove.
3. Remove O-rings from cylinder.
4. Remove filter.
a
a
b
54745
54743
a - O-rings
b - Filter
Cleaning and Inspection of
Trim Rod Components
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint
free. Slightest amount of debris in Power Trim
system could cause system to malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not remove check valve components from
trim rod piston. Removal and reinstallation of
check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible power trim system damage.
a
a
51199
a - Check Ball Components
54744
a - Above Trim Check Ball Components
5B-28 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from
check valve if found. If debris cannot be cleaned from
check valve, replace trim rod piston as an assembly.
Clean trim rod and components with parts cleaner
and dry with compressed air.
MOTOR ASSEMBLED
Connect Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads as shown. If
switch is good, full continuity (zero ohms) will be indicated. If full continuity is not indicated, disassemble
motor and recheck switch per instructions, following.
It is recommended that all O-rings in trim system be
replaced.
Inspect trim rod. If scraper (located in cap) has failed
to keep rod clean, replace scraper.
Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
Motor and Electrical Tests/
Repair
Trim Pump Motor Test
a
WARNING
Do not perform this test near flammables (or explosives), as a spark may occur when making
connections.
1. Disconnect orange (motor) wire and black (motor) wire from relay switch wiring harness.
2. Connect a 12 volt power supply to motor wires
(positive to orange; negative to black results in
motor up direction. Positive to black; negative to
orange results in motor down direction). Motor
should run.
3. If motor does not run, disassemble motor and
check components.
b
51196
a - Motor Wire (Black)
b - Motor Wire (Orange)
MOTOR DISASSEMBLED
Connect Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads as shown. If
switch is good, full continuity (zero ohms) will be indicated.
Thermal Overload Switch Test
IMPORTANT: If thermal overload switch has been
activated, pump motor cannot be tested for a
minimum of one minute. After this period switch
should close (reset itself) and pump motor may
be operated. Perform the following check(s) only
if switch does not reset itself.
51193
If full continuity is not indicated, clean switch contact
surfaces, using an ignition point file.
Recheck switch; if full continuity is not indicated, replace end frame.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-29
Armature Tests
Power Trim System
Reassembly
TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature on a Growler (follow Growler manufacturer’s test instructions). Indication of a short requires replacement of armature.
Manifold Installation
IMPORTANT: Filter must be installed in trim cylinder with ridge of filter housing facing out.
TEST FOR GROUND
Use an Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale). Place one lead of
Ohmmeter on armature shaft and other lead on commutator, as shown. If continuity is indicated, armature
is grounded and must be replaced.
50447
1. Install lubricated O-rings and filter, with housing
ridge facing out, to trim cylinder.
a
51195
b
CHECKING AND CLEANING COMMUTATOR
If commutator (a) is worn it can be turned down on an
armature conditioner tool or on a lathe.
Clean commutator with “00” sandpaper.
a
54745
a - O-ring
b - Filter
5B-30 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Install check ball components (a) into manifold.
4. Secure manifold to cylinder using screws, torque
to 100 lb. in. (11.2 N·m).
a
c
b
54746
a - Trim Cylinder
b - Manifold
c - Screw
a
Oil Pump Installation
1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
54744
3. Hold check ball components in place using
screwdriver (as shown). Connect manifold to trim
cylinder.
2. Install lubricated O-rings to manifold.
3. Install oil pump to manifold and secure using
screw, torque to 90 lb. in. (10.2 N·m).
c
b
a
54747
a - O-ring
b - Oil Pump
c - Screw
54748
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-31
Trim Motor Reassembly
1. Apply Quicksilver Marine Lubricant (2-4-C) to armature shaft and insert into end frame.
3. Align scribe mark on housing with mark on end
frame.
4. Install lubricated O-ring to end frame.
a
a
b
b
c
51195
a - Armature Shaft
b - Washer
c - End Frame
51194
2. Guide armature and end frame into housing as
shown.
a - O-ring
b - Scribe Mark
5. Install washers to armature shaft as shown.
6. Install end cap to housing. Torque nuts to 25 lb. in.
(2.8 N·m).
c
a
b
d
51196
5B-32 - MID-SECTION
a
b
c
d
51194
- End Cap
- Motor Housing
- Wave Washer
- Washer
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
IMPORTANT: When installing motor, wires (black,
orange) must rest in cavity of cylinder allowing
motor to seat properly.
3. Install end cap, O-ring and foam pad to cylinder.
4. Torque screws to 13 lb. ft. (1.5 N·m).
a
b
a
c
b
51194
a - Manifold
b - Cavity
51195
Reservoir Installation
1. Connect trim motor wires to harness.
a - End Cap
b - O-ring
c - Foam Pad
2. Insert motor into reservoir. Motor must be seated
properly prior to end cap installation.
5. Install grommet, washer and screw cap to cylinder end cap. Tighten screw securely.
a
b
c
51195
51196
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a - Grommet
b - Washer
c - Screw Cap
MID-SECTION - 5B-33
6. Place drive shaft into oil pump.
10. Install lubricated O-rings and “E” clip to manual
release valve.
7. Install lubricated O-ring to base of reservoir.
8. Carefully guide reservoir (with motor) down onto
drive shaft.
b
a
c
b
a
51196
a - “E” Clip
b - O-ring
c - Manual Release Valve
11. Insert manual release valve into manifold and
tighten snuggly. Back release valve out 3 or 4
turns allowing trim rod installation.
b
a
51194
a - Drive Shaft
b - O-ring
9. Secure reservoir to manifold using four screws.
Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (7.9 N·m).
c
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
c - Reverse Thrust Valve
a
a
51193
a - Screw
5B-34 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Trim Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated O-rings and rod wiper to end
cap.
4. Apply Loctite Grade A (271) to threads of trim rod
and install trim rod piston. Tighten piston securely
using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long peg).
b
a
a
c
b
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
2. Secure trim rod in soft jawed vise as shown.
51146
3. Slide end cap onto trim rod.
a - Trim Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
a
5. Install lubricated O-ring to trim rod piston.
6. Install check ball components into its respective
bore.
7. Secure components in place using plate and
screws. Torque screws securely.
d
e
f
a
51146
a - End Cap
c
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
51147
- Screw
- Plate
- O-ring
- Ball
- Seat, Spring
- Spring
MID-SECTION - 5B-35
Trim Rod Installation
4. Install trim rod into cylinder.
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vise.
2. Fill trim cylinder three inches (76.2mm) from top
of cylinder using Quicksilver Power Trim and
Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
3. Install lubricated O-ring to memory piston and
place into cylinder. Push piston down to level of
oil.
b
a
51196
5. Tighten end cap assembly to cylinder securely
using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long
pegs).
51144
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
IMPORTANT: Memory piston must not come in
contact with trim rod end cap during end cap/trim
rod installation.
51145
6. Tighten manual release valve snuggly following
end cap installation.
5B-36 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Bleeding Power Trim Unit
Power Trim Unit Installation
IMPORTANT: Manual release valve must be in the
closed position during power trim bleeding and
operation.
1. Apply Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1) to
lower pivot pin hole and pivot pin surface.
1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
2. Remove fill screw. Add Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid (92-90100A12) or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II
up to threads of reservoir.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin bore and position lower dowel pin (RETAINED) in its respective
hole.
b
a
51148
a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
3. Position trim cylinder assembly (BOTTOM
FIRST) between clamp brackets and route trim
pump electrical harness through access hole in
starboard clamp bracket.
50241
3. Using a 12 volt power supply connect positive
lead to green wire, negative lead to blue wire and
drive trim rod to the down position. Connect positive lead to blue wire and negative lead to green
wire and drive trim rod to the up position. Recheck
fluid level, add fluid if required and repeat cycle
until fluid level remains at lower portion of
threads.
2
a
4. Install fill plug.
1
51195
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5B-37
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into
clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until
pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
7. Using a suitable mallet, drive upper pivot pin into
swivel bracket and through trim ram until pivot pin
is flushed with swivel bracket.
b
a
c
a
51148
51147
a - Lower Pivot Pin
5. Using a suitable punch, drive lower dowel pin into
its respective bore until seated.
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Trim Ram
8. Drive upper dowel pin (RETAINED) into its respective hole until seated.
a
a
51147
51148
a - Dowel Pin
a - Lower Dowel Pin
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) to
surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin bore and trim
ram bore.
9. Remove trim fluid fill screw. Fluid level should be
to bottom of threads. Add Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid (92-90100A12) or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II
to trim system, if necessary.
10. Reinstall fill screw.
a
11. Power trim may now be operated to lower outboard to desired position. Trim system is self
bleeding.
c
12. Reconnect spark plug leads to spark plugs.
b
13. Reinstall top cowl.
14. Connect battery leads to battery terminals.
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Pivot Pin Bore
c - Trim Ram Bore
5B-38 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION
5
50158
POWER TRIM (DESIGN II)
C
Table of Contents
Page
Power Trim General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-1
Trimming Outboard “Up” (“Out”) . . . . . . . 5C-1
Trimming Outboard “Down” (“In”) . . . . . . 5C-1
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-2
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually . . 5C-2
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-2
Power Trim System Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-3
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-3
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant Application
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-3
Power Trim Flow Diagrams Design II . . . . . . . 5C-4
Design II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-5
Design II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-6
Design II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-7
Design II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-8
Design II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-9
Design II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-10
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-11
Determining if Problem is Electrical or
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-11
Trouble Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-11
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . 5C-12
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-12
Leak Down Check – Pump and Manifold
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-12
Leak Down Check – Pilot Valve
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-13
Leak Down Check – Manual Release
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-13
Leakage Past Ball and Seat – Piston
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-13
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . 5C-14
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . 5C-15
Electrical System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 5C-16
5C-0 - MID-SECTION
Page
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount Remote
Control (Power Trim/Tilt Electric Start with
Warning Horn) Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . 5C-16
Power Trim System Wiring Diagram . . . . . 5C-17
Troubleshooting the “Down” Circuit*
(When “Up” Circuit is OK) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-18
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit*
(When “Down” Circuit Is OK) . . . . . . . . . 5C-19
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits
(All Circuits Inoperative)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-20
Power Trim System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-21
Power Trim System Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . 5C-22
Trim Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-22
Trim Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-23
Trim “Motor” Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-25
Trim Motor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-25
Reservoir Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . . 5C-26
Oil Pump/Manifold Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-27
Cleaning and Inspection of Trim Rod
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-28
Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Trim Pump Motor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Thermal Overload Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Motor Assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Motor Disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-29
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-30
Test for Shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-30
Test for Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-30
Checking and Cleaning Commutator . 5C-30
Power Trim System Re-assembly . . . . . . . . . 5C-30
Manifold/Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . 5C-30
Trim Motor Re-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-31
Reservoir Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-33
Trim Rod Re-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-34
Trim Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-35
Bleeding Power Trim Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-36
Power Trim Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5C-37
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim General
Information
Description
The Power Trim system consists of an electric motor,
pressurized fluid reservoir, pump and trim cylinder.
The remote control (or trim panel) is equipped with a
switch that is used for trimming the outboard “up” and
“down”, and for tilting the outboard for shallow water
operation (at slow speed) or for “trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed “up” or “down” while engine is
under power or when engine is not running.
Trimming Characteristics
NOTE: Because varying hull designs react differently
in various degrees of rough water, it is recommended
to experiment with trim positions to determine whether trimming “up” or “down” will improve the ride in
rough water.
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
Operating “Up” circuit will actuate the “up” solenoid
(located under engine cowl) and close the electric
motor circuit. The electric motor will drive the pump,
thus forcing automatic transmission fluid thru internal
passageways into the “up” side of the trim ram.
The trim cylinder/trim ram will position the engine at
the desired trim angle within the 20° maximum trim
range. The Power Trim system is designed so the engine cannot be trimmed beyond the 20° maximum
trim angle as long as engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM.
When trimming your outboard from a mid-trim position (trim tab in neutral, straight fore-and-aft, position), you can expect the following results:
The engine can be raised beyond the 20° maximum
trim angle for shallow water operation, etc., by keeping the engine RPM below 2000 RPM. If engine
speed increases above 2000 RPM, the thrust created
by the propeller (if deep enough in the water) should
cause the trim system to automatically lower the engine back to the 20° maximum trim angle.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (“OUT”)
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (“IN”)
WARNING
WARNING
Excessive trim “out” may reduce the stability of
some high speed hulls. To correct instability at
high speed, reduce the power gradually and trim
the motor “In” slightly before resuming high
speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will
cause a sudden change of steering torque and
may cause additional momentary boat instability.)
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may cause
undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions.
Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the tilt
angle (tilt pin relocation).
Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top speed.
In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right
(bow steer).
Transfers steering torque harder to left on installations below 23 in. transom height.
Increases clearance over submerged objects.
In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
In excess, can cause insufficient water supply to water pump resulting in serious water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
Usually improves ride in choppy water.
Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to
the left).
Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving tilt
pin one hole closer to transom).
Operating “Down” circuit will actuate the “down” solenoid (located under engine cowl) and close the electric motor circuit (motor will run in opposite direction
of the “Up” circuit). The electric motor will drive the
pump, thus forcing automatic transmission fluid thru
internal passageways into the “down” side of the tilt
ram. The tilt ram will move the engine downward to
the desired angle.
MID-SECTION - 5C-1
Trailering Outboard
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
While operating “up” circuit, tilt ram will continue to tilt
outboard to full up position for trailering.
Tilting Outboard Up and Down
Manually
WARNING
Before loosening the manual release valve, make
sure all persons are clear of engine as engine will
drop to full “down” position when valve is loosened.
With power trim installed, the outboard can be raised
or lowered manually by opening the manual release
valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise).
a
Operating some boats with engine trimmed to the
full “in” trim angle [not using trim adjustment pin
(a)] at planing speed will cause undesirable and/
or unsafe steering conditions. Each boat must be
water tested for handling characteristics after engine installation and after any trim adjustments.
IMPORTANT: Some boat/motor combinations,
that do not use the trim adjustment pin (a) and are
trimmed to the full “in” trim angle, will not experience any undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions during planing speed. Thus, not using
trim adjustment pin may be desired. However,
some boats with engine trimmed to the full “in”
trim angle at planing speed will cause undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. If these
steering conditions are experienced, under no
circumstances should the engine be operated
without the trim adjustment pin and without the
pin adjusted in the proper holes to prevent unsafe
handling characteristics.
Water test the boat not using the trim adjustment pin.
If undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions are
experienced (boat runs with nose down), install trim
adjustment pin (a) in proper hole to prevent unsafe
handling characteristics.
a
50146
a - Manual Release Valve
51057
5C-2 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
NOTE: It is recommended that “ALL” O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
Power Trim System
Components
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
-
Trim Rod
2
Dowel Pin
Pivot Pin
Rod Wiper
O-ring .671 in. I.D.
Cylinder Cap
O-ring 1.864 in. I.D.
O-ring .614 in. I.D.
Trim Rod Piston
Ball (5)
Seat Spring (5)
Spring (5)
Retainer Plate
Screw (3)
O-ring 1.600 in. I.D. (2)
Memory Piston
Trim Rod Cylinder
6
Screw (2)
O-ring .208 in. I.D. (2)
7
O-ring .114 in. I.D.
Spool
8
O-ring .301 in. I.D. (3)
Sleeve
9
Spring
10
Valve Seat
Valve
11
12
Spring (2)
Ball
13
Dowel Pin (2)
Manifold
a 14
O-ring .114 in. I.D.
O-ring .208 in. I.D.
15
O-ring .239 in. I.D.
Relief Valve
“E” Clip
16
Dowel Pin
O-ring .176 in. I.D. (2)
Bolt
Drive Shaft
O-ring 2.364 in. I.D.
Reservoir
Bolt (4)
Washer (4)
O-ring .538 in. I.D.
Fill Screw
Wire Harness
Cap
Washer
Grommet
Screw (4)
Screw
Reservoir Cap
O-ring 2.634 in. I.D.
Nut (2)
Disk Foam Pad
End Cap
Washer (2; .030 in. Thick)
Thrust Washer
Armature
Washer (.010 in. Thick)
Housing
End Frame
O-ring .489 in. I.D.
Bolt (2)
Trim Pump
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
46
3
47
51
41
48
49
52
50
f
A
1
45
c
42
44
53
55
56
5
54 e
43
4
57
58
40
b
18
17
B
59
d 38
39
60
65
2
61
37
62
36
19
22
28
3
20
21
27
23
B
25
64
63
24
30
26
32
29
31
33
35
34
51005
Torque Specifications
a 35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m)
b 100 lb. in. (11.3 N·m)
c 70 lb. in. (7.9 N·m)
d 90 lb. in. (10.2 N·m)
e 25 lb. in. (2.8 N·m)
f 13 lb. in. (1.5 N·m)
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant
Application Points
A
B
Loctite Grade “A” (271)
Special Lubricant 101
MID-SECTION - 5C-3
Power Trim Flow Diagrams
Design II
51644
5C-4 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design II
51645
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-5
Design II
51646
5C-6 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design II
51647
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-7
Design II
51648
5C-8 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design II
51649
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-9
Design II
51650
5C-10 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting
Determining if Problem is Electrical
or Hydraulic
Refer to the following chart to determine which system is at fault.
Trouble Chart
Outboard will not trim up or down.
Outboard trims up, will not trim
down.
Determine if Power Trim pump
motor operates when appropriate trim circuit is activated.
Outboard trims down, will not trim
up.
Outboard will not return completely to “down” position or returns part
way with jerky motion.
Pump motor operates.
Pump motor does not operate.
Refer to “Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting”.
Refer to “Electrical System
Troubleshooting”.
Outboard thumps when shifted.
Outboard trails out when backing
off throttle at high speed.
Outboard will not hold a trimmed
position or will not remain tilted for
any extended period.
Outboard will not hold trim position
when in reverse.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-11
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
power trim system.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components
have been found (during troubleshooting procedure) it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball valve components and
castings must be cleaned using engine cleaner
and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
Leak Down Check – Pump and Manifold Assembly
NOTE: Scribe (d) pump housing halves before disassembly. Check pump for problems as follows:
1. Debris or chips between valve and seat (a). Usually imbedded in rubber valve seat.
2. Nicked or deteriorated O-ring (b).
3. Nicked, deteriorated or misplaced O-ring between manifold and trim cylinder. Refer to “Manifold Removal” for O-ring location.
IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized.
Outboard must be in the full “UP” position (trim
rod fully extended) prior to fill/drain plug, or manual release valve removal.
d
Refer to instructions following if disassembly is required when servicing.
Follow preliminary checks before proceeding to troubleshooting flow diagrams (following).
Preliminary Checks
IMPORTANT: Operate Power Trim system after
each check to see if problem has been corrected.
If problem has not been corrected proceed to next
check.
b
a
51736
1. Check that manual release valve is tightened to
full right (clockwise) position.
2. Check trim pump fluid level with outboard in full
“UP” position and fill if necessary. Refer to “Bleeding Power Trim Unit”.
3. Check for external leaks in Power Trim system.
Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
4. Outboard not holding tilted position (falls down to
trim position) indicates debris or defective components in trim valve assembly. Clean or replace
components as required.
5. Check manual release valve for broken stem and
one O-ring remaining in the release valve passage. (Separate the manifold assembly from the
cylinder to dislodge broken stem.) Install new release valve and test system.
6. Check for nicked, deteriorated or misplaced Orings throughout trim system.
5C-12 - MID-SECTION
b
d
51735
4. After reassembly, insert drive shaft and check
pump rotation resistance to turning – housing
halves can shift/turn during reassembly. Align
scribe marks (d) carefully.
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Leak Down Check – Pilot Valve Assembly
Leakage Past Ball and Seat – Piston
Assembly
1. Debris or chips between valve and seat (a), usually imbedded in rubber valve seat.
Unit will trim to full or near full DOWN position and
then will begin to trim UP while trim switch is held in
“DOWN” mode.
2. Pilot valve installed from non-chamfered end of
spool results in nicked or damaged O-ring (b).
3. Nicked or deteriorated O-ring (c).
A leak path is created between the UP side of the cylinder and the reservoir. The trim system will leak
DOWN until the trim port in cylinder is covered.
c
If trim switch is released, outboard can be pushed (by
hand) DOWN to the point where trim UP started.
1. Inspect balls and seats in piston assembly for debris or damage. Repair or replace balls/seats.
b
a
51560
a - Valve and Seat
b - Pilot Valve O-ring
c - O-ring
51143
a
a - Ball and Seat. Check for Debris or Damage
Leak Down Check – Manual Release
Valve
1. Debris or chips under O-ring (a).
2. Flash from valve molding causing O-ring (a) to not
seal.
3. Nicked O-ring (a).
a
51560
a - O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-13
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Outboard falls to full down position with manual release valve closed.
Example a: Outboard lowers more than one
tilt pin hole in eight hours.
Example b: Outboard lowers during acceleration.
Inspect Manual Release
Valve.
Result
Result
Manual release valve and/or Oring damage.
Manual release valve and O-rings
appear to be OK. Replace Orings.
Replace defective valve and Orings.
Inspect Memory Piston O-ring.
Result
Result
Result
O-ring appear to be OK. Cylinder
bore and memory piston are OK.
Replace O-rings and proceed.
O-ring, memory piston or cylinder
bore defective.
Inspect Oil Pump O-rings (located
below oil pump).
Replace defective O-rings or
components.
Result
O-ring failure (located below oil
pump).
O-rings appear to be OK. Replace O-rings.
Replace O-rings.
Replace oil pump.
5C-14 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Outboard will not hold tilted position in reverse
and/or trails out during high speed deceleration.
Inspect Manual Release
Valve.
Result
Result
Manual release valve and/or Oring damage
Manual release valve and O-rings
appear to be OK. Replace O-rings
and proceed.
Replace defective valve and Orings.
Inspect Trim Rod Piston Check
Valve.
Result
Result
Result
No debris or defective components
found.
Debris found in check valve components.
Inspect Manifold Reverse Thrust
Valve.
Clean check valve components
using engine cleaner and compressed air or replace.
Result
Debris found in manifold reverse
thrust valve components.
No debris found in manifold reverse thrust valve.
Clean manifold reverse thrust
valve without removing components using engine or cleaner and
compressed air or replace.
Replace Manifold as a Unit.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-15
Electrical System
Troubleshooting
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount
Remote Control (Power Trim/Tilt
Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram
g
7
d
e
4
f
a
b
BLK •
BLU •
BRN •
GRY •
GRN •
PUR •
RED •
TAN •
WHT •
YEL •
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Green
Purple
Red
Tan
White
Yellow
- Ignition/Choke Switch
- Emergency Stop Switch
- Neutral Start Switch
- Tachometer/Accessories Harness Connector
- Wiring Harness Connector
- Warning Horn
- Trim/Tilt Switch
5C-16 - MID-SECTION
5
c
23891
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
50436
HARNESS
SIDE MOUNT
REMOTE CONTROL
1
8
Black
Blue
Green
Red
White
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
TO
BATTERY
POWER
TRIM
MODULE
STARTER
SOLENOID
3
2
6
POWER
TRIM
MOTOR
BLK •
BLU •
GRN •
RED •
WHT •
WIRES FROM
Power Trim System Wiring Diagram
MID-SECTION - 5C-17
Troubleshooting the “Down” Circuit*
(When “Up” Circuit is OK)
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 1 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Down” trim button.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 2.
• Depress “Down” trim button.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 4 and black lead to ground.
Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 4 and 1.
No Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit between
Point 3 and positive (+) battery terminal.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check wires for open circuit.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Pump motor wiring is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Relay Switch is defective.
• Pump motor is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indicated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or
open circuit in wire supplying current to Point 5.
5C-18 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit*
(When “Down” Circuit Is OK)
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 8 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Up” trim button.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 6.
• Depress “Up” trim button.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 7 and black lead to ground.
Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 7 and 8.
No Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit between
Point 3 and positive (+) battery terminal.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check wires for open circuit.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Pump motor wiring is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Relay Switch is defective.
• Pump motor is defective.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indicated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or
open circuit in wire supplying current to Point 5.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-19
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits (All Circuits Inoperative)*
Check in-line fuse (under cowl) to
see if fuse is blown.
Blown Fuse:
Fuse Not Blown:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3 and black lead to ground.
Battery voltage should be indicated.
• Correct problem that caused
fuse to blow.
• Replace fuse.
No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 8 and black lead to ground.
• Check battery leads for poor
connections or open circuits.
• Check battery charge.
• Depress “Up” trim button and
check for battery voltage.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Check black ground wires for
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect red Voltmeter lead to
Point 5, and black lead to ground.
No Voltage Indicated:
Check that voltage is being
supplied to control by performing
the following checks:
• DO NOT start engine.
• Turn ignition switch to “Run” position.
• Check for voltage at any instrument, using a Voltmeter.
poor connection or poor ground.
• Pump motor is faulty. Refer to
“Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair”, following.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Trim switch is faulty or there is an
open circuit in wires (green-white,
blue-white) between trim buttons
and trim pump.
• Check trim switch.
• Check all trim harness connectors for loose or corroded connections.
• Check for pinched or severed
wires.
No Voltage Indicated:
Red wire is open between Point 3
and red terminal on back of the ignition switch.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check for open in wire.
5C-20 - MID-SECTION
Battery Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit in wire between Point 5 and Red terminal on
the back of the ignition switch.
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim System Removal
5. Use suitable punch to remove (DRIVE UP) lower
dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
power trim system.
1. Disconnect power trim harness form outboard
wiring harness.
2. Remove screw and clip securing wiring harness
to clamp bracket.
3. Use suitable tool to remove (DRIVE DOWN) upper dowel pin. Retain pin.
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
6. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
4. Use suitable punch to drive out upper pivot pin.
a
a
51144
a - Pivot Pin
51144
a - Pivot Pin
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-21
7. Tilt power trim assembly (top first) out from clamp
bracket and remove assembly.
Power Trim System
Disassembly
Trim Rod Removal
CAUTION
1
DO NOT ADJUST OR REMOVE REVERSE
THRUST VALVE. THIS VALVE IS PRESET AT FACTORY FOR PRECISE REVERSE THRUST PRESSURE AND DOES NOT REQUIRE ADJUSTMENT.
1. Secure power trim assembly in soft jawed vise.
2. Open manual release valve three or four turns
(counterclockwise) and position trim rod to full up
position.
3. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from cylinder
using trim cylinder spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16
in. long pegs).
a
2
51195
b
8. Remove fill cap and drain unit.
c
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
c - Reverse Thrust Valve (Do Not Remove, or Adjust)
51193
9. Remove O-ring from fill cap.
51194
5C-22 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove trim rod assembly from cylinder.
6. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
a
b
51196
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
51196
5. Remove memory piston from cylinder using lockring pliers (Craftsman P/N 4735) or suitable tool.
7. Remove trim system from vise and empty fluid
into appropriate container.
Trim Rod Disassembly
1. Place trim rod assembly on clean work surface.
2. Remove screws securing plate to trim rod piston
and O-ring.
3. Remove check valve components from trim rod
piston.
a
d
b
a
b
c
d
51193
c
51143
- Screw (3)
- Plate
- O-ring
- Piston
CAUTION
When removing Trim Rod piston, spanner
wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs to
avoid damage to trim piston.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-23
4. Place trim rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat
to loosen piston using torch lamp (P/N 91-63209).
5. Loosen trim rod piston using trim spanner spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs).
6. Allow trim rod piston to cool, remove from trim rod.
CAUTION
Do not remove check ball components from trim
rod piston. Removal and re-installation of check
valve could result in improper operating pressure
and possible power trim system damage. If check
valve is defective, replace trim rod piston.
7. Remove inner O-ring from piston.
a
c
b
51199
a - Check Ball Components
b - O-ring
c - Piston
8. Remove rod wiper, inner O-ring and outer O-ring.
51146
b
a
51147
a
b
c
51146
a - Trim Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
5C-24 - MID-SECTION
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove motor harness from reservoir.
Trim “Motor” Removal
1. Secure power trim assembly in soft jawed vise.
2. Remove cap, washer and grommet from reservoir assembly.
b
a
c
51196
Trim Motor Disassembly
51195
a - Cap
b - Washer
c - Grommet
1. Remove end cap from motor housing. Note position of washers on armature.
3. Remove screws securing reservoir cap to reservoir.
c
a
a
b
d
a
51193
a
b
c
d
51194
- End Cap
- Motor Housing
- Wave Washer (2)
- Washer
a - Screws (4)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-25
2. Remove O-ring from end frame.
Reservoir Assembly Removal
3. Place scribe mark on motor housing and end
frame as re-assembly reference, as shown.
CAUTION
DO NOT ADJUST OR REMOVE REVERSE
THRUST VALVE. THIS VALVE IS PRESET AT FACTORY FOR PRECISE REVERSE THRUST PRESSURE AND DOES NOT REQUIRE ADJUSTMENT.
a
1. Remove manual release valve form manifold. DO
NOT remove or adjust reverse thrust valve.
b
51194
b
a - O-ring
b - Scribe Mark
a
51194
4. Remove end frame and armature from housing.
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
2. Remove “E” clip and O-rings from manual release
valve.
e
a
b
d
a
c
c
b
51194
a
b
c
d
e
- End Frame
- Washer
- Armature
- Fiber Guard (Liner)
- Housing
5C-26 - MID-SECTION
51196
a - “E” Clip
b - O-rings
c - Manual Release Valve
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Remove four screws securing reservoir to manifold.
Oil Pump/Manifold Removal
1. Remove screw, oil pump, O-rings and check
valve components from manifold.
e
c
a
d
51006
a
a
b
51193
a - Screws (4)
a
4. Remove reservoir from manifold.
a
5. Remove drive shaft from oil pump.
51007
a
b
c
d
e
- O-rings (3)
- Oil Pump
- Screw
- Spring
- Check Ball
2. Remove screws and manifold from cylinder.
b
a
a
b
c
51194
a - Drive Shaft
b - Oil Pump
51007
a - Trim Cylinder
b - Manifold
c - Screw
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-27
IMPORTANT: Removal of O-ring (e) from manifold
will result in damage to O-ring. O-ring MUST be
replaced after removal.
4. Remove O-rings from cylinder.
3. Remove check valve components from manifold.
a
51008
a - O-rings
e
51736
a
Cleaning and Inspection of
Trim Rod Components
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint
free. Slightest amount of debris in Power Trim
system could cause system to malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not remove check valve components (a) from
trim rod piston. Removal and re-installation of
check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible power trim system damage.
b
c
d
a
e
f
g
51199
h
51008
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
- Manifold
- Spring
- Check Valve
- Check Valve Seat
- O-ring
- Spring
- Sleeve
- Spool
Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris form
check valve if found. If debris cannot be cleaned from
check valve, replace trim rod piston as an assembly.
Clean trim rod and components with parts cleaner
and dry with compressed air.
It is recommended that all O-rings in trim system be
replaced.
Inspect trim rod. If scraper (located in cap) has failed
to keep rod clean, replace scraper.
Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
5C-28 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Motor and Electrical Tests/
Repair
Trim Pump Motor Test
WARNING
Do not perform this test near flammables (or explosives), as a spark may occur when making
connections.
1. Disconnect orange (motor) wire and black (motor) wire from relay switch wiring harness.
2. Connect a 12 volt power supply to motor wires
(positive to orange; negative to black results in
motor up direction. Positive to black; negative to
orange results in motor down direction). Motor
should run.
a
3. If motor does not run, disassemble motor and
check components.
b
Thermal Overload Switch Test
IMPORTANT: If thermal overload switch has been
activated, pump motor cannot be tested for a
minimum of one minute. After this period switch
should close (reset itself) and pump motor may
be operated. Perform the following check(s) only
if switch does not reset itself.
51196
a - Motor Wire (Black)
b - Motor Wire (Orange)
MOTOR DISASSEMBLED
Connect Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads as shown. If
switch is good, full continuity (zero ohms) will be indicated.
MOTOR ASSEMBLED
Connect Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale) leads as shown. If
switch is good, full continuity (zero ohms) will be indicated. If full continuity is not indicated, disassemble
motor and recheck switch per instructions, following.
51193
If full continuity is not indicated, clean switch contact
surfaces, using an ignition point file.
Recheck switch; if full continuity is not indicated, replace end frame.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-29
Armature Tests
Power Trim System
Reassembly
TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature on a Growler (follow Growler manufacturer’s test instructions). Indication of a short requires replacement of armature.
TEST FOR GROUND
Manifold/Oil Pump Installation
IMPORTANT: Install spring, check valve and Oring into manifold. Position components in place
using sleeve to seat in place.
Use an Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale). Place one lead on
Ohmmeter on armature shaft and other lead on commutator, as shown. If continuity is indicated, armature
is grounded and must be replaced.
50999
1. Install check valve components into manifold.
a
51195
b
CHECKING AND CLEANING COMMUTATOR
c
If commutator (a) is worn it can be turned down on an
armature conditioner tool or on a lathe.
d
Clean commutator with “00” sandpaper.
e
a
f
g
h
51008
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
5C-30 - MID-SECTION
- Manifold
- Spring
- Check Valve
- Check Valve Seat
- O-ring
- Spring
- Sleeve
- Spool
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Install O-rings on cylinder and secure manifold
assembly to cylinder using screws. Torque
screws to 100 lb. in. (11.3 N·m).
4. Install check valve components and O-rings to
manifold. Secure oil pump to manifold using bolt.
Torque bolt to 90 lb. in. (10.2 N·m).
e
c
a
d
a
51006
b
a
51008
a
51007
a
b
c
d
e
- O-rings (3)
- Oil Pump
- Screw
- Spring
- Check Ball
Trim Motor Reassembly
b
1. Apply Quicksilver Marine Lubricant (2-4-C) to armature shaft and insert into end frame.
a
51007
a - O-ring
b - Screws [100 lb. in. (11.3 N·m)]
3. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
b
c
51195
a - Armature Shaft
b - Washer
c - End Frame
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-31
2. Guide armature and end frame into housing as
shown.
6. Install end cap to housing. Torque nuts to 25 lb. in.
(2.8 N·m).
c
a
b
d
a
b
c
d
51196
3. Align scribe mark on housing to mark on end
frame.
51194
- End Cap
- Motor Housing
- Wave Washer
- Washer
IMPORTANT: When installing motor, wires (black,
orange) must rest in cavity of cylinder allowing
motor to seat properly.
4. Install lubricated O-ring to end frame.
a
a
b
b
51194
51194
a - O-ring
b - Scribe Mark
a - Manifold
b - Cavity
5. Install washers to armature shaft as shown.
5C-32 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Reservoir Installation
1. Connect trim motor wires to harness.
2. Insert motor into reservoir. Motor must be seated
properly prior to end cap installation.
5. Install grommet, washer and screw cap to cylinder end cap. Tighten screw securely.
a
b
c
51195
a - Screw Cap
b - Washer
c - Grommet
6. Place drive shaft into oil pump.
51196
3. Install end cap, O-ring and foam pad to cylinder.
4. Torque screws to 13 lb. in. (1.5 N·m).
7. Install lubricated O-ring to base of reservoir.
8. Carefully guide (cylinder/motor) down onto drive
shaft.
a
b
c
b
a
51194
a - Drive Shaft
b - O-ring
51195
a - End Cap
b - O-ring
c - Foam Pad
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-33
9. Secure reservoir to manifold using four screws.
Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (7.7 N·m).
Trim Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated O-rings and rod wiper to end
cap.
a
a
a
c
b
51193
a - Screw
10. Install “E” clip, lubricated O-rings and to manual
release valve.
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
2. Secure trim rod in soft jawed vise as shown.
b
3. Slide end cap onto trim rod.
a
a
c
51196
a - “E” Clip
b - O-ring
c - Manual Release Valve
11. Insert manual release valve into manifold and
tighten snuggly. Back release valve out 3 or 4
turns allowing trim rod installation.
b
a
51146
a - End Cap
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
5C-34 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Apply Loctite Grade A (271) to threads of trim rod
and install rod piston. Tighten piston securely using trim cylinder spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in.
long peg).
b
a
Trim Rod Installation
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vise.
2. Fill trim cylinder three inches (76.2mm) from top
of cylinder using Quicksilver Power Trim and
Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
3. Install lubricated O-ring to memory piston and
place into cylinder. Push piston down to level of
oil.
b
a
51146
a - Trim Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
5. Install lubricated O-ring to trim rod piston.
6. Install check valve components into their respective seats.
7. Secure components in place using plate and
screws. Torque screws to 35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m).
51144
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
IMPORTANT: Memory piston must not come in
contact with trim rod end cap during end cap/trim
rod installation.
d
e
f
a
c
b
51147
a
b
c
d
e
f
- Screw (3)
- Plate
- O-ring
- Ball (5)
- Seat, Spring (5)
- Spring (5)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-35
4. Install trim rod into cylinder.
Bleeding Power Trim Unit
IMPORTANT: Manual release valve must be in the
closed position during power trim bleeding and
operation.
1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
2. Remove fill screw. Add Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid (92-90100A12) or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II
up to threads of reservoir. Install cap.
51196
IMPORTANT: Memory piston must not come in
contact with trim rod end cap during end cap/trim
rod installation.
5. Tighten end cap assembly to cylinder securely
using trim cylinder spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16
in. long pegs).
50241
3. Using a 12 volt power supply connect positive
lead to green wire, negative lead to blue wire and
drive trim rod to the down position. Connect positive lead to blue wire and negative lead to green
wire and drive trim rod to the up position. Recheck
fluid level, add fluid if required and repeat cycle
until fluid level remains at lower portion of
threads.
51145
6. Tighten manual release valve snuggly following
end cap installation.
5C-36 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim Unit Installation
1. Apply Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1) to
lower pivot pin hole and pivot pin surface.
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into
clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until
pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin bore and position lower dowel pin (RETAINED) in its respective
hole.
b
a
51147
a - Lower Pivot Pin
a
5. Using a suitable punch, drive lower dowel pin into
its hole until seated.
51148
a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
3. Position trim cylinder assembly (BOTTOM
FIRST) between clamp brackets and route trim
pump electrical harness through access hole in
starboard clamp bracket.
a
2
51148
a - Lower Dowel Pin
a
1
51195
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5C-37
6. Apply Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1) to surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin bore and trim ram
bore.
8. Drive upper dowel pin (a) into its hole until seated.
a
c
a
b
51147
9. Recheck fluid level.
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Pivot Pin Bore
c - Trim Ram Bore
10. Power trim may now be operated to lower outboard to desired position. Trim system is self
bleeding.
11. Re-connect spark plug leads to spark plugs.
7. Using a suitable mallet, drive upper pivot pin into
swivel bracket and through trim ram until pivot pin
is flushed with swivel bracket.
12. Re-install top cowl.
13. Connect battery leads to battery terminals.
b
a
c
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Trim Ram
5C-38 - MID-SECTION
90-8i7643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION
5
51486
POWER TRIM (DESIGN 3)
D
Table of Contents
Page
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-1
Power Trim - General Information . . . . . . . . . . 5D-1
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-1
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-1
Trimming Outboard “Up” (“Out”) . . . . . . . 5D-1
Trimming Outboard “Down” (“In”) . . . . . . 5D-1
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-2
Tilting Outboard Up and Down Manually . . 5D-2
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-2
Power Trim System Components . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-3
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-4
Determining if Problem is Electrical or
Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-4
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . 5D-5
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-5
Leak Down Check - Pump and Manifold
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-5
Leak Down Check - Pilot Valve
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-6
Leak Down Check - Manual Release
Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-6
Leaks Past Ball and Seat - Piston
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-6
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 5D-7
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 5D-8
Electrical System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . 5D-9
Commander 2000 Side Mount Remote
Control (Power Trim/Tilt Electric Start with
Warning Horn) Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . 5D-9
Power Trim System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . 5D10
Troubleshooting the “Down” Circuit*
(When “Up” Circuit is OK) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-11
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit*
(When “Down” Circuit Is OK) . . . . . . . . . 5D-12
Troubleshooting the “Down” and “Up” Circuits
(All Circuits Inoperative)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 5D-13
5D-0 - MID-SECTION
Power Trim System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Trim System Disassembly . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim “Motor” Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim “Motor” Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Assembly Removal . . . . . . . . . .
Manifold Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and Inspection of Trim Rod
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Pump Motor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test for Shorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test for Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Cleaning Commutator .
Power Trim System Reassembly . . . . . . . . . .
Manifold Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Motor Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reservoir Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purging Power Trim Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Trim Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
5D-14
5D-15
5D-15
5D-16
5D-18
5D-18
5D-18
5D-19
5D-20
5D-20
5D-20
5D-20
5D-20
5D-20
5D-21
5D-21
5D-21
5D-22
5D-23
5D-24
5D-25
5D-26
5D-26
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Will lift bow of boat, usually increasing top speed.
Special Tools
Part No.
Transfers steering torque harder to port (left) on installations below 23 in. transom height.
Torch Lamp
91-63209
Increases clearance over submerged objects.
Spanner Wrench
91-74951
In excess, can cause “porpoising” and/or ventilation.
Multi-Meter DVA Tester
91-99750
In excess, can cause insufficient water supply to water pump resulting in serious water pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Description
Quicksilver Lubricants and
Service Aids
Description
Part No.
Power Trim and Steering Fluid
91-9010012
Loctite 271
91-32609-1
Liquid Neoprene
91-25711-1
Anti-Corrosion Grease
91-78376A6
Power Trim - General
Information
Description
The Power Trim system consists of an electric motor,
pressurized fluid reservoir, pump and trim cylinder.
The remote control (or trim panel) is equipped with a
switch that is used for trimming the outboard “up” and
“down”, and for tilting the outboard for shallow water
operation (at slow speed) or for “trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed “up” or “down” while engine is
under power or when engine is not running.
Trimming Characteristics
When trimming outboard from a mid-trim position
(trim tab in neutral, straight fore-and-aft position), you
can expect the following results:
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (“OUT”)
WARNING
Excessive trim “out” may reduce the stability of
some high speed hulls. To correct instability at
high speed, reduce the power gradually and trim
the motor “In” slightly before resuming high
speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will
cause a sudden change of steering torque and
may cause additional momentary boat instability.)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
Operating “Up” circuit will actuate the “up” relay (located under engine cowl) and close the electric motor
circuit. The electric motor drives the pump, forcing
fluid thru internal passageways into the “up” side of
the trim cylinder.
The trim cylinder/trim ram will position the engine at
the desired trim angle within the 20° maximum trim
range. The Power Trim system is designed so the engine cannot be trimmed beyond the 20° maximum
trim angle as long as engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM.
The engine can be raised beyond the 20° maximum
trim angle for shallow water operation, etc., by keeping the engine RPM below 2000 RPM. If engine RPM
increases above 2000 RPM, the thrust created by the
propeller (if deep enough in the water) will cause the
trim system to automatically lower the engine back to
the 20° maximum trim angle.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (“IN”)
WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may cause
undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions.
Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the tilt
angle (tilt bolt relocation).
Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy load.
Usually improves ride in choppy water.
In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or right
(bow steer).
Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less to
the left).
Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving tilt
bolt one hole closer to transom).
MID-SECTION - 5D-1
Operating “Down” circuit will actuate the “down” relay
(located under engine cowl) and close the electric
motor circuit (motor will run in opposite direction of the
“Up” circuit). The electric motor will drive the pump,
forcing fluid thru internal passageways into the
“down” side of the tilt ram. The tilt ram will move the
engine down to the desired angle.
Trailering Outboard
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
While operating “up” circuit, the ram will continue to
tilt outboard to full up position for trailering.
Tilting Outboard Up and Down
Manually
WARNING
Before opening the manual release valve, make
sure all persons are clear of engine as engine will
drop to full “down” position when valve is
opened.
Trim “In” Angle Adjustment
WARNING
Operating some boats with engine trimmed to the
full “in” trim angle [not using trim adjustment bolt
(a)] at planing speed will cause undesirable and/
or unsafe steering conditions. Each boat must be
water tested for handling characteristics after engine installation and after any trim adjustments.
IMPORTANT: Some boat/motor combinations,
that do not use the trim adjustment bolt (a) and
are trimmed to the full “in” trim angle, will not experience any undesirable and/or unsafe steering
conditions during planing speed. Thus, not using
trim adjustment bolt may be desired. However,
some boats with engine trimmed to the full “in”
trim angle at planing speed will cause undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions. If these
steering conditions are experienced, under no
circumstances should the engine be operated
without the trim adjustment bolt and without the
bolt adjusted in the proper holes to prevent unsafe handling characteristics.
Water test the boat not using the trim adjustment bolt.
If undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions are
experienced (boat runs with nose down), install trim
adjustment bolt in proper hole to prevent unsafe handling characteristics.
With power trim installed, the outboard can be raised
or lowered manually by opening the manual release
valve 3 turns maximum (counterclockwise).
a
a
52029
a - Trim Adjustment Bolt
52028
a - Manual Release Valve
5D-2 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim System
Components
1 - Tilt/Trim Cylinder
2 - Reservoir/Motor Housing
3 - Piston Rod
4 - Upper Pivot Shaft
5 - Cross Pin
5
6 - O-ring
7 - End Cap Seal
8 - End Cap
9 - O-ring
10- O-ring
11- Piston Assembly
12- O-ring
8
13- O-ring
14- Memory Piston
9
15- Lower Pivot Shaft
16- Cross Pin
17- Screw (2)
18- Pump Assembly
10
19- Pilot Valve Assembly
20- O-ring
21- Driveshaft
22- Washer (4)
11
23- Screw (4)
24- Fill Screw
25- O-ring
26- Motor Frame
12
27- Thrust Washer (2)
28- Armature
13
29- Ring
30- Seal
31- Screw (2)
32- Screw (4)
33- Relay
14
34- Wiring Harness
35- Relay Mount (2)
36- Rubber Mount (2)
37- Screw (2)
38- Spacer (2)
39- Anode
40- Washer (2)
41- Screw (2)
42- Manual Release Valve
43- O-ring
44- E-clip
Q
4
31
26
32
3
Q
6
7
23
2
1
30
B
25
29
24
17
27
22
16
28
20
27
21
44
37
36
38
35
19
Q
38
36
18
15
43
42
33
37
39
35
34
P
40
33
41
51498
NOTE: Lubricate all
O-rings and seals with
Quicksilver Lubricants
and Service Aids
B
Loctite “271” (92-32609-1)
P
Liquid Neoprene (92-25711-1)
Q
Power Trim and Steering Fluid (92-90100A12)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Q
Torque Specifications
a
b
c
d
- 100 lb. in (11.1 N·m)
- 13 lb. ft. (1.5 N·m)
- 70 lb. in. (7.7 N·m)
- 35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m)
MID-SECTION - 5D-3
Troubleshooting
Determining if Problem is Electrical
or Hydraulic
When a problem is encountered with the Power Trim
system, the first step is to determine whether the malfunction is in the “electrical system” or the “hydraulic
system.” Refer to the following chart to determine
which system is at fault.
Problem Chart
Outboard will not trim up or
down.
Outboard trims up, will not trim
down.
Determine if Power Trim
pump motor operates when
appropriate trim circuit is
activated.
Outboard trims down, will not
trim up.
Outboard will not return completely to “down” position or returns part way with jerky motion.
Outboard
shifted.
thumps
Pump motor operates.
Pump motor does not operate
when
Refer to “Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting.”
Refer to “Electrical System
Troubleshooting.”
Outboard trails out when backing off throttle at high speed.
Outboard will not hold a
trimmed position or will not remain tilted for any extended
period.
Outboard will not hold trim position when in reverse.
5D-4 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
power trim system.
After debris or failed components have been
found (during troubleshooting procedures) disassemble unit completely and replace all O-rings.
Check ball valve components and castings must
be cleaned using engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
Leak Down Check - Pump and
Manifold Assembly
NOTE: Scribe (d) pump housing and manifold before
disassembly.
1. Debris or chips between valve and seat (a), usually imbedded in rubber valve seat.
2. Nicked or deteriorated O-ring (b).
3. Nicked, deteriorated, or misplaced O-ring (c).
Power trim system is pressurized. Outboard must
be in the full ‘‘UP” position (cylinder fully extended) prior to fill screw or manual release valve
removal.
a
Refer to instructions following if disassembly is required.
Follow preliminary checks before proceeding to troubleshooting flow diagrams (following).
d
Preliminary Checks
Operate Power Trim System after each check to
see if problem is corrected. If not, proceed with
the next check.
b
1. Check that manual release valve is tightened to
full right (clockwise) position.
2. Check trim pump fluid level with outboard in full
“UP” position and fill if necessary. Refer to “Fill
and Purge the Power Trim System.”
3. Check for external leaks in Power Trim system.
Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
c
51560
4. After reassembly, insert driveshaft and check
pump rotor resistance to turning - housing halves
can shift/turn during reassembly. Align scribe
marks (d) carefully.
4. Outboard not holding tilted position (falls to trim in
position) indicates debris or defective components in trim valve assembly. Clean or replace
components as required.
5. Check manual release valve for broken stem and
one O-ring remaining in the release valve passage. (Separate the manifold assembly from the
cylinder to dislodge broken stem.) Install new release valve and test system.
6. Check for nicked, deteriorated, or misplaced
O-rings throughout trim system.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-5
Leak Down Check - Pilot Valve
Assembly
Leaks Past Ball and Seat - Piston
Assembly
1. Debris or chips between valve and seat (a), usually imbedded in rubber valve seat.
Unit will trim to full or near full down position and then
will begin to trim up while trim switch is held in
‘‘DOWN” mode.
2. Pilot valve installed from non-chamfered end of
spool, results in nicked or damaged O-ring (b).
3. Nicked or deteriorated O-ring (c).
A leak path is created between the UP side of the cylinder and the reservoir. The trim system will leak
down until the trim port in cylinder is covered.
If trim switch is released, outboard can be pushed (by
hand) down to the point where trim UP started.
1. Inspect balls and seats in piston assembly for debris or damage. Repair or replace balls/seats.
c
a
b
a
51143
51560
a - Valve and Seat
b - Pilot Valve O-ring
c - O-ring
a - Ball and Seat. Check All For Debris or Damage.
Leak Down Check - Manual Release
Valve
1. Debris or chips under O-ring (a).
2. Flash from valve molding causing O-ring (a) to not
seal.
3. Nicked O-ring (a).
a
51560
a - O-ring
5D-6 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Outboard falls to full down position with manual release valve closed.
Example a: Outboard lowers more than one
tilt bolt hole in eight hours.
Example b: Outboard lowers during acceleration.
Inspect Manual Release
Valve.
Result
Result
Manual release valve and/or Oring damage.
Manual release valve and O-rings
appear to be OK. Replace Orings.
Replace defective valve and Orings.
Result
O-rings appear to be OK. Cylinder bore and memory piston are
OK. Replace O-rings and proceed.
Inspect O-rings on Pilot Relief
Valve (located in manifold assembly).
Results
Results
O-ring failure.
O-rings appear to be OK. Replace O-rings.
Inspect Memory Piston
O-ring.
Replace O-rings.
Results
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Results
All components appear to be OK.
O-ring or Cylinder Bore Defective.
Replace Manifold and Pump Assembly.
Replace O-ring or Components.
MID-SECTION - 5D-7
Troubleshooting Flow Diagram
Outboard will not hold tilted position in reverse
and/or trails out during high speed deceleration.
Inspect Manual Release
Valve.
Results
Results
Manual release valve and/or Oring damage.
Manual release valve and O-rings
appear to be OK. Replace O-rings
and proceed.
Replace defective valve and Orings.
Inspect Trim Rod Piston Check
Valve.
Results
Results
No debris or defective components
found.
Debris found in check valve components.
Inspect Manifold Reverse Thrust
Valve.
Clean check valve components
using engine cleaner and compressed air or replace.
Replace Pump and Manifold Assembly.
5D-8 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Electrical System Troubleshooting
COMMANDER 2000 Side Mount
Remote Control (Power Trim/Tilt
Electric Start with Warning Horn)
Wiring Diagram
g
UP
DOWN
7
d
e
4
f
a
b
BLK •
BLU •
BRN •
GRY •
GRN •
PUR •
RED •
TAN •
WHT •
YEL •
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Black
Blue
Brown
Gray
Green
Purple
Red
Tan
White
Yellow
- Ignition/Choke Switch
- Emergency Stop Switch
- Neutral Start Switch
- Tachometer/Accessories Harness Connector
- Wiring Harness Connector
- Warning Horn
- Trim/Tilt Switch
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
5
c
23891
MID-SECTION - 5D-9
Power Trim System Wiring Diagram
BLK •
BLU •
GRN •
RED •
BLU/WHT •
GRN/WHT •
Black
Blue
Green
Red
Blue/White
Green/White
Negative (–)
Trim Motor (UP)
Trim Motor (DOWN)
Positive (+)
Trim Switch to UP Relay
Trim Switch to DOWN Relay
8
Wiring From
Side Mount
Remote
Control
Harness
1
Power
Trim
Motor
Engine Harness
Fuse
3
Rectifier
Start Solenoid
To Battery
UP
DOWN
Trim Relays
51507
5D-10 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting the “Down” Circuit*
(When “Up” Circuit is OK)
*Remote Control Not Equipped with Trailer
Button
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 1 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Down” trim button.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Down Relay is Defective. Replace and retest.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 4 and black lead to ground.
Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 4 and 1.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indicated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or
open circuit in wire supplying current to Point 5.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-11
Troubleshooting the “Up” Circuit*
(When “Down” Circuit Is OK)
*Remote Control NOT Equipped with Trailer
Button
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 8 and black lead to ground.
Depress the “Up” trim button.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
UP Relay is defective. Replace and retest.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 7 and black lead to ground.
Depress “Down” trim button. If battery voltage is indicated, wire is
open between Points 7 and 8.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 5. If battery voltage is indicated, trim switch is faulty. If no battery voltage, check for loose or corroded connection at Point 5 or
open circuit in wire supplying current to Point 5.
5D-12 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting the “Down” and
“Up” Circuits (All Circuits
Check in-line fuse (under cowl) to
see if fuse is blown
Inoperative)*
*Remote Control NOT Equipped with Trailer
Button
Blown Fuse:
Fuse Not Blown:
Connect Voltmeter red lead to
Point 3 and black lead to ground,
Battery voltage should be indicated.
• Correct problem that caused
fuse to blow.
• Replace fuse.
No Voltage Indicated:
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Check battery leads for poor
• Connect Voltmeter red lead to
connections or open circuits.
Point 8 and black lead to ground.
• Check battery charge.
• Depress “Up” trim button and
check for battery voltage.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
• Check black ground wires for
poor connection or poor ground.
No Voltage Indicated:
Connect red Voltmeter lead to
Point 5, and black lead to ground.
• Pump motor is faulty. Refer to
“Motor and Electrical Tests/Repair,” following.
No Voltage Indicated:
Check that voltage is being
supplied to control by performing
the following checks:
• DO NOT start engine.
Battery Voltage Indicated:
Trim switch is faulty or there is an
open circuit in wires (green-white,
blue-white) between trim buttons
and trim pump.
• Turn ignition switch to “Run” po-
• Check trim switch.
• Check all trim harness connec-
sition.
• Check for voltage at any instrument using a Voltmeter.
tors for loose or corroded connections.
• Check for pinched or severed
wires.
No Voltage Indicated:
Red wire is open between Point 3
and red terminal on back of the ignition switch.
• Check for loose or corroded connections.
• Check for open circuit in wire.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Battery Voltage Indicated:
There is an open circuit in wire between Point 5 and Red terminal on
the back of the ignition switch.
MID-SECTION - 5D-13
Power Trim System Removal
Inspect cross pin hole and pivot pin hole for damage.
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
power trim system.
6. Use suitable punch to remove (DRIVE UP) lower
dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
1. Disconnect power trim harness from outboard
wiring harness.
2. Remove screw and clip securing wiring harness
to clamp bracket.
3. Remove trim gauge sender (if equipped).
4. Use suitable tool to remove upper headed cross
pin. Retain pin. Straight pin is hard to remove (see
item 5).
ab
51144
a - Cross Pin
7. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
51505
a - Cross Pin (Design 1 - Straight)
b - Cross Pin (Design 2 - Headed)
5. Drive out upper pivot pin. This will shear cross pin.
51144
a
a - Pivot Pin
50515
a - Upper Pivot Pin
5D-14 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
8. Tilt power trim assembly (top first) out from clamp
bracket and remove assembly.
Power Trim System
Disassembly
Trim Rod Removal
1. Secure power trim assembly in soft jawed vise.
2. Open manual release valve three turns maximum (counterclockwise) and position trim rod to
full up position.
3. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from cylinder
using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long
pegs).
a
c
b
51195
9. Remove fill screw and drain unit.
a
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
c - Spanner Wrench (P/N 91-74951)
4. Remove trim rod assembly from cylinder.
51505
a - Fill Screw
10. Remove O-ring from fill cap.
51194
51196
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-15
5. Remove memory piston from cylinder using lockring pliers (Craftsman P/N 4735) or suitable tool.
Trim Rod Disassembly
1. Place trim rod assembly on clean work surface.
2. Remove screws securing plate to trim rod piston
and O-ring.
3. Remove check ball components from trim rod piston.
a
d
b
a
b
c
d
LOCK-RING PLIERS
c
51143
- Screw (3)
- Plate
- O-ring
- Piston
CAUTION
51193
6. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
When removing Trim Rod piston, spanner
wrench must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs to
avoid damage to trim piston.
a
b
51196
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
7. Remove trim system from vise and empty fluid
into appropriate container.
5D-16 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Place trim rod into soft jawed vise and apply heat
to shock piston using torch lamp (a) (P/N
91-63209).
5. Loosen trim rod piston using spanner wrench (1/4
in. x 5/16 in. long pegs).
6. Allow trim rod piston to cool. Remove from trim
rod.
CAUTION
Do not remove check ball components (a) from
trim rod piston. Removal and re-installation of
check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible power trim system damage. If check valve is defective, replace trim rod
piston.
7. Remove inner O-ring from piston.
a
a
c
b
51199
a - Check Ball Components
b - O-ring
c - Piston
8. Remove rod wiper, inner O-ring and outer O-ring.
51146
a - Torch Lamp
b
c
51147
a
b
c
51145
51146
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-Ring
c - Outer O-Ring
b - Spanner Wrench
c - Trim Rod Piston
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-17
Trim “Motor” Removal
Trim “Motor” Disassembly
1. Secure power trim assembly in soft jawed vise.
1. Remove armature from motor frame. Note position of washers on armature.
2. Remove screws securing end cap to reservoir
and remove end cap.
b
a
c
c
a
a
51486
a - Armature
b - Motor Frame
c - Washer (1 each end of armature)
Reservoir Assembly Removal
1. Remove manual release valve from manifold.
51486
a - Screws (4)
3. Remove motor from reservoir.
a
b
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
2. Remove “E” clip and O-rings from manual release
valve.
b
a
c
51484
51196
a - “E” Clip
b - O-rings
c - Manual Release Valve
5D-18 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Remove four screws securing reservoir to manifold.
Manifold Removal
1. Remove screws and manifold from cylinder.
b
a
c
a
a
51193
a - Screws (4)
4. Remove reservoir from manifold.
51007
a - Trim Cylinder
b - Manifold
c - Screw (2)
5. Remove drive shaft from oil pump.
2. Remove check valve components from manifold.
a
IMPORTANT: Sleeve (d) is chamfered on I.D. on
end opposite drilled cross hole. Install spool (b)
(with O-ring installed) from chamfered end of
sleeve to avoid possibility of damaging O-ring on
spool.
a b
c
b
d
e
f
c
g
h
51560
51486
a - Reservoir
b - Drive Shaft
c - Oil Pump
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
- O-ring (0.114 I.D.)
- Spool
- O-ring (0.301 I.D.) (3 each)
- Sleeve
- Spring
- Valve Seat
- Valve
- Spring
MID-SECTION - 5D-19
3. Remove O-rings from cylinder.
Motor and Electrical
Tests/Repair
Trim Pump Motor Test
a
WARNING
Do not perform this test near flammables (or explosives), as a spark may occur when making
connections.
1. Disconnect green (motor) wire and blue (motor)
wire from trim system wiring harness.
51008
a - O-rings (2)
Cleaning and Inspection of
Trim Rod Components
CAUTION
Do not remove check ball components (a) from
trim rod piston. Removal and re-installation of
check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible power trim system damage.
2. Connect a 12 volt power supply to motor wires
(positive to blue; negative to green results in motor up direction. Positive to green; negative to
blue results in motor down direction). Motor
should run.
3. If motor does not run, disassemble motor and
check components.
Armature Tests
TEST FOR SHORTS
Check armature on a Growler (follow Growler manufacturer’s test instructions). Indication of a short requires replacement of armature.
TEST FOR GROUND
a
Use an Ohmmeter (R x 1 scale). Place one lead on
Ohmmeter on armature shaft and other lead on commutator, as shown. If continuity is indicated, armature
is grounded and must be replaced.
51199
Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris form
check valve if found. If debris cannot be cleaned from
check valve, replace trim rod piston as an assembly.
Clean trim rod and components with parts cleaner
and dry with compressed air.
It is recommended that all O-rings in trim system be
replaced.
Inspect trim rod. If scraper (located in cap) has failed
to keep rod clean, replace scraper.
Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
5D-20 - MID-SECTION
51195
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
CHECKING AND CLEANING COMMUTATOR
1. Install check valve components into manifold.
a b
If commutator (a) is worn it can be turned down on an
armature conditioner tool or on a lathe.
c
Clean commutator with “00” sandpaper.
a
d
e
f
g
h
51560
Power Trim System
Reassembly
Manifold Installation
IMPORTANT: Install spring, check valve and Oring into manifold. Position components in place
using sleeve to seat in place. It is recommended
that O-ring and valve seat be replaced when installing Screw and Seal Kit 811226A1 in manifold.
a
a
b
c
d
- O-ring (0.114 I.D.)
- Spool
- O-ring (0.301 I.D.) (3 each)
- Sleeve
- Spring
- Valve Seat
- Valve
- Spring
IMPORTANT: Sleeve (d) is chamfered on I.D. on
end opposite drilled cross hole. Install spool (e)
(with O-ring installed) from chamfered end of
sleeve to avoid possibility of damaging O-ring on
spool.
2. Install O-rings on cylinder and secure manifold
assembly to cylinder using screws. Torque
screws to 100 lb. in. (11.0 N·m).
d
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
b
50999
- Spring
- O-ring
- Sleeve
- Valve Seat
a
51486
a - O-rings (2)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-21
b
b
d
b
a
c
51007
b - Screws [100 lb. in. (11 N·m)] (2)
3. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
51484
Trim Motor Reassembly
1. Place brush tension springs on outer ends of
brush housings to release tension on brushes.
a - End Cap Bushing. Lubricate with Quicksilver 2-4-C
Lubricant
b - Brush (2)
c - Commutator
d - Brush Tension Spring (2)
3. Guide armature and motor frame into reservoir
housing as shown.
a
b
c
a
c
b
c
a
51485
d
a - Brush Tension Spring (2)
b - Brush Housing (2)
c - Brush (2)
2. Lubricate end cap bushing with Quicksilver 2-4-C
Lubricant and install armature and motor frame
into end cap. As brushes contact commutator, release brush tension spring from ends of brush
housings (returning springs to apply brush pressure to commutator). Install washer on each end
of armature before installing armature into end
cap (see inset).
5D-22 - MID-SECTION
b
51485
a
b
c
d
- End Cap
- Motor Housing
- Armature and Motor Frame
- Washer (One Each End of Armature)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
5. Secure reservoir to manifold using four screws.
Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (7.7 N·m).
Reservoir Installation
1. Torque end cap screws to 13 lb. ft. (1.5 N·m).
c
a
b
a
a
51193
a - Screws (4)
6. Install lubricated O-rings and “E” clip to manual
release valve.
51486
a - End Cap
b - O-ring
c - Screws (4)
b
2. Place drive shaft into oil pump.
3. Install lubricated O-ring to base of reservoir.
a
c
4. Carefully guide (with motor) down onto drive
shaft.
51196
a - “E” Clip
b - O-ring
c - Manual Release Valve
7. Insert manual release valve into manifold and
tighten snuggly. Back release valve out 3 turns
maximum allowing trim rod installation.
b
a
b
a
51194
a - Manual Release Valve
b - Manifold
51486
a - Drive Shaft
b - O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-23
Trim Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated O-rings and rod wiper to end
cap.
4. Apply Loctite Grade A (271) to threads of trim rod
and install rod piston. Tighten piston securely using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long peg).
b
a
a
c
b
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
2. Secure trim rod in soft jawed vise as shown.
51146
3. Slide end cap onto trim rod.
a - Trim Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
5. Install lubricated O-ring to trim rod piston.
a
6. Install check ball components into its respective
bore.
7. Secure components in place using plate and
screws. Torque screws to 35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m).
d
e
f
a
51146
a - End Cap
c
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
5D-24 - MID-SECTION
51147
- Screw (3)
- Plate
- O-ring
- Ball (5)
- Seat, Spring (5)
- Spring (5)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Install trim rod into cylinder.
Trim Rod Installation
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vise.
2. Fill trim cylinder three inches (76.2mm) from top
of cylinder using Quicksilver Power Trim and
Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
3. Install lubricated O-ring to memory piston and
place into cylinder. Push piston down to level of
oil.
Memory piston must not contact end cap during
trim rod/end cap installation.
b
a
51196
5. Tighten end cap assembly to cylinder securely
using spanner wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long
pegs).
51144
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
51145
a - Spanner Wrench (P/N 91-74951)
6. Tighten manual release valve snuggly following
end cap installation.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-25
Purging Power Trim Unit
Power Trim Unit Installation
Manual release valve must be in full closed position during power trim purging and operation.
1. Apply Special Lubricant 101 (92-13872A1) to
lower pivot pin bore and pivot pin surface.
1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin bore and position lower cross pin (RETAINED) in its respective
hole.
2. Remove fill cap (a). Add Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid (92-90100A12) or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II
up to threads of reservoir. Install cap (a).
51148
a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
a
3. Position trim cylinder assembly (BOTTOM
FIRST) between clamp brackets and route trim
pump electrical harness through access hole in
starboard clamp bracket.
52029
3. Using a 12 volt power supply connect positive
lead to green wire, negative lead to blue wire and
drive trim rod to the down position. Connect positive lead to blue wire and negative lead to green
wire and drive trim rod to the up position. Recheck
fluid level, add fluid as required and repeat cycle
until fluid level remains at lower portion of
threads.
51195
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly
5D-26 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into
clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until
pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
6. Apply Special Lubricant (92-13872A1) to surface
of upper pivot pin, pivot pin bore and trim ram
bore.
NOTE: Install trim ram with cross hole located as
shown. If trim ram is installed reversed, the trim sender (if installed) will not operate.
a
b b
c
51515
Cross Hole
51147
a - Lower Cross Pin
5. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into
clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until
pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
Transom Side
d
Engine Side
a
b
c
d
- Pivot Pin
- Pivot Pin Bore
- Trim Ram Bore
- Install Trim Ram As Shown
51148
a - Lower Dowel Pin
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5D-27
7. Using a suitable mallet, drive upper pivot pin into
swivel bracket and through trim ram until pivot pin
is flush with swivel bracket.
8. Drive upper retaining pin (a) in until seated.
a
a
c
b
51505
9. Recheck fluid level.
51515
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Trim Ram
10. Power trim may now be operated to lower outboard to desired position. Trim system is self
purging.
11. Reconnect power trim leads to relays under ignition cover.
12. Reinstall spark plug leads to spark plugs.
13. Reinstall cowls.
14. Connect battery leads to battery terminals.
5D-28 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION
5
55331
POWER TRIM (DESIGN 4)
E
Table of Contents
Page
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-1
Page
Power Trim System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-27
Theory Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-4
Power Trim Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-28
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-4
Trim Motor Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump and Components Removal . . . . . . .
Manifold Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trimming Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-4
Trimming Outboard “Up” (“Out”) . . . . . . . 5E-4
Trimming Outboard “Down” (“In”) . . . . . . 5E-4
Trailering Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-5
Tilting Outboard Up and Down
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-5
Trim Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-7
Tilt Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-9
Maximum Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-11
Down Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-13
Shock Function Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-15
Shock Function Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-17
Manual Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-19
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-20
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Power Trim
Electrical System (Wiring Diagram) . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Power Trim
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5E-0 - MID SECTION
5E-20
5E-21
5E-22
5E-23
5E-24
5E-29
5E-29
5E-30
5E-30
5E-31
Memory Piston Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-33
Cleaning/Inspection/Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-34
Trim Motor Electrical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-34
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-35
O-Ring and Seal Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-35
O-ring Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-36
O-ring Description and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-37
Power Trim Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5E-38
Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Limit Assembly Installation . . . . . . . .
Manual Release Valve Installation . . . . . .
Manifold Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pump Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Operated Assembly Installation
Reservoir/Motor Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bleeding Power Trim Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of Power Trim System . . . . . . . . .
5E-38
5E-39
5E-40
5E-40
5E-40
5E-41
5E-42
5E-42
5E-43
5E-43
5E-25
5E-26
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Special Tools
1. Spanner Wrench P/N 91-74951
2. Lock-Ring Pliers P/N 91-822778A3
3. Expanding Rod P/N CG 41-11
4. Collet P/N CG 41-14
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-1
POWER TRIM COMPONENTS
A
17
19
20
22
3
26
1
21
23
95
F
25
24
4
B
2
4
12
16
8
9
D
7
5
13
E
C
6
11
6
11
6
11
17
15
11
7
11
6
11
11
95
15
18
14
6
D
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
10
11
NOTE: Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not available, use automotive (ATF)
automatic transmission fluid.
NOTE: It is recommended that all o-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
5E-2 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
POWER TRIM COMPONENTS
REF.
NO. QTY.
–
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
16
1
–
1
17
2
18
1
19
1
20
1
21
1
22
2
23
2
24
2
25
2
26
2
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
POWER TRIM PUMP
SHOCK ROD KIT
MEMORY PISTON ASSEMBLY
O RING REBUILD KIT
O RING
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
TRIM LIMIT VALVE KIT
PUMP ASSEMBLY
MOTOR KIT
RESERVOIR PLUG
MANUAL RELEASE ASSEMBLY
MANIFOLD KIT
SCREW KIT (MOTOR)
DRIVE SHAFT
FILTER KIT
P.O. CHECK ASSEMBLY KIT
CABLE
O RING KIT (COMPLETE TRIM)
GROOVE PIN
ANCHOR PIN
PIN
BRACKET
HARNESS-Trim
SCREW (M6 x 25)
RELAY
BRACKET
GROMMET
BUSHING
lb. in. lb. ft.
45
N·m
61
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
80
9.0
120
13.5
A – Torque cylinder cap to 45 lb. ft. (61 N·m)
B – Torque screws to 80 lb. in. (9.0 N·m)
C – Torque screws to 70 lb. in. (7.9 N·m)
D – Torque plugs to 120 lb. in. (13.5 N·m)
E – Torque screws to 100 lb. in. (11 N·m)
F – Torque shock piston to 90 lb. ft. (122 N·m)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-3
Theory Of Operation
The Power Trim system consists of an electric motor,
pressurized fluid reservoir, pump and trim cylinder.
The remote control (or trim panel) is equipped with a
switch that is used for trimming the outboard “up” and
“down”, and for tilting the outboard for shallow water
operation (at slow speed), or for “trailering”. The outboard can be trimmed “up” or “down” while engine is
under power or when engine is not running.
Adjustments
Trimming Characteristics
NOTE: Because varying hull designs react differently
in various degrees of rough water, it is recommended
to experiment with trim positions to determine whether trimming “up” or “down” will improve the ride in
rough water.
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
Operating “Up” circuit will actuate the “up” relay (located under engine cowl) and close the electric motor
circuit. The electric motor will drive the pump, thus
forcing automatic transmission fluid through internal
passageways into the “up” side of the trim cylinder.
The trim cylinder/trim rod will position the engine at
the desired trim angle within the 20 maximum trim
range. The power trim system is designed so the engine cannot be trimmed beyond the 20 maximum
trim angle as long as engine RPM is above approximately 2000 RPM.
When trimming your outboard from a mid-trim position (trim tab in neutral, straight fore-and-aft position),
you can expect the following results:
The engine can be raised beyond the 20 maximum
trim angle for shallow water operation, etc., by keeping the engine RPM below 2000 RPM. If engine RPM
increases above 2000 RPM, the thrust created by the
propeller (if deep enough in the water) will cause the
trim system to automatically lower the engine back to
the 20 maximum trim angle.
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “UP” (“OUT”)
TRIMMING OUTBOARD “DOWN” (“IN”)
WARNING
Excessive trim “out” may reduce the stability of
some high speed hulls. To correct instability at
high speed, reduce the power gradually and trim
the motor “In” slightly before resuming high
speed operation. (Rapid reduction in power will
cause a sudden change of steering torque and
may cause additional momentary boat instability.
WARNING
Excessive speed at minimum trim “In” may cause
undesirable and/or unsafe steering conditions.
Each boat should be tested for handling characteristics after any adjustment is made to the tilt
angle (tilt pin relocation).
•
Will help planing off, particularly with a heavy
load.
•
Usually improves ride in choppy water.
•
Will lift bow of boat, generally increasing top
speed.
•
Transfers steering torque harder to left on installations below 23 in. transom height.
•
In excess, can cause boat to veer to the left or
right (bow steer).
•
Increases clearance over submerged objects.
•
•
In excess, can cause porpoising and/or ventilation.
Transfers steering torque harder to right (or less
to the left).
•
•
In excess, can cause insufficient water supply to
water pump resulting in serious water pump and/
or powerhead overheating damage.
Improves planing speed acceleration (by moving
tilt pin one hole closer to transom).
5E-4 - MID SECTION
Operating “Down” circuit will actuate the “down” relay
(located under engine cowl) and close the electric
motor circuit (motor will run in opposite direction of the
“Up” circuit). The electric motor will drive the pump,
thus forcing automatic transmission fluid through internal passageways into the “down” side of the trim
cylinder. The trim rod will move the engine downward
to the desired angle.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Trailering Outboard
WARNING
Tilting Outboard Up and Down
Manually
WARNING
Excessive engine trim angle will result in insufficient water supply to water pump causing water
pump and/or powerhead overheating damage.
Make sure that water level is above gear housing
water intake holes whenever engine is running.
Before loosening the manual release valve, make
sure all persons are clear of engine as engine will
drop to full “down” position when valve is loosened.
While operating “up” circuit, the cylinder rod will continue to tilt the outboard to a full “up” position for trailering.
With power trim installed, the outboard can be raised
or lowered manually by opening the manual release
valve 3 to 4 turns (counterclockwise).
a
55170
a - Manual Release Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-5
POWER TRIM FLOW DIAGRAMS
b
a
TRIM UP CIRCUIT
c
w
d
l
j
i
u
k
e
v
h
g
t
m n
f
Í
Í
Reservoir Oil
g
Filtered Feed Oil
Í
Í
Return Oil
o
p
Oil Under Pressure
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-6 - MID SECTION
s
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Trim Up
When the trim switch is activated in the “up” position,
the electric motor (c) begins to rotate the pump gears
(j), the oil pump draws a small amount of oil through
the filter (g) and through the up circuit suction port (i).
The oil pump gear (j) rotation forces oil into the passages for the up circuit. Oil, under pressure, will slide
the shuttle valve (m) against the down circuit pressure operated valve (f). The shuttle valve will mechanically open the down pressure operated valve,
allowing oil from the down cavity of the trim cylinder,
to flow into the oil pump. This returning oil, from the
down cavity, will supply most of the oil required for the
up circuit. Oil in the up circuit is blocked from returning
into the reservoir by the ball inside the down circuit
suction port (k). The pressure of the oil will force the
up circuit pressure operated valve (n) to open, allowing the oil to enter the passages inside the manifold
(q) leading to the trim cylinder (w) up cavity. Oil is
blocked from all other passages by the closed manual
tilt valve (p). Oil under pressure will enter the trim cylinder below the memory piston (t). With an increasing
amount of oil entering the cylinder, the memory piston
contacts the shock piston (u) and forces the piston
rod (a) up and out, raising the outboard motor. Oil on
the top of the shock piston exits through a passage
running down along the side of the cylinder and enters the manifold passages. The oil is drawn back into
the pump (j) through the open down pressure operated valve (f) and enters the pump as supply for the
up circuit.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-7
TILT CIRCUIT
b
a
c
w
u v
d
h
l
j
i
t
k
e
g
Reservoir Oil
f
m n
Í
Í
g
Í
Í
Filtered Feed Oil
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure
o
p
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-8 - MID SECTION
s
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Tilt Up
In the “up” mode, as the piston rod (a) extends from
the cylinder (w), the memory piston (t) clears or uncovers the pressure relief passage. Oil from the up
cavity will enter this passage and, if required, causes
the tilt relief piston (s) to open the tilt pressure relief
valve (r). This valve lowers the amount of pressure
available to lift the outboard motor. With the engine in
forward gear, and at high engine rpm, the oil pressure
available will not be able to overcome the propeller
thrust, limiting the trim range to below the pressure relief orifice. When the engine rpm’s fall or if engine is
not in forward gear, the oil pressure is available to extend the piston rod (a) up into the tilt range.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-9
MAXIMUM TILT
b
a
u v
h
t
c
w
d
j
i
l
k
e
g
f
m
Í
Í
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-10 - MID SECTION
s
Reservoir Oil
n
g
Í
Í
Filtered Feed Oil
Return Oil
o
p
Oil Under Pressure
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Maximum Tilt
With the piston rod at maximum travel, and due to no
rod movement, the pressure inside of the trim cylinder
(w) will increase to the pressure required to move the
tilt relief piston (s). The tilt relief piston’s “pin” opens
the tilt relief valve (r). Up pressure flows into the trim
relief passage, and returns back into the reservoir.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-11
DOWN CIRCUIT
b
a
c
w
d
j
i
l
k
e
uv
h
f
m n
Í
Í
t
Reservoir Oil
g
g
Í
Í
Filtered Feed Oil
Return Oil
o
p
Oil Under Pressure
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-12 - MID SECTION
s
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Down Mode
When the trim switch is activated in the “down” position, the electric motor (c) will rotate the pump (j) in the
opposite direction. With the pump gears rotating
backwards, the flow of oil is reversed. Oil is drawn
through the filter (g), through the down circuit suction
port (k) and into the oil pump (j). The pump forces
pressurized oil into the down passages, oil will slide
the shuttle valve (m) into the up circuit pressure operated valve (n). The shuttle valve will mechanically
open the up circuit pressure operated valve and allow
oil, from the up cavity of the trim cylinder (w), to return
into the oil pump. This returning oil, from the up cavity,
will supply the oil required for the down circuit. The oil
is blocked from returning into the reservoir by the ball
inside the up circuit suction port (i). Oil, under pressure, opens the down pressure operated valve (f) and
enters the down passages inside of the manifold (q).
The manifold passage connects into the trim cylinder
passage leading to the top of the cylinder. The cavity,
inside the cylinder, above the shock piston (u) is the
down cavity. As the down cavity fills with oil, the piston
rod (a) retracts into the cylinder, lowering the outboard motor. Oil from the up cavity exits in the cylinder
and is drawn back into the pump through the open up
pressure operated valve (n). When the piston rod
reaches full travel, the oil pressure inside the down
circuit will rise until the down pressure relief valve (e)
opens, bypassing oil back into the reservoir. When
the trim button is released, and the oil pump stops
supplying pressure, both of the pressure operated
valves (f & n) will close and; if open, the down pressure regulating valve (e) will close. The closed valves
will lock the fluid on either side of the shock piston (u)
& memory piston (t), holding the outboard motor in
position.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-13
SHOCK FUNCTION UP
b
a
c
w
v
h
u
d
i
t
j
l
k
e
f
g
Reservoir Oil
n
m
Í
Í
g
Í
Í
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure
o
p
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-14 - MID SECTION
s
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Shock Function Up
Oil inside the down cavity is locked in a static position
by the closed pressure operated valve (f), the manual
release valve (p) and the manifold reverse suction
valve (o). If the outboard strikes an underwater object
while in forward gear the piston rod (a) will try to rapidly extend from the cylinder (w), the pressure increases inside the trim cylinder down cavity and connecting passages. When the pressure increases to
the level required, the impact relief valves (v), located
inside the shock piston (u), will open and allow the
fluid to pass through the shock piston. As the fluid
passes through the piston, the piston rod (a) will extend from the trim cylinder. The memory piston (t) is
held in position by vacuum, created by the oil in the
up cavity being locked in a static position. Therefore;
oil passing through the shock piston is trapped between the memory piston (t) and shock piston (u).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-15
SHOCK FUNCTION RETURN
b
a
c
w
v
h
u
d
t
j
i
l
k
e
f
m
g
Í
Í
Reservoir Oil
n
g
Í
Í
Return Oil
Oil Under Pressure
o
p
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-16 - MID SECTION
s
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Shock Function Return
After the engine clears the under water object, the
weight of the engine will increase the oil pressure between the memory piston (t) and shock piston (u) to
the level required to open the shock return valve (h),
inside the shock piston, allowing the oil to bleed back
through the shock piston into the down cavity. If required, additional oil will enter the down cavity
through the manifold reverse suction valve (o). This
will return the engine back against the memory piston
(t) and into the original running position.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-17
MANUAL RELEASE
b
a
Down
Pressure
525-880
PSI
c
w
v
h
u
d
t
j
i
l
k
e
f
Reservoir Oil
m n
g
Í
Í
g
Í
Í
Return Oil
Filtered Oil
o
p
Impact Relief Pressure #22
880-1110 (40-60)
1220-1420 (75-125)
Up Pressure
1625 (40-60)
2800 (75-125)
min.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Piston Rod
End Cap
Electric Motor
Reservoir Oil
Down Pressure Regulating Valve
Down Pressure Operated Valve
Filter (2 shown for clarity)
Shock Return Valve
Up Circuit Suction Port
Oil Pump
Down Circuit Suction Port
Oil Fill Cap
5E-18 - MID SECTION
s
r
Tilt Relief Pressure
250-400 (40-60)
540-990 (75-125)
mnopqr s t uv w-
q
Shuttle Valve
Up Pressure Operated Valve
Manifold Reverse Suction Valve
Manual Release Valve
Manifold
Tilt Relief Valve
Tilt Relief Piston
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Impact Relief Valve
Cylinder
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt
To manually tilt the outboard engine, the owner will
need to back out the manual release valve (p) 3-4
turns. With the valve backed out, the internal passages inside the manifold are connected together.
These passages connect both the cylinder down and
up cavities together, along with the reservoir, allowing
the engine to be raised or lowered. Piston rod (a)
movement will continue until the manual release
valve (p) is closed, locking the fluid inside of the cylinder and manifold.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-19
Troubleshooting
Support outboard with tilt lock pin when servicing
power trim system.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components
have been found (during troubleshooting procedure) it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball valve components and
castings must be cleaned using engine cleaner
and compressed air or replaced prior to re-assembly.
IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized.
Outboard must be in the full “UP” position (trim
rod fully extended) prior to fill/drain plug or manual release valve removal.
Refer to instructions following if disassembly is required when servicing.
Follow preliminary checks before proceeding to troubleshooting flow diagrams (following).
Preliminary Checks
IMPORTANT: Operate Power Trim system after
each check to see if problem has been corrected.
If problem has not been corrected, proceed to
next check.
1. Check that manual release valve is tightened to
full right (clockwise) position.
2. Check trim pump fluid level with outboard in full
“UP” position and fill if necessary. Refer to “Bleeding Power Trim Unit”.
3. Check for external leaks in Power Trim system.
Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
4. Outboard not holding tilted position (falls down to
trim position) indicates debris or defective components in trim assembly. Clean or replace components as required.
5E-20 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Flow Chart
OUTBOARD WILL NOT HOLD TILTED POSITION
DURING REVERSE AND/OR TRAILS OUT
DURING HIGH SPEED DECELERATION
Manual release valve
and O-ring damaged
Inspect manual release valve
Replace manual release valve and Orings
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Manual release valve and
O-rings appear to be O.K. Clean and reinstall manual
release valve
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Remove and inspect piston rod assembly for debris and/or shock ball
hang up
Debris and/or shock
ball hang up identified
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust
Replace piston
rod assembly
Shock piston appears O.K.
- Clean and reinstall piston
rod assembly
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Remove PO check valve
assembly, inspect O-rings
and seals for damage
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Debris and/or damage identified
PO check valve appears
O.K. - Clean and reinstall
PO check valve assembly
Replace PO check
valve assembly
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust
continued on next page
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-21
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Flow Chart
continued
Remove suction seat assembly and inspect for
debris and/or damage
Suction seat assembly appears O.K. - Clean and reinstall suction seat assembly
Debris and/or damage
identified
Replace suction seat
assembly
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
5E-22 - MID SECTION
Trim will not hold
reverse thrust
Trim system holds
reverse thrust: Testing complete
Replace trim system
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Flow Chart
TRIM SYSTEM LEAKS DOWN WITH
MANUAL RELEASE VALVE CLOSED
Manual release valve
and O-ring damaged
Inspect manual release valve
Trim system leaks
down
Replace manual release valve and Orings
Trim system does
not leak down: Testing complete
Remove tilt relief valving
and inspect O-rings and
seals for debris and/or
damage
Trim system does
not leak down:
Testing complete
Tilt relief valving and O-rings
appear to be O.K. - Clean and
reinstall tilt relief valving
Debris and/or damage identified
Replace tilt relief valving
Trim system does
not leak down: Testing complete
Trim system leaks
down
Replace PO check
valve assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Trim system does
not leak down: Testing complete
Remove PO check valve
assembly, inspect O-rings
and seals for damage
Debris and/or damage identified
Trim system does
not leak down: Testing complete
Manual release valve and Orings appear to be O.K. - Clean
and reinstall manual release
valve
PO check valve appears
O.K. - Clean and reinstall
PO check valve assembly
Trim system leaks
down
Trim system does
not leak down: Testing complete
continued on next page
MID-SECTION - 5E-23
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Flow Chart
continued
Inspect memory piston O-ring and cylinder
bore
Cylinder bore appears
smooth with no debris
Replace memory piston and shock piston
O-rings
Trim system does
not leak down: Testing complete
5E-24 - MID SECTION
Cylinder bore appears
rough and/or debris
found in cylinder
Trim leaks down
Replace trim system
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Electrical System
Trim Switch
(Remote Control
Mounted)
Trim Switch
(Panel Mounted)
UP
DN
UP
DN
BLU/WHT
Fuse Holder
GRN/WHT
BLU/WHT or PUR
GRN/WHT or GRN
RED
RED
RED
Fuse Holder
+
B
–
A
RED/PUR
RED
Battery
GRN/WHT
Solenoid
BLU/WHT
3
Down Relay
LT. GRN/WHT
GRN/WHT
GRN
14 BLK
RED
BLK
LT. GRN/WHT
LT. BLU/WHT
LT.BLU/WHT
BLUE
14 BLK
RED
BLK
LT. BLU/WHT
RED
Up Relay
RED/PUR
4
1
UP
DN
Cowl Switch
2
Trim Pump Motor
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-25
Troubleshooting the Power Trim Electrical System
Refer to wiring diagram on preceding page for location of wire connections.
Problem
Possible Cause
Remedy
Trim Switch “UP” is inoperative, but the Cowl Switch “UP”
does operate.
1. Open wire between Wire Connection (1)
and Trim Switch.
2. Faulty Trim Switch.
1. Check for an open connection or cut .
wire.
2. Replace.
Cowl Switch “UP” is inoperative, but the Trim Switch “UP”
does operate.
1. Open wire between Wire Connection (2)
and Solenoid.
2. Faulty Cowl Switch.
1. Check for an open connection or cut
wire.
2. Replace.
Trim Switch “UP” and Cowl
Switch “UP” are both inoperative.
1. Open wire between Wire Connection (1)
and the Up Relay.
2. Open BLK wire between ground and UP
Relay.
3. Open RED wire between Solenoid and
Up Relay.
4. Faulty Up Relay .
1. Check for an open connection.
Trim Switch “DOWN” is inoperative, but the Cowl Switch
“DOWN” does operate.
1. Open wire between Wire Connection (3)
and Trim Switch.
2. Faulty Trim Switch.
1. Check for an open connection or cut
wire.
2. Replace.
Cowl Switch “DOWN” is inoperative, but the Trim Switch
“DOWN” does operate.
1. Open wire between Wire Connection (2)
and Solenoid.
2. Faulty Cowl Switch.
1. Check for an open connection or cut
wire.
2. Replace.
2. Check for an open connection.
3. Check for an open connection.
4. Replace.
Trim Switch “DOWN” and
1. Open wire between Wire Connection (3)
Cowl Switch “DOWN” are both and the Up Relay.
inoperative.
2. Open BLK wire between ground and
Down Relay.
3. Open RED wire between Solenoid and
Down Relay.
4. Faulty Down Relay
1. Check for an open connection.
Trim Switch “UP” and
“DOWN” are both inoperative,
but the Cowl Switch does operate.
1. 20 AMP Fuse blown.
1. Replace fuse. Locate the cause of the
blown fuse. Check electrical wiring for a
shorted circuit.
2. Replace
3. Check for an open connection or cut
wire.
4. Check for a loose or corroded connection.
Trim Switch and Cowl Switch
are both inoperative.
1. One of the Trim Pump Motor wires is
open between the motor and the Relays.
2. Faulty trim pump motor.
1. Check wire connections (4) for loose
or corroded condition.
2. If voltage is present at connections (4)
when the appropriate trim button is
pressed, then motor is faulty. Replace
motor.
Trim system operates (motor
runs) without pressing the
switches.
1. The Trim or Cowl switch is shorted.
1. Replace.
5E-26 - MID SECTION
2. Faulty trim switch.
3. Wire is open between fuse holder and
solenoid.
4. Wire is open between fuse holder and
trim switch.
2. Check for an open connection.
3. Check for an open connection.
4. Replace.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Power Trim System Removal
3. Remove the trilobe pin.
1. Tilt outboard to the full up position and support
with tilt lock pin.
4. Drive out the upper pivot pin.
a
b
a
55464
a - Trilobe Pin
b - Upper Pivot Pin
a - Tilt Lock Pin
5. Remove the sacrificial anode.
2. Disconnect the power trim wire harness and remove clamp.
a
b
a
55331
a - Sacrificial Anode
55264
a - Power Trim Wire Harness Clamp
b - Harness
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-27
6. Use suitable punch to remove (Drive Up) lower
pin. Retain dowel pin.
Power Trim Disassembly
IMPORTANT: Power trim system is pressurized.
Trim rod must be in the full “UP” position (fully extended) prior to fill/drain plug, or manual release
valve removal.
1. Remove reservoir cap.
2. Remove manual release valve assembly to drain
oil.
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
a
7. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
b
55263
a - Reservoir Cap
b - Manual Release Valve
a
51144
a - Lower Pivot Pin
5E-28 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Trim Motor Removal
Pump and Components Removal
1. Secure power trim assembly in a soft jaw vise.
1. Remove pressure operated plugs on pump. Remove spring and check valve/poppet (both
sides). Use special tool CG 41-11 and special tool
CG 41-14 with 5/16″ end to remove spool.
2. Remove four (4) screws to remove motor/reservoir. Remove reservoir seal and coupler.
a
b
b
d
c
d
a
e
a
b
c
d
e
-
Screw (4)
Reservoir
Reservoir Seal
Coupler
Manifold Assembly
a
b
c
d
e
-
b
c
d
a
c
e
Plug (2)
Spring (2)
Check Valve/Poppet (2)
Seat (2)
Spool
IMPORTANT: Inspect poppet assembly for debris
in the area shown. If debris is found on poppet, replace poppet.
a
b
a - Debris Under Valve Tip
b - Rubber Seat
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-29
2. Remove three (3) screws to remove pump. Remove filter and filter seal under pump. Remove
suction seat assembly.
2. Remove tilt relief components.
a
a
b
b
c
c
d
d
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
-
-
51008
Spring
Poppet
Spool Housing
Trim Limit Spool
Shock Rod Removal
Screws (3)
Filter Seal
Filter
Suction Seat Assembly
1. Unscrew end cap assembly from cylinder using
spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm)
long pegs].
Manifold Removal
1. Remove two (2) screws to remove manifold from
cylinder.
2. Remove shock rod assembly from cylinder.
a
51146
a - Screw (2)
5E-30 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod
piston.
Shock Rod Disassembly
NOTE: The only serviceable items on the shock rod
assembly are the O-rings and wiper ring. If shock rod
requires any other repair, replace shock rod assembly.
4. Remove o-ring from shock rod piston.
c
b
b
c
a
b
a
d
a - End Cap
b - O-ring
c - Wiper Ring
51147
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.
2. Remove three (3) screws and remove plate from
shock rod piston.
a
b
c
d
-
Spring (5)
Seat (5)
Ball (5)
O-ring
a
b
c
51143
a - Screw (3)
b - Plate
c - Shock Rod Piston
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-31
10. Remove inner o-ring from shock rod piston.
CAUTION
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench
must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs to avoid
damage to shock piston.
5. Place shock rod into soft jawed vise and apply
heat to loosen piston using torch lamp (P/N
91-63209).
6. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench
[1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs].
7. Allow shock rod piston to cool. Remove from
shock rod.
b
a
51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
11. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock
rod.
12. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed
to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
13. Place end cap on clean work surface.
14. Remove rod wiper, inner o-ring, and outer o-ring.
51146
a
b
a
c
b
51145
51146
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
8. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from
check valve if found. If debris cannot be cleaned
from check valve, replace shock piston as an assembly.
9. Clean shock and components with compressed
air.
5E-32 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Remove o-ring from memory piston.
Memory Piston Removal
a
1. Remove memory piston from cylinder using one
of two methods:
b
a. Using lock ring pliers (Craftsman P/N 4735) or
suitable tool.
51144
a - O-Ring
b - Memory Piston
51144
b. Blowing compressed air into manual release
valve hole using adaptor (P/N 91-822778A3).
WARNING
Memory piston cup may be expelled at a high
velocity when air pressure is applied. Failure to
place cylinder as shown below could result in
personal injury.
NOTE: Point cylinder opening down and away. Use
a shop rag or towel to avoid damage to the memory
piston.
a
b
c
55466
a - Adaptor/Air Hose
b - Memory Piston Exit
c - Shop Rag
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-33
Cleaning/Inspection/Repair
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint
free. Slightest amount of debris in Power Trim
system could cause system to malfunction.
Clean shock rod and components with parts cleaner
and dry with compressed air.
It is recommended that all O-rings in trim system be
replaced. Use O-Ring Kit 25-827668A1.
Lubricate all o-rings with Quicksilver Power Trim
Fluid (92-90100A12). If not available, use automotive
(ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
Trim Motor Electrical Tests
1. Connect a 12 volt supply to motor leads. If motor
fails to run, replace pump motor.
IMPORTANT: Trim Motor is not serviceable. If motor fails to run, replace motor assembly.
5E-34 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Reassembly
O-Ring and Seal Placement
O-Rings and Seals are part of O-Ring Kit
25-809880A1
1
2
3
5
4
22
6
7
8
20
10
19
9
11
21
13
12
14
18 9
10
9
8
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
15
16
17
MID-SECTION - 5E-35
O-ring Sizes
2
1
9
3
7
4, 22
13
5
12, 17, 18
14
15, 20
6
16
19
8
Cutaway View of O-Ring
Width
21
10
11
O.D.
I.D.
O-RINGS SHOWN ARE ACTUAL SIZE
5E-36 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
O-ring Description and Sizes
O-Ring
Description
O-Ring I.D.
O-Ring O.D.
O-Ring Width
1
Wiper Ring (412585)
2
Cyl. Cap, Inner12586)
0.671 in. (17.04 mm)
0.949 in. (24.10 mm)
0.139 in. (3.53 mm)
3
Cyl. Cap8134)
1.864 in. (47.34 mm)
2.004 in. (50.90 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
4
Shock Piston2579)
1.6 in. (40.64 mm)
2.02 in. (53.086 mm)
0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
5
Piston Bolt05797)
0.676 in. (17.17 mm)
.816 in. (20.726 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
6
Reservoir Plug01271)
0.549 in. (13.94 mm)
0.755 in. (19.17 mm)
0.103 in. (2.616 mm)
7
Motor Seal12599)
0.489 in. (12.42 mm)
0.629 in. (15.97 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
8 (2)
P.O. Check Plug06484)
9 (3)
Poppet Assy.74585)
10 (2)
P.O. Check Seat07328)
0.364 in. (9.25 mm)
0.504 in. (12.80 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
11 (2)
Pump Port
0.145 in. (3.683 mm)
0.285 in. (7.239 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
12
Suction Seat
0.239 in. (6.07 mm)
0.379 in. (9.626 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
13
Filter Seal12607)
14
Filter12590)
15
Manual Release406483)
0.114 in. (2.90 mm)
0.254 in. (6.451 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
16
Manual Release06226)
0.176 in. (4.47 mm)
0.316 in. (8.026 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
17
Manual Release09051)
0.239 in. (6.07 mm)
0.379 in. (9.626 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
18
Spool09051)
0.239 in. (6.07 mm)
0.379 in. (9.626 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Spool Housing09005)
0.301 in. (7.645 mm)
0.441 in. (11.20 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Trim Limit Spool06483)
0.114 in. (2.895 mm)
0.254 in. (6.451 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Manifold405387)
0.208 in. (5.283 mm)
0.348 in. (8.839 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Memory Piston412579)
1.6 in. (40.64 mm)
2.02 in. (53.086 mm)
0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
19 (3)
20
21 (2)
22
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-37
Power Trim Reassembly
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.
IMPORTANT: Lubricate all o-rings with Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-90100A12). If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
5. Position cylinder end cap onto rod as shown.
Shock Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated o-rings to end cap.
2. Install rod wiper.
51146
a
CAUTION
c
When installing shock rod piston, spanner
wrench must have1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x8mm)
long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
b
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
6. Apply Loctite Grade “A” (271) to threads on shock
rod.
7. Install shock rod piston.
8. Tighten shock rod piston securely using spanner
wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs). If a torquing
type spanner tool is used to tighten shock piston,
then torque to 90 lb. ft. (122 N⋅m).
3. Install lubricated o-rings to shock piston.
b
a
c
b
a
51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
c - O-ring
51146
a - Shock Rod Piston - Torque to 90 lb. ft. (122 N⋅m)
b - Spanner Wrench
5E-38 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
9. Remove shock rod assembly from vise.
Shock Rod Installation
10. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock
rod piston.
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vice.
11. Secure components with plate. Torque screws to
35 lb. in. (4.0 Nm).
2. Install lubricated O-ring to memory piston and
place into cylinder. Push memory piston all the
way to bottom.
a
b
d e
a - Memory Piston
b - O-ring
c
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
-
Screws (3) Torque to 35 lb. in. (4.0 N⋅m)
Plate
Springs (5)
Seats (5)
Balls (5)
51147
3. Fill cylinder three inches (76.2mm) from top of cylinder using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering
Fluid. If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
4. Install shock rod into cylinder until power trim fluid
flows through oil blow off ball passage. Fill remaining cylinder to just below the cylinder
threads.
a
a - Oil Blow Off Ball Passage
CAUTION
End cap must not make contact with shock rod
piston when tightening. Shock rod piston must
be positioned in cylinder deep enough to avoid
contact.
5. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench
[1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs].. If a
torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten end
cap, then torque to 45 lb. ft. (61.0 N·m).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-39
Trim Limit Assembly Installation
Manifold Installation
1. Lubricate all O-rings. Install spring, poppet spool
housing and trim limit spool into manifold.
NOTE: There are two different size springs used in
this manifold. The heavy spring is used on 75 to 125
HP engines. The light spring is used on 40 to 60 HP
engines.
1. Install dowel pin and two (2) lubricated O-rings
into trim cylinder.
a
or
a
b
b
c
a - O-Rings (2)
b - Dowel Pin
d
a
b
c
d
-
51008
2. Align the trim cylinder and pump/reservoir assembly together.
Spring
Poppet
Spool Housing
Trim Limit Spool
Manual Release Valve Installation
a
1. Install “E” clip (if removed) and lubricate O-rings
to manual release valve.
2. Install manual release valve assembly into manifold.
a
b
c
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly
b - Reservoir/Manifold Assembly
b
a - Manifold
b - Manual Release Valve
c - E Clip
5E-40 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Install the two (2) long screws and torque to 100
lb. in. (11 N⋅m).
Oil Pump Installation
1. Install spring, ball, lubricated O-ring and plastic
seat to manifold.
2. Check to see that O-rings are placed on bottom
of pump.
3. Install filter and filter seal under pump. Install
pump onto manifold. Torque screws to 70 lb. in.
(7.7 N⋅m).
a
a
51146
a - Screws (2) Torque to 100 lb. in. (11 N⋅m)
b
a - Screws (3) Torque to 70 lb. in. (7.7 N⋅m)
b - Suction Seat Assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-41
Pressure Operated Assembly
Installation
Reservoir/Motor Installation
IMPORTANT: Inspect poppet assembly for debris
in the area shown. If debris is found on poppet replace poppet.
3. Install coupler into top of pump. Make sure reservoir seal is in the reservoir groove and place reservoir onto pump/manifold assembly. Install
ground strap under screw shown Torque screws
to 80 lb. in. (9 N⋅m).
a
a
b
b
c
a - Debris Under Valve Tip
b - Rubber Seat
d
1. Lubricate o-rings.
2. Install spool, seat with O-ring, check valve/poppet, spring and plug with O-ring into pump. Repeat for other side. Torque plugs to 120 lb. in.
(13.5 N⋅m).
a
d
a
a
b
c
d
e
-
b
c
d
e
c
b
f
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Screw (4) Torque to 80 lb. in. (9 N⋅m)
Reservoir
Reservoir Seal
Coupler
Manifold Assembly
Ground Strap
4. Fill reservoir to bottom of fill hole using Quicksilver Power Trim Fluid (92-901000A12). If not
available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
Plugs (2) Torque to 120 lb. in. (13.5 N⋅m)
Springs (2)
Check Valve/Poppet (2)
Seats (2)
Spool
5E-42 - MID SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Bleeding Power Trim Unit
1. Secure power trim unit in soft jawed vise.
Installation of Power Trim
System
2. Add power trim fluid until even with the bottom of
the fill hole. Reinstall plug.
1. Lubricate lower pivot pin, mounting holes with
2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
3. Close the manual release valve. (Turn full clockwise).
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin bore and position lower dowel pin (Retained) in its respective
hole.
b
a
b
a
55263
51148
a - Reservoir Plug/Fill Hole
b - Manual Release Valve
4. Using a 12 volt power supply, connect the positive
lead to (blue) trim motor wire and negative lead to
(green) trim motor wire and drive shock rod to the
up position. Repeat for three times.
a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
3. Position trim cylinder assembly (Bottom First) between clamp brackets.
5. Connect the positive lead to the (green) trim motor wire, and the negative lead to the (blue) trim
motor wire and drive the shock rod to the down
position.
6. Recheck fluid level, add fluid if required and repeat cycle until fluid level stays even with the bottom of the fill hole.
a
55467
a - Trim Cylinder Assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-43
4. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant ( 92-90018A12) to
lower pivot pin. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into clamp bracket and trim cylinder
assembly until pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) to
surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin bore and trim
ram bore.
a
c
b
a
51148
51147
a - Pivot Pin
b - Pivot Pin Bore
c - Trim Ram Bore
a - Lower Pivot Pin
5. Using a suitable punch, drive lower dowel pin into
its hole until seated.
7. Using a suitable mallet, drive upper pivot pin into
swivel bracket and through trim ram until pivot pin
is flush with swivel bracket.
b
a
a
c
51148
a - Lower Dowel Pin
5E-44 - MID SECTION
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Trim Ram
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
8. Drive trilobe pin (a) into its hole until seated.
10. Route trim harness through clamp bracket and
cowling.
a
a
55464
a - Trilobe Pin
55264
9. Install sacrificial aluminum anode to reservoir
bracket placing ground strap between bracket
and anode as shown.
a - Trim Harness
11. Secure trim harness with clamp as shown.
a
b
a
c
55465
a - Sacrificial Anode
b - Ground Strap
c - Bracket
a - Clamp
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5E-45
MID-SECTION
5
MANUAL TILT SYSTEM
(DESIGN I, II, III)
F
Table of Contents
Page
Manual Tilt System Components (Design One
and Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-1
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant Application
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-1
Torque Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-1
Manual Tilt System Components (Design
Three) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-2
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant Application
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-2
Torque Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-2
Manual Tilt Flow Diagrams Design 1 . . . . . . . . 5F-3
Manual Tilt Flow Diagrams Design 2 . . . . . . . . 5F-8
Manual Tilt Flow Diagrams Design 3 . . . . . . . 5F-13
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 5F-18
Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-19
Manual Tilt System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-21
Manual Tilt System Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . 5F-22
Accumulator Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-22
Shock Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-23
Shock Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-24
Valve Block Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-26
Valve Block Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-27
Manual Tilt System Cleaning and
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-28
Manual Tilt System Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . 5F-28
Valve Block Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-28
Valve Block Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-30
Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-30
Shock Rod Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-32
Instructions for Making Retaining Tool . . . . . . 5F-33
Bleeding Manual Tilt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-34
Manual Tilt System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5F-35
5F-0 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt System Components (Design One and Two)
1 - Shock Rod Cylinder
2 - Accumulator
3 - Shock Rod
4 - Valve Block
5 - Dowel Pin
6 - Pivot Pin
7 - Rod Wiper
8 - O-ring .671 in. I.D.
9 - Cylinder Cap
10- O-ring 1.864 in I.D
11- O-ring .614 in. I.D.
12- Shock Rod Piston
13- Ball (5)
14- Spring Seat (5)
15- Spring (5)
16- Retaining Plate
17- Screw (3)
18- O-ring 1.600 in. I.D. (Shock Piston)
19- O-ring 1.600 in. I.D. (Memory Piston)
20- Memory Piston
21- Screw (2)
22- O-Ring .208 in. I.D. (2)
23- Pipe Plug
24- Spring (Large)
25- Spring (Small)
26- Ball
27- Plunger
28- Screw Plug (2)
29- Spring (2)
30- O-ring (2)
31- Ball (2)
32- Push Rod (2)
33- Dowel Pin
34- Spool
35- Spring
36- O-ring .301 in I.D.
37- Screw Plug
38- O-ring .301 in. I.D.
39- Cam Shaft
40- Insulator
41- Retainer Plate
42- Screw
43- O-ring 2.114 in. I.D.
44- Push Rod
45- Ball
46- Flat Spring
47- Screw
Design One Only
48- O-ring
49- Filter
50- Valve Seat
51- O-ring .364 in. I.D.
52- Ball
53- Spring Guide
54- Spring
55- Hole in Cyliner
Torque Specification
6
5
3
a
35 lb. ft. (47 N·m)
b
100 lb. in. (11.5 N·m)
c
35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m)
d
27 lb. in. (3.0 N·m)
e
75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
Bottom of Valve Block/Cylinder
7
8
9
Check
Ball
DESIGN 1
1
DESIGN 2
Side of Valve Block
lower
notch
10
11
21
55
12
13
49
14
15
48
DESIGN 1
DESIGN 2
16
17
22
18
19
20
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant
Application Points
Lubricate ALL O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
A
Loctite 271
B
Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon (592)
C
Special Lubricant 101
2
23
47
C
24
26 50
25
27 51 52
45
43
46
44
53 54
42
28
29
30
31
32
33
38 39
40
4
34
35 36
41
26153
37
NOTE: It is recommended that ALL O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-1
Manual Tilt System Components (Design Three)
1 - Shock Rod Cylinder
2 - Accumulator
3 - Shock Rod
4 - Valve Block
5 - Dowel Pin
6 - Pivot Pin
7 - Rod Wiper
8 - O-ring .671 in. I.D.
9 - Cylinder Cap
10- O-ring 1.864 in I.D
11- O-ring .614 in. I.D.
12- Shock Rod Piston
13- Ball (5)
14- Spring Seat (5)
15- Spring (5)
16- Retaining Plate
17- Screw (3)
18- O-ring 1.600 in. I.D. (Shock Piston)
19- O-ring 1.600 in. I.D. (Memory Piston)
20- Memory Piston
21- Screw (2)
22- O-Ring .208 in. I.D. (2)
23- Plug
24- Spring (Large)
25- Spring (Small)
26- Ball
27- Plunger
28- Screw Plug (2)
29- Spring (2)
30- O-ring (2)
31- Ball (2)
32- Push Rod (2)
33- Dowel Pin
34- Spool
35- Spring
36- O-ring .301 in I.D.
37- Screw Plug
38- O-ring .301 in. I.D.
39- Cam Shaft
40- Insulator
41- Retainer Plate
42- Screw
43- O-ring 2.114 in. I.D.
44- Push Rod
45- Ball
46- Flat Spring
47- Screw
Torque Specification
a
35 lb. ft. (47 N·m)
b
100 lb. in. (11.5 N·m)
c
35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m)
d
27 lb. in. (3.0 N·m)
e
75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
upper
notch
stamped
“s”
or
s
DESIGN 3
Quicksilver Lubricant/Sealant
Application Points
Lubricate ALL O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II.
A
Loctite Grade “A” (271)
B
Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon (592)
C
Special Lubricant 101
26153
NOTE: It is recommended that ALL O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
5F-2 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt Flow Diagrams
Design 1
51651
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-3
Design 1
51652
5F-4 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 1
51653
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-5
Design 1
51654
5F-6 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 1
51655
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-7
Manual Tilt Flow Diagrams
Design 2
51656
5F-8 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 2
51657
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-9
Design 2
51658
5F-10 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 2
51659
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-11
Design 2
51660
5F-12 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt Flow Diagrams
Design 3
51661
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-13
Design 3
51662
5F-14 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 3
51663
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-15
Design 3
51664
5F-16 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Design 3
51665
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-17
2. Check for external leaks in the manual tilt system.
Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting
Refer to disassembly/reassembly instructions (following) if disassembly is required when servicing.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components
have been found (during troubleshooting procedure) it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball components and castings
must be cleaned using engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
IMPORTANT: If cut or damaged O-rings are found,
inspect machined surfaces for scoring, burrs or
debris.
3. Check for discharged accumulator. 35 to 50 lb. ft.
(47-68 N·m) of pulling force must be attained
when tilting outboard from full “down” to full “up”
position. If more than 50 lb. ft. (68 N·m) of force is
required, replace accumulator.
a
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
manual tilt system.
1. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam
must open and close freely. Adjust cam link rod as
necessary.
b
a
b
c
50431
a - Weight Scale
b - Valve Lever (open position)
51143
a - Link Rod
b - Manual Release Lever
c - Accumulator
5F-18 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
Outboard falls to full down position with manual release valve lever in LOCK/RUN (up) position. Example a: Outboard lowers more than one tilt pin
hole in eight hours, Example b: Outboard lowers
during acceleration.
CAUTION
Tilt ram must be in full “up” position and accumulator removed before manual tilt system
disassembly.
Inspect memory piston O-ring.
Results
Results
O-ring defect.
O-ring appears to be o.k., cylinder bore and
memory piston are o.k. Replace O-rings and
proceed.
Replace defective O-ring.
Inspect Transfer Valve.
Results
No debris or defective components found.
Results
Debris or defective components found in
transfer valve.
Replace valve block.
Clean components using engine cleaner and
compressed air or replace as necessary.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-19
Troubleshooting Flow Chart
(Continued)
Outboard will not hold tilted position in reverse and/or
trails out during high speed deceleration with manual
release valve lever in the lock/run (up) position.
CAUTION
Tilt ram must be in full “up” position and accumulator removed before manual tilt system disassembly.
Inspect shock rod piston check valve(s).
Results
Results
Debris or defective components found in check
valve(s).
Clean check valve(s) components using engine cleaner and compressed air or replace.
Results
Inspect transfer valve(s).
Results
No debris or defective components found in
transfer valve(s).
Debris or defective components found in
transfer valve(s).
Inspect valve block.
Clean transfer valve(s) components using
engine cleaner and compressed air or replace.
Results
Results
No debris found in valve block passages.
Debris found in valve block passages.
Replace defective valve block.
5F-20 - MID-SECTION
No debris or defective components found in check
valve(s).
Clean valve block using engine cleaner and
compressed air.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt System Removal
3. Use suitable punch to remove (DRIVE DOWN)
upper dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
CAUTION
Remove cowling and remove all spark plug leads
from spark plugs to prevent accidental starting
while servicing outboard.
WARNING
Service or installation of the tilt system may result in loss of pressure in the shock cylinder. If the
outboard is not in the full down position, such
loss of pressure will cause the engine to fall to the
full down position with a potential for damaging
engine or causing personal injury. To avoid such
injury support outboard in the up position using
tilt lock lever.
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
WARNING
4. Use suitable punch to drive out upper pivot pin.
Manual tilt system is pressurized. Accumulator
must be removed when shock rod is in the full up
position, prior to servicing, otherwise oil
spray-back may occur.
a
1. Support outboard in the up position using tilt lock
lever.
2. Remove link rod.
51144
a
a - Pivot Pin
b
5. Use punch to remove (DRIVE UP) lower dowel
pin. Retain dowel pin.
a
51143
51144
a - Link Rod
b - Accumulator
a - Dowel Pin
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-21
6. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
Manual Tilt System
Disassembly
NOTE: Accumulator contains a high pressure nitrogen charge and is NOT SERVICEABLE. Replace if
necessary.
WARNING
a
51144
This tilt system is pressurized. Remove accumulator only when shock rod is in full up position.
a - Pivot Pin
7. Tilt shock absorber assembly (TOP FIRST) out
from clamp bracket and remove assembly.
Accumulator Removal
1. Place manual tilt system in soft jawed vise.
2. Position shock rod to full up position.
3. Remove accumulator
1
a
1
2
51144
a
b
a - Manual Tilt System
2
51143
a - Shock Rod
b - Accumulator
5F-22 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. If plunger can be compressed into accumulator
by hand, accumulator is defective. Replace accumulator.
Shock Rod Removal
1. Remove cylinder end cap assembly using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs].
a
51145
2. Remove shock rod assembly.
51143
a - Plunger
5. Remove O-ring.
51143
51145
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-23
3. Remove memory piston from cylinder using lock
ring pliers (Craftsman P/N 4735) or suitable tool.
Shock Rod Disassembly
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.
2. Remove plate and O-ring.
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod
piston.
c
a
b
d
51143
51144
4. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
b
a
b
c
d
- Screw (3)
- Plate
- O-ring
- Shock Rod Piston
CAUTION
a
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench
must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs to avoid
damage to shock piston.
51144
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
5. Remove tilt system from vise and empty fluid into
appropriate container.
5F-24 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Place shock rod into soft jawed vise and apply
heat to loosen piston using torch lamp (P/N
91-63209).
5. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench
[1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs].
6. Allow shock rod piston to cool. Remove from
shock rod.
CAUTION
Do not remove check ball components from
shock rod piston. Removal and reinstallation of
check valve could result in improper operating
pressure and possible manual tilt system damage.
7. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from
check valve if found. If debris cannot be cleaned
from check valve, replace shock piston as an assembly.
8. Clean shock and components with compressed
air.
9. Remove inner O-ring.
51146
b
a
a
b
51199
a - O-ring
b - Shock Piston
10. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock
rod.
11. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed
to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
51146
a - Shock Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-25
12. Place end cap on clean work surface.
Valve Block Removal
13. Remove rod wiper, inner O-ring, and outer O-ring.
1. Remove valve block from shock rod cylinder.
b
a
51147
c
51146
a - Screws (2)
b - Valve Block
c - Shock Rod Cylinder
a
2. Remove O-rings.
b
c
a
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
51148
a - O-rings (2)
5F-26 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove reservoir assembly.
Valve Block Disassembly
1. Remove slow trim valve assembly.
2. Remove hydraulic oil transfer valve components.
a
a
c
b
51142
a - Screw
b - Flat Spring
c - Ball
b
5. Remove cam assembly.
51143
a - Transfer Valves (2)
b - Slow trim Valve Assembly (Plug or Screw Plug)
3. Remove surge valve assembly.
b
a
51145
a - Screw
b - Cam Assembly
a
51145
a - Surge Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5F-27
Manual Tilt System Cleaning
and Inspection
1. It is recommended that all O-rings exposed during disassembly be replaced.
2. Clean components, filter, and check valve seats
using engine cleaner and compressed air. Do not
use cloth rags.
e
3. Inspect all machined surfaces for burrs or scoring
to assure O-ring longevity.
4. Inspect shock rod. If wiper (located in cap) has
failed to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
d
Manual Tilt System
Reassembly
c
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint
free. Slightest amount of debris in tilt system
could cause system to malfunction.
b
Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid or,
(ATF) Type F, FA or Dexron II on all O-rings during
reassembly.
NOTE: Refer to “Manual Tilt System Components”
for proper O-ring sizes.
Valve Block Reassembly
a
a
b
c
d
e
51142
- Screw
- Retainer Plate
- Insulator
- Cam Shaft
- O-ring
4. Install push rod, ball, flat spring and screw in valve
block.
5. Torque screw to 27 lb. in. (3.0 N·m).
IMPORTANT: Cam shaft O-ring must be lubricated using Special Lubricant 101 prior to installation.
1. Install lubricated O-ring to cam shaft.
2. Install cam shaft in valve block.
3. Secure cam shaft in place using insulator, retainer plate, and screw. Tighten screw securely.
d
c
a
b
51145
a
b
c
d
5F-28 - MID-SECTION
- Screw
- Flat Spring
- Ball
- Push Rod
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
6. Install spool, spring, lubricated O-ring and screw
plug (surge valve assembly) into valve block.
7. Torque screw plug to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m).
a
b
c
a
d
e
b
f
c
d
a
b
c
d
51142
- Spool
- Spring
- O-ring
- Screw Plug
a
b
c
d
e
f
51142
- Plunger
- Ball
- Spring (Small)
- Spring (Large)
- O - ring
- Plug (Design 3)
12. Torque screw plug to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m).
8. Install push rod, ball, spring, lubricated O-rings
and screw plug (transfer valve components) in
valve block.
9. Install plunger, ball, spring (small), spring (large)
in valve block (Slow Trim Valve Assembly).
10. Apply Loctite Pipe Sealant with Teflon 592 to
threads of pipe plug (design one and two style
valve block).
a
11. Install pipe plug or plug into valve block. Tighten
pipe plug (if equipped) securely.
b
c
d
e
51142
a
b
c
d
e
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
- Push Rod (2)
- Ball (2)
- Spring (2)
- O-ring (2)
- screw Plug (2)
MID-SECTION - 5F-29
3. Install lubricated O-ring.
Valve Block Installation
1. Install lubricated O-rings.
a
51148
a - O-rings (2)
2. Install valve block to shock rod cylinder. Torque
screws to 100 lb. in. (11.5 N·m).
51145
Shock Rod Reassembly
1. Install lubricated O-rings.
2. Install rod wiper.
a
b
a
c
a - Screw (2)
b - Valve Block
c - Shock Rod Cylinder
5F-30 - MID-SECTION
b
51146
c
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Install lubricated O-ring.
8. Tighten shock rod piston securely using spanner
wrench (1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs).
b
a
a
51199
b
a - O-ring
b - Shock Piston
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.
51146
5. Position cylinder end cap onto rod as shown.
a - Shock Rod Piston
b - Spanner Wrench
9. Remove shock rod assembly from vise.
10. Install lubricated O-ring to shock rod piston.
11. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock
rod piston.
12. Secure components with plate. Torque screws to
35 lb. in. (4.0 N·m).
51146
d
e
CAUTION
When installing shock rod piston, spanner
wrench must have1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x8mm)
long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
f
a
6. Apply Loctite 271 to threads on shock rod.
c
7. Install shock rod piston.
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
51147
- Screw (3)
- Plate
- O-ring
- Ball (5)
- Seat (5)
- Spring (5)
MID-SECTION - 5F-31
6. Refill cylinder to top.
Shock Rod Installation
1. Place cylinder/manifold assembly into soft jawed
vise.
CAUTION
2. Fill cylinder to top using Quicksilver Power Trim
and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F, FA of Dexron
II.
End cap must not make contact with shock rod
piston when tightening. Shock rod piston must
be positioned in cylinder deep enough to avoid
contact.
3. Place cam shaft lever in the open position (lever
facing down).
7. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench
[1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs].
4. Install lubricated O-ring to memory piston and install piston into cylinder three inches (76mm) from
top.
b
a
51145
51144
a - O-ring
b - Memory Piston
5. Refill cylinder to top and install shock rod assembly into cylinder.
51143
5F-32 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Instructions for Making
Retaining Tool
3/16 in. x 3 in.
(5 x 7.5 cm)
Steel Plate
3/8 in. x 13 in.
(10mm x 33cm)
Threaded Rod
4 in. x 1/4 in. min.
(10cm x 6.4mm) minimum
Channel Iron
10 in.
(25 cm)
8 in.
(20 cm)
1 in.
(25mm
)
3 in.
(76mm
)
2 holes, 7/16 in. dia. (11 mm)
1-1/4 in. dia.
(30m)
5 in.
(125mm)
20 in.
(508mm)
2 in.
(50mm)
4 in.
(100 mm)
6 in.
(152mm)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
8 in.
(203mm)
3/8 in. dia. 2 holes
MID-SECTION - 5F-33
Bleeding Manual Tilt System
IMPORTANT: While bleeding tilt system, time
must be allowed between each stroke to allow air
bubbles to dissipate.
3. Bleed unit by pushing rod down slowly (18-20 seconds per stroke) until stopped at base. Wait until
all air bubbles exit accumulator base.
1. With shock rod in the full up position and manifold
cam lever open (facing down), secure tilt system
to retaining tool and container. (A No. 10 can or 3
lb. coffee can can be used).
2. Fill container to near full level using Quicksilver
Power Trim and Steering Fluid or; (ATF) Type F,
FA or Dexron II.
IMPORTANT: Fluid level must remain above accumulator opening during bleeding process.
a
50432
e
4. During up stroke, pull up on rod slowly 3 in.
(76mm) from base.
b
5. Wait until all air bubbles exit accumulator base.
c
a
d
50447
a
b
c
d
e
- Retaining Tool
- Tilt System
- Container
- Cam Lever
- Accumulator Opening
50433
6. Slowly cycle unit 5-8 times (round trip per cycle)
using short strokes 3 in. (76mm) from base allowing bubbles to disappear during each stroke.
5F-34 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. Allow unit to stand five minutes then proceed to
cycle unit 2-3 more times using short strokes. No
air bubbles should appear from accumulator port
at this time.
11. With cam lever remaining open (facing down), remove tilt assembly from oil and secure in soft
jawed vise. Torque accumulator to 35 lb. ft. (47
N·m).
8. With oil level well above accumulator port, slowly
pull rod to full up position.
9. Install accumulator making sure air bubbles do
not enter system.
50433
50432
10. Tighten accumulator snugly at this time.
Manual Tilt System
Installation
1. Apply Special Lubricant 101 to lower pivot pin
hole and pivot pin surface.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin hole and position lower dowel pin (retained) in its hole.
b
a
51148
50432
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
MID-SECTION - 5F-35
3. Reinstall manual tilt system. Reconnect release
valve link rod.
2
6. Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant
(92-90018A12) to surface of upper pivot pin, pivot
pin hole and shock rod hole.
a
a
c
2
1
b
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Pivot Pin Bore
c - Shock Rod Bore
1
51144
a - Manual Tilt System
7. Using a mallet, drive upper pivot pin into swivel
bracket and through shock rod until pivot pin is
flush with swivel bracket.
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into
clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until
pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
b
c
a
51148
a
51147
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Shock Rod
8. Drive upper dowel pin (a) into its hole until seated.
a - Lower Pivot Pin
5. Using a punch, drive lower dowel pin in until
seated.
a
51147
a - Dowel Pin
a
51148
a - Lower Dowel Pin
5F-36 - MID-SECTION
9. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam
must open and close freely. Adjust link rod as necessary.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION
5
MANUAL TILT SYSTEM
(DESIGN 4)
G
Table of Contents
Page
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-1
Tilt Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-5
Tilt Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-7
Slow Tilt Down
Under High Thrust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-9
Under Water Strike
with Valves Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G11
Shock Function
with Valves Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-13
Shock Function Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-15
Hydraulic System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-16
Manual Tilt System Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-17
Manual Tilt System Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-18
Accumulator Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-18
Shock Rod Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-19
Shock Rod Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-20
Valve Block Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-22
Memory Piston Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-22
Valve Block Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-23
Actual O-ring Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-25
O-ring Description and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5G-26
5G-0 - MID-SECTION
Page
Manual Tilt System
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Tilt System Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cam Shaft Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Body Check Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Velocity Valve Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Retainer Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Plug Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valve Block Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shock Rod Installation and
Fluid Filling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions for Making
Retaining Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bleeding Manual Tilt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Tilt System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Release Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5G-27
5G-27
5G-27
5G-27
5G-27
5G-28
5G-28
5G-28
5G-29
5G-30
5G-32
5G-33
5G-35
5G-36
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Special Tools
1. Spanner Wrench P/N 91-74951
2. Lock-Ring Pliers P/N 91-822778A3
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-1
MANUAL TILT COMPONENTS
13
A
3
12
1
F
95
4
2
4
7
B
E
6
8
11
7
D
5
6
8
11
13
8
11
11
8
11
9
12
95
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
9
8
10
C
NOTE: Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not available, use automotive (ATF)
automatic transmission fluid.
NOTE: It is recommended that all O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
5G-2 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MANUAL TILT COMPONENTS
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY.
DESCRIPTION
–
1
MANUAL TRIM ASSEMBLY
–
1
MANUAL TRIM BEACHING ASSEMBLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
–
12
13
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
lb. in. lb. ft.
SHOCK ROD ASSEMBLY
SHOCK ROD ASSEMBLY (BEACHING)
MEMORY PISTON ASSEMBLY
O RING REBUILD KIT-Cylinder
O RING
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
SCREW AND SEAL KIT
ACCUMULATOR ASSEMBLY
VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
CAM KIT
VELOCITY VALVE KIT
CHECK SYSTEM REPAIR KIT
O RING KIT
PIN
GROOVE PIN
75
75
N·m
45
61
35
47
8.5
8.5
A – Torque cylinder cap to 45 lb. ft. (61 N·m)
B – Torque Accumulator to 35 lb. ft. (47 N·m)
C – Torque Velocity Valve to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
D – Torque Transfer Valve Plug to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N·m)
E – Torque Screw to 100 lb. in. (11 N·m)
F – Torque Shock Piston to 90 lb. ft. (122 N·m)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-3
MANUAL TRIM FLOW DIAGRAMS
Up Circuit
b
a
c
d
p
e
o
f
n
k
m
l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Shock Rod
End Cap
Accumulator
Accumulator Piston
Accumulator Check Valve
Camshaft Lever
Manifold
Down Fast Transfer Valve
5G-4 - MID-SECTION
j
i j k l mnop-
i
h
g
Down Slow Transfer Valve
Up Fast Transfer Valve
Surge Valve
Cylinder
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Shock Return Valve
Impact Relief Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Tilt Up
With the engine in the down position, the accumulator
piston (d) will be at the top of the accumulator (c) with
the gas at maximum pressure. To raise the engine,
the camshaft lever (f) is rotated all the way down. The
internal shaft connected to the camshaft lever will
move the push rods, opening the accumulator check
valve (e), both fast transfer valves (h & j) and the
down slow transfer valve (i). As the operator lifts the
engine; oil, under pressure inside the accumulator,
will flow around both the slow transfer valve (i) and the
down circuit fast transfer valve (h). Oil flows into the
bottom of the tilt cylinder forcing the memory piston
(m) into the shock piston (n) and then forcing the
shock rod (a) up and out. Oil above the shock piston
exits the cylinder (l) through an interconnecting passage along side of the cylinder and returns into the
manifold (g). Inside the manifold the oil flows past the
groove in the surge valve (k), through the transfer
valve (j) and mixes with the oil flowing from the accumulator into the up cavity. With the engine in the correct position, the camshaft lever (f) is rotated up and
the push rods allow the check valves (e, h, i, & j) to
close. The closed check valves prevent the oil from
traveling between cavities and locks the engine into
position.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-5
Down Circuit
b
a
c
d
p
e
o
f
n
k
m
l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Shock Rod
End Cap
Accumulator
Accumulator Piston
Accumulator Check Valve
Camshaft Lever
Manifold
Down Fast Transfer Valve
5G-6 - MID-SECTION
j
i j k l mnop-
i
h
g
Down Slow Transfer Valve
Up Fast Transfer Valve
Surge Valve
Cylinder
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Shock Return Valve
Impact Relief Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Tilt Down
With the engine tilted up, the piston inside the accumulator piston (d) will be at the bottom of the accumulator (c) and the gas pressure is low. To lower the engine, the camshaft lever (f) is rotated down, the
internal cam will cause the push rods to open the accumulator check valve (e), both fast transfer valves (h
& j) and the down slow transfer valve (i). The operator
will have to press down on the engine cowl to overcome the pressure inside cylinder. Fluid will flow out
of the bottom of the cylinder, past both the down fast
transfer valve (h) and down slow transfer valve (i).
Fluid will flow past the up fast transfer valve (j), surge
valve (k) and through the interconnecting passage
into the top of the cylinder (l). Due to the shock rod (a),
the tilt cylinder cavities differ in volume, the extra fluid
from the up cavity [forced into the accumulator (c)] will
cause the internal accumulator piston (d) to compress the gas. With the engine in the correct position,
the camshaft lever is rotated up and the push rods allow the check valves (e, h, i, & j) to close.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-7
Slow Tilt Down Under
High Thrust
b
a
c
d
p
f
e
o
n
k
m
j
i
h
g
l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Shock Rod
End Cap
Accumulator
Accumulator Piston
Accumulator Check Valve
Camshaft Lever
Manifold
Down Fast Transfer Valve
5G-8 - MID-SECTION
i j k l mnop-
Down Slow Transfer Valve
Up Fast Transfer Valve
Surge Valve
Cylinder
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Shock Return Valve
Impact Relief Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Slow Tilt Down Under High Thrust
To tilt the engine down under high thrust conditions
[where the propeller thrust forces the shock rod down,
creating higher pressure below the memory piston
(m)] the camshaft lever (f) is rotated slightly downward. The internal shaft connected to the lever will
open the down slow transfer valve (i) allowing oil under pressure into the cavity around the shaft. The
higher oil pressure will open the up fast transfer valve
(j) allowing oil from the bottom of the cylinder to flow
above the shock piston (n) while lowering the engine.
Additional oil will flow into the accumulator (c) as the
internal pressure forces the accumulator check valve
(e) to open. Oil flowing into the accumulator moves
the accumulator piston (d) and compresses the gas.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-9
Under Water Strike
(Valves Open)
b
a
c
d
p
o
e
f
n
k
m
j
l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Shock Rod
End Cap
Accumulator
Accumulator Piston
Accumulator Check Valve
Camshaft Lever
Manifold
Down Fast Transfer Valve
5G-10 - MID-SECTION
i j k l mnop-
i
h
g
Down Slow Transfer Valve
Up Fast Transfer Valve
Surge Valve
Cylinder
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Shock Return Valve
Impact Relief Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Under Water Strike With Valves Open
Should the drive unit strike a submerged object while
in forward motion, the shock rod (a) will extend from
the tilt cylinder (l). Fluid will attempt to exit the cylinder
through the interconnecting passage. The rapid fluid
flow will increase the pressure below the surge valve
(k), causing the valve to move, closing the oil return
passage back into the accumulator (c). Oil inside the
up cavity is locked in a static position by the closed up
fast transfer valve (j), the closed down slow transfer
valve (i) and down fast transfer valve (h). As the shock
rod extends outward, the pressure inside the up cavity will reach sufficient pressure to open the shock
valve (p) which opens at 880-1110 psi. Oil will flow into
the cavity created as the shock rod & shock piston (a
& n) moves away from the memory piston (m).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-11
Shock Function
(Valve Closed)
b
a
c
Accumulator
Gas Pressure
400 PSI
d
p
o
e
n
f
k
m
j
i
h
g
l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Shock Rod
End Cap
Accumulator
Accumulator Piston
Accumulator Check Valve
Camshaft Lever
Manifold
Down Fast Transfer Valve
5G-12 - MID-SECTION
i j k l mnop-
Down Slow Transfer Valve
Up Fast Transfer Valve
Surge Valve
Cylinder
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Shock Return Valve
Impact Relief Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Shock Function With Valves Closed
Should the drive unit strike a submerged object while
in forward motion, the shock rod (a) will extend from
the cylinder (l). Oil inside the up cavity is locked in a
static position by the closed up fast transfer valve (j),
the closed down slow transfer valve (i) and closed
down fast transfer valve (h). Fluid will attempt to exit
the cylinder through the interconnecting passage
back into the accumulator (c). The closed up fast
transfer valve (j) will prevent the fluid return. As the
shock rod extends outward, the pressure inside the
up cavity will reach sufficient pressure to open the
shock valve (p) which opens at 880-1110 psi. Oil will
flow into the cavity created as the shock rod & shock
piston (a & n) moves away from the memory piston
(m).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-13
b
Shock Function Return
a
c
d
p
o
e
n
f
k
m
j
i
h
g
l
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Shock Rod
End Cap
Accumulator
Accumulator Piston
Accumulator Check Valve
Camshaft Lever
Manifold
Down Fast Transfer Valve
5G-14 - MID-SECTION
i j k l mnop-
Down Slow Transfer Valve
Up Fast Transfer Valve
Surge Valve
Cylinder
Memory Piston
Shock Piston
Shock Return Valve
Impact Relief Valve
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Shock Function Return
After the drive clears the object, the shock return
valve (o) will allow the oil to flow from between the
shock piston (n) and memory piston (m) onto the
down cavity as the drive returns to its original running
position.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-15
Hydraulic System
Troubleshooting
Refer to disassembly/reassembly instructions (following) if disassembly is required when servicing.
IMPORTANT: After debris or failed components
have been found (during troubleshooting procedure), it is recommended that unit be disassembled completely and ALL O-rings be replaced. Check ball components and castings
must be cleaned using engine cleaner and compressed air or replaced prior to reassembly.
3. Check for discharged accumulator. 35 to 50 lb. ft.
(47-68 N·m) of pulling force must be attained
when tilting outboard from full “down” to full“up”
position. If more than 50 lb. ft. (68 N·m) of force is
required, replace accumulator.
a
Support outboard with tilt lock lever when servicing
manual tilt system.
1. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam
must open and close freely. Adjust cam link rod as
necessary.
b
b
a
50431
c
a - Weight Scale
b - Valve Lever (open position)
51143
a - Link Rod
b - Manual Release Lever
c - Accumulator
2. Check for external leaks in the manual tilt system.
Replace defective part(s) if leak is found.
IMPORTANT: If cut or damaged O-rings are found,
inspect machined surfaces for scoring, burrs or
debris.
5G-16 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt System Removal
CAUTION
3. Position piece of wood under transom bracket
instead of tilt lock for access of removing pin. Use
suitable punch to remove (DRIVE DOWN) upper
dowel pin. Retain dowel pin.
Remove cowling and remove all spark plug leads
from spark plugs to prevent accidental starting
while servicing outboard.
WARNING
Service or installation of the tilt system may result in loss of pressure in the shock cylinder. If the
outboard is not in the full down position, such
loss of pressure will cause the engine to fall to the
full down position with a potential for damaging
engine or causing personal injury. To avoid such
injury support outboard in the up position using
tilt lock lever.
b
a
51144
WARNING
Manual tilt system is pressurized. Accumulator
must be removed when shock rod is in the full up
position, prior to servicing, otherwise oil
spray-back may occur.
1. Support outboard in the up position using tilt lock
lever.
a - Dowel Pin
b - Wood
4. Position tilt lock and remove piece of wood. Use
suitable punch to drive out upper pivot pin.
a
2. Remove link rod.
a
b
51144
b
a - Pivot Pin
b - Tilt Lock
5. Use punch to remove (DRIVE UP) lower dowel
pin. Retain dowel pin.
51143
a - Link Rod
b - Accumulator
a
51144
a - Dowel Pin
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-17
6. Use suitable punch to drive out lower pivot pin.
Manual Tilt System
Disassembly
NOTE: Accumulator contains a high pressure nitrogen charge and is NOT SERVICEABLE. Replace if
necessary.
WARNING
51144
a
This tilt system is pressurized. Remove accumulator only when shock rod is in full up position.
a - Pivot Pin
Accumulator Removal
7. Tilt shock absorber assembly (TOP FIRST) out
from clamp bracket and remove assembly.
1. Place manual tilt system in soft jawed vise.
2. Position shock rod to full up position.
3. Open cam shaft valve (Down Position).
4. Loosen surge valve enough to drip, wait until dripping stops.
a
1
2
5. When fluid stops dripping, loosen and remove accumulator.
51144
a - Manual Tilt System
a
b
c
a - Accumulator
b - Cam Lever
c - Velocity Plug
5G-18 - MID-SECTION
51143
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
6. If plunger can be compressed into accumulator
by hand, accumulator is defective. Replace accumulator.
Shock Rod Removal
1. Unscrew cylinder end cap assembly using spanner wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs].
a
51145
2. Remove shock rod assembly from cylinder.
51143
a - Plunger
7. Once accumulator is removed, remove O-ring,
conical spring, steel ball and plunger.
a
b
c
d
51145
a
b
c
d
-
Conical Spring
Steel Ball
Plunger
O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-19
3. Remove check ball components from shock rod
piston.
Shock Rod Disassembly
NOTE: The only serviceable items on the shock rod
assembly are the O-rings and wiper ring. If shock rod
requires any other repair, replace shock rod assembly.
4. Remove O-ring.
c
b
b
c
a
b
a
d
a - End Cap
b - O-rings (2)
c - Wiper Ring
51147
1. Place shock rod assembly on clean work surface.
2. Remove three (3) screws and remove plate from
shock rod piston.
a
b
c
d
-
Springs (5)
Seats (5)
Balls (5)
O-ring
a
b
c
51143
a - Screw (3)
b - Plate
c - Shock Rod Piston
5G-20 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
10. Remove inner O-ring.
CAUTION
When removing shock piston, spanner wrench
must have 1/4 in. x 5/16 in. long pegs to avoid
damage to shock piston.
5. Place shock rod in soft jawed vise and apply heat
to loosen piston using torch lamp (P/N 91-63209).
6. Loosen shock rod piston using spanner wrench
[1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs].
a
7. Allow shock rod piston to cool. Remove from
shock rod.
b
51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
11. Remove cylinder end cap assembly from shock rod.
12. Inspect shock. If wiper (located in cap) has failed to
keep rod clean, replace wiper.
13. Place end cap on clean work surface.
14. Remove rod wiper, inner O-ring, and outer O-ring.
51146
a
b
51147
a
c
51146
b
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston
51145
8. Inspect check valve for debris; clean debris from
check valve if found. If debris cannot be cleaned
from check valve, replace shock piston as an assembly.
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
9. Clean shock and components with compressed
air.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-21
Valve Block Removal
Memory Piston Removal
1. Remove two screws from the shock rod cylinder
to separate the valve block.
1. Remove memory piston from cylinder using one
of two methods:
a. Using lock ring pliers (Craftsman P/N 4735) or
(Snap-on P/N SRP4).
b
a
c
51146
a - Screws (2)
b - Valve Block
c - Shock Rod Cylinder
51144
2. Remove O-rings and dowel pins.
b. Blowing compressed air into center O-ring
hole.
b
WARNING
Memory piston cup may be expelled at a high
velocity when air pressure is applied. Failure to
place cylinder as shown below could result in
personal injury.
a
NOTE: Point cylinder opening down and away. Use
a shop rag or towel to avoid damage to the memory
piston. Fluid will blow out also.
51148
a
a - O-ring (2)
b - Dowel Pin (2)
b
c
55466
a - Adaptor/Air Hose
b - Memory Piston Exit
c - Shop Rag
5G-22 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Remove O-ring from memory piston.
3. Remove surge valve assembly.
a
b
a
b
c
d
51144
a - O-Ring
b - Memory Piston
a
b
c
d
Valve Block Disassembly
-
Spool
Spring
O-ring
Screw Plug
1. Remove check retainer plug and components.
2. Remove hydraulic oil transfer valve plugs and
components.
4. Remove screw and remove cam assembly.
e
d
c
b
a
a
b
c
d
e
-
Spacer Retainer Clip
Retainer Clip
Screw
Shaft Seal
Cam
a
b
51142
a - Transfer Valve Plug Assembly (2)
b - Check Retainer Plug or Screw Assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-23
REASSEMBLY - O-RING AND SEAL PLACEMENT
1
2
3
5
4
14
7
9
6
11 12
10
8
13
NOTE: Lubricate all O-rings using Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not available, use automotive (ATF)
automatic transmission fluid.
NOTE: It is recommended that all O-rings be replaced when servicing tilt system.
5G-24 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Actual O-ring Sizes
1
2
9
3
4, 14
5
10
6 (2)
11 & 13
Cutaway View of O-Ring
12
7
Width
8 (2)
O.D.
I.D.
O-RINGS SHOWN ARE ACTUAL SIZE
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-25
O-ring Description and Sizes
O-Ring
Description
O-Ring I.D.
O-Ring O.D.
O-Ring Width
1
Wiper Ring (412585)
2
Cyl. Cap, Inner (412586)
0.671 in. (17.04 mm)
0.949 in. (24.10 mm)
0.139 in. (3.53 mm)
3
Cyl. Cap (408134)
1.864 in. (47.34 mm)
2.004 in. (50.90 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
4
Shock Piston (412782)
1.6 in. (40.64 mm)
2.02 in. (53.086 mm)
0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
5
Piston Bolt (405797)
0.676 in. (17.17 mm)
.816 in. (20.726 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Manifold Split Line405387 0.208 in. (5.283 mm)
0.348 in. (8.839 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Slow Valve (401627)
0.114 in. (2.90 mm)
0.254 in. (6.451 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
Plug (404463)
0.489 in. (12.42 mm)
0.629 in. (15.97 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
9
Accumulator (412175)
2.114 in. (53.69 mm)
2.254 in. (57.25 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
10
Lip Seal (412574)
11
Cam Shaft (402664)
0.301 in. (7.645 mm)
0.441 in. (11.20 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
12
Back Up Ring (412592)
13
Surge Valve (402664)
0.301 in. (7.645 mm)
0.441 in. (11.20 mm)
0.07 in. (1.78 mm)
14
Memory Piston
1.6 in. (40.64 mm)
2.02 in. (53.086 mm)
0.21 in. (5.334 mm)
6 (2)
7
8 (2)
5G-26 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Manual Tilt System Cleaning
and Inspection
VALVE BODY CHECK REASSEMBLY
1. Install lubricated O-ring, plunger, steel ball and
conical spring to valve block.
1. It is recommended that all O-rings exposed during disassembly be replaced.
a
2. Clean components, filter, and check valve seats
using engine cleaner and compressed air. Do not
use cloth rags.
b
3. Inspect all machined surfaces for burrs or scoring
to assure O-ring longevity.
d
c
4. Inspect shock rod. If wiper (located in cap) has
failed to keep rod clean, replace wiper.
51145
Manual Tilt System
Reassembly
IMPORTANT: Components must be dirt and lint
free. Slightest amount of debris in tilt system
could cause system to malfunction.
a
b
c
d
-
Conical Spring
Steel Ball
Plunger
O-ring
Apply Quicksilver Power Trim and Steering Fluid to all
O-rings during reassembly. If not available, use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission fluid.
VELOCITY VALVE REASSEMBLY
CAM SHAFT REASSEMBLY
2. Torque screw plug to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N⋅m).
1. Install spool, spring, lubricated O-ring and screw
plug (surge valve assembly) into valve block.
IMPORTANT: Cam shaft O-ring must be lubricated using 2-4-C with Teflon (92-825407A12).
1. Install lubricated O-ring and back up seal to cam.
2. Install shaft seal in valve block with lips facing out.
3. Install cam shaft assembly in valve block.
a
4. Secure cam shaft in place using insulator, retainer plate, and screw. Tighten screw securely.
b
c
g
e f
d
d
c
b
a
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
a
b
c
d
-
Spool
Spring
O-ring
Screw Plug - Torque to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N⋅m)
Spacer Retainer Clip
Retainer Clip
Screw
Shaft Seal
O-ring
Back up Seal
Cam
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-27
CHECK RETAINER REASSEMBLY
Valve Block Installation
1. Install plunger, spring (large), ball, spring (small),
and plug into valve block.
1. Install lubricated O-rings and dowel pins.
b
1
a
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
d
e
-
51148
a - O-rings (2)
b - Dowel Pins (2)
51142
Plunger
Spring (Large)
Ball
Spring (Small)
Plug
2. Install valve block to shock rod cylinder. Insert
screws to shock rod cylinder and torque to 100 lb.
in. (11 N·m).
a
VALVE PLUG REASSEMBLY
b
1. Install plunger, steel ball, spring, lubricated O-ring
and screw plug. Torque screw plugs to 75 lb. in.
(8.5 N⋅m).
c
51146
a - Valve Block
b - Screws (2) Torque to 100 lb. in. (11 N⋅m)
c - Shock Rod Cylinder
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
d
e
-
51142
Plungers (2)
Steel Balls (2)
Springs (2)
O-rings (2)
Screw Plugs (2) Torque to 75 lb. in. (8.5 N⋅m)
5G-28 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Shock Rod Reassembly
4. Clamp shock rod in soft jawed vise.
1. Install lubricated O-rings to end cap.
5. Position cylinder end cap onto rod as shown.
2. Install rod wiper.
a
c
b
51146
51145
a - Rod Wiper
b - Inner O-ring
c - Outer O-ring
CAUTION
When installing shock rod piston, spanner
3. Install lubricated O-rings to shock piston.
wrench must have1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x8mm)
long pegs to avoid damage to shock rod piston.
6. Apply Loctite Grade “A” (271) to threads on shock
rod.
7. Install shock rod piston.
8. Tighten shock rod piston securely using spanner
wrench [1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long
pegs]. If a torquing type spanner tool is used to
tighten shock piston, then torque to 90 lb. ft. (122
N⋅m).
b
c
a
a
b
51199
a - Shock Piston
b - O-ring
c - O-ring
51146
a - Spanner Wrench
b - Shock Rod Piston - Torque to 90 lb. ft. (122 N⋅m)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-29
9. Install ball, seat, and spring (five sets) to shock
rod piston.
10. Secure components with plate. Torque screws to
35 lb.in. (3.9 N⋅m).
11. Remove shock rod assembly from vise.
Shock Rod Installation and Fluid Filling Procedure
NOTE: There are two ways for the filling procedure.
The first is the easiest and less time consuming.
Filling Procedure Option One
1. Place trim cylinder in soft jawed vice.
2. With manifold cam lever closed (Up Position), fill
cylinder and manifold to top with Quicksilver Power trim and steering fluid, or (ATF) automatic
transmission fluid. Let bubbles disperse.
d
e
3. Install lubricated O-ring to memory piston.
4. Using lock ring pliers (Craftsman P/N 4735) or
(Snap-on P/N SRP4) set memory piston in top of
cylinder then open cam lever (Down Position) and
push memory piston down just below cylinder
treads. Close cam lever (Up Position).
c
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
-
51147
Screw (3) Torque to 35 lb. in. (3.9 N⋅m)
Plate
Spring (5)
Seat (5)
Ball (5)
51144
5. Fill top of cylinder again with fluid to top and install
shock rod assembly on top memory piston. Open
cam lever (Down Position) and push shock rod
assembly down to 1/8″ below cylinder threads.
Close cam lever (Up Position).
5G-30 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
6. Fill top of shock rod assembly with fluid to top of
cylinder. Open cam lever (Down Position) and
screw cylinder cap down.
7. Tighten end cap securely using spanner wrench
[1/4 in. x 5/16 in. (6.4mm x 8mm) long pegs]. If a
torquing type spanner tool is used to tighten end
cap, then torque the end cap to 45 lb. ft. (61.0
N⋅m). Close cam lever (up Position).
51145
8. Open and close cam lever watching for bubbles
coming from accumulator check ball hole. When
bubbles stop, fill accumulator opening to top with
fluid. Grease threads on accumulator and opening with 2-4-C with Teflon. Start accumulator in
threads and open cam lever (Down Position).
Torque accumulator to 35 lb. ft. (47 N⋅m).
a
b
51143
a - Accumulator
b - Cam Lever (Down Position)
NOTE: If filling procedure is done correctly, it should
be hard to turn cylinder rod assembly by hand.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-31
Filling Procedure Option Two
Instructions for Making
Retaining Tool
3/16 in x 3 in.
(5 x 7.5 cm)
Steel Plate
3/8 in. x 13 in.
(10mm x 33cm)
Threaded Rod
4in. x 1/4 in. min.
(10cm x 6.4mm) minimum
Channel Iron
10 in.
(25 cm)
8 in.
(20 cm)
1 in.
(25mm)
3 in.
(76mm)
2 holes, 7/16 in. dia. (11 mm)
1 1/4 in. dia.
(30m)
5 in.
(125mm)
20 in.
(508mm)
2 in.
(50mm)
4 in.
(100 mm)
6 in.
(152mm)
5G-32 - MID-SECTION
8 in.
(203mm)
3/8 in. dia. 2 holes
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Bleeding Manual Tilt System
IMPORTANT: While bleeding tilt system, time
must be allowed between each stroke to allow air
bubbles to dissipate.
3. Bleed unit by pushing rod down slowly (18-20 seconds per stroke) until stopped at base. Wait until
all air bubbles exit accumulator base.
1. With shock rod in the full up position and manifold
cam lever open (facing down), secure tilt system
to retaining tool and container. (A No. 10 can or 3
lb. coffee can could be used).
2. Fill container to near full level using Quicksilver
Power Trim and Steering Fluid. If not available,
use automotive (ATF) automatic transmission
fluid.
IMPORTANT: Fluid level must remain above accumulator opening during bleeding process.
a
50432
e
b
4. During up stroke, pull up on rod slowly 3 in.
(76mm) from base.
c
a
5. Wait until all air bubbles exit accumulator base.
d
50447
a
b
c
d
e
-
Retaining Tool
Tilt System
Container
Cam Lever
Accumulator Opening
50433
6. Slowly cycle unit 5-8 times (round trip per cycle)
using short strokes 3 in. (76mm) from base allowing bubbles to disappear during each stroke.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-33
7. Allow unit to stand five minutes then proceed to
cycle unit 2-3 more times using short strokes. No
air bubbles should appear from accumulator port
at this time.
11. With cam lever remaining open (facing down), remove tilt assembly from oil and secure in soft
jawed vise. Torque accumulator to 35 lb. ft. (47
N·m).
8. With oil level well above accumulator port, slowly
pull rod to full up position.
9. Install accumulator making sure air bubbles do
not enter system.
50433
50432
10. Tighten accumulator snugly at this time.
50432
5G-34 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Using a suitable punch, drive lower pivot pin into
clamp bracket and trim cylinder assembly until
pivot pin is flush with outside surface.
Manual Tilt System
Installation
1. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant to lower pivot pin
hole and pivot pin surface.
2. Start lower pivot pin into pivot pin hole and position lower dowel pin (retained) in its hole.
b
a
51147
a - Lower Pivot Pin
a
51148
a - Lower Pivot Pin
b - Lower Dowel Pin
5. Using a punch, drive lower dowel pin in until
seated.
3. Reinstall manual tilt system, bottom first. Reconnect release valve link rod.
2
a
a
51148
a - Lower Dowel Pin
1
51144
a - Manual Tilt System
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MID-SECTION - 5G-35
6. Apply 2-4-C Marine Lubricant (92-90018A12) to
surface of upper pivot pin, pivot pin hole and
shock rod hole.
8. Drive upper dowel pin (a) into its hole until seated.
a
c
2
a
b
51147
a - Dowel Pin
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Pivot Pin Bore
c - Shock Rod Bore
9. Check manual release cam adjustment. Cam
must open and close freely. Adjust link rod as necessary.
7. Using a mallet, drive upper pivot pin into swivel
bracket and through shock rod until pivot pin is
flush with swivel bracket.
Manual Release Valve Adjustment
1. With outboard in full up position, place tilt lock lever forward.
2. Lift cam lever (with link rod) to full up position.
b
a
c
c
a
51148
a - Pivot Pin
b - Swivel Bracket
c - Shock Rod
b
51143
a - Tilt Lock Lever
b - Cam Lever
c - Link Rod
3. Link rod end must snap onto ball of tilt lock lever
without moving tilt lock lever or cam lever.
5G-36 - MID-SECTION
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT
51114
STANDARD GEAR HOUSING
6
A
Table of Contents
Page
Drive Shaft and Water Pump Components . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Lubrication/Sealant Application Points . . . . . . . . . 6A-1
Propeller Shaft Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-2
Lubrication/Sealant Application Points . . . . . . . . . 6A-2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
Quicksilver Lubricants and Service Aids . . . . . . . . . . 6A-3
New Tools Required for 50-60 Gear Housing . . . . . . 6A-3
Draining and Inspecting Gear Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 6A-5
Propeller Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-6
Gear Housing Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-6
Gear Housing Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-7
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-7
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-8
Propeller Shaft Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-10
Pinion Gear, Driveshaft and Forward Gear . . . . 6A-11
Upper Driveshaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-11
Lower Driveshaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6A-12
6A-0 - LOWER UNIT
Gear Housing Re-assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower Driveshaft Bearing Installation . . . . . . . .
Upper Driveshaft Bearing Installation . . . . . . . .
Forward Gear, Pinion Gear, Upper Driveshaft
Bearing Race, Retainer and Driveshaft
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinion Gear Location and Forward Gear
Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining Pinion Gear Location . . . . . . . .
Determining Forward Gear Backlash . . . . . .
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Water Pump Re-assembly and Installation . . . .
Gear Housing Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Housing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling Gear Housing with Lubricant . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Housing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement . . . . . . .
Page
6A-13
6A-13
6A-14
6A-15
6A-15
6A-16
6A-17
6A-17
6A-18
6A-18
6A-19
6A-19
6A-20
6A-21
6A-22
6A-24
6A-24
6A-24
6A-25
6A-26
6A-27
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Drive Shaft and Water Pump
Components
A
1 - Gear Housing
2 - Drain Screw
3 - Screw
4 - Washer
5 - Dowel Pin (Hollow)
6 - Dowel Pin (Solid)
7 - Pipe Plug
8 - Roller Bearing
9 - Pinion Gear
10- Nut
11- Shift Shaft
12- Retaining Ring
13- Bushing
14- O-ring
15- Oil Seal
16- Drive Shaft
17- Shim Set
18- Tapered Roller Bearing
19- Nut
20- Water Pump Base
21- O-ring
22- Oil Seal
23- Oil Sea
24- Face Plate
25- Impeller
26- Key
27- Water Pump
28- Gasket (Lower)
29- Gasket (Upper)
30- Seal
31- Screw
32- Washer
33- Insulator (Design 1)
34- Insulator (Design 1)
35- Shift Cam
36- Spacer
37- Coupler
38- Plate
39- Seal
D
31 a
C
30
32
27
33
26
19 c
18
D
25
a
31
17
29
32
34
24
28
16
A
20
B
21
(O.D.)
22
D
23
38
A
(I.D.)
(I.D.)
(O.D.)
37
8
39
6
A
7
36
A
15
Torque Specifications
a
b
c
d
e
f
1
60 lb. in. (6.8 N·m)
13
5
D
20 lb. in. (2.2 N·m)
75 lb. ft. (101.7 N·m)
22 lb. ft. (29.8 N·m)
f 3
9
2-4-C Marine Lubricant (P/N 92-90018A12)
B
Super Duty Marine Gear Lubricant (P/N 92-13135A12)
Special Lubricant 101 (P/N 92- 13872A1)
D
Loctite Grade A (P/N 92-32609-1)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
11
e 10
A
C
12
35
50 lb. ft. (67.8 N·m)
35-80 lb. in. (3.8-8.8 N·m)
Lubrication/Sealant Application
Points
14
4
3
4
D
4
2
51113
f
LOWER UNIT - 6A-1
Propeller Shaft Components
59
61
d 60
E
a
63
64
(O.D.)
48
D
47 46
45
58
c
44
1
42
43
41
40
57
62
56
55
53
F
(I.D.)
G
54
52
49
51
40- Shim Set
41- Tapered Roller Bearing
42- Forward Gear
43- Roller Bearing
44- Cam Follower
45- Guide
46- Spring
47- Clutch
48- Cross Pin
49- Spring
50- Propeller Shaft
51- Reverse Gear
52- Ball Bearing
53- Bearing Carrier
54- O-ring
55- Roller Bearing
56- Oil Seal
57- Oil Seal
58- Screw
59- Trim Tab
60- Screw
61- Washer
62- Thrust Hub
63- Propeller Nut
64- Tab Washer
50
E
Torque Specifications
a
b
c
d
55 lb. ft. (75 N·m)
275 lb. in. (31.0 N·m)
150 lb. in. (17.0 N·m)
22 lb. ft. (30.0 N·m)
Lubrication/Sealant Application
Points
D
Loctite Grade A (P/N 92-32609-1)
E
2-4-C Marine Lubricant (P/N 92-90018A12)
F
Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant
(P/N 92-42649A-1)
Special Lubricant 101 (P/N 92- 13872A1)
G
6A-2 - LOWER UNIT
51114
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Special Tools
Part No.
Description
91-14311A2
91-817057A1
91-19660--1
91-24273
91-27780
91-37241
91-37312*
91-37323*
91-43506
91-46068A1
91-58222A1
91-83155
91-87516
91-817005
91-817006
91-817007
91-817008
91-817009
Bearing Preload Tool
Backlash Indicator Tool
Backlash Indicator Update Kit
Mandrel
Puller
Universal Puller Plate
Driver Head
Driver Rod
Bearing Retaining Tool
Puller Jaws
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit
Puller Bolt
Forward Gear Bearing Installer
Water Pump Base Seal Installer
Bearing Carrier Seal Installer
Pinion Gear Location Tool
Forward Gear Bearing Race
Driver Cup
Needle Bearing Installer
Lower Driveshaft Bearing Driver
Assembly
Driveshaft Holding Tool
91-817011
91-817058A1
91-817070
New Tools Required for 50-60
Gear Housing
b
a
c
c
d
e
l
f
g
*Tools included in Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
h
Quicksilver Lubricants and
Service Aids
Part No.
Description
92-34227--1
92-42649A1
92-13872A1
92-19007A12
92-32609
92-90018A12
Perfect Seal
Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant
Special Lubricant 101
Gear Lubricant
Loctite A (271)
2-4-C Marine Lubricant
i
k
J
51270
Ref.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
Description
Qty.
Bushing - 3/4 in. (19mm) I.D.
Bushing - 7/8 in. (22mm) I.D.
Set Screw
Nut
Bolt
Spring
Washer
Bearing
Adaptor
Plate
Nut
Stud
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
91-14311A-2 Bearing Preload Tool
NOTE: Bearing Preload Tool 91-14311A-1 may be updated to a 91-14311A-2 tool, by ordering Update Kit
91-817057A-1.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-3
19660-1
91-19660--1 Backlash Indicator Tool
51043
51043
91-817009 Driver Cup (Forward Gear Bearing Race)
51043
91-817005 Bearing Installer (Forward Gear Needle
Bearing)
51043
91-817011 Needle Bearing Installer (Bearing Carrier)
d
c
51043
91-817006 Seal Installer (Water Pump Base)
91-817007 Seal Installer (Bearing Carrier)
51043
b
a
51270
51043
Ref.
a
b
c
d
Description
Plate
Nut
Stud
Sleeve
Qty.
1
1
1
1
91-817057A-1 Update Kit (Converts 91-14311A-1 Bearing Preload Kit Tool to a 91-14311A-2)
91-817008A2 Pinion Gear Locating Tool
6A-4 - LOWER UNIT
51043
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Draining and Inspecting Gear
Lubricant
! WARNING
If gear housing is installed on outboard, disconnect
(and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs before
working near the propeller.
1. With gear housing in normal running position, place a
clean pan under housing and remove two vent plugs
and one fill/drain plug (with gaskets).
a
b
50558
a - Vent Plug
b - Fill/Drain Plug
51043
91-817058A-1 Bearing Driver Assy. (Lower Drive Shaft
Bearing)
51043
2. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant will
have a “metal flake” appearance). Presence of fine
metal particles (resembling powder) on the drain plug
magnet indicates normal wear. Metal chips on the
magnet indicate the need for gear housing disassembly and component inspection.
3. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color indicates presence of water. Gear lubricant drained from
a gearcase recently in operation will have a yellowish
color due to lubricant agitation/aeration. This is normal
and should not be confused with the presence of water.
4. Presence of water indicates the need for disassembly
and inspection of oil seals, o-rings, gaskets and components for damage.
91-817070 Drive Shaft Holding Tool
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-5
Propeller Removal
Gear Housing Removal
! WARNING
! WARNING
If gear housing is not removed from outboard, before
attempting to remove or install the propeller, remove
(and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs to prevent outboard from starting.
1. Bend tabs of tab washer (a) away from nut (b).
To prevent accidental engine starting, remove (and
isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs before removing gear housing.
1. Remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark
plugs.
2. Shift into forward gear.
3. Tilt engine to full “Up ” position.
4. Remove four bolts and washers (a), two from each
side.
5. Remove trim tab (b).
6. Remove locknut and washer (c) in trim tab recess.
a
7. Remove gear housing.
b
c
51119
2. Use a block of wood (a) to prevent propeller from rotating. Remove nut and pull components from shaft.
b
a
a
50555
50552
6A-6 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Gear Housing Disassembly
a
Water Pump
1. If water tube seal (a) stayed on water tube (inside of driveshaft housing) when gear housing was removed,
then pull seal from water tube. Replace water tube seal
(a) if damaged.
2. Remove 6 bolts (b), washers (c) and isolators (d) (Design 1). Remove cover (e).
c
b
NOTE: Isolators (d) from forward 2 screws are different
from the other isolators. Retain these for proper re-assembly (Design 1).
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the impeller sealing bead should be disregarded when inspecting cover and plate as the depth of the groove will not
affect water pump output.
51207
5. Remove plate (a) and gasket (b).
6. Replace plate if groove(s) (other than impeller sealing
groove) in plate are more than .030 in. (.762mm) deep.
3. Replace cover if thickness of steel at the discharge
slots is .060 in. (1.524mm) or less, or if groove(s) (other
than impeller sealing groove) in cover roof are more
than .030 in. (.762mm) deep.
a
a
b
e
c
b
b
51206
b
c
d
c
7. Remove water pump base (a) by lifting gently as
shown.
d
c
51206
4. Lift impeller (a), drive key (b), and gasket (c). Replace
impeller if:
a
– Impeller blades are cracked, torn, or worn.
– Impeller is glazed or melted (caused by insufficient
water supply).
– Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to impeller
hub.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
51206
LOWER UNIT - 6A-7
8. Remove (and discard) seals (a), if damaged.
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
1. Drain lubricant; refer to “Draining and Inspecting Gear
Lubricant”.
a
2. Remove bolts (a).
a
51205
9. Remove seal and plate if damaged or worn.
a
a
b
51117
51268
3. With propeller shaft horizontal, pull carrier to break
seal with gear housing. Remove bearing carrier/propeller shaft components. Do not leave cam follower in
end of propeller shaft. Remove propeller shaft from
bearing carrier using bearing puller.
a - Seal
b - Plate
b
d
c
a
e
19180
a
b
c
d
e
6A-8 - LOWER UNIT
-
Bearing Carrier
Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
Puller Bolt (91-85716)
Thrust Hub
Propeller Shaft
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Replace reverse gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth on reverse gear are chipped or worn. If reverse gear must
be replaced, pinion and sliding clutch should also be inspected for damage.
7. If bearing (c) is rusted or does not roll freely, replace
bearing. Remove bearing and oil seals. Discard oil
seals.
5. If reverse gear bearing is rusted or does not roll freely,
replace bearing. Remove bearing and reverse gear
using bearing puller (91-27780).
a
b
c
d
51264
a
b
c
d
51205
-
Driver Rod (91-37323)
Driver Head (91-37312)
Propeller Shaft Needle Bearing
Oil Seals (2)
8. Remove seals (if not removed with bearing) and O-ring
(a).
6. Remove ball bearing (a) from reverse gear (b) using
Universal Puller Plate (c) and mandrel (d).
a
d
51263
51289
a
b
c
51269
a
b
c
d
-
Ball Bearing
Reverse Gear
Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
Driver Head (91-37312)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-9
Propeller Shaft Disassembly
a
1. Remove spring (a). Push out cross pin (e).
e
e
a
c
b
d
51265
51265
a
b
c
d
e
-
Cam Follower
Guide Block
Spring
Sliding Clutch
Jaws
4. Check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft. If shaft is
worn/pitted, replace shaft and corresponding bearing.
d
5. Replace propeller shaft if:
a. Splines are twisted or worn.
b
c
b. Oil seal surface (b) is grooved in excess of 0.005
in. (0.12mm).
c.
c
Shaft has a noticeable “wobble” or is bent more
than 0.006 in. (.152 mm). Check with a dial indicator and V-blocks.
b
c b
e
51268
a
b
c
d
e
-
Spring
Cam Follower
Apply Pressure as Shown
Punch
Cross Pin
2. Replace cam follower if worn or pitted on either end.
3. Replace sliding clutch if jaws are rounded or chipped.
Rounded jaws indicate the following:
a. Improper shift cable adjustment.
b. Engine idle speed too high while shifting.
c.
a
51139
a - “Vee” Blocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Check with Dial Indicator Here
Shifting too slowly.
6A-10 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Pinion Gear, Driveshaft and Forward
Gear
1. Hold driveshaft using Driveshaft Holding Tool (a)
(91-817070); remove (and discard) pinion nut (b).
2. Remove driveshaft (c), pinion gear (d), and forward
gear (f).
7. Replace forward gear tapered roller bearing (a) and
race if either bearing or race are rusted or damaged;
or if bearing does not roll freely after cleaning in solvent. Remove bearing from gear using Universal Puller Plate (b) (91-37241) and Mandrel (c). To remove
race, refer to “Forward Gear Bearing Race”, following.
c
3. Replace pinion gear (d) if chipped or worn.
4. Replace bearing (e) if rusted or damaged; or does not
roll freely. To remove, refer to “Lower Driveshaft Bearing”, following.
a
5. Replace forward gear (f) if gear teeth are chipped or
worn.
a
b
51119
51043
Upper Driveshaft Bearing
c
1. Replace bearing (a) and race if either bearing or race
are rusted or damaged; or if bearing does not roll freely
after cleaning in solvent.
d
To
Remove
f
b
a
e
51263
6. Replace bearing if rusted or does not roll freely after
cleaning in solvent. Remove as shown.
19203
51271
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-11
Lower Driveshaft Bearing
Shift Shaft
1. Remove lower driveshaft bearing
(91-817058A1) with bushing installed.
using
tool
1. Remove shift shaft coupler (a) and spacer (b).
a
b
b
51271
2. Remove shift shaft bushing (a) and shift shaft (b). Protect shift shaft to prevent spline damage.
c
b
a
a
51205
51260
3. Remove shift shaft cam (a); replace if worn.
a - Bearing
b - Removal Tool (91-817058A1)
c - Bushing
Forward Gear Bearing Race
IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for re-assembly.
a
1. Remove race (a) and shim(s) (b) using bearing puller
(c) (91-27780).
c
b
a
51265
51117
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Bearing Puller (91-27780)
6A-12 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove shift shaft bushing (a) and clip (b) from shift
shaft (c). Replace shift shaft if splines are twisted or
damaged on either end of shaft. Remove (and discard)
O-ring (d) if damaged.
a
d
c
b
c
a
b
51264
51270
5. Remove (and discard) seal (a) if damaged.
3. Assemble components.
d
b
c
a
a
51264
51265
Gear Housing Reassembly
a
b
c
d
-
Shift Shaft
“E” Clip
Bushing
O-ring
4. Install shift cam (a) (numbers toward top of gear housing); align hole in shift cam with hole (b).
b
Shift Shaft
1. Apply Perfect Seal on O.D. of new seal (a). Install with
seal lip up as shown.
2. Press seal into shift shaft bushing (b) until seal bottoms. Use a suitable tool (c).
a
Apply Quicksilver Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant on
O-ring and I.D. of seal.
51117
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-13
5. Install shift shaft assembly (a); insert splines into shift
cam.
2. Install cross pin.
c
a
b
a
51268
a - Cross Pin
b - Cam Follower
c - Apply Pressure in This Direction
3. Install spring.
NOTE: Spring windings must lay flat with no overlapping in
clutch groove after installation.
a
51268
Propeller Shaft
1. Install components.
a
c
d
51265
a - Spring
b
A
51265
A
2-4-C Quicksilver Marine Lubricant
a - Spring
b - Clutch (Align Hole with Slot in Propshaft; Long End of Clutch with 3
Teeth Towards Propshaft Shoulder)
c - Guide Block
d - Cam Follower (Hold in Place with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine
Lubricant
6A-14 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Forward Gear Bearing Race
1. Place shim(s) retained from disassembly into housing.
If shim(s) were lost or damaged, or a new gearcase is
being assembled, start with a .010 in. (.254mm) shim.
3. Install small diameter oil seal (a). Seal lip faces away
from shoulder on Installer Tool. Press seal in until Installer Tool bottoms.
2. Drive bearing race into housing. Use a lead hammer to
avoid damage to propshaft.
b
a
A
51043
e
d
a
c b
c
51043
51265
a - Shim(s)
b - Race (Apply Quicksilver Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant
on O.D.)
c - Driver Cup (91-817009)
d - Propeller Shaft
e - Assembled Bearing Carrier
a - Small Diameter Seal
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
Bearing Carrier
4. Install large diameter seal (a) on Installer Tool. Seal lip
faces towards shoulder on Installer Tool. Press in until
Installer tool bottoms.
51206
Loctite Grade A (O.D. of Seal)
A
1. Lubricate O.D. of needle bearing (a) with Quicksilver
Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant.
2. Install needle bearing.
Installation Note: Push against numbered end of bearing.
b
b
a
a
51043
51043
A
51263
A
Loctite Grade A (O.D. of Seal)
a - Large Diameter Seal
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
51269
a - Needle Bearing
b - Installer (91-817011)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-15
Installation Note: If service tools are not available, the following reference dimensions apply for installing bearing
and seals to proper depths.
.82 in. (20mm)
Reverse Gear
1. Lubricate I.D. of bearing (a) with Quicksilver Needle
Bearing Assembly Lubricant. Use Installer Tool and
press onto gear until bearing bottoms.
b
a
a
51275
a - Bearing
.44 in. (11mm)
.04 in. (1mm)
b
a
51205
a - Bearing
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
51275
a - Oil Seal (Install with Lip Down)
b - Oil Seal (Install with Lip Up)
2. Install reverse gear and bearing assembly (a). Lubricate O.D. of bearing with Quicksilver Needle Bearing
Assembly Lubricant before installation.
5. Lubricate O-ring with Special Lubricant 101. Install Oring (a).
b
a
a
c
51263
51264
a - Reverse Gear and Bearing Assembly
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
c - Bearing Carrier
6A-16 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Forward Gear
Lower Driveshaft Bearing Installation
Press new propshaft bearing into gear. Lubricate O.D. of
bearing with Quicksilver Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant before installation. Press until Installer Tool bottoms.
1. Lubricate O.D. of bearing race with Quicksilver Needle
Bearing Assembly Lubricant.
Installation Note: Push against numbered end of bearing.
2. Install bearing (a) into housing. Press until Installer
Tool bottoms.
Installation Note: Push against numbered end of bearing.
51043
7.05 in.
7.07 in.
(
)
179.0mm
179.5mm
b
51291
a - Installer Tool (91-817005)
1. Press tapered roller bearing (a) onto gear. Lubricate
I.D. of bearing with Quicksilver Needle Bearing Assembly Lubricant before installation. Use Installer Tool
(b). Press until bearing bottoms on gear.
a
Ref. Bearing
Depth
b
a
51260
a - Needle Bearing (Lubricate O.D. Before Assembly)
b - Bearing Installer Tool (91-817058A1)
51272
a - Bearing (Lubricate I.D. Before Assembly)
b - Installer Tool (91-817007)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-17
Upper Driveshaft Bearing Installation
1. Press upper driveshaft bearing (a) onto driveshaft. Lubricate I.D. of bearing with Quicksilver Needle Bearing
Assembly Lubricant before pressing in place.
Forward Gear, Pinion Gear, Upper
Driveshaft Bearing Race, Retainer
and Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: If shim(s) were lost or are not reusable (damaged),
start with approximately .015 in. (0.361mm).
Install components in sequence shown.
d
c
51285
e
g
51043
a
a
b
g
f
51268
51263
a - Forward Gear/Bearing: Apply Quicksilver Gear Lube to Bearing
Rollers Before Installation
b - Pinion Gear
c - Upper Driveshaft Bearing Race and Shim(s)
d - Upper Driveshaft Bearing Retainer [Torque to 75 lb. ft. (101.7 N·m)]
Use Tool (91-43506)
e - Driveshaft
f - Driveshaft Holding Tool (91-817070)
g - Pinion Nut (New) (See Note at “Pinion Gear Depth”, Following.)
Recess in Nut is Installed Toward Pinion Gear (See Inset).
a - Upper Driveshaft Bearing (Lubricate I.D. Before Assembly)
6A-18 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Pinion Gear Location and Forward
Gear Backlash
3. Measure distance (a).
4. Increase distance (a) by 1 in. (25.4mm).
5. Rotate driveshaft 10 revolutions. This properly seats
upper driveshaft tapered roller bearing.
DETERMINING PINION GEAR LOCATION
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any
change in shim thickness.
c
a
IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly must be installed in gear housing when checking pinion gear
depth to obtain accurate shim measurements.
1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder and
diameter.
2. Position gear housing upright (driveshaft vertical). Install Bearing Preload Tool in sequence shown.
b
h
3/4 in. (19mm) I.D.
i
i
19884
6. Insert Pinion Location Tool (a). Position access hole (b)
as shown. Insert feeler gauge between gauging surface (c) and pinion gear (d).
g
f
a
b
c
d
e
d
c
b
51265
a
b
c
d
-
Pinion Location Tool (91-817008A2)
Access Hole
Gauging Surface
Pinion Gear
a
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
-
51270
Plate
Adaptor: Bearing surfaces clean and free of nicks
Thrust Bearing: Oiled and able to move freely
Thrust Washer: Clean and free of nicks and bends
Spring
Nut: Threaded all-the-way onto bolt
Bolt: Held snug against spring
Sleeve: Holes in sleeve must align with set screws
Set Screw (2): Tighten against drive shaft, bolt should not slide on
driveshaft
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-19
7. The correct clearance between the gauging surface
(b) and the pinion gear (c) is .025 in. (0.64mm).
8. To obtain .025 in. (0.64mm), add or subtract shims below the upper bearing race (b) to lower or raise the pinion gear.
9. After final adjustment to pinion height, and forward
gear backlash has been established, apply Loctite
271 to threads and torque new pinion nut to 50 lb. ft. (67
N·m).
DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any
change in shim thickness.
1. Obtain correct pinion gear location; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear Location”, preceding.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool on driveshaft; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear Location”, preceding.
3. Install components.
4. Torque to 45 lb. in. (5 N·m)
d
a
51285
b
d
c
a
b
c
51119
a
b
c
d
c
-
Propeller Shaft*
Bearing Carrier* (Assembled)
Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
Puller Bolt (91-58716) Torque to 45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m).
*Refer to “Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation”, following.
51263
a
b
c
d
-
Bearing Race
Shim(s)
Pinion Nut [Recessed Side (d) Toward Pinion]
Recessed Side Toward Pinion
6A-20 - LOWER UNIT
5. Rotate driveshaft 10 revolutions to properly seat forward gear tapered roller bearing.
6. Re-torque puller bolt to 45 lb. in. (5.1 N·m).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. Install components.
e
d
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
Installation
f
1. Insert propeller shaft assembly into bearing carrier.
2. Lubricate O-ring (a) and areas (b) with Quicksilver
Special Lubricant 101 (P/N 92-13872A1).
3. Install bearing carrier and propeller shaft assembly
into gear housing. Use care not to displace cam follower (c).
a
b
c
b
b
c
51275
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Threaded Rod
Washers
Nuts
Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
Backlash Indicator Tool (91-19660--1)
a
c
51271
! CAUTION
Use care not to damage O-ring (a) during installation
of bearing carrier assembly.
4. Install bolts (a). Apply Loctite 271 to threads and torque
to 150 lb. in. (17 N·m).
8. Position Dial Indicator on line “3” on Backlash Indicator
Tool.
9. Turn driveshaft back-and-forth (check for no rotation at
the propeller shaft).
a
10. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which
must be between .013 in. (.33mm) and .019 in.
(.48mm).
11. If backlash is less than the minimum reading, remove
shim(s)* from in front of the forward gear bearing race.
12. If backlash is more than the maximum reading, add
shim(s) in front of the forward gear bearing race.
* By adding or subtracting .001 in. (0.025mm) shim, the backlash will
change .00125 in. (0.032mm).
NOTE: When final measurement has been made, apply
Loctite 271 to threads of pinion nut. Torque to 50 lb. ft. (67.8
N·m).
a
51117
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-21
Water Pump Re-assembly and
Installation
0.04 in. (1.02 mm)
a
1. Place seal (a) on longer shoulder side (b) of tool.
b
2. Press into water pump base until tool bottoms.
Seal
Bottom
51285
a - Seal (Install with spring visible when installed.)
b - Seal (Install with spring visible when installed.)
A
51043
If installation tool is not available, press seals in as shown
to depths indicated.
5. Install O-ring (a). Lubricate O-ring and gear housing
bore with Quicksilver Special Lubricant 101.
b
6. Install water pump base (b) into gearcase (c).
a
b
a
51270
A
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant
a - Seal (Install with spring visible when installed.)
b - Seal Installation Tool (91-817006)
3. Place seal (a) on shorter side (b) of tool (c).
4. Press into water pump base until tool bottoms.
c
c
c
51263
51043
b
a
A
51263
A
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant
6A-22 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. If removed previously, re-install seal (a) and plate (b).
10. Lubricate I.D. of cover with Quicksilver Needle Bearing
Assembly Lubricant (P/N 92-42649A1). Install gasket
(a) with bead (b) towards cover.
b
a
b
51290
11. Rotate driveshaft clockwise and push cover down. Secure cover.
a
a
d
c
51268
d
d
d
c
8. Install gasket (a) and face plate (b).
b
b
c
c
b
b
51275
a
a - Cover
b - Isolators, (Design 1) Note: 2 isolators for forward screws are
different from remaining 4 isolators
c - Washers (6)
d - Bolts (6); Apply Loctite on threads and torque to 60 lb. in.
(6.8 N·m).
NOTE: Torque cover screws as shown.
51293
IMPORTANT: If the old impeller is re-used, install in the
original (clockwise) direction of rotation.
1
9. Install drive key (a) and impeller (b).
3
5
b
6
4
a
2
51271
51292
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-23
12. If water tube seal (a) stayed on water tube (inside of
driveshaft) pull seal from water tube.
3. Rotate driveshaft, prop shaft and move shift rod while
housing is pressurized to check for leaks.
13. Lubricate I.D. of water tube seal (a) with Quicksilver
2-4-C Marine Lubricant (P/N 92-90018A12) and install.
a
51206
a - Water Tube Seal
4. If pressure drop is noted immerse housing in water.
Gear Housing Pressure Test
1. Remove vent plug and install pressure test gauge.
Tighten securely.
5. Re-pressurize to 10-12 p.s.i. and check for air bubbles.
6. Replace leaking seals as necessary. Retest housing.
NOTE: It should hold 10-12 p.s.i. for 5 minutes.
7. Remove tester from housing and install vent plug.
Gear Housing Installation
Filling Gear Housing with Lubricant
NOTE: Gear housing lubricant capacity is approximately
11.5 fl. oz. (340 ml).
! WARNING
If gear housing is installed on outboard, disconnect
(and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs before
working near the propeller.
! CAUTION
Do not use automotive grease in the gear housing. Use
only Quicksilver Gear Lube.
2. Pressurize housing to 10-12 p.s.i. and observe gauge
for 5 minutes.
1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill” and “Vent”
plugs and gear housing. Install new gaskets on “Fill”
and “Vent” plugs.
IMPORTANT: Never add lubricant without removing
“Vent” plugs. Gear housing cannot be filled because
of trapped air. Fill gear housing when driveshaft is in
a vertical position.
2. Remove “Fill” plug and gasket (a).
6A-24 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Insert lubricant tube in “Fill” hole, then remove “Vent”
plugs and gaskets (b and c).
4. Fill until excess lubricant flows out of “Vent” hole (b).
Gear Housing Installation
! WARNING
5. Replace this “Vent” plug and gasket and continue to fill
until lubricant flows from second “Vent” hole (c).
Disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads before installing gear housing onto driveshaft housing.
6. Replace this “Vent” plug and gasket (c).
1. Position shift block (a) in forward gear position.
7. Install “Fill” plug and gasket (a).
b
a
c
51190
a - Shift Block
2. Tilt engine to full “Up” position. Engage tilt lock lever.
3. Shift gear housing into neutral. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direction.
4. Install water tube seal (a), spacer (b) and shift shaft
coupler (c).
a
50558
A
a - “Fill” Plug
b - “Vent” Plug
c - “Vent” Plug
a
Torque screws to 35-80 lb. in. (3.8-8.8 N·m)
c
b
51206
A
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2-4-C Marine Lubricant (I.D. of seal,
coupler splines)
LOWER UNIT - 6A-25
11. Check shift operation.
! CAUTION
Do not lubricate top of driveshaft. Excess lubricant will
not allow driveshaft to fully engage crankshaft. Tightening the gear housing fasteners (if excess lubricant
is on top of driveshaft) will load the driveshaft/crankshaft and may damage either or both powerhead and
gear housing. Wipe the top of driveshaft free of lubricant.
5. Lightly apply Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant onto
the driveshaft splines.
6. Shift gear housing into forward gear. Gear housing will
not engage when propeller shaft is turned clockwise.
7. Position driveshaft into driveshaft housing. Move gear
housing towards driveshaft housing while aligning shift
shaft coupler, water tube seal and driveshaft splines.
NOTE: If the driveshaft splines will not align with the crankshaft splines, install a propeller and turn the propeller shaft
counterclockwise while pushing gear housing onto driveshaft housing. It may also be necessary to move the shift
block (on the powerhead) to align the shift shaft splines for
proper re-assembly.
8. Install 4 bolts and washers (a), (two each side). Apply
Loctite A (271) on threads of bolts prior to installation.
a. Gear housing should not engage when propeller
shaft is turned clockwise when in forward gear.
b. Propeller shaft will rotate freely in either direction
when gearcase is in neutral.
c.
Propeller shaft will not rotate in either direction
when gearcase is in reverse.
IMPORTANT: If shift operation is not as described, remove the gear housing and correct the shift operation.
Propeller Installation
! WARNING
Disconnect and isolate spark plug leads when working
near the propeller to prevent the outboard from starting.
1. Apply a thin coat of lubricant to propeller shaft
splines with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
2. Install components as shown.
Flo-Torq I Drive Hub Propellers
c
9. Install locknut and washer (b).
b
10. Torque bolts and locknut to 40 lb. ft. (54 N·m).
a
a - Forward Thrust Hub
b - Propeller Nut Retainer
c - Propeller Nut
Flo-Torq II Drive Hub Propellers
a
e d
a
c
b
b
50551
6A-26 - LOWER UNIT
a
b
c
d
e
-
a
Forward Thrust Hub
Replaceable Drive Sleeve
Rear Thrust Hub
Propeller Nut Retainer
Propeller Nut
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Tighten propeller nut to 55 lb.ft. (75 N·m). Bend
tabs against nut.
a
b
b
2. The trim tab will offset (balance) some of the “steering
load” that is caused by “propeller torque” at higher
speeds. If at higher speeds the boat turns more easily
to the left, loosen bolt, move the trim tab (trailing edge)
to the left (when viewed from behind); re-tighten bolt.
Turn trim tab (trailing edge) to the right if the boat turns
more easily to the right.
a - Propeller Nut - Torque To 55 lb. ft. (75 N·n)
b - Bend Tabs Against Nut
a
! CAUTION
c
Do not misinterpret propeller shaft movement for propeller movement, propeller and propeller shaft however may move fore-and-aft. However, the propeller itself
should not move fore-and-aft on the propeller shaft.
4. Re-check propeller nut for tightness after first use.
Check for tightness periodically, especially if a stainless propeller is used.
b
5. Install and adjust trim tab as follows.
Trim Tab Adjustment and
Replacement
IMPORTANT: The trim tab is made of a special alloy to
aid in protecting the drive shaft housing and gear
housing from galvanic corrosion (corrosion and pitting of metal surfaces). Do not paint or place protective
coating on the trim tab, or trim tab corrosion protection function will be lost.
50553
a - Trim Tab
b - Anti-Ventilation Plate
c - Retaining Bolt and Washer; Torque Bolt to 22 lbs. ft. (29.8 N·m)
1. Replace trim tab if 50% (or more) consumed. Mark location of old trim tab on anti-ventilation plate before removal; install new trim tab in same location.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6A-27
LOWER UNIT
791-H
60 BIG FOOT,
60 SEAPRO/MARATHON
GEAR HOUSING
(4-1/4 inch Torpedo, 2.3:1 Gear Ratio)
6
B
Table of Contents
Page
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-1
Gear Housing (Drive Shaft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-2
Gear Housing (Propeller Shaft) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-6
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-8
Propeller Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-8
Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-9
Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-10
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft . . . . . 6B-11
Pinion Gear, Drive Shaft, and Forward
Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-14
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-15
Oil Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-16
Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race . . . . . . . . 6B-16
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-17
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-18
Trim Tab Adjustment and Replacement . . 6B-18
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-18
Forward Gear Bearing Race . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-18
Shift Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-18
Bearing Carrier Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-19
Forward Gear Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 6B-21
6B-0 - LOWER UNIT
Page
Propeller Shaft Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive Shaft Wear Sleeve Installation . . . .
Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Sleeve Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing Installation . . .
Forward Gear, Lower Drive Shaft Bearing,
Pinion Gear, and Drive Shaft
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinion Gear Depth and Forward Gear
Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining Pinion Gear Depth . . . . . .
Determining Forward Gear Backlash .
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Water Pump Reassembly and
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Housing Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling Gear Housing With Lubricant . . . . . . .
Propeller Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearcase Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6B-22
6B-22
6B-23
6B-24
6B-24
6B-25
6B-25
6B-25
6B-27
6B-28
6B-29
6B-31
6B-31
6B-32
6B-33
6B-34
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Notes:
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-1
Gear Hsg. (Drive Shaft)(60 Seapro/Marathon/Big Foot)
30
31
7
28
95
21
33
7
32
95
27
29
34
20
23
95
25
26
95
95
39 40
22
7
37
38
24
7
7
95
36
11
14
35
12
19
18
87
9
10
7
3
12
13
1
8
2
17
15
16
7
6
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
87
Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-13783A24)
92
Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
6B-2 - LOWER UNIT
6
4
4
92
6
7
5
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Gear Hsg. (Drive Shaft)(60 Seapro/Marathon/Big Foot)
REF.
NO. QTY.
–
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
5
1
6
3
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
2
13
1
14
1
15
1
16
1
17
1
18
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
GEAR HOUSING (LONG)
GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
DOWEL PIN (FRONT)
OILER TUBE
DRAIN SCREW
SCREW (MAGNETIC)
WASHER-Sealing
DOWEL PIN (REAR)
TRIM TAB
SCREW
WASHER
CARRIER
ANODE
NUT
SCREW
PINION GEAR
NUT
SHIFT CAM
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
60
60
N·m
7.0
7.0
22
60
30.0
7.0
70
95.0
LOWER UNIT - 6B-3
Gear Hsg. (Drive Shaft) (60 SeaPro/Marathon/Big Foot)
30
31
7
28
95
21
33
7
95
32
95
27
29
34
20
23
95
39 40
22
7
25
26
95
37
38
24
7
95
7
36
11
14
35
12
19
18
87
9
10
7
3
12
13
1
8
2
17
15
16
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
87
Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-13783A24)
92
Loctite 7649 Primer (92-809824)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
6B-4 - LOWER UNIT
92
6
6
4
4
6
7
5
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Gear Hsg. (Drive Shaft)(60 Seapro/Marathon/Big Foot)
REF.
NO. QTY.
–
1
1
1
19
1
20
1
21
1
22
1
23
1
24
1
25
1
26
1
27
1
28
1
29
1
30
4
31
1
32
1
33
1
34
6
35
1
36
1
37
1
38
1
39
1
40
2
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
GEAR HOUSING
GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
SHIM ASSEMBLY
DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
WEAR SLEEVE ASSEMBLY
COVER ASSEMBLY
GASKET
GASKET
OIL SEAL (LOWER)
OIL SEAL (UPPER)
GASKET
WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY
FACE PLATE
SCREW (M6 x 1 x 30)
COUPLING
KEY
IMPELLER
SCREW
SHIFT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
E-RING
BUSHING ASSEMBLY
O-RING
OIL SEAL
SCREW (M6 x 1)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
60
7.0
60
7.0
35
4.0
LOWER UNIT - 6B-5
Gear Hsg. (Prop Shaft)(60 Seapro/Marathon/Big Foot)
95
1
46
44
42
45
43
41
63
53
87
95
94
51
65
50
66
49
48
7
7
60
47
61
62
95
87
64
56
55
54
87
52
57
95
58
95
59
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
87
Super Duty Gear Lubricant (92-13783A24)
94
95
Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-78376A6)
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
6B-6 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Gear Hsg. (Prop Shaft)(60 Seapro/Marathon/Big Foot)
REF.
NO. QTY.
–
1
1
1
41
1
42
1
43
1
44
1
45
3
46
1
47
1
48
1
49
1
50
1
51
1
52
1
53
1◗
54
1
55
1◗
56
1◗
57
1
58
1
59
1
60
2
61
2
62
2
63
1
64
1
65
1
66
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
GEAR HOUSING
GEAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING ASSEMBLY
FORWARD GEAR
ROLLER BEARING
CAM FOLLOWER ASSEMBLY
BALL
SPRING
CLUTCH
CROSS PIN
SPRING
PROPELLER SHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
BEARING CARRIER ASSEMBLY
O-RING
ROLLER BEARING
OIL SEAL (INNER)
OIL SEAL (OUTER)
ROLLER BEARING
THRUST WASHER
THRUST BEARING
STUD
WASHER
NUT
SHIM ASSEMBLY
THRUST HUB ASSEMBLY
PROPELLER NUT ASSEMBLY
TAB WASHER
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
260
N·m
21.5
29.5
55
74.5
LOWER UNIT - 6B-7
6. Remove gear housing.
Special Tools
Part No.
91-46086A1
91-85716
91-34569A1
91-36569
91-15755
91-37323
91-56775
91-37241
91-83165M
91-31106
91-31108
91-37350
91-31229
11-24156
91-78473
91-58222A1
91-83155
91-12349A2
91-14308A1
91-14309A1
91-14310A1
91-14311A2
91-13945
91-13949
91-19660--1
*
Description
Puller Jaws
Puller Bolt
Slide Hammer
Mandrel*
Mandrel*
Driver Rod*
Drive Shaft Holding Tool
Universal Puller Plate
Bearing Puller Assembly
Mandrel
Oil Seal Driver
Mandrel
Threaded Rod*
Nut*
Backlash Indicator Tool (3 Cyl)
Dial Indicator
Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit
Pinion Gear Locating Tool
Bearing Race Tool
Bearing Installation Tool
Wear Sleeve Installation Tool
Bearing Preload Tool
Bearing Installation Tool
Oil Seal Driver
Backlash Indicator Tool (4 Cyl)
From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A7)
a
b
53992
a - Bolts (or Locknuts) and Washers
b - Locknut and Washer
Propeller Removal
WARNING
If gear housing is not removed from drive shaft
housing, before attempting to remove or install
the propeller, remove (and isolate) spark plug
leads from spark plugs to prevent engine from
starting accidentally.
1. Bend tabs of tab washer away from hub.
b
Removal
a
WARNING
To prevent accidental engine starting, remove
(and isolate) spark plug leads from spark plugs
before removing gear housing.
1. Remove (and isolate) spark plug leads from spark
plugs.
2. Shift engine into forward gear.
3. Tilt engine to full “Up” position.
4. Remove 4 bolts (or locknuts on 1995 Models) and
washers (two each side).
5. Remove locknut and washer.
6B-8 - LOWER UNIT
51871
a - Tab Washer
b - Hub
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
2. Place a block of wood, as shown, to prevent propeller from rotating and to protect hands during removal of nut.
3. Remove nut and pull components from shaft.
c
a
a
b
53922
a - Oil Level Screw
b - Fill/Drain Screw
c - Vent Screw
53923
a - Block of Wood
Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing
Lubricant
WARNING
If gear housing is installed on engine, to avoid
accidental starting, disconnect (and isolate) spark
plug leads from spark plugs before working near
the propeller.
1. With gear housing in normal running position,
place a clean pan under housing and remove the
two vent screws and one fill/drain screw (with
gaskets).
2. Inspect gear lubricant for metal particles (lubricant
will have a “metal flake” appearance). Presence of
fine metal particles (resembling powder) on the
drain plug bar magnet indicates normal wear. The
presence of metal chips on the drain plug bar magnet indicates the need for gear housing disassembly and component inspection.
3. Note color of gear lubricant. White or cream color
MAY indicate presence of water in lubricant. Gear
lubricant which has been drained from a gear case
recently in operation will have a yellowish color
due to lubricant agitation/aeration. Gear lube
which is mixed with assembly lubricant (Special
Lube 101 or 2-4-C w/Teflon will also be creamy
white in color. This is normal and should not be
confused with the presence of water. If water is
suspected to be present in gearcase, a pressure
check of gearcase should be made (with no lubricant in gearcase). Gearcase should hold 10 to 12
psi of pressure for 5 minutes without leaking down.
Pouring a portion of the gear lubricant into a glass
jar and allowing the lubricant to settle will allow any
water in the lube to separate and settle to the bottom of the jar.
4. Presence of water in gear lubricant indicates the
need for disassembly and inspection of oil seals,
seal surfaces, O-rings, water pump gaskets as
well as gear housing components for damage. If
gearcase is rebuilt, gearcase should be pressure
checked before filling with lubricant.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-9
7. Inspect impeller. Replace impeller if any of the
following conditions exist:
Water Pump
1. If water tube seal stayed on water tube (inside of
drive shaft housing) when gear housing was
removed, pull water tube seal from water tube.
2. Replace water tube seal, if damaged.
– Impeller blade(s) are cracked, torn, or worn.
– Impeller is glazed or melted (caused by operation without sufficient water supply).
– Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to
impeller hub.
3. Remove 4 bolts, washers, and isolators.
4. Remove cover.
8. Remove plate and gasket.
9. Replace plate if groove(s) (other than impeller
sealing bead groove) in plate are more than
0.030 (0.762mm) deep.
a
c
c
a
b
b
b
19212
a - Water Tube Seal
b - Bolts (4 each)
c - Cover
IMPORTANT: The circular groove formed by the
impeller sealing bead should be disregarded
when inspecting cover (Step 5) and plate (Step 9),
as the depth of the groove will not affect water
pump output.
5. Replace cover if thickness of steel at the discharge
slots is 0.060 or less, or if groove(s) (other than
impeller sealing bead groove) in cover roof are
more than 0.030 (0.762mm) deep.
19219
a - Plate
b - Gasket
c - Impeller Sealing Groove
10. Remove bolts and washers.
a
6. Lift impeller, drive key, and gasket from drive shaft.
a
c
b
19217
19220
a - Impeller
b - Drive Key
c - Gasket
6B-10 - LOWER UNIT
a - Bolts and Washers (6 each)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
11. Remove water pump base.
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
1. Drain lubricant from gear housing; refer to “Draining and Inspecting Gear Housing Lubricant.”
a
2. Remove bolts and washers or self locking nuts if
applicable.
a
19226
a - Water Pump Base
12. Remove (and discard) seals.
a
a
51117
a - Bolt and Washers or Locknuts
3. With propeller shaft horizontal, pull carrier to break
seal with gear housing. Remove bearing carrier/
propeller shaft components as an assembly, taking care not to lose cam follower or 3 metal balls
in end of propeller shaft.
4. Remove propeller shaft from bearing carrier.
19195
a - Seals
13. Remove gasket.
e
c
a
a
d
19218
a - Gasket
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a
b
c
d
e
-
b
51116
Bearing Carrier
Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
Puller Bolt (91-85716)
Thrust Hub
Propeller Shaft
LOWER UNIT - 6B-11
5. Lift reverse gear, thrust bearing and thrust washer
from bearing carrier.
6. Replace reverse gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth
on reverse gear are chipped or worn. If reverse
gear must be replaced, pinion gear and sliding
clutch should be inspected for damage.
9. If bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace
bearing. Remove bearing and oil seals using
Mandrel* (91-36569) and Driver Rod* (91-37323).
Discard oil seals.
*
From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5).
7. Replace thrust bearing and thrust washer if rusted
or damaged.
c
a
b
a
c
b
19202
a - Reverse Gear
b - Thrust Bearing
c - Thrust Washer
51264
a - Bearing
b - Mandrel (91-26569)
c - Driver Rod (91-37323)
10. Remove (if not removed with bearing in Step 9)
propeller shaft seals and bearing carrier O-ring.
8. If bearing is rusted or does not roll freely, replace
bearing. Remove bearing using Slide Hammer
(91-34569A1).
a
a
51263
a - O-ring
19205
a - Bearing
6B-12 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
14. Replace cam follower if worn or pitted.
11. Remove spring.
15. Replace sliding clutch if jaws are rounded or
chipped. Rounded jaws indicate one or more of
the following:
a. Improper shift cable adjustment.
b. Engine idle speed too high while shifting.
a
c. Shifting from neutral to reverse (or forward) too
slowly.
a
12. Apply constant pressure to cam follower to prevent cam follower assembly from ejecting from
propeller shaft while pushing cross pin out of
clutch dog.
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
e
d
f
51876
a - Spring
b c
f
51265
Cam Follower
3 Metal Balls
Guide Block
Spring
Sliding Clutch
Jaws
16. Check bearing surfaces of propeller shaft for pitting or wear. If shaft is worn or pitted, replace shaft
and corresponding bearing.
17. Replace propeller shaft if any of the following
exist:
a. Splines are twisted or worn.
b
b. Oil seal surface is grooved.
c. Shaft has a noticeable “wobble” or is bent more
than 0.009 in. (0.228mm). Prop shaft trueness
should be measured with a dial indicator with
prop shaft on V-blocks.
c
a
b
b
51800
a - Cross Pin
b - Cam Follower
a
13. Remove components from propeller shaft.
51877
a - V-Blocks
b - Bearing Surfaces
c - Measure with Dial Indicator at This Point.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-13
Pinion Gear, Drive Shaft, and Forward
Gear
6. Replace bearing if it is rusted or does not roll freely; use a punch and hammer to remove bearing.
1. Hold drive shaft using Drive Shaft Holding Tool
(91-56775); remove (and discard) pinion nut.
2. Remove drive shaft, pinion gear, bearing and forward gear .
3. Replace pinion gear if it is chipped or worn.
4. Replace bearing and race if either are rusted or
damaged; or if bearing does not roll freely. To remove race, refer to “Lower Drive Shaft Bearing
Race,” following.
5. Replace forward gear if gear teeth or clutch teeth
are chipped or worn.
a
a
c
19203
a - Bearing
7. Replace forward gear bearing and race if either
are rusted or damaged; or if bearing does not roll
freely.
Remove
bearing
from
gear
using Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) and mandrel. To remove race, refer to “Forward Gear Bearing Race,” following.
c
a
e
d
b
b
51119
f
19175
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Drive Shaft Holding Tool (91-817070)
Pinion Nut
Drive Shaft
Pinion Gear
Bearing
Forward Gear
6B-14 - LOWER UNIT
a - Forward Gear Bearing
b - Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
c - Mandrel
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
8. Replace drive shaft if splines are worn or twisted.
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing
9. If bearing surface is damaged, replace drive shaft
and corresponding bearing.
1. Replace upper drive shaft bearing and sleeve if either are rust stained, or if bearing will not roll freely.
Remove bearing and then sleeve using Puller Assembly (91-83165M) with suitable jaws.
IMPORTANT: Do not tighten vise against drive
shaft.
10. If wear sleeve is deeply grooved allowing water to
enter gear case, remove (and discard) sleeve using Universal Puller Plate (91-37241) and mallet.
c
OR
e
a
a
d
c
b
a
b
19710
a
b
c
d
e
-
Splines
Bearing Surface
Wear Sleeve
Universal Puller Plate (91-37241)
Mallet
19177
a - Upper Drive Shaft Bearing
b - Sleeve
c - Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
11. Remove (and discard) rubber ring.
a
19152
a - Rubber Ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-15
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve
must be removed prior to oil sleeve removal. Refer
to “Upper Drive Shaft Bearing,” preceding.
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve
and oil sleeve do not have to be removed for lower
drive shaft bearing race removal.
Oil Sleeve
Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race
1. Remove oil sleeve (if necessary) using Puller Assembly (91-83165M) with suitable jaws.
IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for reassembly.
b
1. Remove race and shim(s) using bearing race tool
(91-14308A1).
c
a
b
a
19222
a - Oil Sleeve
b - Puller Assembly (91-83165M)
6B-16 - LOWER UNIT
19171
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
c - Bearing Race Tool (91-14308A1)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Remove shift cam from housing.
Shift Shaft
1. Remove
spacer.
shift
b
shaft
coupler
and
nylon
5. Replace shift cam if worn.
a
a
53925
a - Shift Shaft Coupler
b - Spacer
51117
a - Shift Cam
2. Remove bolts.
Note: If shift shaft splines are rough, shift shaft seal
lips wil be cut during removal/installation.
a
6. Remove shift shaft bushing and clip from shift
shaft.
7. Replace shift shaft if splines are worn or shaft is
twisted.
8. Remove (and discard) O-ring.
53926
a - Bolts
a
d
c
e
d
b
Note: Gearcase should be in FORWARD for easiest
removal of shift shaft.
3. Remove shift shaft bushing and shift shaft.
a
53928
b
a - Bushing
b - Clip
c - Shift Shaft
d - Splines
e - O-ring
9. Remove (and discard) seal.
53927
a
a - Bushing
b - Shift Shaft
53929
a - Seal
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-17
Forward Gear Bearing Race
Reassembly
IMPORTANT: Retain shim(s) for reassembly. If
shims are damaged, replace with new shims of
equal thickness.
Forward Gear Bearing Race
1. Remove race and shim(s)
Hammer (91-34569A1).
using
Slide
1. Place shim(s) (retained from disassembly) into
housing. If shim(s) were lost, or a new gear housing is being assembled, start with 0.010
(0.254mm) shim(s).
2. Assemble components as shown; drive race into
housing by striking propeller shaft end with lead
hammer.
a
e
b
c
a - Race
b - Shim(s)
d
c
a
27653
c - Slide Hammer
(91-34569A1)
Trim Tab Adjustment and
Replacement
IMPORTANT: The trim tab is now painted and does
NOT aid in protecting the drive shaft housing and
gear housing from galvanic corrosion (corrosion
and pitting of metal surfaces). Side anodes now
provide protection. Do not paint or place protective coating on the side anodes, or corrosion
protection function will be lost.
1. Replace trim tab if damaged. Mark location of old
trim tab on anti-ventilation plate before removal;
install new trim tab in same location.
2. The trim tab provides a means to offset (balance)
some of the steering load that is caused by propeller torque at higher operating speeds. If at higher
speeds the boat turns more easily to the left, loosen bolt, move the trim tab (trailing edge) to the left
(when viewed from behind); retighten bolt. Turn
trim tab (trailing edge) to the right if the boat turns
more easily to the right.
b
a - Shim(s)
b - Race, Apply 2-4-Cw/Teflon Lubricant on O.D.
c - Mandrel (91-31106)
19179
d - Disassembled Propeller
Shaft
e - Assembled Bearing
Carrier
Shift Shaft
1. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of new seal.
2. Press seal into shift shaft bushing until seal is
seated against shoulder.
3. Install new O-ring.
4. Apply 2-4-C with Teflon on O-ring and I.D. of seal.
c
a
c
d
b
a
a - Trim Tab
b - Anti-Ventilation Plate
c - Retaining Bolt and Washer; Torque Bolt to 22 lbs. ft.
(29.8 Nm)
6B-18 - LOWER UNIT
53931
a
b
c
d
-
b
53930
Seal
Bushing
Surface
O-ring
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
5. Assemble components as shown.
a
8. Apply Loctite 271 on bottom half of threads of
bolts; install bolts and torque to 60 lb. in. (6.5 N·m).
b
a
c
a - Shift Shaft
b - “E” Clip
53928
c - Shift Shaft Bushing
6. Install shift cam (numbers toward top of gear housing); align hole in shift cam with hole.
53926
a - Bolts [Torque to 60 lb. in. (6.5 N·m)]
Bearing Carrier Reassembly
b
1. Lubricate O.D. of bearingand bearing carrier bore
with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Protect lip on forward side of bearing carrier, using
bearing installation tool (91-13945).
3. Press propeller shaft needle bearing (number side
toward mandrel) into carrier, until bearing bottoms
out.
a
51117
a - Shift Cam (Numbers UP)
b - Hole
c
7. Install shift shaft assembly; insert splines into shift
cam.
a
b
a
b
53932
a - Shift Shaft Assembly
b - Splines
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
21042
a - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
b - Mandrel (91-37263)
c - Suitable Driver Rod
LOWER UNIT - 6B-19
4. Place smaller diameter seal on longer shoulder of
Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with seal lip away from
shoulder.
5. Protect lip on front side of bearing carrier using
Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945). Apply Loctite
271 on O.D. of seal. Press seal into carrier until
tool bottoms.
8. Install O-ring.
9. Lubricate O-ring with 2-4-C w/Teflon. Lubricate
seal lips with 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12). Lubricate outside diameter of bearing and bearing
carrier bore with a light coating of 2-4-C w/Teflon.
10. Press bearing into carrier until tool bottoms.
b
a
b
a
c
c
21040
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
19163
6. Place larger diameter seal on shorter shoulder of
Oil Seal Driver (91-31108) with seal lip
toward shoulder.
7. Protect lip on front side of bearing carrier using
Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945). Apply Loctite
271 on O.D. of new seal. Press seal into carrier
until tool bottoms.
b
a - O-ring
b - Bearing, Numbered Side Toward Tool
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
11. Install thrust washer. Coat thrust washer with
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant (92-13783A24).
a
a
a
c
19167
21041
a - Thrust Washer
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-31108)
c - Bearing Installation Tool (91-13945)
6B-20 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
12. Install thrust bearing . Coat thrust bearing with
Quicksilver Gear Lubricant (92-13783A24).
Forward Gear Reassembly
1. Press bearing onto gear (press only on inner race
of bearing).
a
a
b
51869
a - Mandrel (91-37350)
b - Bearing; Lubricate I.D. with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon
19168
2. Apply 2-4-Cw/Teflon to bore in center of gear and
to O.D. of bearing.
13. Apply gear lubricant to bearing surface of reverse
gear and install reverse gear.
3. Press bearing into gear until bearing bottoms out.
a - Thrust Bearing
NOTE: Do not apply pressing force AFTER bearing
bottoms out as bearing damage could result.
b
a
a
b
28062
19202
a - Mandrel
b - Bearing, Numbered Side Toward Mandrel
a - Reverse Gear
b - Bearing Surface
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-21
Propeller Shaft Reassembly
1. Install components
sequence shown.
d
c b
into
propeller
shaft
in
Drive Shaft Wear Sleeve Installation
1. Install new rubber ring.
2. Apply a light coat of Loctite 271 on outside
diameter of rubber ring.
a
a
19154
a - Spring
b - Guide Block
c - 3 Metal Balls*
d - Cam Follower*
19152
*Hold in Place With Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon
a - Ring
2. Install cross pin.
3. Insert sleeve into holder*.
*Component of Wear Sleeve Installation Tool (91-14310A1).
b
a
a
a
51800
b
a - Apply Pressure in This Direction
b - Cross Pin
3. Install spring. DO NOT overlap springs.
19169
a - Sleeve
b - Holder
a
51876
a - Spring
6B-22 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Press sleeve onto drive shaft using Wear Sleeve
Installation Tool (91-14310A1); continue pressing
until surface contacts surface.
Lower Drive Shaft Bearing Race
Installation
IMPORTANT: Lower drive shaft bearing cup can
be installed with or without upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve and oil sleeve installed.
b
1. Lubricate O.D. of bearing race with Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon.
2. Install shim(s) and bearing race into housing.
NOTE: Verify shim(s) are not cocked when drawing up
race.
d
f
c
d
e
e
a
c
f
b
d
19166
a
b
c
d
-
Drive Shaft
Wear Sleeve Installation Tool
Surface
Surface
5. Remove excess Loctite from assembled shaft.
a
b
c
53933
a - Shim(s); Retained From Disassembly. If Shim(s) Were Lost
or a New Gear Housing is Being Assembled, Start With
0.025 (0.635mm) Shim(s)
b - Bearing Race
c - Mandrel*
d - Mandrel*
e - Threaded Rod** (91-31229)
f - Nut** (11-24156)
*From Bearing Installation Tool (91-14309A1)
**From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-23
IMPORTANT: Oil sleeve must be installed prior to
upper drive bearing installation.
Oil Sleeve Installation
1. Install oil sleeve with tab positioned as shown.
b
IMPORTANT: Upper drive shaft bearing/sleeve
can be installed with or without lower drive shaft
bearing cup installed.
3. Install bearing/sleeve into housing.
f
a
e
c
e
d
f
c
a
b
53934
a - Oil Sleeve
b - Tab
d
Upper Drive Shaft Bearing Installation
1. Lubricate I.D. of bearing holder and O.D. of
bearing with 2-4-C w/ Teflon.
53935
a
b
c
d
e
f
2. Press bearing into sleeve.
-
Bearing/Sleeve
Tapered End
Mandrel*
Mandrel*
Threaded Rod** (91-31229)
Nut** (11-24156)
*From Bearing Installation Tool (91-14309A1)
**From Bearing Removal and Installation Kit (91-31229A5)
d
c
a
b
19164
a
b
c
d
-
Bearing Sleeve
Tapered End
Bearing; Numbered Side Toward Mandrel
Mandrel; From Bearing Installation Tool (91-14309A1)
6B-24 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Forward Gear, Lower Drive Shaft
Bearing, Pinion Gear, and Drive Shaft
Installation
2. With gear housing positioned up right (drive shaft
vertical), install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1)
over drive shaft in sequence shown.
g
1. Install components in sequence shown.
e
h
d
h
c
e
b
f
d
a
d
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
b
c
f
a
-
Adaptor: Bearing surfaces clean and free of nicks
Thrust Bearing: Oiled and able to move freely
Thrust Washer: Clean and free of nicks and bends
Spring
Nut: Threaded all-the-way onto bolt
Bolt: Held snug against spring
Sleeve: Holes in sleeve must align with set screws
Set Screw (2): Tightened against drive shaft, bolt should not
slide on drive shaft.
3. Measure distance between top of nut and bottom
of bolt head.
19175
a - Forward Gear/Bearing: Work Quicksilver gear lube into
bearing rollers.
b - Lower Drive Shaft Tapered Roller Bearing: Work Quicksilver
gear lube into bearing rollers.
c - Pinion Gear
d - Drive Shaft
e - Drive Shaft Holding Tool (91-817070)
f - Pinion Nut (New): Apply Loctite 271 to threads during final
assembly (after pinion gear depth and forward gear
backlash have been set), torque to 70 lb. ft. (95 N·m).
Pinion Gear Depth and Forward Gear
Backlash
4. Increase distance by 1 (25.4mm).
5. Rotate drive shaft 5 to 10 revolutions. This should
properly seat upper drive shaft tapered roller bearing.
a
c
b
DETERMINING PINION GEAR DEPTH
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any
change in shim thickness.
IMPORTANT: Forward gear assembly must be
installed in gear housing when checking pinion
gear depth or an inaccurate measurement will be
obtained.
1. Clean the gear housing bearing carrier shoulder
and diameter.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
19884
a - 1“ (25.4mm)
b - Nut
c - Bolt Head
LOWER UNIT - 6B-25
6. Assemble Pinion Gear Locating Tool (91-12349A2)
as shown; do not tighten collar retaining bolt at this
time.
b
d
10. Install the number “3” locating disc against bearing
carrier shoulder in gear housing.
11. Position access hole as shown.
e
c
a
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
c
b
a
f
Arbor
Gauging Block; Install With Numbers Away From Split Collar
Bolt; Gauging Block Retaining
Split Collar
Bolt; Collar Retaining
Snap Ring
7. Insert tool into forward gear assembly; position
gauging block under pinion gear as shown.
a
24643
a - Locating Disc
b - Access Hole
12. Determine pinion gear depth by inserting a feeler
gauge thru access hole in locating disc.
13. The correct clearance between gauging block and
pinion gear is 0.025 (0.64mm).
14. If clearance is correct, leave Bearing Preload Tool
on drive shaft and proceed to “Determining Forward Gear Backlash,” following.
15. If clearance is incorrect, add (or subtract) shims
from above bearing race to lower (or raise) pinion
gear. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite
271 on threads of nut.
22067
c
a - Gauging Block
a
8. Remove tool, taking care not to change gauging
block position, and tighten collar retaining bolt.
d
9. Insert tool into forward gear assembly; position
proper numbered flat (from chart) of gauging block
– under pinion gear.
MODEL
GEAR RATIO
(PINION GEAR TEETH/
REVERSE GEAR TEETH)
USE
FLAT
NO.
60 Big Foot, 60
SeaPro/Marathon
13/30
8
75-thru-90
(3 Cylinder)
13/30
8
100/115/125
(4 Cylinder)
14/29
2
6B-26 - LOWER UNIT
b
24643
a
b
c
d
-
Feeler Gauge
Gauging Block
Pinion Gear
Bearing Race
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
DETERMINING FORWARD GEAR BACKLASH
5. Install components as shown.
e
NOTE: Read entire procedure before attempting any
change in shim thickness.
f
1. Obtain correct pinion gear depth; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear Depth,” preceding.
2. Install Bearing Preload Tool (91-14311A1) on
drive shaft; refer to “Determining Pinion Gear
Depth,” preceding.
d
c
3. Install components as shown.
a
d
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
-
c
53936
Propeller Shaft*
Bearing Carrier* (Assembled)
Puller Jaws (91-46086A1)
Puller Bolt (91-85716); Torque to 45 lbs. in.
(5.0 N·m)
*Refer to “Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft Installation,” following.
4. Rotate drive shaft 5 to 10 revolutions. This should
properly seat forward gear tapered roller bearing.
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Threaded Rod (Obtain Locally)
Washers
Nuts
Dial Indicator Adaptor Kit (91-83155)
Dial Indicator (91-58222A1)
Backlash Indicator Tool
6. Position Dial Indicator on appropriate line (from
chart) marked on Backlash Indicator Tool.
MODEL
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
51117
ALIGN POINTER OF
DIAL INDICATOR WITH MARK
60 Big Foot, 60
SeaPro/Marathon
Backlash
Indicator
Tool (91-78473)
4
75-thru-90
(3 Cylinder)
Backlash
Indicator
Tool (91-78473)
4
100/115/125
(4 Cylinder)
Backlash
Indicator
Tool (91-19660)
1
LOWER UNIT - 6B-27
7. Lightly turn drive shaft back-and-forth (no movement should be noticed at propeller shaft).
3. Lubricate o-ring and mating surfaces with 2-4-C
w/Teflon (92-825407A12).
8. Dial Indicator registers amount of backlash, which
must be between specification shown in chart.
4. Install bearing carrier and propeller shaft into
housing with the word “TOP” located on flange toward top of housing.
MODEL
DIAL
INDICATOR
MINIMUM
READING
MAXIMUM
60 Big Foot,
60 SeaPro/Marathon
0.012 in.
(0.30mm)
0.019 in.
(.48mm)
75-thru-90
(3 Cylinder)
0.012 in.
(0.30mm)
0.019 in.
(.48mm)
100/115/125
(4 Cylinder)
0.015 in.
(0.38mm)
0.022 in.
(0.55mm)
b
c
9. If backlash is less than the minimum specification,
remove shim(s)* from in front of forward gear bearing race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut.
10. If backlash is more than the maximum specification, add shim(s)* in front of forward gear bearing
race to obtain correct backlash. When reinstalling
pinion nut, apply Loctite 271 on threads of nut.
*
a
By adding or subtracting 0.001 (0.025mm) shim, the backlash will change approximately 0.001 (.025mm).
21044
Bearing Carrier and Propeller Shaft
Installation
a - Apply 2-4-C w/Teflon
b - O-ring
c - TOP
1. Insert propeller shaft assembly into bearing
carrier.
5. Install components as shown.
2. Before installing bearing carrier assembly into
gear housing, obtain locally a 6 (152.4mm) long
by 1-1/4 – 1-1/2 (31.7 – 38.1mm) diameter
piece of PVC pipe (c). Install the PVC pipe over the
prop shaft (a) and secure the pipe against the
bearing carrier assembly (b) with the propeller nut
(d) and tab washer (e). This will allow the reverse
gear to apply pressure to the reverse gear thrust
bearing to prevent the thrust bearing from being inadvertently dislodged as the bearing carrier
assembly is installed in the gear housing.
b
a
b
c
d
a
19147
a - Washers
b - Bolts; Apply Loctite 271 on Threads and Torque to 25 lb. ft.
(34.0 N·m)
e
6B-28 - LOWER UNIT
NOTE: If nuts are used in place of bolts, torque nuts
to 25 lb. ft. (34.0 N·m).
21043
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Place seal on shorter shoulder side of Oil Seal
Driver (91-13949) with seal lip toward shoulder.
Water Pump Reassembly and
Installation
1. Place seal on longer shoulder side of Oil Seal
Driver (91-13949) with seal lip away from
shoulder.
2. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of seal; press seal into
water pump base until tool bottoms.
4. Apply Loctite 271 on O.D. of seal; press seal into
water pump base until tool bottoms.
5. Lubricate lip of each seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/
Teflon (92-825407A12).
LIP FACES TOWARD
GEAR CASE
- GLOSS BLACK
COLOR
TEFLON COATED LIP
- FLAT BROWNISH
BLACK COLOR
- LIP FACES TOWARD
POWER HEAD
a
a
SPRING - FACES
TOWARD
GEAR CASE
SPRING - FACES
TOWARD
POWER HEAD
b
b
b
b
a
51553
51553
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
a - Seal
b - Oil Seal Driver (91-13949)
6. Install gasket.
a
19218
a - Gasket
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-29
9. Install gasket, drive key and impeller.
7. Install components as shown.
a
c
b
b
a
19220
19217
a - Water Pump Base
b - Bolts and Washers; Apply Loctite 271 on bottom 1/2
ofThreads and Torque to 60 lb. in. (6.5 N·m).
a - Gasket
b - Drive Key
c - Impeller
10. Lubricate I.D. of cover with Quicksilver 2-4–C w/
Teflon (92-825407A12).
8. Install gasket and plate.
11. Rotate drive shaft clockwise and push cover down
over impeller.
b
12. Install cover.
13. If water tube seal stayed on water tube (inside of
drive shaft housing) when gear housing was removed, pull water tube seal from water tube.
a
14. Lubricate I.D. of water tube seal with Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12) and install as
shown.
b
19219
a - Gasket
b - Plate
IMPORTANT: If the old impeller will be re-used,
impeller must be installed in original (clockwise)
direction of rotation.
a
c
c
19212
a - Cover
b - Seal
c - Bolts (4); Apply Loctite 271 on Threads and Torque to
60 lb. in. (6.5 N·m).
NOTE: It is recommended that the gearcase be pressure tested for leaks after reassembly and BEFORE
gear lube is added. Gearcase should hold 10 to 12
psi for 5 minutes.
6B-30 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Gear Housing Pressure Test
1. Remove vent plug and install pressure test gauge
Filling Gear Housing With
Lubricant
NOTE: Gear housing lubricant capacity is 22.5 fl. oz.
(665.2ml).
WARNING
If gear housing is installed on engine, to avoid
accidental starting, disconnect (and isolate) spark
plug leads from spark plugs before working near
the propeller.
CAUTION
Do not use automotive grease in the gear housing.
Use only Quicksilver Gear Lube or Quicksilver
Super-Duty Lower Unit Lubricant.
2. Pressurized housing to 10 to 12 psi and observe
gauge for 5 minutes.
3. Rotate drive shaft,prop shaft and move shift shaft
while housing is pressurized to check for leaks.
1. Remove any gasket material from “Fill” and “Vent”
screws and gear housing.
2. Install new gaskets on “Fill” and “Vent” screws.
IMPORTANT: Never apply lubricant to gear housing without first removing “Vent” screws or gear
housing cannot be filled because of trapped air.
Fill gear housing only when housing is in a vertical
position.
3. Remove lubricant “Fill” screw and gasket from
gear housing.
4. Insert lubricant tube into “Fill” hole, then remove
“Vent” screws and gaskets.
5. Fill gear housing with lubricant until excess starts
to flow out of one (first) “Vent” screw hole.
4. If pressure drop is noted, immerse housing in water.
5. Re-pressurize to 10 to 12 psi and check for air
bubbles.
6. Replace leaking seals as necessary. Retest housing.
NOTE: Gearcase should hold 10 to 12 psi for 5 minutes.
7. Remove tester from housing and install vent plug.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-31
6. Replace this lubricant “Vent” screw and gasket
only and continue filling until excess starts to flow
out of second lubricant “Vent” screw hole.
2. Install components as shown.
b
a
a
c
51801
b
a - Thrust Hub; Flat Surface Toward Propeller
b - Propeller
3. Install tab washer and locknut.
53922
a - Vent Screw
b - Fill/Drain Screw
c - Oil Level Vent Screw
4. Thread locknut onto propeller shaft until locknut is
recessed into tab washer.
5. Torque locknut to 55 lbs. ft. (75 N·m).
7. Replace second lubricant “Vent” screw and gasket.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose more than one fluid
ounce (30cc) of gear lubricant while reinstalling
“FILL” screw.
8. Remove lubricant tube from “Fill” hole; install “Fill”
screw and gasket.
Propeller Installation
WARNING
If gear housing is not removed from drive shaft
housing, before attempting to remove or install
the propeller, remove (and isolate) spark plug
leads from spark plugs to prevent engine from
starting accidentally.
6. Bend 3 tabs of tab washer down into grooves to
secure locknut. If tab washer tabs do not align with
slots, continue to tighten locknut to obtain alignment.
CAUTION
Do not misinterpret propeller shaft movement
with propeller movement. If propeller and
propeller shaft together move forward-and-aft,
this is normal; however, propeller should not
move forward-and-aft on propeller shaft.
7. After first use, retighten propeller nut and again secure with tab washer. Propeller should be checked
periodically for tightness, particularly if a stainless
steel propeller is used.
c
b
1. Apply a liberal coat of one of the following Quicksilver products on propeller shaft splines:
– Special Lubricant 101 (P/N 92-13872A1)
– 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12)
– Anti-Corrosion Grease (92-19007A24)
a
51871
a - Tab Washer
b - Locknut
c - Grooves
6B-32 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Gearcase Installation
CAUTION
WARNING
Disconnect (and isolate) spark plug leads from
spark plugs before installing gear housing onto
drive shaft housing. Failure to follow this warning
could result in accidental engine starting and
possible injury.
1. Position shift block in forward gear position,
as shown.
a
Do not use lubricant on top of drive shaft. Excess
lubricant, that is trapped in clearance space, will
not allow drive shaft to fully engage with
crankshaft. Subsequently, tightening the gear
housing fasteners (while lubricant is on top of
drive shaft) will load the drive shaft/crankshaft
and damage either or both the power head and
gear housing. Top of drive shaft is to be wiped free
of lubricant.
6. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon
onto drive shaft splines.
b
7. Apply a light coat of Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon on
gear case shift shaft splines and upper shift shaft
splines. Do not use lubricant on ends of shift
shafts.
19879
8. Install components as shown in appropriate
photo.
a - Shift Block; Front of Block MUST Extend 1/8 (3.2mm) Past
Front of Rail.
b - Rail
2. Tilt engine to full up position and engage tilt lock
lever.
b
3. Shift gear housing into neutral position. Propeller
shaft will rotate freely in either direction.
4. Install water tube seal; lube I.D. of seal with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon (92-825407A12).
a
5. Apply a bead of RTV Sealer as shown.
a
53968
b
a - Nylon Spacer
b - Shift Shaft Coupler; Used on Models Equipped with Power
Trim
53938
a - Water Tube Seal
b - RTV Sealer
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6B-33
a
b
c
a
b
53922
a - Bolts and Washers (4)
b - Locknut and Washer
53925
a - Nylon Spacer
b - Shift Shaft Coupler; Used on Models NOT Equipped with
Power Trim
c - Flat; MUST BE Positioned Toward Front of Gear Housing.
16. Check shift operation as follows:
a. Place shift lever in forward gear. Gear housing
should ratchet when propeller shaft is turned
clockwise and resistance should be felt when
propeller shaft is turned counterclockwise.
9. Shift gear housing into forward gear position. In
forward gear the gear housing will ratchet when
propeller shaft is turned clockwise and resistance
will be felt when propeller shaft is rotated counterclockwise.
b. Place shift lever in neutral. Propeller shaft
should rotate freely in either direction.
10. Apply Loctite Grade 271 on threads of gear housing retaining bolts.
IMPORTANT: If shift operation is not as described,
preceding, the gear housing must be removed and
the cause corrected.
NOTE: If, while performing Step 11, the drive shaft
splines will not align with the crankshaft splines, place
a propeller onto propeller shaft and turn it counterclockwise as the gear housing is being pushed toward
drive shaft housing.
NOTE: During installation of gear housing, it may be
necessary to move the shift block (located under cowl)
slightly to align upper shift shaft splines with shift shaft
coupler splines.
11. Position gear housing so that the driveshaft is protruding into drive shaft housing.
12. Move gear housing up toward drive shaft housing,
while aligning upper shift shaft splines with shift
shaft coupler splines, water tube with water tube
seal, and crank shaft splines with drive shaft
splines.
13. Install 4 bolts and washers (two each side).
14. Install locknut and washer.
15. Torque bolts and locknut (or nuts only if applicable)
to 40 lbs. ft. (54 N·m).
c. While rotating propeller shaft, place shift lever in
reverse gear. Resistance should be felt when
propeller shaft is rotated in either direction.
Trim Tab Adjustment
1. Check trim tab position as follows:
a. Operate boat at the speed at which it normally
would be operated.
b. If the boat pulls to the right (STARBOARD), the
trailing edge of trim tab must be moved to the
right. If the boat pulls to the left (PORT), the trailing
edge of trim tab must be moved to the left.
2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows:
a. Shift engine control into NEUTRAL and turn ignition key to “OFF” position.
NOTE: Loosen trim tab bolt sufficiently to allow trim tab
to disengage from locking ridges in gear case before attempting to move tab. DO NOT strike trim tab with a hard
object to make adjustments.
b. If boat pulls to the left, adjust trailing edge of trim
tab to the left. If boat pulls to the right, adjust trailing edge of trim tab to the right.
3. Tighten trim tab retaining bolt and washer to 22 lb.
ft. (30.0 N·m).
6B-34 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT
JET DRIVE
6
C
Table of Contents
Page
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-1
Jet Pump Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-2
Jet Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-4
Selecting A Boat Best Suited For Jet Power . 6C-5
Engine Horsepower Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-5
Transom Height of the Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-6
Locate Center line Of The Outboard . . . . . . . . 6C-6
Outboard Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-6
Water Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-7
Checking for Cavitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-7
Shift Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-8
Lubricating The Drive Shaft Bearing . . . . . . . . 6C-9
Impeller Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . 6C-9
Steering Pull Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-11
Impeller Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 6C-11
6C-0 - LOWER UNIT
Page
Worn (Dull) Impeller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flushing The Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Liner Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jet Drive Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing Carrier Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing Carrier Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing Carrier Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Lower Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Upper Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Drive Shaft Ball Bearing . . . . . . .
Installing Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Upper Seal Housing . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Jet Drive to Drive Shaft Housing . .
Reassembling Water Pump to Jet Drive .
Installing Jet Drive to Drive Shaft Housing
Jet Drive Tiller Handle Adaptor KIt . . . . . . . . .
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Cable Adjustement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6C-11
6C-12
6C-12
6C-12
6C-13
6C-14
6C-14
6C-14
6C-15
6C-15
6C-15
6C-16
6C-17
6C-17
6C-18
6C-20
6C-20
6C-23
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Notes:
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6C-1
JET PUMP ASSEMBLY
15
16
14
17
22
18
18
23
1
21
2
20
19
95
3
9
10
11
8
5
6
4
13
6
12
7
95
6C-2 - LOWER UNIT
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
JET PUMP ASSEMBLY
REF.
NO. QTY.
–
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
8
11
1
12
6
13
4
14
2
15
1
16
1
17
1
18
2
19
2
20
1
21
1
22
1
23
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
JET PUMP ASSEMBLY
HOUSING-Pump
HOSE-lube
IMPELLER
HOUSING-Intake
LINER
DRIVESHAFT
SLEEVE
NUT
KEY
SHIM
TAB WASHER
SCREW (1/4-20 x .875)
SCREW (1/4-20 x .875)
SCREW (1/4-20 x .625)
SCREW (.312-18 x 1.25)
BRACKET
NUT
PIN-Dowel
SCREW (M10 x 60)
SCREW (M10 x 90)
SCREW (M10 x 70)
SCREW (.375-16 x .75)
WASHER
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
Drive Tight
100
70
70
13
11.5
8.0
8.0
17.5
13
17.5
25
25
25
22.5
34.0
34.0
34.0
30.5
LOWER UNIT - 6C-3
JET COMPONENTS
7
11
13
25
9
25
8
5
7
2
95
10
1
12
4
3
6
7
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
25
Liquid Neoprene (92-25711--2)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
5
2
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
4
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
REV LIMITER
HARNESS–Adaptor–Rev Limiter
BRACKET
SCREW (M6 x 16)
SCREW (M5 x 25)
GREASE KIT
IMPELLER
KEY
WATER PUMP
GASKET (UPPER)
SEAL
FACE PLATE
SCREW
6C-4 - LOWER UNIT
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
70
70
8.0
8.0
60
7.0
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Selecting A Boat That Is Best
Suited For Jet Power
Engine Horsepower Selection
A boat operating at slow speed requires considerably
more depth than one which is planing on the surface
of the water. It is important therefore to use sufficient
horsepower and not to overload your boat beyond its
ability to plane. See the following table.
Too obtain the best performance from the jet drive, the
boat should have the following features:
1. The boat should be as light as possible.
2. The boat should have hull and transom that is designed for use with a jet drive.
3. The boat should be at least 13 feet in length.
Engine Horsepower Selection
The following table is based on experience obtained with sledtype boats using outboard jets. The gross weights shown includes the outboard, boat, people, and all the gear carried. For a
given horsepower loading beyond these weights will give less
than good performance.
220
200
180
160
140
HP
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
500
6
8 1000 12
14
16
18 2000 22
24
26 28 3000 32
34 36
Gross Weight - Lbs.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6C-5
Transom height of the boat
Outboards with jet drives will be mounted approximately 7 inches higher on the transom than propeller
driven outboards. This requires outboards that have a
15 in. shaft length to be installed on boats having a 22
in. transom height and outboards that have a 20 in.
shaft length to be installed on boats having a 27 in.
transom height.
SETTING OUTBOARD MOUNTING HEIGHT ON
BOATS WITH “V” BOTTOM HULLS
1. Measure the width of the leading edge on the water
intake housing. Make a horizontal line (a) on the
transom up from the “V” bottom the same length as
the width of the water intake housing (b).
If the boat transom is of insufficient height, and the outboard cannot be installed to the recommended height,
contact the boat manufacturer for recommended procedure to build up the boat transom.
Locate Center line Of The
Outboard
Locate (and mark with pencil) the vertical centerline (a)
of boat transom.
a
b
2. Place (center) the outboard on the boat transom so
that the transom brackets are resting on top of the
transom. Temporally fasten the outboard to the
transom using two C-clamps.
3. Position the outboard in a vertical position.
A
B
4. Line-up a straight edge (c) along the bottom of the
boat with the horizontal line made in Step 1 and
measure the distance between the horizontal line
and top front edge of the water intake housing (d).
a
C
D
a - Centerline of Transom
Outboard Mounting Height
The initial outboard mounting height setting will work
good for most applications, however, because of different boat/hulls designs, the setting should be rechecked by test-running the boat. Refer to Water Testing.
• Installing the outboard too high on the transom will
allow the water intake to suck in air and cause cavitation. (cavitation will cause the engine to overspeed in spurts and reduce thrust). This condition
should be avoided by proper height setting.
c
d
5. Raise The outboard up on the transom the distance measured in Step 4. Use a straight edge and
recheck the mounting height. The top edge of the
water intake housing should be lined-up with the
horizontal line made in Step 1.
• Installing the outboard too low on the transom will
allow excessive drag.
6. Fasten outboard to the transom at this height.
6C-6 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
SETTING OUTBOARD MOUNTING HEIGHT ON
BOATS WITH FLAT BOTTOM HULLS
1. Place (center) the outboard on the boat transom so
that the transom brackets are resting on top of the
transom. Temporally fasten the outboard to the
transom using two C-clamps.
2. Position the outboard in a vertical position.
3. Place a straight edge (a) along the bottom of the
boat as shown and measure the distance between
the bottom of the boat and top front edge of the water intake housing (b).
When operating the boat, the outboard drive shaft
should be vertical when planing or tilted toward the
boat in order to provide a scooping angle on the water
intake. Tilting the outboard out beyond a vertical position reduces the scoop angle and can cause impeller
slippage and cavitation. If the angle of the boat transom does not allow the drive shaft to be positioned vertical a Wedge kit should be installed behind the transom brackets to increase the tilt-in angle.
NOTE: Slight cavitation in sharp turns and rough water
is acceptable but excessive cavitation is harmful to the
outboard and should be avoided.
Test run the boat. If cavitation occurs (air enters the
pump causing loss of thrust, engine over-speeds erratically). the first thing to try is lowering the outboard
height 1/4 in. This can be accomplished by elongating
the drilled mounting holes in the boat transom by 1/4
in.
If cavitation still exists after lowering the outboard 1/4
in., it maybe helpful to seek advice from the boat
manufacturer.
a
b
a - Straight Edge
b - Top Edge of Water Intake Housing
4. Raise The outboard up on the transom the distance measured in Step 3. Use a straight edge and
recheck the mounting height. The top edge of the
water intake housing should be in line with the bottom of the boat as shown.
A number of other options are available to further reduce cavitation.
1. Water intake fin kit (a) – Available from the Specialty Mfg. Co. for jet models 30 thru 140. The purpose
of these fins is to ram more water into the intake
and shield the forward sides of the intake from the
entrance of air. This kit will help reduce cavitation
when running with the wind in a chop.
a
5. Fasten outboard to the transom at this height.
Water testing
Checking for Cavitation
Making the initial outboard height setting should be
close to the optimum setting for the outboard. However
because of the hull design of some boats, obstructions
or imperfections in the hull ahead of the water intake
may require this setting to change in order to prevent
cavitation at running speeds.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a - Intake Fin Kit
Water Intake Fin Kit Part No.1186 for jet models 45
thru 140 and Part No. 1185 for jet model 30 is
available from.
Specialty Mfg. Co.
2035 Edison Ave.
San Leandro, CA 94577
Continued on next page
LOWER UNIT - 6C-7
Water testing
Checking for Cavitation (Continued)
2. Rough Water Plate (b) – Using this type of plate
may be helpful in reducing cavitation when running
in windy rough water conditions where air is
sucked-in the water intake when jumping waves.
Install a 1/32 in. metal plate that extends from the
hull bottom to the top of the water intake housing.
This plate tends to reduce air intake as well as reduce spray.
4. Attach the brass barrel (c) to the bracket with bolt
and locknut. Tighten the bolt until it seats against
the barrel, then back-off the bolt 1/4 turn. Hold bolt
from turning, and tighten locknut on bolt. The barrel
must be free to pivot.
c
b
a
b
d
a
b
c
d
b - Rough Water Plate
Shift Cable Installation
WARNING
The shift cable must be adjusted to lock the reverse gate against unexpected engagement
(caused by water pressure hitting the gate) while
operating the boat in forward. Activation of the reverse gate will cause sudden unexpected stopping
of the boat. Sudden stopping may cause occupants to be thrown within the boat or even out of
the boat. This action may result in serious injury or
death.
-
Shift Cable
Shift Cam
Barrel
Roller
5. Recheck the shift cable adjustment in forward shift
position. The correct shift adjustment will position
the cam far enough on the roller in order to lock the
the reverse gate into forward position. You should
not be able to forcibly push up the reverse gate toward neutral. Pull on the reverse gate by hand to
verify this.
IMPORTANT: The forward locking of the reverse
gate must be met. If not, readjust the shift cable.
1. Attach shift cable (a) to the shift cam (b) with flat
washer and locknut as shown. Tighten locknut
against the flat washer, then back-off the locknut
1/4 turn.
2. Place remote control handle into full forward position.
3. Adjust the brass barrel (c) on the shift cable so that
roller (d) is at the full end of travel (bottom) in the
shift cam when the remote control is in full forward.
6C-8 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Lubricating The Drive Shaft
Bearing
Recommended Lubrication - Use 2-4-C w/Teflon.
IMPORTANT: It is important that you do not use a
general-all-purpose grease for this bearing. The
lubricant we recommend is a water resistant
grease of the proper consistency for this application. If you use a substitute grease, be sure that it
is water resistant and of the same consistency.
Impeller Removal and
Installation
REMOVAL
1. Shift outboard to NEUTRAL (N) position.
2. Remove spark plug leads to prevent engine from
starting.
3. Remove the water intake housing that is fastened
with six screws.
Frequency of lubrication - We recommend lubricating the drive shaft bearing after each day’s use and after every 10 hours of operation. After every 30 hours
of operation, pump in extra grease to purge out any
moisture.
a
b
c
a - Vent Hose
b - Grease Gun
c - Grease Exiting Vent Hose
4. Straighten the bent tabs (a) on the impeller nut retainer and remove the impeller nut (b).
5. Pull impeller straight off the shaft. If the impeller is
tight, use a hammer and block of wood to rotate the
impeller (clockwise) on the shaft until the keyway
is directly above the flat on the shaft. This will free
the jammed key and allow removal.
Lubricating Procedure - Pull vent hose (a) off the
grease fitting. Pump in grease through the grease fitting (using the grease gun (b) provided) until excess
grease starts to exit the vent hose (c).
Reconnect the vent hose (a) onto the grease fitting after greasing.
After 30 hours of operation, pump in extra grease to
purge out any moisture. Visually inspecting the purged
grease at this time will give you an indication of conditions inside the bearing housing. A gradual increase in
moisture content, indicates seal wear. If the grease begins to turn dark, dirty gray, the drive shaft bearing and
seals should be inspected and replaced if necessary.
Some discoloration of the grease is normal during the
break-in period on a new set of seals.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
b
a
a - Tab
b - Nut
LOWER UNIT - 6C-9
INSTALLATION
1. Grease the drive shaft, shear key, and impeller
bore. Place the plastic sleeve (a) inside the impeller (b) and install impeller, shear key (c), shims (d)
nut retainer (e), and impeller nut (f). Turn the nut
tight on the shaft to remove any play between the
impeller and shaft. If the tabs on the retainer do not
line up with the flats on the nut, remove the nut and
turn the retainer over and re-tighten the nut again.
3. After setting the impeller height, tighten the impeller nut snug with a wrench. Secure impeller nut by
bending tabs (a) against the flats on the impeller
nut.
a
a
a - Tabs
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Plastic Sleeve
Impeller
Shear Key
Shims
Nut Retainer
Impeller Nut
4. Reinstall the water intake housing with six bolts.
Check clearance around the impeller to make sure
the water intake housing is centered and not rubbing against the liner. Torque mounting bolts to 100
lb. in. (11.2 N·m).
NOTE: If the outboard is used in salt water, apply
Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease around the entire
mounting flange on the water intake housing and also
to the threads on the six mounting bolts.
2. Temporarily reinstall the water intake housing in order to check for impeller clearance. The clearance
between the impeller and liner should be 0.030 in.
(0.8 mm). Shim washers can be transferred to either side of the impeller to raise or lower the impeller to the correct clearance setting. The water intake housing can be shifted side ways a small
amount in order to center the liner.
6C-10 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Steering Pull Adjustment
Worn (Dull) Impeller
The steering on some boats will have the tendency to
pull towards starboard. This pulling condition can be
corrected by using a pliers and bending the ends of the
exhaust fins (a) 1/16 in. (1.5mm) toward the starboard
side of the outboard.
Do Not sharpen or alter the
top side lifting angle
leading
edge
Enlarged
View
a
a - Exhaust Fins
Impeller Clearance
Adjustment
1. The impeller should be adjusted so there is approximately 0.03 in. (0.8mm) clearance between the
impeller edge and liner. Operating the jet drive in
waters that contain sand and gravel can cause
wear to the impeller blades, and the clearance will
start to exceed 0.03 in. (0.8mm). As the blades
wear, shims (a) located in the stack outside of the
impeller can be transferred behind the impeller.
This will move the impeller further down into the tapered liner to reduce the clearance.
Sharpen to a 1/32 in. (.8mm) radius by
removing material from bottom side only
The intake of gravel through the pump can round off
and wear the leading edges on the impeller. Some
conditions you may experience from a worn impeller
are (1) a noticeable performance loss, especially on
acceleration, (2) difficultly getting the boat on plane, or
(3) an increase in engine RPM at wide open throttle.
Check the impeller blades occasionally for damage.
Use a flat file to resharpen the leading edges as shown.
2. Check the impeller clearance by sliding a feeler
gauge through the intake grate and measure the
clearance between the impeller edge and liner. If
adjustment is required, refer to Impeller Removal
and Installation.
a - Shims
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6C-11
Flushing The Cooling System
Use Quicksilver accessory hose coupling Part Number
24789A1.
1. Remove plug and gasket (a) and thread-in hose
coupling (b).
2. Attach a water hose to the hose coupling. Turn on
the water gently, start the engine, and run it at idle
speed only.
3. Check for a steady stream of water flowing out of
the water pump indicator hole. Continue flushing
the outboard for 3 to 5 minutes; adjust water pressure if needed.
2. Remove the liner. If the liner is tight, tap on the inner
edge of the liner with a long drift punch through the
intake grate.
NOTE: Apply grease to the liner mounting bolt threads
before assembly.
3. Position the liner into the water intake housing.
Line up one of the liner bolts and lightly thread it in.
It may be necessary to tap or press the liner into the
water intake housing to locate the liner for installation of the remaining bolts. Torque bolts to 100 lbs.
in. (11.2 N·m)
4. Grind off the ends of any bolts that may extend beyond the inner liner surface.
4. Stop the engine, turn off the water, and remove the
hose coupling. Reinstall the plug and gasket.
Jet Drive Removal
1. Shift outboard to NEUTRAL (N) position and disconnect the shift linkage.
2. Remove spark plug leads to prevent engine from
starting.
a
3. Remove the water intake housing that is fastened
with six screws.
b
a - Plug and Gasket
b - Hose Coupling
Liner Replacement
1. Mark the liner mounting bolts for reassembly into
the same holes. Remove the bolts.
6C-12 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Straighten the bent tabs (a) on the impeller nut retainer and remove the impeller nut (b).
5. Pull impeller straight off the shaft. If the impeller is
tight, use a hammer and block of wood to rotate the
impeller (clockwise) on the shaft until the keyway
is directly above the flat on the shaft. This will free
the jammed key and allow removal.
Bearing Carrier Removal
NOTE: Water pump assembly must be removed before bearing carrier can be removed.
1. Remove 4 bolts securing water pump assembly
and remove water pump.
a
b
c
d
e
f
b
a
a - Tabs
b - Nut
g
6. Remove 5 bolts securing jet drive to drive shaft
housing and remove pump.
a
a
54258
54165
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Bolts (4)
Seal
Housing
Key
Impeller
Gasket
Plate
a - Bolts (4)
b - Bolt (1)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6C-13
2. Remove 4 bolts securing bearing carrier to jet
drive.
a
Bearing Carrier Reassembly
Installing Lower Seals
Install seals into bearing carrier as follows:
1. Install O-ring seals (a) into the top seats of the three
passage holes.
2. Install spiral retaining ring (b) into the inner ring
groove.
3. Spread a film of grease around the inside bore of
the seal surface before pressing in the seals.
4. Press in the garter spring seal (c) against the inner
retaining ring as shown. Fill the garter spring cavity
in the seal with grease.
a
54165
a - Bolts
Bearing Carrier Disassembly
1. Remove the large beveled snap ring (a) from the
bearing carrier.
2. Heat the bearing carrier (b) with a torch only until
you can barely touch it.
5. Install spiral retaining ring (d) into the outer ring
groove. Align the notched ends of the retaining ring
to straddle the small vent hole drilled in the ring
groove.
6. Press in the outer seal (e) against the retaining ring
as shown.
7. Grease all the seal lips.
a
3. Hold the drive shaft vertical and bump the impeller
end of the drive shaft against a wooden block causing the bearing carrier to slide down off the bearing.
4. Remove snap ring (e), press the ball bearing (c) off
the drive shaft. Leave the bearing thrust ring (f) (located in the drive shaft groove) unless damaged.
5. Remove the seals and spiral retaining rings from
the bearing carrier and the upper seal housing (d).
6. Clean all parts thoroughly and remove any burrs.
a
d
a
b
e
c
d
c
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Snap Ring
Bearing Carrier
Ball Bearing
Upper Seal Housing
Snap Ring
Thrust Ring
6C-14 - LOWER UNIT
e
IMPORTANT: The
notched ends of the
retaining ring must
straddle this vent hole.
f
a
b
c
d
e
-
O-rings
Retaining Ring
Spring Seal
Retaining Ring
Outer Seal
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Installing Upper Seals
Installing Drive Shaft Ball Bearing
1. Install spiral retaining ring (a) into the inner ring
groove of the upper seal housing.
1. If removed, install the bearing thrust ring (a) into
the groove on the drive shaft.
2. Spread a film of grease around the inside bore of
the seal surface before pressing in the seals.
2. Install collar (b) onto the drive shaft. Press the new
ball bearing (c) onto the drive shaft, pressing
against the inner race only. Press collar (b) over
the thrust ring (a), locking it in its groove. Install
snap ring (d) into drive shaft groove below the
bearing.
3. Press in the garter spring seal (b) against the inner
retaining ring as shown. Fill the garter spring cavity
in the seal with grease.
4. Install spiral retaining ring (c) into the outer ring
groove. Align the notched ends of the retaining ring
to straddle the small vent hole drilled in the ring
groove.
a
b
c
5. Press in the outer seal against the retaining ring as
shown.
a
b
6. Grease all the seal lips.
7. Grease the two O-ring seals (e) and install then into
the outer ring grooves.
d
c
d
Installing Drive Shaft
1. Lubricate the seals and inside bore of the bearing
carrier (a).
2. Place the drive shaft (“b” impeller end facing up)
into a vise.
e
3. Heat the bearing carrier (a) until it feels warm to the
touch.
c
4. Place the bearing carrier (a) onto the drive shaft.
Square up the inner bore with the ball bearing and
push the bearing carrier down until it bottoms-out
against the bearing. It may be necessary to lightly
tap bearing carrier onto the bearing using a rubber
hammer.
d
NOTE: Only a light pressing force is needed to press
on the bearing carrier. It may be necessary to lightly tap
the bearing carrier onto the bearing using a rubber
hammer.
a
b
IMPORTANT: The notched
ends of the retaining ring
must straddle this vent hole.
a
b
c
d
e
-
a
Retaining Ring
Spring Seal
Retaining Ring
Outer Seal
O-rings
b
a - Bearing Carrier
b - Drive Shaft
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
LOWER UNIT - 6C-15
7. Install spacer (c), and the upper seal housing (b)
being careful not to damage the O-ring seals as
they pass the snap ring groove. Only finger pressure should be necessary to push in the housing.
5. Grease the upper seals and inside bore of the
bearing carrier to ease entry of the seal housing.
8. Install the beveled snap ring (a), beveled side facing up into the ring groove. Make sure the snap ring
is fully seated into groove.
6. Install the thrust washer (d) against the ball bearing.
Bearing Carrier Installation
1. Install the bearing carrier into the jet drive. Secure
carrier in drive with 4 bolts. Torque bolts to 70 lb. in.
(7.9 N·m).
2. Fill carrier with grease, using the grease gun supplied with the jet drive. If using a hand lever gun,
pump very slowly so as to not build up internal
grease pressure and damage the seals or housing.
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
e
-
Snap Ring
Upper Seal Housing
Spacer
Thrust Washer
Bolts [Torque to 70 lb. in. (7.9 N·m)]
e
e
6C-16 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Installing Jet Drive to Drive
Shaft Housing
4. Apply Loctite 271 to retaining bolts (4) and torque
to 60 lb. in. (6.8 N·m).
a
b
Reassembling Water Pump to Jet
Drive
c
NOTE: Replace cover if thickness of steel at discharge
slots is 0.060 in. (1.524mm) or less, or if groove(s) (other than impeller sealing groove) in cover roof are more
than 0.030 in. (0.762mm) deep.
95
d
e
NOTE: Replace impeller if:
f
a. Impeller blades are cracked, torn or worn.
b. Impeller is glazed or melted (caused by insufficient water supply.)
g
c. Rubber portion of impeller is not bonded to impeller hub.
1. Install base plate, pump cover gasket (NEOPRENE STRIP FACES UP) and impeller key.
IMPORTANT: If impeller being installed has been
previously used and vanes have taken a “set,” DO
NOT INSTALL THE IMPELLER WITH THE VANES
REVERSED FROM THEIR PREVIOUS “SET” AS
VANE BREAKAGE WILL OCCUR SHORTLY AFTER
UNIT IS RETURNED TO SERVICE.
2. Install impeller.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to inside of
pump cover to ease installation of cover over impeller.
3. Install pump cover. Rotate drive shaft CLOCKWISE while pressing cover down over impeller.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
54258
95
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
Bolts (4) [Apply Loctite 271. Torque to 60 lb. in. (7.0 N·m)]
Seal
Cover
Key
Impeller
Gasket
Plate
LOWER UNIT - 6C-17
Installing Jet Drive to Drive Shaft
Housing
1. Apply a light coat of 2-4-C w/Teflon to the drive
shaft splines. DO NOT APPLY GREASE TO THE
TOP OF THE DRIVE SHAFT AS THE GREASE
WILL PREVENT THE DRIVE SHAFT FROM FULLY ENGAGING THE CRANKSHAFT AND DAMAGE TO THE POWERHEAD AND/OR GEAR
CASE WILL RESULT.
a - Bolt and Washer [Torque to 22.5 N·m)]
5. Grease the drive shaft, shear key, and impeller
bore. Place the plastic sleeve (a) inside the impeller (b) and install impeller, shear key (c), shims (d)
nut retainer (e), and impeller nut (f). Turn the nut
tight on the shaft to remove any play between the
impeller and shaft. If the tabs on the retainer do not
line up with the flats on the nut, remove the nut and
turn the retainer over and re-tighten the nut again.
2. Carefully slide jet drive into drive shaft housing
while aligning drive shaft splines with crankshaft
and the water tube with the water pump cover seal.
3. Secure jet drive to drive shaft housing with 4 bolts.
Torque bolts to 25 lb. ft. (34.0 N·m)].
a
b
a
c
d
e
f
a
54165
a - Bolts [Torque to 25 lb. ft. (33.9 N·m)]
4. Secure aft end of jet drive to drive shaft housing
with bolt and washer. Torque bolt to 22.5 lb. ft. (30
.5 N·m).
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
Plastic Sleeve
Impeller
Shear Key
Shims
Nut Retainer
Impeller Nut
6. Temporarily reinstall the water intake housing in order to check for impeller clearance. The clearance
between the impeller and liner should be 0.030 in.
(0.8 mm). Shim washers can be transferred to either side of the impeller to raise or lower the impeller to the correct clearance setting. The water intake housing can be shifted side ways a small
amount in order to center the liner.
a
6C-18 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. After setting the impeller height, tighten the impeller nut snug with a wrench. Secure impeller nut by
bending tabs (a) against the flats on the impeller
nut.
NOTE: If the outboard is used in salt water, apply
Quicksilver Anti-Corrosion Grease around the entire
mounting flange on the water intake housing and also
to the threads on the six mounting bolts.
a
a - Tabs
8. Reinstall the water intake housing with six bolts.
Check clearance around the impeller to make sure
the water intake housing is centered and not rubbing against the liner. Torque mounting bolts to 100
lbs. in. (11.5 N·m).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
9. Refer to “SHIFT CABLE INSTALLATION” page 8
and reinstall shift cable to jet drive.
LOWER UNIT - 6C-19
Jet Drive Tiller Handle
Adaptor Kit
2. Check to see if the shift cable will slide through the
drilled hole. If necessary, use a file to remove any
extra metal from the hole.
Installation Instructions
NOTE: This kit must be used in conjunction with the
recommended Quicksilver tiller handle kit.
1. Drill hole in bottom cowl for cable routing as follows:
a. Locate the center lines for the hole following
the dimensions given in the illustration below.
Use a center punch to mark center of hole.
b.
Drill a 1/4 in. pilot hole and then a 9/16 in. hole
angling up into the bottom cowl.
Front View
Side View
5/8 in.
(16 mm)
3. Install the shift cable to the jet drive. Use the existing mounting hardware supplied with the outboard.
Adjust shift cable after kit is installed.
1/2 in.
(12 mm)
a
b
c
d
6C-20 - LOWER UNIT
-
Shift Cable
Bolt
Locknut
Flat Washer
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Lubricate the shift cable. Slide the cable boot onto
the cable.
8. Drill the shift cable retainer mounting hole as follows:
a. Remove air box cover off the carburetors. Reinstall after installation.
a
b. Lay a straight ruler above the corner radius and
across the flat side of the cable opening in the
bottom cowl.
b
c. locate the center of hole by measuring 1-1/4 in.
(31 mm) from the opening.
d. Drill a 9/32 in. hole through bottom cowl.
a - Cable Boot
b - Lubricant
5. Slide the shift cable through the drilled hole.
6. Position the cable boot 1/2 in. (12 mm) out of the
drilled hole.
a
7. Fasten shift cable to the starter motor mount with
J-clip.
1-1/4 in.
(31 mm)
a - Straight Ruler
9. Rotate the shift cable retainer so that the set screw
is facing up and the slot is facing out.
10. Slide shift cable into retainer until brass tube extends out 2-1/4 in. (56 mm). Secure the retainer at
this position by tightening the set screw until it is
snug, then add an additional 1/8 turn.
b
11. Install the Allen head screw and tighten securely.
1/2 in.
(12 mm)
a
2-1/4 in.
(56 mm)
b
a
a - Position Cable Boot 1/2 in. (12 mm) out of Drilled Hole
b - J-Clip
d
c
a
b
c
d
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
-
Cable Retainer
Set Screw
Lock Washer
Allen Head Screw - Tighten Securely
LOWER UNIT - 6C-21
12. Fasten the shift cable retainer to the bottom cowl
with the mounting hardware shown. Tighten locknut, then back-off the locknut 1/4 turn.
13. Attach the shift cable to the outer flange hole.
IMPORTANT: Do not over-tighten. Shift Cable must
be free to pivot.
IMPORTANT: Do not over-tighten. Shift cable retainer must be free to pivot.
a
b
a
c
d
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
-
7/8 in. OD White Nylon Washer
1.00 in. OD Flat Washer
Bottom Cowl
5/8 in. OD Black Nylon Washer
21/32 in. OD Flat WAsher
Locknut - Tighten, Then Back-Off The Locknut 1/4 turn.
b
e
a
b
c
d
e
-
Bolt
1/2 in. OD Flat Washer
Shift Cable
Nylon Bearing
Locknut - Tighten, Then Back-Off The Locknut 1/4 turn.
14. Lubricate the new cable seal.
15. Slip the cable seal onto the throttle cable.
16. Place the cable seal along with the throttle cable
into the cowl opening. Spread the seal over the
shift cable.
a
b
a - Cable Seal
b - Lubricant
6C-22 - LOWER UNIT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
17. Install the throttle cable as follows:
Shift Cable Adjustment
a. Rotate the throttle grip to the IDLE position.
b. loosen the set screw (a) in the cable barrel.
c. Position the throttle cable barrel (b) so the barrel will be able to slip into the retainer when the
cable end is on the mounting stud and there is
a slight pre-load against the throttle stop.
d. Apply a small amount of Loctite to threads on
set screw and tighten until snug, then add an
additional 1/8 turn.
a
b
! WARNING
The shift cable must be adjusted to lock the reverse gate against unexpected engagement
(caused by water pressure hitting the gate) while
operating the boat in forward. Activation of the reverse gate will cause sudden unexpected stopping
of the boat. Sudden stopping may cause occupants to be thrown within the boat or even out of
the boat. This action may result in serious injury or
death.
1. Place shift lever into full forward position.
2. Adjust the brass barrel (c) on the shift cable so that
roller (d) is at the full end of travel (bottom) in the
shift cam when the shift lever is in forward.
3. Attach the brass barrel (c) to the bracket with bolt
and locknut. Tighten the bolt until it seats against
the barrel, then back-off the bolt 1/4 turn. Hold bolt
from turning, and tighten locknut on bolt. The barrel
must be free to pivot.
a - Set Screw
b - Cable Barrel
18. Place the cable barrel into retainer.
19. Fasten the cable end to mounting stud with nylon
washer (a) and locknut (b). Tighten locknut against
the nylon washer, then back-off the locknut 1/4
turn.
20. Secure the retainer in place with cable latch (c).
a
b
c
d
c
a
b
a - Nylon Washer
b - Locknut - Tighten Locknut Against The Nylon Washer, Then
Back-Off The Locknut 1/4 turn.
c - Cable Latch
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
-
Shift Cable
Shift Cam
Barrel
Roller
4. Recheck the shift cable adjustment in forward shift
position. The correct shift adjustment will position
the cam far enough on the roller in order to lock the
the reverse gate into forward position. You should
not be able to forcibly push up the reverse gate toward neutral. Pull on the reverse gate by hand to
verify this.
IMPORTANT: The forward locking of the reverse
gate must be met. If not, readjust the shift cable.
LOWER UNIT - 6C-23
OUTBOARD
INSTALLATION/
ATTACHMENTS
50331
RIDE-GUIDE STEERING THROTTLE/SHIFT CABLES &
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
7
A
Table of Contents
Page
Installing Outboard Motor on Transom . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
Determining Recommended
Outboard Mounting Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
Locate Centerline of Boat Transom . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-1
Lifting Outboard (Electric Start Models) . . . . . . . . 7A-1
Lifting Outboard (Manual Start Models) . . . . . . . . 7A-2
Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes
(Electric Start Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-2
Fastening Outboard on Boat Transom
(Manual Start Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-2
Securing Outboard to Boat Transom
(Electric Start Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-5
Steering Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-5
Dual Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-5
Cable Installation to Tilt Tube - Cable
Routed on Starboard Side of Boat . . . . . . . . . . 7A-6
Cable Installation to Tilt Tube - Cable
Routed on Port Side of Boat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-7
Tilt Tube Reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-7
Installing Steering Link Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-7
Models with One-Piece steering Arm . . . . . . . 7A-8
Models with One-Piece steering
Arm/Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-8
Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-9
Dual Steering Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-9
Steering Coupler Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-10
Models With Forged Two Hole Steering
Arm and One Piece Top Cowl . . . . . . . . . . 7A-10
Models With Two Hole Two Piece Steering
Arm/Bracket and One Piece Top Cowl . . . 7A-11
Ride-Guide Steering Attachment
Extension Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-12
Trim Tab Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-12
Dual Outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-12
Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A-12
7A-0 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
Page
Transom Mounted Ride-Guide Attaching Kit
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clevis Attaching Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Cable Installation and
Adjustment to Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle Cable Installation and Adjustment
to Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Remote Control Wiring Harness
to Engine Wiring Harness (Electric Start
Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Trim Wiring Connections (Models
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7A-13
7A-13
7A-14
7A-14
7A-15
7A-15
7A-16
7A-16
7A-17
7A-17
7A-18
7A-18
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Locate Centerline of Boat Transom
Installing Outboard Motor
on Transom
Locate (and mark with a pencil) vertical centerline (a) of
boat transom, as shown.
Determining Recommended
Outboard Mounting Height
It is recommended for best-all-around boating performance, the outboard should be mounted with the anti-ventilation plate parallel to and at the same level as the boat bottom.
On boats with a 20 in. (508mm) transom height, this will require that the outboard be mounted approximately 1 in.
(25.4mm) high on the transom as the outboard has a 21 in.
(533mm) shaft length.
A
B
a
C
D
NOTE: Dimension “A” & “B” and “C” & “D” are Equal
Length.
Lifting Outboard (Electric Start
Models)
! WARNING
Make sure that lifting eye is threaded into flywheel a
minimum of 5 turns and that hoist has a minimum lift
capacity of at least 500 lbs. (227 kg) BEFORE lifting
outboard.
Remove cowling from outboard and plastic cap from center
of flywheel. Thread lifting eye (a) into flywheel hub a minimum of 5 turns. Replace plastic cap after installation.
Connect hoist [minimum lift capacity of 500 lbs. (227 kg)]
to lifting eye or rings of lift harness and lift outboard onto
boat transom.
b
50563
If, with the outboard mounted so that the anti-ventilation
plate is level with the bottom of the boat, excessive propeller slippage/cavitation is experienced, it is recommended
that the outboard be lowered one position on the transom
to increase propeller “BITE” at a slight loss at top end
speed and increase spray.
a
NOTE: Raising or lowering the outboard by one mounting
hole will change outboard height by approximately 3/4 in.
(19mm).
50565A
a - Lifting Ring (P/N 91-75132)
b - Hoist
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-1
IMPORTANT: If using “Transom Drill Fixture”
(91-98234A2), use drill guide holes marked “A” when
drilling outboard mounting holes.
Lifting Outboard (Manual Start
Models)
Remove cowling from outboard. Use lifting eye on outboard and lift outboard on boat transom.
51456
Drilling Outboard Mounting Holes
(Electric Start Models)
IMPORTANT: Before drilling any mounting holes, carefully read “Determining Recommended Outboard Motor Mounting Height”, preceding. There is a 3/4 in.
(19mm) difference between outboard mounting holes
in transom bracket.
! WARNING
DO NOT under any circumstances, allow upper outboard mounting bolts to be closer than 1 in. (25.4mm)
from top of boat transom. Upper mounting bolts must
never be installed thru shims.
1. Secure (tape) “Outboard Mounting Template” (located
in center of Installation Manual) to outside of boat transom.
2. Align “Top of Boat Transom Line” of template with top
edge of (real) boat transom, not shim(s).
3. Align vertical centerline of template with centerline of
transom.
4. Use a 17/32 in. (13.5mm) diameter drill bit and drill 4
mounting holes perpendicular to and thru transom at
marked hole centers on template.
Fastening Outboard on Boat Transom
(Manual Start Models)
! WARNING
Outboard must be fastened to boat transom with transom clamp handles and transom clamp retainers or
mounting bolts as shown in installation A or B should
the outboard strike an underwater object or be steered
into a sharp turn. Failure to tighten transom clamp
handles along with installing transom clamp retainers
or mounting bolts could result in outboard ejecting
suddenly off boat transom causing serious injury or
death, boat damage or loss of outboard.
7A-2 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Outboard Mounting Hardware
Installation B
Use for easy removal and installation of outboard.
a
a
b
c
d
b
e
a
b
c
d
e
-
c
51509
Mounting Bolts (4)
Flat Washers (4)
Locknuts (4)
Transom Clamp Retainers With Mounting Hardware
Shims - Transom Clamp Retainers (If Required)
d
51462
Fasten outboard to boat transom following installation A or
B shown below.
a
b
c
d
-
Tighten Transom Clamp Handels
Part Number 812433-C1
Part Number 812432-C1
Transom Clamp Retainers (Opitional)
Installation A
Installation A
Fastening outboard for permanent installation.
Use for permanent installation.
Drill four 1/2 in. (12.5mm) holes and fasten outboard to
boat transom.
a
a
c
b
d
b
51489
51462
a - Tighten Transom Clamp Handles
b - Mounting Bolts (Supplied with Outboard
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
a
b
c
d
-
Bolts (4)
Flat Washers (4)
Locknuts (4)
Marine Sealer
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-3
Installation B
Retainers installed.
Fastening outboard for easy removal and installation.
Mark hole location.
51394
51393
Outboard can be easily removed and installed.
Drill four 3/8 in. (9.5mm) holes and fasten transom clamp
retainers to transom.
Add shims (if necessary) to allow for a small amount of
clearance between transom clamps and retainers.
g
c
a
e
b
d
51395
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
51489
Bolts (4)
Flat Washers (4)
Locknuts (4)
Marine Sealer
Transom Clamp Retainers (2)
Shims (4)
Transom Clamp
7A-4 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Installation must be water-tight, and outboard should
be checked for tightness on the transom during operation. Failure to bolt outboard to transom (using 4 bolts
and locknuts, as shown) may result in damage to boat
and/or loss of outboard and possible injury to occupants of boat.
Outboard installed.
a
a
c
b
a
c
51462
a - Tighten transom clamp, handles. Retighten every 1/2 hour.
b
50181
Securing Outboard to Boat Transom
(Electric Start Models)
a - Mounting Bolt 4 in. Long (4 Req’d)
b - Flat Washer (4 Req’d)
c - Locknut (4 Req’d)
IMPORTANT: If boat is equipped with thru tilt tube
steering, steering cable end must be installed into tilt
tube of outboard before securing outboard to transom. Refer to “Steering Cable and Steering Link Rod
Installation”, following.
Steering Cable Installation
Refer to “Determining Recommended Outboard Motor
Mounting Height”, and position outboard on boat transom
aligning mounting holes in transom bracket.
! CAUTION
Marine sealer must be used on shanks of mounting
bolts to make a water-tight installation.
IMPORTANT: In order to avoid transom damage DO
NOT use an impact driver when tightening transom
mounting bolts.
Apply marine sealer to shanks of mounting bolts (not
threads) secure outboard to transom with 4 bolts, flat washers and locknuts, as shown. Be sure that installation is water-tight.
! WARNING
Before operating, outboards(s) MUST BE SECURED to
boat transom with four 1/2 in. diameter bolts and locknuts, as follows: 2 bolts must be installed thru upper
mounting holes and 2 bolts thru lower mounting holes.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Refer to “Quicksilver Accessories Guide” to determine correct length of steering cable and remote control cables.
IMPORTANT: Steering cable and remote control cables
must be the correct length. Cables which are too short
or too long will result in unwanted cable stress.
Install steering mount and steering wheel in accordance with installation instructions that accompany
each.
Dual Outboard
IMPORTANT: The distance from each outboard’s centerline to the side of transom opening or gunnel MUST
BE a minimum of 16 in. (406mm).
With a dual steering system installation, a minimum outboard centerline distance of 21 in. (533mm) must be attained to assure interference-free movement.
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-5
Ride-Guide steering cable can be routed on either side of
boat. If steering cable is routed on starboard side of boat,
cable attaches to port outboard. If steering cable is routed
on port side of boat, cable attaches to starboard outboard.
1. Lubricate inside of outboard tilt tube (a) and steering
cable end (b) with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
2. Insert steering cable end thru outboard tilt tube and secure with steering cable attaching nut (c). Torque to 35
lb. ft. (41 N·m).
Cable Installation to Tilt Tube - Cable
Routed on Starboard Side of Boat
c
a
b
50564B
3. Make pencil mark (a) on tilt tube 1/4 in. (6.4mm) from
port end of tube. Slide spacer (b), O-ring (c) and cap
(d) over steering cable end.
51130
Single Cable-Dual
Outboard
1/4 in.
(6.4mm)
b
c
d
Single Cable-Single
Outboard
IMPORTANT: Before installing steering cable tilt tube,
lubricate entire cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C Marine Lubricant.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional lubrication at initial installation.
a
50180
4. Thread cap (d) onto tilt tube, up to mark (a).
d
a
50180
7A-6 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Cable Installation to Tilt Tube - Cable
Routed on Port Side of Boat
1. Lubricate inside of outboard tilt tube (a) and steering
cable end (b) with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine
Lubricant.
2. Insert steering cable end thru outboard tilt tube and secure with steering cable attaching nut (c). Torque to 35
lb. ft. (41 N·m).
TILT TUBE REVERSAL
! CAUTION
Outboard tilt tube MUST BE removed and re-installed
in the opposite direction. When re-assembled, longer
threaded end of tilt tube extends out port side of outboard approximately 3/4 in. (19mm). Failure to reposition outboard tilt tube as described could interfere
with steering system operation.
Remove outboard tilt tube and re-install in the opposite direction (turn end for end). When re-assembled, longer
threaded end (a) of tilt tube extends out port side of outboard approximately 3/4 in. (19mm). Refer to Section 5A
“Midsection”.
c
b a
50579
3. Make pencil mark (a) on tilt tube 1/4 in. (6.4mm) from
starboard end of tube. Slide spacer (b), O-ring (c) and
cap (d) over steering cable end.
a
a
c
50579
b
1/4 in.
(6.4mm)
4. Thread cap (d) onto tilt tube, up to mark (a).
d
50325
d
a
50325
Installing Steering Link Rod
51130
Single Cable-Single
Single Cable-Dual
Outboard
Outboard
IMPORTANT: Before installing steering cable tilt tube,
lubricate entire cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional lubrication at initial installation.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
! WARNING
Steering link rod MUST BE secured between outboard
steering arm/bracket and steering cable end using a
special washer head bolt, spacer and nylon locknuts
as shown. Both special washer head bolt and locknuts
MUST BE tightened as specified.
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-7
Lubricate hole in end of cable with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. Assemble steering link rod to steering cable end using 2 flat washers and nylon insert locknut.
Tighten locknut until it seats [DO NOT exceed 120 lb. in.
(13.5 N·m) of torque], then back off 1/4 turn.
MODELS WITH TWO-PIECE STEERING
ARM/BRACKET
Starboard Cable Entry Into Tilt Tube
a
Lubricate ball joint in steering link rod with SAE 30W motor
oil. Secure link rod to outboard steering arm (inner hole) using special washer head bolt and nylon insert locknut as
shown. Torque bolt to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m), then torque nut to
20 lb. ft. (27 N·m).
f
b
e
MODELS WITH ONE-PIECE STEERING ARM
Starboard Cable Entry Into Tilt Tube
c
e
f
d
g
d
Port Cable Entry Into Tilt Tube
f
c
50056
a
a
b
a
51103
b
f
Port Cable Entry Into Tilt Tube
e
e
c
f
d
g
d
f
c
a
a
b
50056
51103
a - Flat Washer (2)
b - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque until it seats [DO NOT Exceed
120 lb. in. (13.5 N·m) or Torque], Then back off 1/4 Turn
c - Special Washer Head Bolt, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
d - Spacer
e - Nylon Insert Locknut, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
f - Steering Link Rod
7A-8 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
a - Two-Piece Steering Bracket, Mount Steering Link Rod in Back Hole
b - Flat Washer (2)
c - Nylon Insert Locknut - Torque until it seats [DO NOT Exceed
120 lb. in. (14 N·m) or Torque], Then back off 1/4 Turn
d - Special Washer Head Bolt, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
e - Spacer
f - Nylon Insert Locknut, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
g - Steering Link Rod
! WARNING
After installation is complete and before operating
outboard, check that boat will turn right when steering
wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left when
steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru full
range (right and left) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Maintenance Instructions
c
d e
b
a
b
d
c
Maintenance is the owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals specified.
Normal Service - Every 50 hours of operation or 60 days
(whichever comes first).
*Severe Service - Every 25 hours of operation or 30 days
(whichever comes first).
*Operation in salt water is considered “Severe Service”.
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear.
Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they
are torqued to correct specifications.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional lubrication at initial installation.
! WARNING
Core of steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable housing before lubricating cable. If
cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic lock of
cable could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering cable (transom end)
fully retracted, lubricate transom end of steering cable
thru grease fitting and exposed portion of cable end
with 2-4-C Marine Lubricant. Lubricate all pivot points
with SAE 30W engine oil.
a
b
c
d
e
-
Coupler
Rubber Sleeve
Steering Eye
Rubber Bushing
Jam Nut
! WARNING
Both steering eyes must be threaded into coupler 3/4
in. (19mm) minimum. Thread length of steering eye is
3-1/2 in. (89mm), so exposed thread must not extend
out of coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70mm). Failure to
adhere to this requirement could result in steering system failure.
Assemble steering coupler between outboard steering
arms/brackets, as shown on the following pages.
IMPORTANT: With assembled steering coupler installed and before tightening special washer head
bolts/locknuts, check outboard alignment. Distance
between hole centers of steering eye ball joints MUST
BE equal to distance between propeller shaft center
lines, for proper steering. If adjustment is necessary,
temporarily remove special washer head bolt/locknut
from one steering eye and turn eye in or out to correct
alignment.
! WARNING
Dual Steering Installation
Steering Coupler Assembly
Position outboards so that they are pointing straight ahead.
(Distance between threaded hole centers of steering arm/
brackets MUST BE equal to distance between propeller
shaft centerlines.)
Lubricate inside of rubber sleeves with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant and slide sleeves on steering coupler.
Work rubber bushings onto threaded ends of steering
eyes.
Thread jam nut on starboard steering eye.
Thread steering eyes equally into coupler, so that distance
between hole centers of steering eye ball joints is equal to
distance between threaded hole centers of steering arms/
brackets. Exposed threads of steering eyes MUST BE of
equal length and threads MUST NOT extend out from coupler more than 2-3/4 in. (70mm).
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Both steering eyes MUST BE threaded into coupler 3/4
in. (19mm) minimum, and jam nut must be tightened
against coupler to prevent coupler from turning.
Torque “jam” nut to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m).
Tighten “jam” nut against coupler. Torque “jam” nut to 20 lb.
ft. (27 N·m).
Spray Quicksilver Corrosion Guard on exposed threads of
steering eyes and position rubber bushings and rubber
sleeves to cover exposed threads of steering eyes.
! WARNING
After installation is complete (and before operating
outboard(s), check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left
when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru
full range (left and right) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
Adjust trim tabs of both outboards, as outlined in “Trim Tab
Adjustment”, following.
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-9
Installation
IMPORTANT: Lubricate all moving parts with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
MODELS WITH FORGED TWO HOLE STEERING
ARM AND ONE PIECE TOP COWL
IMPORTANT: All 50-60 models with one piece top cowl
require a minimum centerline distance of 21 in.
(533mm) during dual outboard installation to assure
interference-free movement.
a
b
f
50159
Steering Cable Routed on Starboard Side of Boat Connected to Port Outboard
i
n
l
f
m
i
l
f
f
i
c
h
h
d
h
g
J
J
k
g
g
e
d
o
Steering Cable Routed on Port Side of Boat Connected
to Starboard Outboard
i
c
g
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
i
l
m
n
l
f
i
h
h
d
d
f
f
o
h
g
e
-
Steering Link Connecting Hole
Coupler Assembly Connecting Hole
Steering Link
Washer
Ride-Guide Cable
Steering Bracket
Special (Washer Head) Bolt (3/8” x 1-5/8”; P/N 10-90041),
Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)
h - Special Washer (P/N 12-71970)
7A-10 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
i j k l mn o -
J
k
J
g
Lock Nut P/N 11-34863, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
Steering Eye
Rubber Sleeve
Rubber Bushing
Jam Nut, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)
Dual Steering Coupler
Lock Nut P/N 11-34863, Torque Until it Seats [Do Not Exceed 120
lb. in. (14 N·m) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
MODELS WITH TWO HOLE TWO PIECE STEERING
ARM/BRACKET AND ONE PIECE TOP COWL
IMPORTANT: Lubricate all moving parts with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
IMPORTANT: All 50-60 models with one piece top cowl
require a minimum centerline distance of 21 in.
(533mm) during dual outboard installation to assure
interference-free movement.
a
b
c
g
51011
Steering Cable Routed on Starboard Side of Boat Connected to Port Outboard
o
m
J
n
m
J
J
g
g
g
d
i
i
i
i
i
k
f
k
l
h
e
h
h
p
e
Steering Cable Routed on Port Side of Boat Connected
to Starboard Outboard
J
d
m
J
g
n
o
m
J
g
g
i
i
i
e
i
i
f
h
k
h
l
k
h
e
p
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
-
Steering Link Connecting Hole
Coupler Assembly Connecting Hole
Steering Arm
Steering Link
Washer
Ride-Guide Cable
Steering Bracket
Special (Washer Head) Bolt (3/8” x 1-5/8”; P/N 10-90041),
Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
i - Special Washer (P/N 12-71970)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
j k l mn o p -
Lock Nut P/N 11-34863, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
Steering Eye
Rubber Sleeve
Rubber Bushing
Jam Nut, Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)
Dual Steering Coupler
Lock Nut P/N 11-34863, Torque Until it Seats [Do Not Exceed 120
lb. in. (13.5 N·m) of Torque], Then Back Off 1/4 Turn
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-11
Ride-Guide Steering Attachment
Extension Couplers
Outboard Center
Line Distance
Required Coupler(s) Between
Steering Eyes (Shown Below)
18 in. thru 22-1/2 in.
(457mm thru 572mm)
9 in. (229mm) Coupler
(p/n 814951--1)
22-1/2 in. thru 24-1/2 in.
(572mm thru 622mm)
12 in. (305mm) Coupler
(p/n 814951--2)
23-1/2 in. thru 27-1/2 in.
(597mm thru 699mm)
15 in. (381mm) Coupler
(p/n 814951--3)
26-1/2 in. thru 30-1/2 in.
(673mm thru 755mm)
18 in. (457mm) Coupler
(p/n 814951--4)
2. If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows:
a. Shift outboard into neutral and make sure ignition
key is at “OFF” position.
b. Remove plastic cap from rear of drive shaft housing and loosen bolt and trim tab.
IMPORTANT: Trim tabs MUST BE set in the same position on both outboards.
c.
If boat pulls to the right, adjust trailing edges of
both trim tabs to the right. If boat pulls to the left,
adjust trailing edges of both trim tabs to the left.
d. Tighten both trim tab bolts securely and replace
plastic caps.
e. Operate boat following trim tab adjustment. Readjust trim tab if necessary.
a
b
Maintenance Instructions
Maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must
be performed at intervals specified, following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hrs. of operation or 60 days
(whichever comes first)
*Severe Service - Every 25 hrs. of operation or 30 days
(whichever comes first)
*Operation in a salt water area is considered “Sever Service”.
c
d
a
b
c
d
-
18 in. (457mm) Coupler (P/N 814951--4)
15 in. (381mm) Coupler (P/N 814951--3)
12 in. (305mm) Coupler (P/N 814951--2)
9 in. (229mm) Coupler (P/N 814951--1)
1. Carefully check steering system components for wear.
Replace worn parts.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they
are torqued to correct specifications.
NOTE: Ride-Guide Steering Cables are lubricated at the
factory and require no additional lubrication at initial installation.
! WARNING
Trim Tab Adjustment
DUAL OUTBOARD
1. Check trim tab position as follows:
IMPORTANT: Initial trim tab setting for both outboards
should be straight to rear of outboard, so that tabs are
aligned with gear housing centerline. Refer to “If necessary, adjust trim tab as follows”.
a. Operate boat at normal cruise throttle setting and
adjust trim to optimum setting.
b. If boat pulls to the right (starboard), trailing edge of
trim tab must be moved to the right (when viewing
outboard from behind). If boat pulls to the left
(port), trailing edge of trim tab must be moved to
the left.
7A-12 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
Core of each steering cable (transom end) must be fully retracted into cable housing before lubricating
cable. If cable is lubricated while extended, hydraulic
lock of cable could occur.
3. With core of Ride-Guide Steering Cable (transom end)
fully retracted, lubricate transom end of steering
cables thru grease fittings with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine
Lubricant. Lubricate exposed portion of cable ends
with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
4. Lubricate pivot points of steering link rods and ball
joints of link rods/steering coupler with Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon Lubricant.
5. Inspection and lubrication of steering head assembly
(rotary or straight rack) should be performed once
each year (by your Authorized Dealer) or whenever
steering mount and/or steering head are disassembled, or if steering effort has increased. Lubricate
with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Place Ride-Guide yoke on pivot block and secure with
7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in bolt and locknut, as shown in Figures
1 and 2. Torque locknut to 10 lb.ft. (13.5 N·m), then
back off 1/4 turn.
Transom Mounted RideGuide Attaching Kit
Installation
Attaching Kit Installation
1. Lubricate both holes in pivot block (Figure 1) with
Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
2. Place pivot block on pivot spacer and secure to transom bracket with 3/8 in. x 2-1/2 in. bolt, flat washer and
locknut, as shown in Figure 1. Torque locknut to 20 lb.
ft (27 N·m).
b
a
4. Install one cable tube jam nut onto steering cable tube.
Place tab washer over Ride-Guide yoke, then insert
cable tube thru tab washer and yoke. Install second
cable tube jam nut onto cable tube but do not tighten
at this time. (Figure 3)
5. Position transom attaching kit on transom as follows:
a. Determine centerline of outboard, then measure
15 in. (38.1cm) over from this centerline and draw
a vertical line on transom. (Figure 1)
b. Position attaching kit on transom so that transom
bracket is centered on the 15 in. line (Figure 1)
at a height where the center of Ride-Guide yoke
is even with, or not more than 1/2 in. (12.8mm)
above, top edge of transom. (Figure 3)
h
i
f
c
k
l
d
f
g
e
J
51140
a
g
a
b
h
d
i
f
b
k
c
d
J
c
g
l
e
e
51140
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
-
Ride-Guide Cable
Ride-Guide Yoke
Pivot Block
Pivot Spacer
15 in. (Centerline of Attaching Kit Pivot to Centerline of Outboard)
Pivot Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)]
Outboard Steering Arm or Steering Arm/Bracket
“Clevis Kit”
Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13,5 N·m)
Bolt (3/8 in. x 2-1/2 in.)
Flat Washer
Transom Bracket
a
b
c
d
50568
-
Transom Backing Plate
Bolt (5/16 in. x 3-1/4 in.)
Locknut (Torque to 10 lb. ft.)
Ride-Guide Yoke Attaching Locknut (Torque to 10 lb. ft.
Then Back Off 1/4-Turn
e - 2-3/8 in. Maximum Transom Thickness
f - Bolt (7/16 in. x 1-3/4 in.)
g - Ride-Guide Yoke
Figure 2. Installing Attaching Kit
Figure 1. Installing Attaching Kit
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-13
NOTE: When drilling thru transom, be sure that holes are
drilled perpendicular to transom.
6. With attaching kit positioned as outlined preceding,
use 3 holes in transom bracket as a guide and drill
three 11/32 in. (8.7mm) holes thru transom.
7. Use a marine-type sealer on three 5/16 in. x 3-1/4 in.
bolts. Secure attaching kit to transom, using transom
backing plate, 3 bolts (with sealer) and 3 locknuts, installed as shown in Figure 2. Torque locknuts to 10 lb.
ft. (13.5 N·m).
e
f
a
NOTE: This kit is used to attach Ride-Guide cable to outboard steering arm ONLY when “Transom Mounted RideGuide Attaching Kit” is being used. If Ride-Guide cable is
installed thru outboard tilt tube, then “Steering Link Rod”
must be used.
Installation Instructions
k
h
f
Clevis Attaching Kit
Installation
! CAUTION
J
e
Models with two hole two piece steering arm require
outer connection hole to be used when connecting
clevis to steering arm.
i
c
J
i
b
g
d
a
51140
h
b
e
f
a
k
h
f
g
e
i
c
c
d
J
e
b
d
g
51140
a - Ride-Guide Yoke
b - 0 in. to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) (Center of Ride-Guide Yoke to Top of
Transom)
c - Top of Transom
d - Transom Bracket
e - Cable Tube Jam Nuts [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m)]
f - Tab Washer
g - After Jam Nuts are Torqued to Specification, Bend Locking Tabs
Against Nuts
h - Cable Guide Tube
i - Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Nut [Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m)]
j - “Clevis Kit”
k - Clevis Attaching Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.1 N·m)
Figure 3. Installing Attaching Kit
f
50811
Clevis
Steering Cable
Bolt (3/8 in. x 1-3/8 in.)
Clevis to Steering Cable Locknut [Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 N·m)]
Bolt 3/8 in. x 1-1/4 in. [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.0 N·m)]
Thin Washer [1/16 in. (1.6mm) Thick]
Spacer
Thick Washer [1/8 in. (3.2mm) Thick]
Outboard Steering Arm (use Inner Hole on Models with One Piece
Steering Arm or Outer Hole on Models with Two Hole Two Piece
Steering Arm)
j - Clevis to Outboard Locknut [Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27.0 N·m)]
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
-
1. Lubricate shank of bolt (c) with 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine
Lubricant, then secure clevis to steering cable with this
bolt and locknut. Torque locknut (d) to 10 lb. ft (13.5
N·m).
2. Lubricate spacer (supplied with kit) with 2-4-C w/Teflon
Marine Lubricant.
3. Attach clevis to steering arm bolt using thin washer,
spacer, thick washer (positioned between clevis and
steering arm) and locknut, as shown. Torque bolt (e) to
20 lb. ft (27.0 N·m), then torque locknut (j) to 20 lb. ft.
(27.0 N·m).
7A-14 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Steering Cable Installation
1. Lubricate steering cable end with Quicksilver 2-4-C w/
Teflon Marine Lubricant.
2. Install steering cable thru steering cable tube and secure to cable tube with cable attaching nut. (See below.) Do not tighten cable attaching nut at this time.
3. Attach ride-guide cable to outboard steering bracket
(middle hole) using clevis kit (P/N 70599A4).
4. Adjust 2 large jam nuts on cable tube of attaching kit,
so that steering wheel is in normal straight-driving position with outboard in straight- driving position. Torque
each jam nut to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m), then bend a side
of tab washer against flat of each jam. (below)
5. Torque Ride-Guide cable attaching nut (which secures
cable to guide tube) to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m). (below) Install locking sleeve over cable attaching nut and secure with cotter pin. Spread ends of cotter pin.
a
n b n
o
m
h
m
f
i
l
d
! WARNING
After installation is completed (and before operating
outboard), check that boat will turn right when steering wheel is turned right and that boat will turn left
when steering wheel is turned left. Check steering thru
full range (left and right) at all tilt angles to assure interference-free movement.
6. Lubricate outboard end of Ride-Guide steering cable
(thru grease fitting next to cable attaching nut) with
Quicksilver 2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant.
NOTE: Ride-Guide steering cable is lubricated at the factory and requires no additional lubrication at initial installation.
7. Lubricate all steering system pivot points (and exposed portion of steering cable core) with Quicksilver
2-4-C w/Teflon Marine Lubricant. Lubricate at intervals
specified preceding.
8. Carefully check steering system components for wear
(at intervals specified, preceding). Replace worn parts.
c
k
NOTE: Some Ride-Guide steering cables may not be
equipped with locking sleeve and cotter pin. If cable being
installed does not have these parts, disregard instructions
to install them.
9. Check steering system fasteners (at intervals specified, preceding) to be sure that they are torqued to correct specifications. (Figures 1, 2 and 3)
g
e
J
51140
Maintenance Instructions
a
o m
h
n b n
m
i
Lubrication and maintenance inspection is owner’s responsibility and must be performed at intervals as specified
following:
Normal Service - Every 50 hours of operation or 60 days
(whichever comes first).
f
k
c
d
J
a b c d e f g h i j k l mn o -
*Severe Service - Every 25 hours of operation or 30 days
(whichever comes first).
g
l
*Operation in salt water is considered “Severe Service”.
e
51140
Ride-Guide Cable
Ride-Guide Yoke
Pivot Block
Pivot Spacer
15” (Centerline of Attaching Kit Pivot to Centerline of Engine)
Pivot Attaching Locknut; Torque to 20 lb. ft. (27 N·m)
Engine Steering Arm
Clevis Kit
Ride-Guide Cable Attaching Locknut; Torque to 10 lb. ft. (13.5 N·m)
Bolt (3/8” x 2-1/2”)
Flat Washer
Transom Bracket
Cable Tube Jam Nut; Torque to 35 lb. ft. (47.5 N·m)
Tab Washers (Bend Over Flat of Jam Nuts)
Cable Attaching Nut
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
1. Carefully check steering components for wear. Replace as necessary.
2. Check steering system fasteners to be sure that they
are torqued to correct specifications.
3. Lubricate clevis points with a drop of light oil.
4. Inspection and lubrication of steering system should
be performed once each year or whenever steering
components are disassembled, steering effort has increased or steering seems loose.
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-15
Remote Control Installation
IMPORTANT: Connect control cables to remote control
and mount remote control BEFORE attaching control
cables to engine.
Install throttle and shift cables to remote control and mount
remote control as outlined in the installation instructions
which accompany the remote control.
NOTE: It will be necessary to lift control cable rubber grommet out of opening in bottom cowl. so that control cables
can be routed thru grommet and into bottom cowl.
1. Position remote control handle into neutral detent.
2. Manually shift outboard into neutral (propeller will rotate freely).
3. Route shift cable (a) thru control cable grommet (b).
4. Adjust cable barrel (c) to attain the same length between cable barrel and hole in end of cable as exists
between barrel receptacle (d) and shift actuator stud
(e), keep a slight preload toward reverse.
5. Place end of shift cable on actuator stud (e), then place
plastic washer (f) on stud and secure with locknut (g).
e
g
a
d
b
f
c
a
b
c
50564C
50566
a - Control Cable Rubber Grommet
b - Shift Cable Opening
c - Throttle Cable Opening
Shift Cable Installation and
Adjustment to Engine
NOTE: Attach shift cable to engine first. Shift cable is the
first cable to move when remote control handle is advanced from neutral position toward in-gear position.
If remote control has a neutral lock release, secure the release in the depressed position using a piece of tape. Now
the true neutral detent can be found.
NOTE: Move remote control handle back and forth. You
will feel three detent positions; center detent is neutral.
7A-16 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
6. Check shift cable adjustment as follows:
a. Shift remote control into forward gear. Now,
check prop shaft, the shaft should not be able to
turn counterclockwise. If it does, adjust cable barrel closer to cable end guide.
b. Shift remote control into neutral. The prop shaft
now should turn freely without drag. If not, adjust
cable barrel away from cable end guide. Repeat
steps a and b.
c.
Shift remote control into reverse as the prop
shaft is rotated by hand. The prop shaft should
not be able to turn clockwise. If it does, adjust
cable barrel away from cable end guide. Repeat
steps a thru c.
d. Shift remote control into neutral. The prop shaft
should turn freely without drag. If not, adjust cable
barrel closer to cable end guide. Repeat steps a
thru d.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Throttle Cable Installation and
Adjustment to Engine
Connecting Remote Control Wiring
Harness to Engine Wiring Harness
(Electric Start Models)
1. Shift remote control into neutral.
2. Route throttle cable (a) thru control cable grommet (b).
3. Install throttle cable end (a) onto stud (c) of throttle lever. Place nylon washer (d) over stud and install locknut (e). Tighten locknut against throttle cable end to
snug cable end against throttle lever, then back locknut
off 1/4 turn.
4. Holding engine throttle lever (f) against idle stop, adjust throttle cable barrel (g) to slip into upper hole of
barrel receptacle, with a very light preload of throttle lever against idle stop.
Route remote control harness or key switch harness along
side of boat to engine, fastening harness to boat. Be sure
that harness does not rub, get pinched or come in contact
with bilge water.
Plug remote control harness or key switch harness connector (a) into engine harness connector (b) and push connection securely into retainer (c).
a
f
d
b
c
c
b
e
a
g
50565B
50564D
5. Lock barrels in place with barrel retainer (h).
6. Check preload on throttle cable by placing a thin piece
of paper between idle stop screw and idle stop. Preload is correct when paper can be removed without
tearing, but has some drag on it. Re-adjust cable barrel, if necessary.
h
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
51026
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7A-17
Route remote control harness or key switch harness (d)
along side oil tank (e) and out of bottom cowl thru opening
(f) in battery cable grommet.
Power Trim Wiring Connections
(Models So Equipped)
Make bullet connector wiring connection, between remote
control wiring harness/key switch wiring harness and engine wiring.
IMPORTANT: Tape back and isolate any unused wiring
harness leads.
e
d
b
a
f
50566
! CAUTION
Remote control wiring harness and key switch wiring
harness must be routed between control cable rubber
grommet and engine harness connector, so that harness will not interfere with engine throttle and shift operation.
a - Lead From Trim Solenoid (Down Solenoid)
b - Lead From Trim Solenoid (Up Solenoid)
Battery Connections
! CAUTION
Failure to observe correct polarity when connecting
battery cables to battery will result in damage to the
charging system.
1. Connect battery cables (from engine) to battery. Connect red battery cable to positive (+) battery terminal
and black battery cable to negative (-) battery terminal.
7A-18 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD
INSTALLATION/
ATTACHMENTS
TILLER HANDLE and CO-PILOT
7
B
Table of Contents
Page
Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-1
Steering Handle Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-2
Tiller Handle Adaptor Kit (JET 45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-8
Tiller Arm/Shift Lever Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-9
Tiller Handle Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-11
Tiller Arm Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-14
Tiller Arm/Shift Lever Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-17
Shift Link Rod Installation and Adjustment
to Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-19
Throttle Cable Installation and Adjustment . . . . 7B-20
Co-Pilot Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-21
Wiring Harness Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7B-23
7B-0 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Notes:
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-1
Steering Handle Kit
20
24
25
26
28
21
27
2
95
95
23
19
22
23
16
17
6
2
18
14
1
10
30
S
95
12
95
29
3
95
11
5
15
8
29
4
7
9
13
8
6
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
S
2-4-C Soapy Water Solution (Obtain Locally)
7B-2 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Steering Handle Kit
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
2
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
6
1
7
1
8
2
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
–
1
16
1
17
1
18
1
19
1
20
1
21
1
22
1
23
2
24
1
25
1
26
1
27
1
28
1
29
1
30
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
STEERING ARM
BUSHING
HOUSING
PLATE
GASKET
SCREW (1/2 IN.)
SCREW (3/5 IN.)
CLAMP
SCREW
WING NUT
THROTTLE HANDLE/STOP SWITCH KIT
STOP SWITCH
SCREW
GRIP
J-CLAMP
J-CLAMP
THROTTLE CABLE KIT
CONDUIT
GUIDE TUBE
BARREL
SET SCREW
CABLE
GUIDE
ANCHOR
SET SCREW
SCREW
CAP
WASHER
WASHER
SPACER
THROTTLE TUBE
NUT
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
40
4.5
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
40
54.0
40
54.0
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-3
Steering Handle Kit
33
27
40
7
32
28
20
26
30
29
23
95
31
24
2
42
45
1
46
24
41
25
22
3
4
47
48
21
8
12
7
43
5
13
15
6
9
14
44
10
11
16
34
19 18
37
37 39
38
17
36 35
37
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
7B-4 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Steering Handle Kit
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
1
10
4
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
16
1
17
1
18
1
19
1
20
1
21
1
22
1
23
1
1
24
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
BRACKET
STUD
TAB WASHER
NUT
STOP HARNESS
CABLE
PLUG
GROMMET
COVER
SCREW
HORN
PLUG
STOP SWITCH
LANYARD
RETAINER
CABLE
STUD
NUT
WASHER
SHIFT LEVER
SCREW
TAB WASHER
BUSHING
WASHER (BELLEVILLE)
WASHER (PLASTIC)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
35
N·m
47.5
Drive Tight
75
8.5
70
8.0
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-5
Steering Handle Kit
33
27
40
7
32
28
20
26
30
29
23
95
31
24
2
42
45
1
46
24
41
25
22
3
4
47
48
21
8
12
7
43
5
13
15
6
9
14
44
10
11
16
34
19 18
37
37 39
38
17
36 35
37
7
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
7B-6 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Steering Handle Kit
REF.
NO. QTY.
25
1
26
1
27
1
28
1
29
1
30
1
31
1
32
1
33
1
34
1
35
1
36
1
37
3
38
1
39
1
40
1
41
1
42
1
43
1
44
2
45
1
46
2
47
1
48
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
WASHER
SHIFT ROD
ROD END
BUSHING
WASHER
COTTER PIN
DETENT ASSEMBLY
STUD
KNOB
CO-PILOT LEVER
CO-PILOT DRIVER
WASHER
BRAKE DISC
ARM (TOP)
ARM (BOTTOM)
HARNESS ASSEMBLY
KEY SWITCH
NUT
TRIM SWITCH
NUT
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
SCREW
CLAMP
SCREW
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-7
Tiller Handle Adaptor Kit (JET 45)
1
13
14
16
6
2
7
B
12
8
3
7
4
15
17
9
18
10
19
9
5
20
11
21
A
Loctite 271 (92-809820)
7
A – Drive tight and then back off 1/4 turn.
B – Tighten until snug and then tighten an additional 1/8 turn.
TORQUE
REF.
NO. QTY.
–
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DESCRIPTION
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
TILLER HANDLE ADAPTOR KIT
SHIFT CABLE
TAB WASHER
SHIFT LEVER
STUD
SHIFT KNOB
CABLE BOOT
J CLIP
SCREW (1/4-20 x 7/8)
WASHER
BUSHING
NUT
CABLE SEAL
SCREW (1/4-28 x 1-3/4)
LOCKWASHER
RETAINER
SET SCREW
WASHER
WASHER
WASHER
WASHER
NUT
7B-8 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Release latch and remove throttle cable with grommet
from bottom cowl.
Tiller Arm/Shift Lever Removal
1. Remove battery cables from battery.
b
a
51084
2. Remove outboard cowling.
51093
3. Remove nut securing throttle cable to engine.
a - Rubber Grommet
b - Throttle Cable
5. Remove cotter key from shift rod.
b
b
e
f
g
g
f
d
d
e
b
Design 1
Design 2
c
a
d
51092
a
b
c
d
-
Throttle Cable
Throttle Lever
Washer
Locknut
b
c
a
54256
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
-
Tiller Handle
Shift Rod
Lower Cowl
Bushing
Shift Handle
Washer
Cotter Key
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-9
6. Remove cover.
8. Remove plug from tiller handle bracket.
a
b
a
51608
a - Cover
b - Screw (4)
7. Disconnect stop switch wire at bullet connector and
screw securing ground wire.
51608
a - Plug
9. Remove bolt and nut from tiller handle bracket.
a
a
51608
a - Stop Switch Wire (Bullet Connector)
b
51608
a - Bolt
b - Nut (Hidden)
7B-10 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
10. Remove tiller handle, 2 nylon bushings, stainless steel
spacer and 2 flat washers from bracket.
Tiller Handle Disassembly
1. Using a flat tip screwdriver, carefully pry/push rubber
grip off tiller handle.
d
c
d
e
b
b
a
a
b
c
d
e
-
51606
Tiller Handle
Nylon bushing (2)
Stainless Steel Spacer
Washer (2)
Bolt
b
a
51603
a - Grip
b - Tiller Handle
2. Remove screw from twist grip.
11. Bend tab washer away form bolt securing shift lever
and remove bolt and lever from bracket.
d
a
c
51603
a - Screw
a
b
51606
a
b
c
d
-
Tab Washer
Bolt
Shift Lever
Bracket
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-11
3. Cut sta-strap securing stop switch harness and remove screw from harness J-clip.
5. Remove throttle cable anchor screws and remove
cable guide.
a
b
a
b
a
51602
51603
a - Sta-Strap
b - Screw
a - Anchor Screws
b - Throttle Cable Guide
4. Remove stop switch and twist grip from tiller handle.
6. Remove allen screw from brass barrel and remove
barrel.
a
b
51603
51602
a - Allen Screw
b - Brass Barrel
7B-12 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. Unscrew (counterclockwise) stainless conduit from tiller handle.
9. Remove cover plate and gasket from tiller handle.
10. Remove bolt from throttle friction assembly.
c
a
d
b
c
e
c
a
c
51604
51603
a
b
c
d
e
a - Conduit
8. Pull throttle cable from tiller handle.
-
Cover Plate
Gasket (below plate)
Screws
Throttle Friction Assembly
Bolt
11. Remove throttle arm, gear assembly and friction device from tiller handle. Slide gear cover and friction device off of the throttle arm.
d
a
c
a
b
51604
a
b
c
d
-
Throttle Arm
Gear Assembly
Friction Device
Gear Cover
51604
a - Throttle Cable
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-13
12. Drive out drift pin and remove throttle gear from throttle
arm.
3. Slide cover and friction device onto throttle arm.
d
c
b
b
51604
a
51602
a - Gear
b - Drift Pin
a
b
c
d
-
a
Throttle Arm
Gear
Throttle Friction Device
Cover
4. Install throttle arm assembly into tiller arm.
Tiller Arm Reassembly
1. Reinstall throttle gear on throttle arm and secure gear
to arm with new drift pin.
5. Torque friction device attaching bolt to 40 lb. in. (4.5
N·m)
b
a
a
51602
a - Gear
b - Drift Pin
2. Apply a light coat of Special Lubricant 101 to gear teeth
and inside of gear cover.
7B-14 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
51604
a - Bolt [Torque to 40 lb. in. (4.5 N.m)]
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
6. Install gasket and cover plate over gear assembly. DO
NOT OVERTIGHTEN attaching screws.
c
9. Retract throttle cable into gear assembly until approximately 17 in. (43 cm) extends from the tiller arm.
a
b
c
a
c
c
51604
51604
a - Cover Plate
b - Gasket (Below Cover)
c - Screws
a - Cable [Extends 17 in. (43 cm)]
7. Rotate throttle arm so that twist grip attaching screw
hole faces DOWN and gear drift pin faces UP.
10. Slide stainless steel conduit over throttle cable and
thread into tiller arm until lightly seated. Rotate conduit
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ONE FULL TURN from a
lightly seated position.
8. Insert throttle cable (CURVED END FACING UP) into
tiller handle gear assembly while rotating tiller arm
COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
a
a
51604
a - Stainless Steel Conduit
51604
a - Gear Drift Pin (FACES UP)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-15
11. Slide brass barrel over throttle cable tube. Secure barrel to tube with allen screw approximately 3.5 in. (89
mm) from stainless conduit. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN
screw as tubing may be crushed binding throttle cable.
Position barrel to face towards tiller handle.
13. Position throttle arm slot to face stop harness exit hole
in tiller handle. Route stop switch harness through twist
grip, into throttle arm, and out through side of tiller handle.
a
b
d
e
c
d
51602
b
a
b
c
d
e
c
-
Slot
Exit Hole
Harness
Twist Grip
Stop Switch
14. Secure twist grip to throttle arm with attaching screw.
a
a
51607
a
b
c
d
-
Brass Barrel
Tube
Allen Screw
Tiller Handle
12. Install throttle cable guide onto throttle cable. Secure
guide to cable with anchor and two screws. Guide hole
should face up.
51603
a
a - Screw
b
c
51602
a - Cable Guide
b - Screws (2)
c - Hole (Faces Up)
7B-16 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
15. Sta-strap harness to throttle arm.
Tiller Arm/Shift Lever Installation
1. Install shift lever with detent assembly to bracket.
! CAUTION
Allow enough slack in harness (rotate throttle grip in
both directions) before securing harness to handle assembly with J-clip.
g
16. Attach harness to tiller arm with J-clip allowing enough
slack in harness for full throttle rotation.
17. Attach sta-strap to end of harness sleeve.
f
d
c
a
e
d
a
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
b
51603
a - Sta-strap
b - J-clip
-
b
51607
Bolt
Tab Washer
Washer
Wave Washer (2)
Shift Lever
Bushing
Detent Assembly
2. Install tiller handle with bushings to bracket. Secure in
place with washers and bolt with nut. Tighten bolt allowing tiller handle movement. Torque nut to 40 lb. ft.
(54 N·m).
18. Install rubber twist grip by aligning ridges on plastic
twist grip with grooves inside of rubber grip.
NOTE: Applying a soapy water solution to rubber grip will
ease installation.
c
b
a
d
d
e
b
b
51603
a - Ridges
b - Grooves (Under Handle)
a
a
b
c
d
e
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
-
51606
Tiller Handle
Bushings (2)
Stainless Steel Bushing
Washers (2)
Bolt
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-17
3. Reinstall plug.
5. Install Cover.
b
a
a
51608
51608
a - Cover
b - Screw (4)
6. Install cotter key and components to shift rod.
a - Plug
4. Connect stop switch wire at bullet connector and secure ground wire to handle with screw.
b
d
e
f
g
g
f
d
e
b
Design 1
Design 2
b
c
a
a
51608
a - Stop Switch Wire (Bullet Connector)
7B-18 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
54256
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Tiller Handle
Shift Rod
Lower Cowl
Bushing
Shift Handle
Washer
Cotter Key
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
7. Install throttle cable with grommet.
Shift Link Rod Installation and
Adjustment to Engine
1. Position shift handle to neutral.
2. Manually shift outboard (shift actuator lever) to neutral.
Propeller turns freely in both directions.
b
3. Adjust shift link rod end to slip over shift actuator bolt
with slight preload toward reverse. Install washer and
locknut.
a
b
d
51093
a - Rubber Grommet
b - Throttle Cable
8. Proceed to “Shift Link Rod Installation and Adjustment
to Engine” and “Throttle Cable Installation and Adjustment.”
a
c
51092
a
b
c
d
-
Shift Link Rod End
Actuator Bolt
Washer
Locknut (Tighten until snug, then back off 1/4 turn)
4. Check shift link rod adjustment as follows:
a. Place shift lever in “F” (forward) position. Propeller
should rotate in a CLOCKWISE direction. If propeller does not rotate CLOCKWISE, length of link
rod must be reduced and step “a” repeated.
b. Place shift lever in “N” (neutral) position. Propeller
should rotate freely without drag. If not, length of
link rod must be increased and steps “a” and “b”
must be increased.
c.
While rotating propeller, place shift lever in “R” (reverse) position. If propeller can rotate in either direction, length of link rod must be increased and
steps “a” thru “c” repeated.
d. Place engine shift lever in “N” (neutral) position.
Propeller should turn freely in both directions. If
not, length of link rod must be decreased and steps
“a” thru “d” must be repeated.
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-19
Throttle Cable Installation and
Adjustment
1. Rotate throttle twist grip fully clockwise to stop “IDLE”
position.
4. Holding throttle lever against idle stop, adjust throttle
cable to slip into upper hole of barrel receptacle with a
very light preload of throttle lever against idle stop. Apply small amount of Loctite 271 to threads of set screw.
Tighten until snug, then an additional 1/8 turn.
2. Back out set screw from throttle cable barrel until two
or three threads are exposed.
a
b
a
b
51077
c
a - Set Screw
b - Throttle Cable Barrel
3. Place end of throttle cable guide over peg of throttle lever and secure with locknut and washer.
51092
a - Throttle Lever
b - Idle Stop
c - Barrel Receptacle
b
5. Secure barrel in place with barrel retainer.
c
a
a
d
51092
a
b
c
d
-
Throttle Cable Guide
Throttle Lever
Washer
Locknut (Tighten until snug, then back off 1/4 turn)
! CAUTION
DO NOT exceed 1/4 turn on set screw after it has
bottomed-out.
51091
a - Barrel Retainer
6. Check preload on throttle cable by placing a thin piece
of paper between idle stop screw and idle stop. Preload is correct when paper can be removed without
tearing and still have drag on it. Readjust cable barrel
if necessary.
7. Install Cowl.
7B-20 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
3. Install brake disk and brake.
Co-Pilot Installation
NOTE: To install Co-Pilot kit, tiller handle must be removed
and battery cables disconnected.
1. Install brake disk on swivel bracket. Position “bottom
up” lever, brake disk and “top up” lever onto swivel
bracket. Note location of pin (on steering arm) in relation to top and bottom levers as shown.
c
b
a
e
a
a
51094
51094
b
a - Brake Disk (3)
b - Brake
c - Pin (Holds brake in place)
d
4. Lubricate driver with Never Seize Lubricant or Special
Lubricant 101 (P/N 92-13872A1). Install driver into
handle and adjust until driver (flat) is flush with handle.
c
b
a
b
51093
a
b
c
d
e
-
b
Swivel Bracket
Brake Disk
Bottom Up Lever
Top Up Lever
Pin, Steering Arm
a
2. Double nut co-pilot stud and apply Loctite No. 35 (P/N
92-59328-1) to swivel bracket end of stud and install
until flush with bottom of swivel bracket. Stake stud in
place as shown. Drive dowel pin (c) from bottom of
swivel bracket until flush with bottom of bracket.
a - Handle
b - Driver (Flush to slightly recessed)
5. Install components to stud. Align hex of driver with hex
in brake.
b
c
b
a
28063
c
28063
a
51094
c
a - Handle
b - Driver
c - Plastic Washer
51094
a - Stud
b - Stake Marks
c - Dowel Pin (Driven thru Bottom of Swivel Bracket)
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-21
6. Holding components in place (lever facing forward), install lock nut and torque to 75 lb. in. (8 N·m). Secure
knob to lever with bolt.
2. Install tiller handle to studs with shift rod positioned thru
cowl opening as shown.
b
d
e
f
g
f
d
e
b
g
Design 2
Design 1
a
c
b
51095
b
c
a
a - Locknut [75 lb. in. (8 N·m)]
b - Knob
c - Bolt [45 lb. in. (5 N·m)]
54256
Tiller Handle Installation
1. Apply Loctite No. 35 (P/N 92-59328-1) to threads
(steering arm end) of tiller handle studs. Install with
stud installer. Tighten securely.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
-
Tiller Handle
Shift Rod
Cowl
Bushing
Shift Handle
Washer
Cotter Key
3. Secure tiller handle assembly in place.
b
c
a
51092
a - Studs
b - Steering Arm
a
b
b
51091
a - Tiller Handle Assembly
b - Tab Washer (bend tabs against flats of locknuts)
c - Locknuts [Torque to 26 lb. ft. (35 N·m)]
7B-22 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
4. Install rubber grommet to throttle cable and install into
bottom cowl. Note, a light lubricant on grommet will aid
in installation over shift rod.
2. Route wiring harness thru rubber grommet. Note, light
oil on rubber grommet will aid in wiring harness installation.
b
b
a
a
c
51095
51093
a - Rubber Grommet
b - Throttle Cable
c - Shift Rod
a - Wiring Harness
b - Rubber Grommet
5. Adjust shift link rod and throttle cable “Shift Link Rod
Installation and Adjustment” and “Throttle Cable Installation and Adjustment” as required.
3. Connect handle wiring harness at engine harness connector.
Wiring Harness Connection
1. Remove battery cables from battery.
a
b
51091
a - Engine Harness Connector
b - Handle Harness Connector
51084
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7B-23
4. Reconnect battery cables.
5. Adjust co-pilot tension by moving handle to port (loosen) or starboard (tighten). Locknut on co-pilot stud may
have to be adjusted to attain desired tension on tiller
arm.
51084
MORE
LESS
51095
7B-24 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD
INSTALLATION/
ATTACHMENTS
REWIND STARTER
7
C
Table of Contents
Page
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-1
Rewind Starter Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-2
Rewind Starter Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-4
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-4
Rewind Starter Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-5
Adjusting Rewind Spring Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-6
Starter Interlock Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7C-7
7C-0 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Notes:
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7C-1
Starter Assembly (MANUAL – 55)
14
2 Cycle Outboard Oil (92-13249A24)
95
2-4-C With Teflon (92-825407A12)
7C-2 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
Starter Assembly (MANUAL – 55)
REF.
NO. QTY.
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
5
2
6
4
7
8
8
8
9
4
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
16
1
–
1
17
1
18
1
19
1
20
1
21
1
22
3
23
1
24
1
25
1
26
2
27
2
28
2
29
1
30
1
31
1
32
1
33
1
34
1
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
HANDLE ASSEMBLY
REST
SEAL
SCREW
SPACER
BUSHING
GROMMET
WASHER
NUT
INTERLOCK CABLE
SCREW
WASHER
COTTER PIN
SCREW
COTTER PIN
WASHER
RECOIL STARTER
STARTER HOUSING
SPRING
INTERLOCK LEVER
CAM
RETAINER
SCREW
WASHER - SPRING
SPRING
STARTER SHEAVE
SPRING
CAM
RETAINING RING
STARTER ROPE
SPRING
CAM
SCREW
BUSHING
RETAINING RING
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
lb. in. lb. ft.
N·m
55
6.0
75
8.5
Drive Tight
Drive Tight
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7C-3
6. Remove cam retainer.
Rewind Starter Disassembly
! WARNING
a
b
When disassembling and reassembling rewind starter, SAFETY GLASSES must be worn in case rewind
spring uncoils out of the housing.
1. Remove retaining clip and attaching screw which secures shift interlock cable to starter housing.
2. Remove bolts (4) securing rewind starter to engine.
b
a
c
c
28374
a - Screws (3)
b - Cam Retainer
c
7. Remove cam lever, cam lever spring, and interlock le-
c
ver.
a
51606
b
c
a - Retaining Clip
b - Screw
c - Bolts (4)
3. Slowly pull the starter rope out from the handle rest
approximately 2 feet (60 cm) and tie an overhand knot
between the rewind housing and the handle rest.
4. Remove retainer from rope handle and untie the rope
handle knot.
5. Remove the rewind starter.
a
28375
a - Cam Lever
b - Cam Lever Spring
c - Interlock Lever
b
a - Overhand Knot
b - Retainer
7C-4 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
8. Remove starter sheave.
Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean components in solvent and dry with compressed
air.
2. Inspect rewind spring for kinks, burrs, corrosion of
breakage.
a
3. Inspect starter sheave, rope guide and starter housing
for nicks, grooves, cracks, wear or distortion, especially area of rope travel.
4. Inspect bushing, starter drive pawl and spring for wear
or damage.
5. Inspect starter rope for wear.
6. Replace components as necessary.
Rewind Starter Reassembly
b
! WARNING
51605
a - Starter Sheave
b - Screw
When reassembling rewind starter, SAFETY GLASSES
must be worn in case rewind spring uncoils out of the
housing.
1. Install spring/cover assembly into sheave.
9. Spring is replaced as a spring/cover assembly.
a
a
51607
51607
a - Spring/Cover Assembly
a - Spring/Cover Assembly
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7C-5
2. Install starter sheave to housing and secure in place
with screw. Torque to 135 lb. in. (15.3 N·m).
4. Reinstall cam retainer and secure with screws (3).
a
a
b
b
28374
51605
a - Starter Sheave
b - Screw
3. Install interlock lever, position cam spring into recess
of starter housing and reinstall cam lever.
a - Screws (3)
b - Cam Retainer
Adjusting Rewind Spring Tension
1. Rotate sheave counterclockwise until it stops (coil is
bound). Then back off one full turn, plus what is needed
to align rope end with hole in housing. Never back off
sheave less than one full turn.
a
b
c
2. Route starter rope thru rope guide in housing. Tie a
overhand knot in rope approximately 12 in. (305 mm)
from end of rope.
28375
a - Cam Lever
b - Cam Lever Spring
c - Interlock Lever
b
a - Rotate Counterclockwise and Back Off at Laest One Full Turn
b - Tie Off Starter Rope 12 Inches (305 mm) from End with Overhand
Knot
7C-6 - OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
NOTE: Check operation of rewind and rewind tension before outboard installation.
Starter Interlock Cable Adjustment
3. Place rewind starter on engine.
IMPORTANT: Lubricate core wire of interlock cable
with light oil prior to making adjustments.
4. Pull starter rope thru bracket, handle, and starter rope
retainer. Secure starter rope to starter rope retainer
with knot.
1. While rotating the propeller shaft, place the gear shift
lever into REVERSE.
2. Return the gear shift lever to NEUTRAL without going
a
past neutral detent.
3. Place end of interlock cable over pin of cam lever and
secure with retaining pin.
4. Secure interlock cable to starter housing using adjust-
b
c
d
ing screw. Do not tighted screw at this time.
5. Adjust interlock cable to align raised mark of cam lever
with pointer of rewind housing.
c
a
b
c
d
-
Starter Rope
Bracket
Handle
Starter Rope Retainer
5. Secure rewind starter to engine bolts (4), torque to
90 lb. in. (10 N·m). Secure interlock lock cable with
retaining clip and screw.
a
b
d
b
a
e
c
c
28376
a
b
c
d
e
c
-
Interlock Cable
Retaining Pin
Adjustment Screw
Raised Mark of Cam Lever
Pointer of Rewind Housing
6. Tighten cable adjustment screw and check adjustment
c
after 4 or 5 shift cycles.
d
a
b
c
d
-
51606
Retaining Clip
Screw
Bolts (4) Torque to 90 lb. in. (10 N·m)
Bracket
90-817643R1 DECEMBER 1996
OUTBOARD INSTALLATION/ATTACHMENTS - 7C-7